SEMICENTENNIAL PUBLICATIONS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA 1868-1918 A SURVEY OF SYMBOLIC LOGIC BY C. I. LEWIS UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PRESS BERKELEY 1918 / 3 PRESS OF THE NEW ERA PRINTING COMPANY LANCASTER, PA. TABLE OF CONTENTS PREFACE v CHAPTER I. THE DEVELOPMENT OF SYMBOLIC LOGIC . 1 SECTION I. The Scope of Symbolic Logic. Symbolic Logic and Logistic. Summary Account of their Development I SECTION II. Leibniz 5- SECTION III. From Leibniz to De Morgan and Boole 18 SECTION IV. De Morgan 37 SECTION V. Boole 51 SECTION VI. Jevons 72 SECTION VII. Peirce 79 SECTION VIII. Developments since Peirce 107 CHAPTER II. THE CLASSIC, OR BOOLE-SCHRODER AL GEBRA OF LOGIC 118 SECTION I. General Character of the Algebra. The Postulates and their Interpretation 118 SECTION II. Elementary Theorems 122 SECTION III. General Properties of Functions 132 SECTION IV. Fundamental Laws of the Theory of Equations. . . 144 SECTION V. Fundamental Laws of the Theory of Inequations. 166 SECTION VI. Note on the Inverse Operations, "Subtraction" and "Division" 173 CHAPTER III. APPLICATIONS OF THE BOOLE-SCHRODER ALGEBRA 175 SECTION I. Diagrams for the Logical Relations of Classes .... 175 SECTION II. The Application to Classes 184 SECTION III. The Application to Propositions 213 SECTION IV. The Application to Relations 219 CHAPTER IV. SYSTEMS BASED ON MATERIAL IMPLI CATION 222 SECTION I. The Two-Valued Algebra 222 iii IV Table of Contents SECTION II. The Calculus of Prepositional Functions. Func tions of One Variable 232 SECTION III. Prepositional Functions of Two or More Variables. 246 SECTION IV. Derivation of the Logic of Classes from the Calcu lus of Propositional Functions 260 SECTION V. The Logic of Relations 269 SECTION VI. The Logic of Principia Mathematica 279 CHAPTER V. THE SYSTEM OF STRICT IMPLICATION... 291 SECTION I. Primitive Ideas, Primitive Propositions, and Im mediate Consequences 292 SECTION II. Strict Relations and Material Relations 299 SECTION III. The Transformation {-/-) 306 SECTION IV. Extensions of Strict Implication. The Calculus of Consistencies and the Calculus of Ordinary Inference 316 SECTION V. The Meaning of "Implies" 324 CHAPTER VI. SYMBOLIC LOGIC, LOGISTIC, AND MATHE MATICAL METHOD 340 SECTION I. General Character of the Logistic Method. The "Orthodox" View 340 SECTION II. Two Varieties of Logistic Method : Peano s Formu- laire and Principia Mathematica. The Nature of Logistic Proof 343 SECTION III. A "Heterodox" View of the Nature of Mathe matics and of Logistic SECTION IV. The Logistic Method of Kempe and Royce . SECTION V. Summarv and Conclusion . APPENDIX. TWO FRAGMENTS FROM LEIBNIZ BIBLIOGRAPHY INDEX. 354 362 367 373 389 407 PREFACE The student who has completed some elementary study of symbolic logic and wishes to pursue the subject further finds himself in a discouraging situation. He has, perhaps, mastered the contents of Venn s Symbolic Logic or Couturat s admirable little book, The Algebra of Logic, or the chapters concerning this subject in Whitehead s Universal Algebra. If he read German with sufficient ease, he may have made some excursions into Schroder s Vorlesungen uber die Algebra der Logik. These all concern the classic, or Boole-Schroder algebra, and his knowledge of symbolic logic is probably confined to that system. His further interest leads him almost inevitably to Peano s Formulaire de Mathematiques, Principia Mathematica of Whitehead and Russell, and the increasingly numerous shorter studies of the same sort. And with only elementary knowledge of a single kind of development of a small branch of the subject, he must attack these most difficult and technical of treatises, in a new notation, developed by methods which are entirely novel to him, and bristling with logico-metaphysical difficulties. If he is bewildered and searches for some means of further preparation, he finds nothing to bridge the gap. Schroder s work would be of most assistance here, but this was written some twenty-five years ago; the most valuable studies are of later date, and radically new methods have been introduced. What such a student most needs is a comprehensive survey of the sub ject one which will familiarize him with more than the single system which he knows, and will indicate not only the content of other branches and the alternative methods of procedure, but also the relation of these to the Boole-Schroder algebra and to one another. The present book is an attempt to meet this need, by bringing within the compass of a single volume, and reducing to a common notation (so far as possible), the most important developments of symbolic logic. If, in addition to this, some of the requirements of a "handbook" are here fulfilled, so much the better. But this survey does not pretend to be encyclopedic. A gossipy recital of results achieved, or a superficial account of methods, is of no more use in symbolic logic than in any other mathematical discipline. What is presented must be treated in sufficient detail to afford the possibility of real insight and grasp. This aim has required careful selection of material. vi Preface The historical summary in Chapter I attempts to follow the main thread of development, and no reference, or only passing mention, is given to those studies which seem not to have affected materially the methods of later researches. In the remainder of the book, the selection has been governed by the same purpose. Those topics comprehension of which seems most essential, have been treated at some length, while matters less fundamental have been set forth in outline only, or omitted altogether. My own contribution to symbolic logic, presented in Chapter V, has not earned the right to inclusion here; in this, I plead guilty to partiality. The discussion of controversial topics has been avoided whenever possible and, for the rest, limited to the simpler issues involved. Consequently, the reader must not suppose that any sufficient consideration of these questions is here given, though such statements as are made will be, I hope, accurate. Particularly in the last chapter, on "Symbolic Logic, Logistic, and Mathematical Method ", it is not possible to give anything like an adequate account of the facts. That would require a volume at least the size of this one. Rather, I have tried to set forth the most important and critical considerations somewhat arbitrarily and dogmatically, since there is not space for argument and to provide such a map of this difficult terri tory as will aid the student in his further explorations. Proofs and solutions in Chapters II, III, and IV have been given very fully. Proof is of the essence of logistic, and it is my observation that stu dents even those with a fair knowledge of mathematics seldom command the technique of rigorous demonstration. In any case, this explicitness can do no harm, since no one need read a proof which he already understands. I am indebted to many friends and colleagues for valuable assistance in preparing this book for publication: to Professor W. A. Merrill for emenda tions of my translation of Leibniz, to Professor J. H. McDonald and Dr. B. A. Bernstein for important suggestions and the correction of certain errors in Chapter II, to Mr. J. C. Rowell, University Librarian, for assistance in securing a number of rare volumes, and to the officers of the University Press for their patient helpfulness in meeting the technical difficulties of printing such a book. Mr. Shirley Quimby has read the whole book in manuscript, eliminated many mistakes, and verified most of the proofs. But most of all, I am indebted to my friend and teacher, Josiah Royce, who first aroused my interest in this subject, and who never failed to give me encouragement and wise counsel. Much that is best in this book is due to him. C> L LEWIS. BERKELEY, July 10, 1917. CHAPTER I THE DEVELOPMENT OF SYMBOLIC LOGIC I. THE SCOPE OF SYMBOLIC LOGIC. SYMBOLIC LOGIC AND LOGISTIC. SUMMARY ACCOUNT OF THEIR DEVELOPMENT The subject with which we are concerned has been variously referred to as "symbolic logic", " logistic", "algebra of logic", "calculus of logic", "mathematical logic", "algorithmic logic", and probably by other names. And none of these is satisfactory. We have chosen "symbolic logic" because it is the most commonly used in England and in this country, and because its signification is pretty well understood. Its inaccuracy is obvious: logic of whatever sort uses symbols. We are concerned only with that logic which uses symbols in certain specific ways those ways which are exhibited generally in mathematical procedures. In particular, logic to be called "symbolic" must make use of symbols for the logical relations, and must so connect various relations that they admit of "trans formations" and "operations", according to principles which are capable of exact statement. If we must give some definition, we shall hazard the following: Symbolic Logic is the development of the most general principles of rational pro cedure, in ideographic symbols, and in a form which exhibits the connection of these principles one with another. Principles which belong exclusively to some one type of rational procedure e. g. to dealing with number and quantity are hereby excluded, and generality is designated as one of the marks of symbolic logic. Such general principles are likewise the subject matter of logic in any form. To be sure, traditional logic has never taken possession of more than a small portion of the field which belongs to it. The modes of Aristotle are unnecessarily restricted. As we shall have occasion to point out, the reasons for the syllogistic form are psychological, not logical: the syllogism, made up of the smallest number of propositions (three), each with the small est number of terms (two), by which any generality of reasoning can be attained, represents the limitations of human attention, not logical necessity. To regard the syllogism as indispensable, or as reasoning par excellence, is 2 1 2 A Survey of Symbolic Logic the apotheosis of stupidity. And the procedures of symbolic logic, not being thus arbitrarily restricted, may seem to mark a difference of subject matter between it and the traditional logic. But any such difference is accidental, not essential, and the really distinguishing mark of symbolic logic is the approximation to a certain form, regarded as ideal. There are all degrees of such approximation; hence the difficulty of drawing any hard and fast line between symbolic and other logic. But more important than the making of any such sharp distinction is the comprehension of that ideal of form upon which it is supposed to depend. The most convenient method which the human mind has so far devised for exhibiting principles of exact procedure is the one which we call, in general terms, mathematical. The important characteristics of this form are: (1) the use of ideograms instead of the phonograms of ordinary language; (2) the deductive method which may here be taken to mean simply that the greater portion of the subject matter is derived from a relatively few principles by operations which are "exact"; and (3) the use of variables having a definite range of significance. Ideograms have two important advantages over phonograms. In the first place, they are more compact, + than "plus", 3 than "three", etc. This is no inconsiderable gain, since it makes possible the presentation of a formula in small enough compass so that the eye may apprehend it at a glance and the image of it (in visual or other terms) may be retained for reference with a minimum of effort. None but a very thoughtless person, or one without experience of the sciences, can fail to understand the enor mous advantage of such brevity. In the second place, an ideographic notation is superior to any other in precision. Many ideas which are quite simply expressible in mathematical symbols can only with the greatest difficulty be rendered in ordinary language. Without ideograms, even arithmetic would be difficult, and higher branches impossible. The deductive method, by which a considerable array of facts is sum marized in a few principles from which they can be derived, is much more than the mere application of deductive logic to the subject matter in question. It both requires and facilitates such an analysis of the whole body of facts as will most precisely exhibit their relations to one another. In fact, any other value of the deductive form is largely or wholly fictitious. The presentation of the subject matter of logic in this mathematical form constitutes what we mean by symbolic logic. Hence the essential characteristics of our subject are the following: (1) Its subject matter is The Development of Symbolic Logic 3 the subject matter of logic in any form that is, the principles of rational or reflective procedure in general, as contrasted with principles which belong exclusively to some particular branch of such procedure. (2) Its medium is an ideographic symbolism, in which each separate character represents a relatively simple and entirely explicit concept. And, ideally, all non-ideographic symbolism or language is excluded. (3) Amongst the ideograms, some will represent variables (the " terms" of the system) having a definite range of significance. Although it is non-essential, in any system so far developed the variables will represent "individuals", or classes, or relations, or propositions, or " prepositional functions", or they will represent ambiguously some two or more of these. (4) Any system of symbolic logic will be developed deductively that is, the whole body of its theorems will be derived from a relatively few principles, stated in symbols, by operations which are, or at least can be, precisely formulated. We have been at some pains to make as clear as possible the nature of symbolic logic, because its distinction from "ordinary" logic, on the one hand, and, on the other, from any mathematical discipline in a sufficiently abstract form, is none too definite. It will be further valuable to comment briefly on some of the alternative designations for the subject which have been mentioned. "Logistic" would not have served our purpose, because "logistic" is commonly used to denote symbolic logic together with the application of its methods to other symbolic procedures. Logistic may be defined as the science which deals with types of order as such. It is not so much a subject as a method. Although most logistic is either founded upon or makes large use of the principles of symbolic logic, still a science of order in general does not necessarily presuppose, or begin with, symbolic logic. Since the relations of symbolic logic, logistic, and mathematics are to be the topic of the last chapter, we may postpone any further discussion of that matter here. We have mentioned it only to make clear the meaning which "logistic" is to have in the pages which follow. It comprehends symbolic logic and the application of such methods as symbolic logic exempli fies to other exact procedures. Its subject matter is not confined to logic. "Algebra of logic" is hardly appropriate as the general name for our subject, because there are several quite distinct algebras of logic, and because symbolic logic includes systems which are not true algebras at all. "The algebra of logic" usually means that system the foundations of which were laid by Leibniz, and after him independently by Boole, and 4 A Survey of Symbolic Logic which was completed by Schroder. We shall refer to this system as the " Boole-Schroder Algebra ". "Calculus" is a more general term than "algebra". By a "calculus" will be meant, not the whole subject, but any single system of assumptions and their consequences. The program both for symbolic logic and for logistic, in anything like a clear form, was first sketched by Leibniz, though the ideal of logistic seems to have been present as far back as Plato s Republic. 1 Leibniz left frag mentary developments of symbolic logic, and some attempts at logistic which are prophetic but otherwise without value. After Leibniz, the two interests somewhat diverge. Contributions to symbolic logic were made by Ploucquet, Lambert, Castillon and others on the continent. This type of research interested Sir William Hamilton and, though his own contribution was slight and not essentially novel, his papers were, to some extent at least, responsible for the renewal of investigations in this field which took place in England about 1845 and produced the work of De Morgan and Boole. Boole seems to have been ignorant of the work of his continental predecessors, which is probably fortunate, since his own beginning has proved so much more fruitful. Boole is, in fact, the second founder of the subject, and all later work goes back to his. The main line of this develop ment runs through Jevons, C. S. Peirce, and MacColl to Schroder whose Vorlesungen iiber die Algebra der Logik (Vol. I, 1890) marks the perfection of Boole s algebra and the logical completion of that mode of procedure. In the meantime, interest in logistic persisted on the continent and was fostered by the growing tendency to abstractness and rigor in mathe matics and by the hope for more general methods. Hamilton s quaternions and the Ausdehnungslehre of Grassmann, which was recognized as a con tinuation of the work begun by Leibniz, contributed to this end, as did also the precise logical analyses of the nature of number by Cantor and Dedekind. Also, the elimination from "modern geometry" of all methods .of proof dependent upon "intuitions of space" or "construction" brought that subject within the scope of logistic treatment, and in 1889 Peano provided such a treatment in I Principii di Geometria. Frege s works, from the Begri/sschrift of 1879 to the Grundgesetze der Arithmetik (Vol. I, 1893; Vol. II, 1903) provide a comprehensive development of arithmetic by the logistic method. 1 See the criticisms of contemporary mathematics and the program for the dialectic or philosophic development of mathematics in Bk. vi, Step. 510-11 and Philebus, Step. 56-57. The Development of Symbolic Logic 5 In 1894, Peano and his collaborators began the publication of the Formulaire de Mathematiques, in which all branches of mathematics were to be presented in the universal language of logistic. In this work, symbolic logic and logistic are once more brought together, since the logic presented in the early sections provides, in a way, the method by which the other branches of mathematics are developed. The Formulaire is a monumental production. But its mathematical interests are as much encyclopedic as logistic, and not all the possibilities of the method are utilized or made clear. It remained for Whitehead and Russell, in Principia Mathematica, to exhibit the perfect union of symbolic logic and the logistic method in mathematics. The publication of this work undoubtedly marks an epoch in the history of the subject. The tendencies marked in the development of the algebra of logic from Boole to Schroder, in the development of the algebra of relatives from De Morgan to Schroder, and in the foundations for number theory of Cantor and Dedekind and Frege, are all brought together here. 2 Further researches will most likely be based upon the formulations of Principia Mathematica. We must now turn back and trace in more detail the development of symbolic logic. 3 A history of the subject will not be attempted, if by history is meant the report of facts for their own sake. Rather, we are interested in the cumulative process by which those results which most interest us today have come to be. Many researches of intrinsic value, but lying outside the main line of that development, will of necessity be neglected. Reference to these, so far as we are acquainted with them, will be found in the bibliography. 4 II. LEIBNIZ The history of symbolic logic and logistic properly begins with Leibniz. 5 In the New Essays on the Human Understanding, Philalethes is made to say: 6 "I begin to form for myself a wholly different idea of logic from that which I formerly had. I regarded it as a scholar s diversion, but I now see that, in the way you understand it, it is like a universal mathe- 2 Perhaps we should add "and the modern development of abstract geometry, as by Hilbert, Fieri, and others", but the volume of Principia which is to treat of geometry has not yet appeared. 3 The remainder of this chapter is not essential to an understanding of the rest of the book. But after Chapter i, historical notes and references are generally omitted. 4 Pp. 389-406. 5 Leibniz regards Raymond Lully, Athanasius Kircher, John Wilkins, and George Dalgarno (see Bibliography) as his predecessors in this field. But their writings contain little which is directly to the point. 6 Bk. iv, Chap, xvn, 9. 6 A Survey of Symbolic Logic matics." As this passage suggests, Leibniz correctly foresaw the general character which logistic was to have and the problems it would set itself to solve. But though he caught the large outlines of the subject and actually delimited the field of work, he failed of any clear understanding of the difficulties to be met, and he contributed comparatively little to the successful working out of details. Perhaps this is characteristic of the man. But another explanation, or partial explanation, is possible. Leibniz expected that the whole of science would shortly be reformed by the appli cation of this method. This was a task clearly beyond the powers of any one man, who could, at most, offer only the initial stimulus and general plan. And so, throughout his life, he besought the assistance of learned societies and titled patrons, to the end that this epoch-making reform might be instituted, and never addressed himself very seriously to the more limited tasks which he might have accomplished unaided. 7 Hence his studies in this field are scattered through the manuscripts, many of them still unedited, and out of five hundred or more pages, the systematic results attained might be presented in one-tenth the space. 8 Leibniz s conception of the task to be accomplished altered somewhat during his life, but two features characterize all the projects which he entertained: (1) a universal medium ("universal language" or "rational language" or "universal characteristic") for the expression of science; and (2) a calculus of reasoning (or "universal calculus") designed to display the most universal relations of scientific concepts and to afford some sys tematic abridgment of the labor of rational investigation in all fields, much as mathematical formulae abridge the labor of dealing with quantity and number. "The true method should furnish us with an Ariadne s thread, that is to say, with a certain sensible and palpable medium, which will guide the mind as do the lines drawn in geometry and the formulae for operations which are laid down for the learner in arithmetic." 9 This universal medium is to be an ideographic language, each single character of which will represent a simple concept. It will differ from existing ideographic languages, such as Chinese, through using a combina- 7 The editor s introduction to "Scientia Generalis. Characteristic a" in Gephardt s Philosophischen Schriften von Leibniz (Berlin, 1890), vn, gives an excellent account of Leibniz s correspondence upon this topic, together with other material of historic interest. (Work hereafter cited as G. Phil.} 8 See Gerhardt, op. tit. especially iv and vn. But Couturat, La logique de Leibniz (1901), gives a survey which will prove more profitable to the general reader than any study of the sources. 9 Letter to Galois, 1677, G. Phil, vii, 21. The Development of Symbolic Logic 7 tion of symbols, or some similar device, for a compound idea, instead of having a multiplicity of characters corresponding to the variety of things. So that while Chinese can hardly be learned in a lifetime, the universal characteristic may be mastered in a few weeks. 10 The fundamental char acters of the universal language will be few in number, and will represent the "alphabet of human thought": The fruit of many analyses will be the catalogue of ideas which are simple or not far from simple." n With this catalogue of primitive ideas this alphabet of human thought the whole of science is to be reconstructed in such wise that its real logical organiza tion will be reflected in its symbolism. In spite of fantastic expression and some hyperbole, we recognize here the program of logistic. If the reconstruction of all science is a project too ambitious, still we should maintain the ideal possibility and the desirability of such a reconstruction of exact science in general. And the ideographic language finds its realization in Peano s Formulaire, in Principia Mathe- matica, and in all successful applications of the logistic method. Leibniz stresses the importance of such a language for the more rapid and orderly progress of science and of human thought in general. The least effect of it ". . . will be the universality and communication of different nations. Its true use will be to paint not the word . . . but the thought, and to speak to the understanding rather than to the eyes. . . . Lacking such guides, the mind can make no long journey without losing its way . . . : with such a medium, we could reason in metaphysics and in ethics very much as we do in geometry and in analytics, because the characters would fix our ideas, which are otherwise too vague and fleeting in such matters in which the imagination cannot help us unless it be by the aid of characters." 12 The lack of such a universal medium prevents cooperation. "The human race, considered in its relation to the sciences which serve our welfare, seems to me comparable to a troop which marches in confusion in the darkness, without a leader, without order, without any word or other signs for the regulation of their march and the recognition of one another. Instead of joining hands to guide ourselves and make sure of the road, we run hither and yon and interfere with one another." 13 The "alphabet of human thought" is more visionary. The possibility of constructing the whole of a complex science from a few primitive con- 10 Letter to the Duke of Hanover, 1679 (?), G. Phil., vn, 24-25. 11 G. Phil., vii, 84. " G. Phil., vii, 21. 13 G. Phil, vii, 157. 8 A Survey of Symbolic Logic cepts is, indeed, real vide the few primitives of Principia Mathematica. But we should today recognize a certain arbitrariness in the selection of these, though an arbitrariness limited by the nature of the subject. The secret of Leibniz s faith that these primitive concepts are fixed in the nature of things will be found in his conception of knowledge and of proof. He believes that all predicates are contained in the (intension of the) subject and may be discovered by analysis. Similarly, all truths which are not absolutely primitive and self-evident admit of reduction by analysis into such absolutely first truths. And finally, only one real definition of a thing "real" as opposed to "nominal" is possible; 14 that is, the result of the correct analysis of any concept is unambiguously predetermined in the concept itself. The construction, from such primitives, of the complex concepts of the various sciences, Leibniz speaks of as "synthesis" or "invention", and he is concerned about the "art of invention". But while the result of analysis is always determined, and only one analysis is finally correct, synthesis, like inverse processes generally, has no such predetermined character. In spite of the frequent mention of the subject, the only im portant suggestions for this art have to do with the provision of a suitable medium and of a calculus of reasoning. To be sure there are such obvious counsels as to proceed from the simple to the complex, and in the early essay, De Arte Combinatoria, there are studies of the possible permutations and combinations or "syntheses" of fundamental concepts, but the author later regarded this study as of little value. And in Initia et Specimina Scientice novce Generalis, he says that the utmost which we can hope to accomplish at present, toward the general art of invention, is a perfectly orderly and finished reconstruction of existing science in terms of the absolute primitives which analysis reveals. 15 After two hundred years, we are still without any general method by which logistic may be used in fields as yet unexplored, and we have no confidence in any absolute primi tives for such investigation. The calculus of reasoning, or universal calculus, is to be the instrument for the development and manipulation of systems in the universal language, and it is to get its complete generality from the fact that all science will be expressed in the ideographic symbols of that universal medium. The calculus will consist of the general principles of operating with such ideo- 14 See G. Phil, vn, 194, footnote. 15 G. Phil, vii, 84. The Development of Symbolic Logic 9 graphic symbols: "All our reasoning is nothing but the relating and sub stituting of characters, whether these characters be words or marks or images." 16 Thus while the characteristica universalis is the project of the logistic treatment of science in general, the universal calculus is the pre cursor of symbolic logic. The plan for this universal calculus changed considerably with the development of Leibniz s thought, but he speaks of it always as a mathe matical procedure, and always as more general than existing mathematical methods. 17 The earliest form suggested for it is one in which the simple concepts are to be represented by numbers, and the operations are to be merely those of arithmetical multiplication, division, and factoring. When, later, he abandons this plan of procedure, he speaks of a general calculus which will be concerned with what we should nowadays describe as "types of order" with combinations which are absolute or relative, symmetrical or unsymmetrical, and so on. 1 * His latest studies toward such a calculus form the earliest presentation of what we now call the "algebra of logic". But it is doubtful if Leibniz ever thought of the universal calculus as restricted to our algebra of logic: we can only say that it was intended to be the science of mathematical and deductive form in general (it is doubtful whether induction was included), and such as to make possible the appli cation of the analytic method of mathematics to all subjects of which scientific knowledge is possible. Of the various studies to this end our chief interest will be in the early essay, De Arte Combinatorial and in the fragments which attempt to develop an algebra of logic. 20 Leibniz wrote De Arte Combinatoria when he was, in his own words, vix egressns ex Ephebis, and before he had any considerable knowledge of mathematics. It was published, he tells us, without his knowledge or consent. The intention of the work, as indicated by its title, is to serve the general art of rational invention, as the author conceived it. As has been mentioned, it seems that this end is to be accomplished by a complete analysis of concepts of the topic under investigation and a general survey of the possibilities of their combination. A large portion of the essay is concerned with the calculation of the possible forms of this and that type 16 G. Phil, vii, 31. 17 See New Essays on the Human Understanding, Bk. iv, Chap, xvn, 9-13. 18 See G. Phil, vn, 31, 198 jf., and 204. 19 G. Phil, iv, 35-104. Also Gerhardt, Leibnizens mathematische Schriften (1859), V, 1-79. 20 Scientia Generalis. Characteristica, xv-xx, G. Phil., vn. 10 A Survey of Symbolic Logic of logical construct: the various dyadic, triadic, etc., complexes which can be formed with a given number of elements; of the moods and figures of the syllogism; of the possible predicates of a given subject (the com plexity of the subject as a concept being itself the key to the predicates which can be analyzed out of it); of the number of propositions from a given number of subjects, given number of predicate relations, and given number of quaestiones \ 21 of the variations of order with a given number of terms, and so on. In fact so much space is occupied with the computation of permutations and combinations that some of his contemporaries failed to discover any more important meaning of the essay, and it is most fre quently referred to simply as a contribution to combinatorial analysis. 22 Beyond this the significance of the essay lies in the attempt to devise a symbolism which will preserve the relation of analyzable concepts to their primitive constituents. The particular device selected for this purpose representation of concepts by numbers is unfortunate, but the attempt itself is of interest. Leibniz makes application of this method to geometry and suggests it for other sciences. 23 In the geometrical illustration, the concepts are divided into classes. Class 1 consists of concepts or terms regarded as elementary and not further analyzable, each of which is given a number. Thereafter, the number is the symbol of that concept. Class 2 consists of concepts analyzable into (definable in terms of) those of Class 1. By the use of a fractional notation, both the class to which a concept belongs and its place in that class can be indicated at once. The denomi nator indicates the number of the class and the numerator is the number of the concept in that class. Thus the concept numbered 7 in Class 2 is represented by 7/2. Class 3 consists of concepts definable in terms of those in Class 1 and Class 2, and so on. By this method, the complete analysis of any concept is supposed to be indicated by its numerical symbol. 24 21 Leibniz tells us that he takes this problem from the Ars Magna of Raymond Lully. See G. Phil., v, 62. 22 See letter to Tschirnhaus, 1678, Gerhardt, Math., iv, 451-63. Cf. Cantor, Geschichte d. Math., m, 39 ff. 23 See the Synopsis, G. Phil, iv, 30-31. 24 See Couturat, op. tit., appended Note vi, p. 554 ff. The concepts are arranged as follows (G. Phil., iv, 70-72): "Classis I; 1. Punctum, 2. Spatium, 3. intervallum, 4. adsitum seu contiguum, 5. dis- situm seu distans, 6. Terminus seu quae distant, 7. Insitum, 8. inclusum (v.g. centrum est insitum circulo, inclusum peripheriae), 9. Pars, 10. Totum, 11. idem, 12. diversum, 13. unum, 14. Numerus, etc. etc. [There are twenty-seven numbered concepts in this class.] "Classis II; 1. Quantitas est 14 T&V 9 (15). [Numbers enclosed in parentheses have their usual arithmetical significance, except that (15) signifies an indefinite number .] 2. Indudens est 6.10. III. 1. Intervallum est 2.3.10. 2. Aequale A rijs ll.. 3. Continuum est A ad B, si TOV A j 9 est 4 et 7 TU> B.; etc. etc." The Development of Symbolic Logic 1 1 In point of fact, the analysis (apart from any merely geometrical defects) falls far short of being complete. Leibniz uses not only the inflected Greek article to indicate various relations of concepts but also modal inflections indicated by et, si, quod, quam faciunt, etc. In later years Leibniz never mentions this work without apologizing for it, yet he always insists that its main intention is sound. This method of assuming primitive ideas which are arbitrarily symbolized, of introducing other concepts by definition in terms of these primitives and, at the same time, substituting a single symbol for the complex of defining symbols this is, in fact, the method of logistic in general. Modern logistic differs from this attempt of Leibniz most notably in two respects: (1) modern logistic would insist that the relations whereby two or more concepts are united in a definition should be analyzed precisely as the substantives are analyzed; (2) while Leibniz regards his set of primitive concepts as the necessary result of any proper analysis, modern logistic would look upon them as arbitrarily chosen. Leibniz s later work looks toward the elimina tion of this first difference, but the second represents a conviction from which he never departed. At a much later date come various studies (not in Gerhardt), w r hich attempt a more systematic use of number and of mathematical operations in logic. 25 Simple and primitive concepts, Leibniz now proposes, should be symbolized by prime numbers, and the combination of two concepts (the qualification of one term by another) is to be represented by their product. Thus if 3 represent "rational" and 7 "animal", "man" will be 21. No prime number will enter more than once into a given combination a rational rational animal, or a rational animal animal, is simply a rational animal. Thus logical synthesis is represented by arithmetical multipli cation: logical analysis by resolution into prime factors. The analysis of "man", 21, would be accomplished by finding its prime factors, "rational", 3, and "animal", 7. In accordance with Leibniz s conviction that all knowledge is analytic and all valid predicates are contained in the subject, the proposition "All S is P" will be true if the number which represents the concept S is divisible by that which represents P. Accordingly the 25 Dated April, 1679. Couturat (op. cit., p. 326, footnote) gives the titles of these as follows: "Elementa Characteristicae Universalis (Collected manuscripts of Leibniz in the Hanover Library, PHIL., v, 8 b); Calculi universalis Elementa (PHIL., v, 8 c); Calculi universalis investigations (PHIL., v, 8 d); Modus examinandi consequentias per numeros (PHIL., v, 8 e); Regulae ex quibus de bonitate consequentiarum formisque et modis syllogis- morum categoricum judicari potest per numeros (PHIL., v, 8f)." These fragments, with many others, are contained in Couturat s Opuscules et fragments inedits de Leibniz. 12 A Survey of Symbolic Logic universal affirmative proposition may be symbolized by S/P = y or S = Py (where y is a whole number) . By the plan of this notation, Py will represent some species whose "difference", within the genus P, is y. Similarly Sx will represent a species of S. Hence the particular affirmative, "Some S is P," may be symbolized by Sx = Py, or S/P = y x. Thus the uni versal is a special case of the particular, and the particular will always be true when the universal is true. There are several objections to this scheme. In the first place, it presumes that any part of a class is a species within the class as genus. This is far-fetched, but perhaps theoretically defensible on the ground that any part which can be specified by the use of language may be treated as a logical species. A worse defect lies in the fact that Sx = Py will always be true. For a given S and P, we can always find x and y which will satisfy the equation Sx = Py. If no other choice avails, let x = P, or some multiple of P, and y = S, or some multiple of S. "Angel-man" = "man-angel" although no men are angels. "Spineless man" = "ra tional invertebrate", but it is false that some men are invertebrates. A third difficulty arises because of the existential import of the particular a difficulty which later drew Leibniz s attention. If the particular affirma tive is true, then for some x and y, Sx = Py. The universal negative should, then, be Sx 4= Py. And since the universal affirmative is S = Py, the particular negative should be S 4= Py> But this symbolism would be practically unworkable because the inequations would have to be verified for all values of x and y. Also, as we have noted, the equality Sx = Py will always hold and Sx 4= Py, where x and y are arbitrary, will never be true. Such difficulties led Leibniz to complicate his symbolism still further, introducing negative numbers and finally using a pair of numbers, one positive and one negative, for each concept. But this scheme also breaks down, and the attempt to represent concepts by numbers is thereafter abandoned. Of more importance to symbolic logic are the later fragments included in the plans for an encyclopedia which should collect and arrange all known science as the proper foundation for future work. 26 Leibniz cherished the 26 G. Phil., vii, xvi-xx. Of these, xvi, without title, states rules for inference in terms of inclusion and exclusion; Difficultates quaedam logicae treats of subalternation and conversion and of the symbolic expression for various types of propositions; xvm, Specimen Calculi universalis with its addenda and marginal notes, gives the general prin ciples of procedure for the universal calculus; xix, with the title Non inelegans specimen The Development of Symbolic Logic 13 notion that this should be developed in terms of the universal characteristic. In these fragments, the relations of equivalence, inclusion, and qualification of one concept by another, or combination, are defined and used. These relations are always considered in intension when it is a question of apply ing the calculus to formal logic. "Equivalence" is the equivalence of concepts, not simply of two classes which have the same members; "for A to include B or B to be included in A is to affirm the predicate B universally of the subject A". 27 However, Leibniz evidently considers the calculus to have many applications, and he thinks out the relations and illustrates them frequently in terms of extensional diagrams, in which A, B, etc., are represented by segments of a right line. Although he preferred to treat logical relations in intension, he frequently states that relations of intension are easily transformed into relations of extension. If A is included in B in intension, B is included in A in extension; and a calculus may be inter preted indifferently as representing relations of concepts in intension or relations of individuals and classes in extension. Also, the inclusion rela tion may be interpreted as the relation of an antecedent proposition to a consequent proposition. The hypothesis A includes its consequence B, just as the subject A includes the predicate B.~ B This accords with his frequently expressed conviction that all demonstration is analysis. Thus these studies are by no means to be confined to the logic of intension. As one title suggests, they are studies demonstrandi in abstracts. demonsirandi in abstractis struck out, and xx, without title, are deductive developments of theorems of symbolic logic, entirely comparable with later treatises. The place of symbolic logic in Leibniz s plans for the Encyclopedia is sufficiently indicated by the various outlines which he has left. In one of these (G. Phil., vu, 49), divisions 1-6 are of an introductory nature, after which come : "7. De scientiarum instauratione, ubi de Systematibus et Repertoriis, et de Encyclo paedia demonstrativa codenda. "8. Elementa veritatis aeternae, et de arte demonstrandi in omnibus disciplinis ut in Mathesi. "9. De novo quodam Calculo generali, cujus ope tollantur omnes disputationes inter eos qui in ipsum consenserit; est Cabala sapientum. "10. De Arte Inveniendi. "11. De Synthesi seu Arte combinatoria. "12. De Analysi. "13. De Combinatoria speciali, seu scientia formarum, sive qualitatum in genere (de Characterismis) sive de simili et dissimili. "14. De Analysi speciali seu scientia quantitatum in genere seu de magno et parvo. "15. De Mathesi generali ex duabus praecedentibus composita." Then various branches of mathematics, astronomy, physics, biological science, medi cine, psychology, political science, economics, military science, jurisprudence, and natural theology, in the order named. 27 G. Phil, vii, 208. 28 "Generates Inquisitiones " (1686): see Couturat, Opuscules etc., pp. 356-99. 14 A Survey of Symbolic Logic It is a frequent remark upon Leibniz s contributions to logic that he failed to accomplish this or that, or erred in some respect, because he chose the point of view of intension instead of that of extension. The facts are these: Leibniz too hastily presumed a complete, or very close, analogy between the various logical relations. It is a part of his sig nificance for us that he sought such high generalizations and believed in their validity. He preferred the point of view of intension, or connotation, partly from habit and partly from rationalistic inclination. As a conse quence, wherever there is a discrepancy between the intensional and ex- tensional points of view, he is likely to overlook it, and to follow the former. This led him into some difficulties which he might have avoided by an opposite inclination and choice of example, but it also led him to make some distinctions the importance of which has since been overlooked and to avoid certain difficulties into which his commentators have fallen. 29 In Difficultates quaedam logicae, Leibniz shows that at last he recognizes the difficulty in connecting the universal and the corresponding particular. He sees also that this difficulty is connected with the disparity between the intensional point of view and the existential import of particular proposi tions. In the course of this essay he formulates the symbolism for the four propositions in two different ways. The first formulation is: 30 Univ. aff.; All A is B: AB = A, or A non-5 does not exist. Part, neg.; Some A is not B; AB 4= A, or A non-5 exists. Univ. neg.; No A is B; AB does not exist. Part, aff.; Some A is 5; AB exists. AB = A and AB =}= A may be interpreted as relations of intension or of extension indifferently. If all men are mortal, the intension of "mortal man" is the same as the intension of "man", and likewise the class of mortal men is identical in extent with the class of men. The statements concerning existence are obviously to be understood in extension only. The interpretation here put upon the propositions is identically that of contemporary symbolic logic. With these expressions, Leibniz infers the subaltern and the converse of the subaltern, from a given universal, by 29 For example, it led him to distinguish the merely non-existent from the absurd, or impossible, and the necessarily true from the contingent. See G. Phil, vn, 231, foot- ,C n6te; and "Specimen certitudinis seu de conditionibus," Dutens, Leibnitii Opera, iv, Part in, pp. 92 ff., also Couturat, La Logique de Leibniz, p. 348, footnote, and p. 353, footnote. . 30 G. Phil, vii, 212. The Development of Symbolic Logic 15 means of the hypothesis that the subject, A, exists. Later in the essay, he gives another set of expressions for the four propositions: 31 All A is B: AB = A. Some A is not B: AB 4= A. No A is B: AB does not exist, or AB 4= AB Ens. Some A is B: AB exists, or AB = AB Ens. In the last two of these, AB before the sign of equality represents the possible AB s or the AB "in the region of ideas"; "AB Ens" represents existing AB s, or actual members of the class AB. (Read AB Ens, "AB which exists".) AB = AB Ens thus represents the fact that the class AB has members; AB =f= AB Ens, that the class AB has no members. A logical species of the genus A, "some A", may be represented by YA; YA Ens will represent existing members of that species, or "some exist ing A". Leibniz correctly reasons that if AB = A (All A is B), YAB -- YA (Some A is B); but if AB 4= A, it does not follow that YAB 4= YA, for if Y = B, YAB =-- YA. Again, if AB 4= AB Ens (No A is B), YAB 4= YAB Ens (It is false that some A is B); but if AB = AB Ens (Some A is B), YAB = YAB Ens does not follow, because Y could assume values incompatible with A and B. For example, some men are wise, but it does not follow that foolish men are foolish wise persons, because "foolish" is incompatible with "wise". 32 The distinction here between AB, a logical division of A or of B, and AB Ens, existing AB s, is ingenious. This is our author s most successful treatment of the relations of extension and intension, and of the particular to the universal. In Specimen calculi universal, the "principles of the calculus" are announced as follows: 33 1) "Whatever is concluded in terms of certain variable letters may be concluded in terms of any other letters which satisfy the same conditions; for example, since it is true that [all] ab is a, it will also be true that [all] be is b and that [all] bed is be. . . . 2) "Transposing letters in terms changes nothing; for example ab coincides with ba, animal rational with rational animal . 3) "Repetition of a letter in the same term is useless. . . . 4) "One proposition can be made from any number by joining all the subjects in one subject and all the predicates in one predicate: Thus, a is b and c is d and e is /, become ace is bdf. . . . 31 G. Phil,, vii, 213-14. 32 G. Phil., vii, 215: the illustration is mine. 33 G. Phil, vii, 224-25. 16 A Survey of Symbolic Logic 5) "From any proposition whose predicate is composed of more than one term, more than one proposition can be made; each derived proposition having the subject the same as the given proposition but in place of the given predicate some part of the given predicate. If [all] a is bed, then [all] a is b and [all] a is c and [all] a is d." u If we add to the number of these, two principles which are announced under the head of "self-evident propositions" (1) a is included in a; and (2) ab is included in a we have here the most important of the funda mental principles of symbolic logic. Principle 1 is usually qualified by some doctrine of the "universe of discourse" or of "range of significance", but some form of it is indispensable to algorithms in general. The law numbered 2 above is what we now call the "principle of permutation"; 3, the "principle of tautology"; 4, the "principle of composition"; 5, the "principle of division". And the two "self-evident propositions" are often included in sets of postulates for the algebra of logic. There remain for consideration the two fragments which are given in translation in our Appendix, XIX and XX of Scientia Generalis: Char- acteristica. The first of these, with the title Non inelegans specimen demon- sir andi in abstractis, stricken out in the manuscript, is rather the more inter esting. Here the relation previously symbolized by AB or ab is represented by A+B. And A+B = L signifies that A is contained or included in (est in} B. A scholium attached to the definition of this inclusion relation distinguishes it from the part-whole relation. Comparison of this and other passages shows that Leibniz uses the inclusion relation to cover (1) the relation of a member of the class to the class itself; (2) the relation of a species, or subclass, to its genus a relation in extension; (3) the rela tion of a genus to one of its species a relation of intension. The first of these is our e-relation; (2) is the inclusion relation of the algebra of logic; and (3) is the analogous relation of intension. Throughout both these fragments, it is clear that Leibniz thinks out his theorems in terms of extensional diagrams, in which classes or concepts are represented by segments of a line, and only incidently in terms of the intension of concepts. The different interpretations of the symbols must be carefully dis tinguished. If A is "rational" and B is "animal", and A and B are taken m intension, then A + B will represent "rational animal". But if A and B are classes taken in extension^ then A + B is the class made up of those things which are either A or B (or both). Thus the inclusion relation, 34 4. and 5. are stated without qualification because this study is confined to the proper ties of universal affirmative propositions. 4. is true also for universal negatives. The Development of Symbolic Logic 17 A +B = L, may be interpreted either in intension or in extension as "A is in L ". This is a little confusing to us, because we should nowadays invert the inclusion relation when we pass from intension to extension; instead of this, Leibniz changes the meaning of A +B from "both A and B" (in intension) to "either A or B" (in extension). If A is "rational", B "ani mal", and L "man", then A + B = L is true in intension, "rational animal" = "man" or "rational" is contained in "man". If A, B, and L are classes of points, or segments of a line, then A + B = L will mean that L is the class of points comprising the points in A and the points in B (any points common to A and B counted only once), or the segment made up of segments A and B. The relation A + B does not require that A and B should be mutually exclusive. If L is a line, A and B may be overlapping segments; and, in intension, A and B may be overlapping concepts, such as "triangle" and "equilateral", each of which contains the component "figure". Leibniz also introduces the relation L A, which he calls detractio. L A = N signifies that L contains A and that if A be taken from L the remainder is N. The relations [+] and [ ] are not true inverses: if A + B = L, it does not follow that L A == B, because A and B may be overlapping (in Leibniz s terms, communicantia) . If L A = N, A and N must be mutually exclusive (incommunicantia} . Hence if A+B = L and A and B have a common part, M, L A = B M. (If the reader will take a line, L, in which A and B are overlapping segments, this will be clear.) This makes the relation of detractio somewhat confusing. In extension, L A may be interpreted "L which is not A ". In intension, it is more difficult. Leibniz offers the example: "man" "rational" = "brute", and calls our attention to the fact that "man" "rational" is not "non-rational man" or "man" + "non-rational". 35 In intension, the relation seems to indicate an abstraction; not a negative qualification. But there are difficulties, due to the overlapping of concepts. Say that 7 r * i w^~ " man" + "woodworking" = "carpenter" and "man" + "white-skinned" -^^ 35 G. Phil., vn, 231, footnote. Couturat in commenting on this (op. cit., pp. 377-78) & says: "Ailleurs Leibniz essaie de preciser cette opposition en disant: A A est Nihilum. Sed A non-A est Absurdwn. "Mais il oublie que le ne"ant (non-Ens) n est pas autre chose que ce qu il appelle 1 absurde ou 1 impossible, c est-a-dire le contradictoire." It may be that Couturat, not Leibniz, is confused on this point. Non-existence may be contingent, as opposed to the necessary non-existence of the absurd. And the result of abstracting A from the concept A seems to leave merely non-Ens, not absurdity. 3 , - - - ^ 18 A Survey of Symbolic Logic = "Caucasian". Then " Caucasian " + " carpenter " = "man" + "white- skinned" + "woodworking". Hence ("Caucasian" + "carpenter") - "car penter" = "white-skinned", because the common constituent "man" has been abstracted in abstracting "carpenter". That is, the abstraction of "carpenter" from "Caucasian carpenter" leaves, not "Caucasian" but only that part of the concept "Caucasian" which is wholly absent in "carpenter". We cannot here say "white-skinned man" because "man" is abstracted, nor "white-skinned animal" because "animal" is contained in "man": we can only say "white-skinned" as a pure abstraction. Such abstraction is difficult to carry out and of very little use as an instrument of logical analysis. Leibniz s illustration is scribbled in the margin of the manuscript, and it seems clear that at this point he was not thinking out his theorems in terms of intensions. Fragment XX differs from XIX in that it lacks the relation symbolized by [ ]. This is a gain rather than a loss, both because of the difficulty of interpretation and because [+ ] and [ ] are not true inverses. Also XX is more carefully developed : more of the simple theorems are proved, and more illustrations are given. Otherwise the definitions, relations, and methods of proof are the same. In both fragments the fundamental operation by which theorems are proved is the substitution of equivalent expressions. If the successors of Leibniz had retained the breadth of view 7 which characterizes his studies and aimed to symbolize relations of a like generality, these fragments might well have proved sufficient foundation for a satis factory calculus of logic. III. FROM LEIBNIZ TO DE MORGAN AND BOOLE After Leibniz, various attempts w r ere made to develop a calculus of logic. Segner, Jacques Bernoulli, Ploucquet, Tonnies, Lambert, Holland, Castillon, and others, all made studies toward this end. Of these, the most important are those of Ploucquet, Lambert and Castillon, while one of Holland s is of particular interest because it intends to be a calculus in extension. But this attempt was not quite a success, and the net result of the others is to illustrate the fact that a consistent calculus of logical relations in intension is either most difficult or quite impossible. Of Segner s w r ork and Ploucquet s we can give no account, since no copies of these writings are available. 36 Venn makes it clear that Plouc- 36 There seem to be no copies of Ploucquet s books in this country, and attempts to secure them from the continent have so far failed. The Development of Symbolic Logic 19 quet s calculus was a calculus of intension and that it involved the quanti fication of the predicate. Lambert 37 wrote voluminously on the subject of logic, but his most important contribution to symbolic procedure is contained in the Seeks Versuche einer Zeichenkunst in der Vernunftlehre.* 8 These essays are not separate studies, made from different beginnings; later essays presuppose those which precede and refer to their theorems; and yet the development is not entirely continuous. Material given briefly in one will be found set forth more at length in another. And discussion of more general prob lems of the theory of knowledge and of scientific method are sometimes introduced. But the important results can be presented as a continuous development which follows in general the order of the essays. Lambert gives the following list of his symbols: The symbol of equality (Gleichgultigkeit) = addition (Zmeizung) + abstraction (Absonderung) opposition (des Gegentheils) X universality particularity copula given concepts (Begriffe) a, b, c, d, etc. undetermined concepts n, m, I, etc. unknowns x, y, z. the genus 7 the difference 5 The calculus is developed entirely from the point of view of intension: the letters represent concepts, not classes, [ + ] indicates the union of two concepts to form a third, [ ] represents the withdrawal or abstraction of some part of the connotation of a concept, while the product of a and b represents the common part of the two concepts. 7 and 8 qualify any term "multiplied" into them. Thus ay represents the genus of a, ad the difference of a. Much use is made of the well-known law of formal logic that the concept (of a given species) equals the genus plus the difference. (1) ay + ad = a(y + 6) = a 37 Johann Heinrich Lambert (1728-77), German physicist, mathematician, and astrono mer. He is remembered chiefly for his development of the equation x n +px = q in an infinite series, and his proof, in 1761, of the irrationality of TT. 38 In Logische und philosophische Abhandlungen; ed. Joh. Bernoulli (Berlin, 1782), vol. i. 20 A Survey of Symbolic Logic ay + a8 is the definition or explanation (Erkldrung) of a. As immediate consequences of (1), we have also (2) ay = a ad (3) ad = a ay Lambert takes it for granted that [+ ] and [ ] are strictly inverse opera tions. We have already noted the difficulties of Leibniz on this point. If two concepts, a and b, have any part of their connotation in common, then (a + b) b will not be a but only that part of a which does not belong also to b. If "European" and "carpenter" have the common part "man", then (" European "+ "carpenter") minus "carpenter" is not "European" but "European" minus "man". And [+ ] and [ ] will not here be true inverses. But this difficulty may be supposed to disappear where the terms of the sum are the genus and difference of some concept, since genus anddifference may be supposed to be mutually exclusive. We shall return to this topic later. More complex laws of genus and difference may be elicited from the fact that the genus of any given a is also a concept and can be "explained," as can also the difference of a. (4) a = a(y+ <5) 2 = ay 2 + ayd + ady + ad 2 Proof: ay = ayy + ayd and ad = ady + add But a = ay + ad. Hence Q.E.D. That is to say: if one wish to define or explain a, one need not stop at giving its genus and difference, but may define the genus in terms of its genus and difference, and define the difference similarly. Thus a is equiva lent to the genus of the genus of a plus the difference of the genus of a plus the genus of the difference of a plus the difference of the difference of a. This may be called a "higher" definition or "explanation" of a. Obviously, this process of higher and higher "explanation" may be carried to any length; the result is what Lambert calls his "Newtonian formula". We shall best understand this if we take one more preliminary step. Suppose the explanation carried one degree further and the resulting terms arranged as follows: a = a(7 3 + 776 + ydd + 6 3 ) + 767 + dyd + dyy + ddy The three possible arrangements of two y s, and one d might be summarized The Development of Symbolic Logic 21 by 3y 2 d; the three arrangements of two 6 s and one 7 by 8752. With this convention, the formula for an explanation carried to any degree, n, is: This "Newtonian formula" is a rather pleasant mathematical conceit. Two further interesting laws are given : (6) a = ad + ayd + ay 2 d + ay*d + . . . etc. Proof: a = ay + ad But ay = ay 2 + ayd and ay 2 = ay* + ay 2 d ay* = ay 4 + ay*d, etc. etc. (7) a = ay + ady + ad 2 y + ad*y + . . . etc. Proof: a = ay + ad But ad = ady + ad 2 and ad 2 = ad 2 y + ad* ad* = ad*y + ad*, etc. etc. Just as the genus of a is represented by ay, the genus of the genus of a by ay 2 , etc., so a species of which a is genus may be represented by ay~ l , and a species of which a is genus of the genus by ay~ 2 , etc. In general, as ay n represents a. genus above a, so a species below a may be represented by a ay~ n or yn Similarly afny concept of which a is difference of the difference of the differ ence . . . etc., may be represented by ad~ n or -- Also, just as a = a(y + d) n , where a is a concept and a(y + d) n its "explana tion", so- = a, where ^n ls ^ ne concept and a the "explanation" of it. Certain cautions in the transformation of expressions, both with respect to "multiplication" and with respect to "division," need to be observed. 40 39 Seeks Versuche, p. 5. 40 Ibid.j pp. 9-10. 22 A Survey of Symbolic Logic The concept ay 2 + ady is very different from the concept (ay + ad)y, because (8) (ay + ad)y = a(y+d)y = ay(y+d) = ay while 7 2 + ady is the genus of the genus of a plus the genus of the difference of a. Also - y must be distinguished from . - y is the genus of any 7 77 species x of which a is the genus, i. e., (9) - 7 = a But ay/y is any species of which the genus of a is the genus, i. e., any species x such that a and x belong to the same genus. We turn now to consideration of the relation of concepts which have a common part. Similarity is identity of properties. Two concepts are similar if, and in so far as, they comprehend identical properties. In respect to the remaining properties, they are different. 41 ab represents the common properties of a and b. a ab represents the peculiar properties of a. a + b ab ab represents the peculiar properties of a together with the peculiar properties of b. It is evident from this last that Lambert does not wish to recognize in his system the law a + a = a; else he need only have written a + b ab. If x and a are of the same genus, then xy = ay and ax = ay = xy If now we symbolize by a \ b that part of a which is different from 6, 42 then (10) a\b + b\a + ab + ab = a + b Also x x a = ay, or x = ay + x\a ax = ad a ax = ad a = ax + ad ax = a ad = ay = xy 41 Ibid., p. 10. 42 Lambert sometimes uses a \ b for this, sometimes a : b. The Development of Symbolic Logic 23 And since ay x = - y ax + a x = a ax + x\a = x ax = a a\x = x x\a a\x = a ax x\a = x ax The fact that y is a property comprehended in x may be expressed by y = xy or by y + x y = x. The manner in which Lambert deduces the second of these expressions from the first is interesting. 43 If y is a property of x, then y x is null. But by (10), 2xy + x\y + y\x = x + y Hence in this case, 2xy + x \ y = x + y And since y = xy, 2y + x\y = x + y Hence y+x\y = x He has subtracted y from both sides, in the last step, and we observe that 2y y = y> This is rather characteristic of his procedure; it follows, throughout, arithmetical analogies which are quite invalid for logic. With the complications of this calculus, the reader will probably be little concerned. There is no general type of procedure for elimination or solution. Formulae of solution for different types of equation are given. They are highly ingenious, often complicated, and of dubious application. It is difficult to judge of possible applications because in the whole course of the development, so far as outlined, there is not a single illustration of a solution which represents logical reasoning, and very few illustrations of any kind. The shortcomings of this calculus are fairly obvious. There is too much reliance upon the analogy between the logical relations symbolized and their arithmetical analogues. Some of the operations are logically uninterpretable, as for example the use of numerical coefficients other than and 1. These have a meaning in the "Newtonian formula", but 2y either has no meaning or requires a conventional treatment which is not given. And in any case, to subtract y from both sides of 2y = x + y and get y = x represents no valid logical operation. Any adequate study of the properties of the relations employed is lacking, x = a + b is transformed into a = x b, regardless of the fact that a and b may have a common part and that 43 Seeks Versuche, p. 12. 24 A Survey of Symbolic Logic x b represents the abstraction of the whole of b from x. Suppose, for example, man = rational + animal. Then, by Lambert s procedure, we should have also rational = man animal. Since Leibniz had pointed out this difficulty, that addition and subtraction (with exactly these meanings) are not true inverses, it is the more inexcusable that Lambert should err in this. There is a still deeper difficulty here. As Lambert himself remarks, 44 no two concepts are so completely dissimilar that they do not have a common part. One might say that the concept " thing" (Lambert s word) or " be ing " is common to every pair of concepts. This being the case, [ + ] and [ ] are never really inverse operations. Hence the difficulty will not really disappear even in the case of ay and a<5; and a ay = ad, a a8 = ay will not be strictly valid. In fact this consideration vitiates altogether the use of "subtraction" in a calculus based on intension. For the meaning of a b becomes wholly doubtful unless [ ] be treated as a wholly con ventional inverse of [ + ], and in that case it becomes wholly useless. The method by which Lambert treats the traditional syllogism is only remotely connected with what precedes, and its value does not entirely depend upon the general validity of his calculus. He reconstructs the whole of Aristotelian logic by the quantification of the predicate. 45 The proposition "All A is B" has two cases: (1) A = B, the case in which it has a universal converse, the concept A is identical with the concept B. (2) A > B, the case in which the converse is particular, the concept B comprehended in the concept A. The particular affirmative similarly has two cases : (1) A < B, the case in which the converse is a universal, the subject A comprehended within the predicate B. (2) The case in which the converse is particular. In this case the subject A is comprehended within a subsumed species of the predicate and the predicate within a subsumed species of the subject. Lambert says this may be expressed by the pair: mA > B and A < nB Those who are more accustomed to logical relations in extension must not make the mistake here of supposing that A > mA, and mA < A. mA is a species of A, and in intension the genus is contained in the species, 44 Ibid., p. 12. 45 7m, pp. 93 jf. The Development of Symbolic Logic 25 not vice versa. Hence mA > B does not give A > B, as one might expect at first glance. We see that Lambert here translates "Some A " by mA, a species comprehended in A, making the same assumption which occurs in Leibniz, that any subdivision or portion of a class is capable of being treated as some species comprehended under that class as its genus. In a universal negative proposition Lambert says the subject and predicate each have peculiar properties by virtue of whose comprehension neither is contained in the other. But if the peculiar properties of the subject be taken away, then what remains is contained in the predicate; and if the peculiar properties of the predicate be taken away, then what remains is contained in the subject. Thus the universal negative is repre sented by the pair m and A> B - n The particular negative has two cases: (1) When it has a universal affirmative converse, i. e., when some A is not B but all B is A. This is expressed by .4 <B (2) When it has not a universal affirmative converse. In this case a subsumed species of the subject is contained in the predicate, and a sub sumed species of the predicate in the subject. mA > B and A < nB Either of the signs, < and >, may be reversed by transposing the terms. And if P < Q, Q > P, then for some /, P = IQ. Also, " multi plication" and "division" are strict inverses. Hence we can transform these expressions as follows: A > B is equivalent to A = mB nA = B mA = kB] IA = nB ] A_ _B m k A = B_ I " n J It is evident from these transformations and from the prepositional equiva- or pA = qB or = - 26 A Survey of Symbolic Logic lents of the " inequalities" that the following is the full expression of these equations: (1) A = mB: All A is B and some B is not A. (2) nA = B: Some A is not B and all B is A. (3) mA = nB: Some, but not all, A is B, and some, but not all, B is A. (4) - = - : No A is B. m n The first noticeable defect here is that A/m = B/n is transformable into nA = mB and (4) can mean nothing different from (3). Lambert has, in fact, only four different propositions, if he sticks to the laws of his calculus: (1) A = B: All A is all B. (2) A = mB: All A is some B. (3) nA == B: Some A is all B. (4) mA = nB: Some A is some B. These are the four forms which become, in Hamilton s and De Morgan s treatises, the four forms of the affirmative. A little scrutiny will show that Lambert s treatment of negatives is a failure. For it to be consistent at all, it is necessary that " fractions" should not be transformed. But Lambert constantly makes such transformations, though he carefully re frains from doing so in the case of expressions like A/m = B/n which are supposed to represent universal negatives. His method further requires that m and n should behave like positive coefficients which are always greater than and such that m 4= n. This is unfortunate. It makes it impossible to represent a simple proposition without "entangling alliances". If he had taken a leaf from Leibniz s book and treated negative propositions as affirmatives with negative predicates, he might have anticipated the calculus of De Morgan. In symbolizing syllogisms, Lambert always uses A for the major term, B for the middle term, and C for the minor. The perfectly general form of proposition is: mA nB P ( 1 Hence the perfectly general syllogism will be : 46 AT . mA nB Major p q 46 Ibid., pp. 102-103. 47 Ibid., p. 107. The Development of Symbolic Logic nC vB Minor 27 ~ , fj.n mv Conclusion - C = A irq pp The indeterminates in the minor are always represented thus by Greek letters. The conclusion is delved from the premises as follows: The major premise gives B = A. np The minor gives B = C. irv Hence A-C. np irv mv and therefore -- C = - A. irq pp The above being the general form of the syllogism, Lambert s scheme of moods in the first figure is the following: it coincides with the traditional classification only so far as indicated by the use of the traditional names: B = mA nB = mA I. VII. C yjj nC = B Barbara Lilii C = mvB nvC = mA B = A II. C B VIII. B = A Canerent 7T C P _A Magogos M C = nB uC = nA 7T p III. B _A IX. B_A Decane Q C P Negligo q p C = vB sive sive Celarent C vA Ferio i*C = vA 9 P q p 28 A Survey of Symbolic Logic IV. Fideleo nB = A C B 7T nC X. Pilosos nB = A V.C = B = A V. B = mA Gabini nC = vB sive LiC = mvA Darii nB = mA VI. C = B Hilario nC = mA XL Romano XII. Somnio nB = mA C = B nC = mA nB = mA C = B 7ijjiC = mA The difficulty about "division" does not particularly affect this scheme, since it is only required that if one of the premises involve " fractions", the conclusion must also. It will be noted that the mood Hilario is identi cal in form with Romano, and Lilii with Somnio. The reason for this lies in the fact that nB = mA has two partial meanings, one affirmative and one negative (see above). Hilario and Lilii take the affirmative interpretation, as their names indicate; Romano and Somnio, the negative. Into the discussion of the other three figures, the reader will probably not care to go, since the manner of treatment is substantially the same as in the above. There are various other attempts to devise a convenient symbolism and method for formal logic; 48 but these are of the same general type, and they meet with about the same degree and kind of success. Two brief passages in which there is an anticipation of the logic of relatives possess some interest. 49 Relations, Lambert says, are " external attributes", by which he means that they do not belong to the object an sich. " Metaphysical" (i. e., non-logical) relations are represented by Greek letters. For example if / = fire, h = heat, and a = cause, / = a : : h The symbol : : represents a relation which behaves like multiplication: 48 See in Seeks Versuche, v and vi. Also fragments "Uber die Vernunftlehre", in Logische und Philosophische Abhandlungen, i, xix and xx; and Anlage zur Architektonik, p. 190 jf. 49 ec/is Versuche, pp. 19, 27 ff. The Development of Symbolic Logic 29 a : : h is in fact what Peirce and Schroder later called a "relative product". Lambert transforms the above equation into: Fire is to heat as cause to effect. h Fire is to cause as heat to effect. a -* - Heat is to fire as effect to cause. i <* The dot here represents Wirkuny (it might be, Wirklichkeit, in consonance with the metaphysical interpretation, suggestive of Aristotle, which he gives to Ursache). It has the properties of 1, as is illustrated elsewhere 50 by the fact that 7 may be replaced by this symbol. Lambert also uses powers of a relation. If a = <p : : b, and b = <p : : c, a = <p : : (p : : c = (p- : : c And if a = <p~ : : c, o a j \ a <p- = - and V 7 = \|- c V And more to the same effect. No use is made of this symbolism; indeed it is difficult to see how Lambert could have used it. Yet it is interesting that he should have felt that the powers of a relation ought to be logically important, and that he here hit upon exactly the concept by which the riddles of "mathematical induction" were later to be solved. Holland s attempt at a logical calculus is contained in a letter to Lam bert. 51 He himself calls it an "unripe thought", and in a letter some three years later 52 he expresses a doubt if logic is really a purely formal discipline capable of mathematical treatment. But this study is of particular interest because it treats the logical classes in extension the only attempt at a symbolic logic from the point of view of extension from the time of Leibniz to the treatise of Solly in 1839. Holland objects to Lambert s method of representing the relation of concepts by the relation of lines, one under the other, and argues that the 50 Ibid., p. 21. 61 Joha n. Lamberts deutscher Gelehrten Brief wechsel, Brief m, pp. 16 ff. 52 See Ibid., Brief xxvn, pp. 259 ff. 30 A Survey of Symbolic Logic relation of "men" to " mortals" is not sub but inter. He is apparently not aware that this means exchanging the point of view of intension for that of extension, yet all his relations are consistently represented in extension, as we shall see. (1) If S represent the subject, P the predicate; and p, TT signify unde termined variable numbers, S/p = P/TT will come to: A part of S is a part of P, or certain of the S s are certain of the P s, or (at least) an S is a P. This expression is the general formula of all possible judgments, as is evident by the following: (2) A member is either positive or negative, and in both cases, is either finite or infinite. We shall see in what fashion p and IT can be understood. (3) If p = 1 in S/p, then is S/p as many as all S, and in this way S/p attains its logical maximum. Since, then, p cannot become less than 1, it can still less disappear and consequently cannot become negative. The same is true of TT. (4) Therefore p and TT cannot but be positive and cannot be less than 1 . If p or TT becomes infinite, the concept becomes negative. (5) If /expresses a finite number > 1, then the possible forms of judg ment are as follows: (1) ^ --= ^ All S is all P. (2) ^ --= j All S is some P. Now expresses negatively what l/oo expresses positively. To say that an infinitely small part of a curved line is straight, means exactly: No part of a curved line is straight. (3) ~ = All S is not P. 1 CO (4) j- -. Some S is all P. o p (5) - = Some S is some P. S P (6) - = - Some S is not- P. (7) = ^ All not-S is all P. oo 1 53 See Ibid., Brief iv. The Development of Symbolic Logic 31 S P (8) = j All not-S is some P. S P (9) All not-S is all not-P. (1), (2), and (9) Holland says are universal affirmative propositions; (3), (7), and (8), universal negatives; (4) and (5), particular affirmatives; (6), a particular negative. As Venn has said, this notation anticipates, in a way, the method of Boole. If instead of the fraction we take the value of the numerator indicated by it, the three values are where < v < 1, and /co -.= Q-S. But the differences between this and Boole s procedure are greater than the resemblances. The fractional form is a little unfortunate in that it suggests that the equations may be cleared of fractions, and this would give results which are logically uninterpretable. But Holland s notation can be made the basis of a completely successful calculus. That he did not make it such, is apparently due to the fact that he did not give the matter sufficient attention to elaborate the extensional point of view. He gives the following examples: Example 1. All men H are mortal M All Europeans E are men H P T Ergo, E = [All Europeans are mortal] Example 2. All plants are organisms P = - P All plants are no animals P - oo A Ergo, - = - [Some organisms are not animals] 32 A Survey of Symbolic Logic Example 3. All men are rational // = - P T> All plants are not rational P = - CO vH Ergo, All plants are no men P = - 00 In this last example, Holland has evidently transformed // = R/p into pH = R, which is not legitimate, as we have noted. pH = R would be "Some men are all the rational beings". And the conclusion P = pH/ao is also misinterpreted. It should be, "All plants are not some men". A correct reading would have revealed the invalid operation. Lambert replied vigorously to this letter, maintaining the superiority of the intensional method, pointing out, correctly, that Holland s calculus would not distinguish the merely non-existent from the impossible or contradictory (no calculus in extension can), and objecting to the use of c in this connection. It is characteristic of their correspondence that each pointed out the logical defects in the logical procedure of the other, and neither profited by the criticism. Castillon s essay toward a calculus of logic is contained in a paper presented to the Berlin Academy in 1S03. 54 The letters S, A, etc., represent concepts taken in intension, M is an indeterminate, S + M represents the synthesis" of S and M, S - M, the withdrawal or abstraction of M from S. S M thus represents a genus concept in which S is subsumed, M being the logical "difference" of S in S - M. Consonantly S + M, symbolizing the addition of some "further specification" to S, represents a species concept which contains (in intension) the concept S. The predicate of a universal affirmative proposition is contained in the subject (in intension). Thus "All S is A" is represented by S = A + M The universal negative "No S is A" is symbolized by S = - A + M = (- A) + M The concept S is something, M, from which A is withdrawn is no A. Particular propositions are divided into two classes, "real" and "il lusory". A real particular is the converse of a universal affirmative; the "Memoire sur un nouvel algorithme logique", in Memoires de V Academic des Sciences de Berlin, 1803, Classe de philosophie speculative, pp. 1-14. See also his paper, "Reflexions sur la Logique", loc. cit., 1802. The Development of Symbolic Logic 33 illusory particular, one whose converse also is particular. The real particu lar affirmative is A = S - M since this is the converse of S = A + M. The illusory particular affirmative is represented by S = A=? M Castillon s explanation of this is that the illusory particular judgment gives us to understand that some S alone is A, or that S is got from A by ab straction (S = A - M), when in reality it is A which is drawn from S by abstraction (S == M + A). Thus this judgment puts ~ M where it should put + M] one can, then, indicate it by S = A ^ M. The fact is, of course, that "Some S is A " indicates nothing about the relations of the concepts S and A except that they are not incompatible. This means, in intension, that if one or both be further specified in proper fashion, the results will coincide. It might well be symbolized by S + N = A + M. We suspect that Castillon s choice of S = A =F M is really governed by the consideration that S = A + M may be supposed to give S = A ^F M, the universal to give its subaltern, and that A = S - M will also give S = A =F M, that is to say, the real particular which is "All A is S" will also give S = A =F M. Thus "Some S is A" may be derived both from "All S is A" and from "All A is S", which is a de sideratum. The illusory negative particular is, correspondingly, S = - A =F M Immediate inference works out fairly well in this symbolism. The universal affirmative and the real particular are converses. S = A + M gives A = S M, and vice versa. The universal negative is directly convertible. S = -- A + M gives A = S + J/, and vice versa. The illusory par ticular is also convertible. S = A T J/ gives - A = - S =F M. Hence A = S =F M, which comes back to S = A ^ M. A universal gives its subaltern S = A + M gives S = A =F J/, and S = - A + M gives S = - A =T= M. And a real particular gives also the converse illusory particular, for A = S - M gives S = A + M, 4 34 A Survey of Symbolic Logic which gives its subaltern, S = A ^ M, which gives A = S ^ M. All the traditional moods and figures of the syllogism may be symbolized in this calculus, those which involve particular propositions being valid both for the real particular and for the illusory particular. For example: All Mis A M = A + N All SisM S = M + P All Sis ,4 . . S = A + (N + P) No M is A M = - A + N All S is M S = M + P No Sis A :. S = - A + (N + P) All M is A M = A + N Some S is M S = M =F P or S = M - P . . Some S is A . . S = (A + N) =F P or S = (A + N) - P This is the most successful attempt at a calculus of logic in intension. The difficulty about "subtraction" in the XIX Fragment of Leibniz, and in Lambert s calculus, arises because M P does not mean "M but not P " or " M which is not P ". If it mean this, then [ + ] and [ ] are not true inverses. If, on the other hand, M - P indicates the abstraction from the concept M of all that is involved in the concept P, then M - P is difficult or impossible to interpret, and, in addition, the idea of negation cannot be represented by [-]. How does it happen, then, that Castillon s notation works out so well when he uses [-] both for abstraction and as the sign of negation? It would seem that his calculus ought to involve him in both kinds of difficulties. The answer is that Castillon has, apparently by good luck, hit upon a method in which nothing is ever added to or subtracted from a determined concept, S or A, except an indeterminate, M or N or P, and this indeter minate, just because it is indeterminate, conceals the fact that [+ ] and [-] are not true inverses. And when the sign [ ] appears before a determinate, A, it may serve as the sign of negation, because no difficulty arises from supposing the whole of what is negated to be absent, or abstracted. Castillon s calculus is theoretically as unsound as Lambert s, or more so if unsoundness admits of degree. It is quite possible that it was worked out empirically and procedures which give invalid results avoided. The Development of Symbolic Logic 35 Whoever studies Leibniz, Lambert and Castillon cannot fail to be con vinced that a consistent calculus of concepts in intension is either immensely I difficult or, as Couturat has said, impossible. Its main difficulty is not the one which troubled Leibniz and which constitutes the main defect in Lambert s system the failure of [ + ] and [-] to behave like true inverses. This can be avoided by treating negative propositions as affirmatives with negative predicates, as Leibniz did. The more serious difficulty is that a calculus of "concepts " is not a calculus of things in actu but only in possibile, and in a rather loose sense of the latter at that. Holland pointed this out admirably in a letter to Lambert. 55 He gives the example according to Lambert s method, All triangles are figures. T = tF All quadrangles are figures. Q = qF T Whence, F =- = , or qT = tQ and he then proceeds: 56 "In general, if from A == mC and B = nC the conclusion nA = mB be drawn, the calculus cannot determine whether the ideas nA and mB consist of contradictory partial-ideas, as in the foregoing example, or not. The thing must be judged according to the matter." This example also calls attention to the fact that Lambert s calculus, by operations which he continually uses, leads to the fallacy of the undis tributed middle term. If "some A" is simply some further specification of the concept A, then this mode is not fallacious. And this observation brings down the whole treatment of logic as a calculus of concepts in in tension like a house of cards. The relations of existent things cannot be determined from the relations of concepts alone. The calculus of Leibniz is more successful than any invented by his continental successors unless Ploucquet s is an exception. That the long period between him and De Morgan and Boole did not produce a successful system of symbolic logic is probably due to the predilection for this inten- sional point of view. It is no accident that the English were so quickly successful after the initial interest was aroused; they habitually think of logical relations in extension, and when they speak of "intension" it is usually clear that they do not mean those relations of concepts which the "intension" of traditional logic signifies. 55 Deutscher Gelehrter Brief wechsel, I, Brief xxvu. 56 Ibid., pp. 262-63. 36 A Survey of Symbolic Logic The beginning of thought upon this subject in England is marked by the publication of numerous treatises, all proposing some modification of the traditional logic by quantifying the predicate. As Sir William Hamilton notes, 57 the period from Locke to 1833 is singularly barren of any real con tributions to logic. About that time, Hamilton himself proposed the quantification of the predicate. As we now know, this idea was as old at least as Leibniz. Ploucquet, Lambert, Holland, and Castillon also had quantified the predicate. Both Hamilton and his student Thomson men tion Ploucquet; but this new burst of logical study in England impresses one as greatly concerned about its own innovations and sublimely indifferent to its predecessors. Hamilton quarrelled at length with De Morgan to establish his priority in the matter. 58 This is the more surprising, since George Bentham, in his Outline of a New System of Logic, published in 1827, had quantified the predicate and given the following table of propositions: 1 . X in toto = Y ex parte ; 2. X in toto ! Y ex parte; 3. X in toto = Y in toto; 4. X in toto | Y in toto; 5. X ex parte = Y ex parte; 6. X ex parte | | Y ex parte; 7. X ex parte = Y in toto; 8. X ex parte | | 7 in toto. (| | is here the sign of "diversity"). But Hamilton was certainly the center and inspirer of a new movement in logic, the tendency of which was toward more precise analysis of logical significances. Bayne s Essay on the New Analytic and Thomson s Laws of Thought are the most considerable permanent record of the results, but there was a continual fervid discussion of logical topics in various peri odicals; logistic was in the air. This movement produced nothing directly which belongs to the history of symbolic logic. Hamilton s rather cumbersome notation is not made the basis of operations, but is essentially only an abbreviation of language. Solly s scheme of representing syllogisms was superior as a calculus. But 57 See Discussions on Philosophy, pp. 119 ff. This controversy, begun in 1846, was continued for many years (see various articles in the London Athenceum, from 1860 to 1867). It was concluded in the pages of the Con temporary Review, 1873. The Development of Symbolic Logic 3 7 this movement accomplished two things for symbolic logic: it emphasized in fact though not always in name the point of view of extension, and it aroused interest in the problem of a newer and more precise logic. These may seem small, but whoever studies the history of logic in this period will easily convince himself that without these things, symbolic logic might never have been revived. Without Hamilton, we might not have had Boole. The record of symbolic logic on the continent is a record of failure, in England, a record of success. The continental students habitually emphasized intension; the English, extension. IV. DE MOP CAN De Morgan 59 is known to most students of symbolic logic only through the theorem which bears his name. But he made other contributions of permanent value the idea of the "universe of discourse", 60 the discovery of certain new types of propositions, and a beginning of the logic of rela tions. Also, his originality in the invention of new logical forms, his ready wit, his pat illustrations," and the clarity and liveliness of his writing did yeoman service in breaking down the prejudice against the introduction \ of "mathematical" methods in logic. His important writings on logic are comprised in the Formal Logic, the Syllabus of a Proposed System of Logic, and a series of articles in the Transactions of the Cambridge Philo sophical Society? 1 59 Augustus De Morgan (1806-78), A.B. (Cambridge, 1827), Professor of Mathematics in the University of London 1828-31, reappointed 1835; writer of numerous mathematical treatises which are characterized by exceptional accuracy, originality and clearness. Per haps the most valuable of these is "Foundations of Algebra" (Camb. Phil. Trans., vu, vm); the best known, the Budget of Paradoxes. For a list of his papers, see the Royal Society Catalogue. For many years an active member of the Cambridge Philosophical Society and the Royal Astronomical Society. Father of William F. De Morgan, the novelist and poet. For a brief biography, see Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society, xii, 112. 60 The idea is introduced with these words: "Let us take a pair of contrary names, as man and not-man. It is plain that between them they represent everything, imaginable or real, in the universe. But the contraries of common language embrace, not the whole universe, but some one general idea. Thus, of men, Briton and alien are contraries: every man must be one of the two, no man can be both. . . . The same may be said of integer and fraction among numbers, peer and commoner among subjects of a realm, male and female among animals, and so on. In order to express this, let us say that the whole idea under consideration is the universe (meaning merely the whole of which we are considering parts) and let names which have nothing in common, _but which between them contain the whole of the idea under ^nsideratiqn, be called contraries in, or with respect to, that universe." (Formal Logic, p. 37; see also Camb. Phil. Trans., vm, 380.) 61 Formal Logic: or, The Calculus of Inference, Necessary and Probable, 1847. Here after to be cited as F. L. 38 A Survey of Symbolic Logic Although the work of De IN [organ is strictly contemporary with that of Boole, his methods and symbolism ally him rather more with his prede cessors than with Boole and those who follow. Like Hamilton, he is bent upon improving the traditional Aristotelian logic. His first step in this direction is to enlarge the number of typical propositions by considering all the combinations and distributions of two terms, X and F, and their negatives. It is a feature of De Morgan s notation that the distribution of each term, 62 and the quality affirmative or negative of the proposition are indicated, these being sufficient to determine completely the type of the proposition. That a term A" is distributed is indicated by writing half a parenthesis ^before or after it, with the horns turned toward the letter, thus: A"), or (X. An undistributed term is marked by turning the half-parenthesis the other way, thus: A"(, or )A". A"))} 7 , for example, indicates the proposition in which the subject, X, is distributed and the predicate, F, is undistributed, that is, "All A" is F". X()Y indicates a proposition with both terms un distributed, that is, "Some A is F". 63 The negative of a term, X, is indi cated by .r; of F by y, etc. A negative proposition is indicated by a dot placed between the parenthetical curves; thus "Some X is not Y" will be A"(-(F. 64 Two dots, or none, indicates an affirmative proposition. All the different forms of proposition which De Morgan uses can be generated from two types, the universal, "All . . . is . . ./ and the particular, "Some . . . is . . .," by using the four terms, X and its nega tive, .r, F and y. For the universals we have: Syllabus of a Proposed System of Logic, 1860. Hereafter to be cited as Syll. Five papers (the first not numbered; various titles) in Camb. Phil. Trans., vm, ix, x. The articles contain the most valuable material, but they are ill-arranged and inter spersed with inapposite discussion. Accordingly, the best way to study De Morgan is to get these articles and the Formal Logic, note in a general way the contents of each, and then use the Syllabus as a point of departure for each item in which one is interested. 62 He does not speak of "distribution" but of terms which are "universally spoken of" cr "particularly spoken of ", or of the "quantity" of a term. 63 This is the notation of Syll. and of the articles, after the first, in Camb. Phil. Trans. For a table comparing the different symbolisms which he used, see Camb. Phil. Trans., ix, 91. 64 It is sometimes hard to determine by the conventional criteria whether De Morgan s propositions should be classed as affirmative or negative. He gives the following ingenious rule for distinguishing them (Syll., p. 13): "Let a proposition be affirmative which is true of X and A , false of X and not-A" or x; negative, which is true of X and x, false of X and X. Thus Every A is Y is affirmative: Every A is A is true; Every A is x is false. But Some things are neither A s nor F s is also affirmative, though in the form of a denial: Some things are neither A s nor A s is true, though superfluous in expression; Some things are neither A s nor z s is false." The Development of Symbolic Logic 39 (1) A)) 7 MIX is Y. (2) x))y All not- A" is not- 7. (3) X))y All X is not-7. (4) x))Y Allnot-Zis 7. and for particulars we have : (5) X() Y Some X is 7. (6) x()y Some not-X is not- 7. (7) X()y Some X is not- 7. (8) x()Y Some not-JT is 7. The rule for transforming a proposition into other equivalent forms may be stated as follows: Change the distribution of either term that is, turn its parenthetic curve the other way, change that term into its negative, and change the quality of the proposition. That this rule is valid will appear if we remember that "two negatives make an affirmative", and note that we introduce one negative by changing the term, another by changing the quality of the proposition. That the distribution of the altered term should be changed follows from the fact that whatever proposition distrib utes a term leaves the negative of that term undistributed, and whatever proposition leaves a term undistributed distributes the negative of that term. Using this rule of transformation, we get the following table of equivalents for our eight propositions: (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) XY = X)-(y --=x((y = x(-)Y (2) x))y = x)-(Y = X((Y = X(-)y (3) X))y - X).(Y = x((Y *()? (4) .r))7 = a-)-Q/ = X((y - X(-)Y (5) T() 7 = X(-(y -=x)(y =x).)Y (G) x()i/ *x(.(Y = Z)(7-Z)-)y (7) XQy -.= X(.(Y = x)(Y = x)-)y (8) a-()7 =x(.(y - X}(y -=X)-)Y It will be observed that in each line there is one proposition with both terms positive, A and Y. Selecting these, we have the eight different types of propositions: 40 A Survey of Symbolic Logic (la) A))F All A" is Y. (2c) A ((F Some X is all F; or, All Y is X. (36) X)-(Y NoZis Y. (4d) X(-)Y Everything is either X or Y. (See below.) (5o) A r ()F Some A is 7. (6c) X)(Y Some things are neither X nor F. (See below.) (76) X(-(Y Some A" is not Y. (Sd) X)-)Y All X is not some Y; or, Some 7 is not X. Since the quantity of each term is indicated, any one of these propositions may be read or written backwards that is, w r ith Y subject and X predicate provided the distribution of terms is preserved. (4d) and (6c) are diffi cult to understand. We might attempt to read X(-)Y "Some X is not some F", but we hardly get from that the difference between X(-)Y and A (-(F, "Some X is not (any) F". Also, A"(-)F is equivalent to uni- versals, and the reading, "Some X is not some F", would make it par ticular. A"(-)F is equivalent to cc)) F, "All not-Z is F", and to x)-(y, "Xo not-X is not-F". The only equivalent of these with the terms A" and F is, "Everything (in the universe of discourse) is either X or F (or both)". (6c), X)(Y, we should be likely to read "All X is all F", or " X and F are equivalent "; but this would be an error, 65 since its equivalents are particular propositions. (6a), xQy, is "Some not-X is not-F". The equivalent of this in terms of X and F is plainly, "Some things are neither X nor F". Contradictories 66 of propositions in line (1) will be found in line (7); of those in line (2), in line (8); of line (3), in line (5); of line (4), in line (6). We give those with both terms positive : (la) X))Y contradicts (76) X(-(Y (2c) X((Y " (Sd) AF (36) A>(F " (5a) XQY X(-)Y (6c) X)(Y 65 An error into which it might seem that De Morgan himself has fallen. See e. g., SylL, p. 25, and Camb. Phil. Trans., ix, 98, where he translates X)(Y by "All X is all F ", or "Any one X is any one Y ". But this belongs to another interpretation, the "cumular", which requires X and Y to be singular, and not-X and not- Y will then have common members. However, as we shall note later, there is a real difficulty. 66 De Morgan calls contradictory propositions "contraries" (See F. L., p. 60; Sytt., p. 11), just as he calls terms which are negatives of one another "contraries". The Development of Symbolic Logic 41 Thus the rule is that two propositions having the same terms contradict one another when one is affirmative, the other negative, and the distribution of terms is exactly opposite in the two cases. The rule for transforming propositions which has been stated and exemplified, together with the observation that any symbolized proposition may be read or written backwards, provided the distribution of the terms be preserved, gives us the principles for the immediate inference of uni- versals from universals, particulars from particulars. For the rest, we have the rule, "Each universal affirms the particulars of the same quality". 67 For syllogistic reasoning, the test of validity and rule of inference are as follows: 6i "There is inference: 1. When both the premises are universal; 2. When, one premise only being particular, the middle term has different quantities in the two premises. "The conclusion is found by erasing the middle term and its quantities [parenthetic curves]." This rule of inference is stated for the special arrangement of the syllogism in which the minor premise is put first, and the minor term first in the premise, the major term being the last in the second premise. Since any proposition may be written backward, this arrangement can always be made. According to the rule, X))Y, "All X is F", and F) (Z, "No Y is Z", give X)-(Z, "No X is Z". A>(F, "No X is F", and F(-(Z, "Some F is not Z", give A") - (Z, or A ) (Z, which is "Some things are neither A" nor Z." The reader may, by inventing other examples, satisfy himself that the rule given is sufficient for all syllogistic reasoning, with any of De Morgan s eight forms of propositions. De Morgan also invents certain compound propositions which give com pound syllogisms in a fashion somewhat analogous to the preceding: 69 "1. X)0)Forboth A))Fand AF All X s and some things be sides are F s. 2. X For both A r ))Fand A ((F All X s are F s, and all F s are X s. 3. X(0 (F or both X((Y and X(-(Y Among X s are all the F s and some things besides. 4. A ) O (For both X)-(Y and X)(Y Nothing both A and F and some things neither. 67 Sytt., p. 16. **Sytt.,p. 19. 69 SyU., p. 22. 42 A Survey of Symbolic Logic 5. Z|- | For both A>(Fand X(-)Y Nothing both X and F and everything one or the other. 6. X(O)Y or both X(-)Y and XQY Everything either X or Y and some things both." Each of these propositions may, with due regard for the meaning of the sign O, be read or written backward, just as the simple propositions. The rule of transformation into other equivalent forms is slightly different: Change the quantity, or distribution, of any term and replace that term by its negative. We are not required, as with the simple propositions, to change at the same time the quality of the proposition. This difference is due to the manner in which the propositions are compounded. The rules for mediate, or " syllogistic", inference for these compound propositions are as follows: 70 "If any two be joined, each of which is [of the form of] 1, 3, 4, or 6, with the middle term of different quantities, these premises yield a con clusion of the same kind, obtained by erasing the symbols of the middle term and one of the symbols [O]. Thus X)O(Y(O)Z gives X)O)Z: or if nothing be both X and 7 and some things neither, and if everything be either Y or Z and some things both, it follows that all X and tivo lots of other things are Z s. " In any one of these syllogisms, it follows that may be written for )O) or )O( in one place, without any alteration of the conclusion, except reducing the two lots to one. But if this be done in both places, the con clusion is reduced to | | or | | , and both lots disappear. Let the reader examine for himself the cases in which one of the premises is cut down to a simple universal. "The following exercises will exemplify what precedes. Letters written under one another are names of the same object. Here is a universe of 12 instances of which 3 are X s and the remainder P s; 5 are F s and the remainder Q s; 7 are Z s and the remainder R s. XXX PP PP PPPPP YYY YY QQ QQQQQ Z Z Z Z Z Z Z RRRRR We can thus verify the eight complex syllogisms X)0)Y)0)Z P(0)Y)0)Z P(0(Q(O)Z P(O(Q(O(R P(0)Y)Q(R X)0)Y)0(R X)Q(Q(0(R X)O(Q(O)Z 70 Sytt., p. 23. The Development of Symbolic Logic 45f In every case it will be seen that the two lots in the middle form the quantity of the particular proposition of the conclusion." In so much of his work as we have thus far reviewed, De Morgan is still too much tied to his starting point in Aristotelian logic. He somewhat simplifies traditional methods and makes new generalizations which include old rules, but it is still distinctly the old logic. He does not question the inference from universals to particulars nor observe the problems there involved. 71 He does not seek a method by which any number of terms may be dealt with but accepts the limitation to the traditional two. And his symbolism has several defects. The dot introduced between the parenthetic curves is not the sign of negation, so as to make it possible to read () as, "It is false that ()". The negative of () is ) (, so that this simplest of all relations of propositions is represented by a complex trans formation applicable only when no more than two terms are involved in the prepositional relation. Also, there are two distinct senses in which a term in a proposition may be distributed or "mentioned universally", and De Morgan, following the scholastic tradition, fails to distinguish them and symbolizes both the same way. This is the secret of the difficulty in reading X)(Y, which looks like "All A" is all 7", and really is "Some things are neither A" nor Y ". 72 Mathematical symbols are introduced but without any corresponding mathematical operations. The sign of equality is used both for the symmetrical relation of equivalent propositions and for the un- symmetrical relation of premises to their conclusion. 73 His investigation of the logic of relations, however, is more successful, and he laid the foundation for later researches in that field. This topic is suggested to him by consideration of the formal and material elements in logic. He says: 7l 71 But he does make the assumption upon which all inference (in extension) of a particular from a universal is necessarily based: the assumption that a class denoted by a simple term has members. He says (F. L., pp. 110), "Existence as objects, or existence as ideas, is tacitly claimed for the terms of every syllogism". 72 A universal affirmative distributes its subject in the sense that it indicates the class to which every member of the subject belongs, i. e., the class denoted by the predicate. Similarly, the universal negative, No X is F, indicates that every A is not- Y, every Y is not- A . No particular proposition distributes a term in that sense. The particular nega tive tells us only that the predicate is excluded from some unspecified portion of the class denoted by the subject. A)(F distributes X and Y in this sense only. Comparison with its equivalents shows us that it can tell us, of A", only that it is excluded from some un specified portion of not-F; and of Y, only that it is excluded from some unspecified portion of not-A. We cannot infer that X is wholly included in Y, or Y in X, or get any other relation of inclusion out of it. 73 In one passage (Camb. Phil. Trans., x, 183) he suggests that the relation of two premises to their conclusion should be symbolized by A B < C. 74 Camb. Phil. Trans., x, 177, footnote. 44 A Survey of Symbolic Logic "Is there any consequence without form? Is not consequence an action of the machinery? Is not logic the science of the action of the machinery? Consequence is always an act of the mind : on every consequence logic ought to ask, What kind of act? What is the act, as distinguished from the acted on, and from any inessential concomitants of the action ? For these are of the form, as distinguished from the matter. ". . . The copula performs certain functions; it is competent to those functions . . . because it has certain properties, which are sufficient to validate its use. . . . The word is, which identifies, does not do its work because it identifies, except insofar as identification is a transitive and convertible motion: A is that which is B means A is B ; and A is B means B is A . Hence every transitive and convertible relation is as fit to validate the syllogism as the copula is , and by the same proof in each case. Some forms are valid when the relation is only transitive and not convertible; as in give . Thus if X Y represent X and 7 connected by a transitive copula, Camestres in the second figure is valid, as in EveryZ 7, No X Y, therefore No X~ Z. ... In the following chain of propositions, there is exclusion of matter, form being preserved at every step : Hypothesis (Positively true) Every man is animal Every man is Y Y has existence. Every X is 7 X has existence. Every X 7 - is a transitive relation. a of X 7 a is a fraction < or = 1. (Probability (3) a of .Y 7 /? is a fraction < or - 1. The last is nearly the purely formal judgment, with not a single material point about it, except the transit! veness of the copula. 75 "... I hold the supreme form of the syllogism of one middle term to be as follows: There is the probability a that X is in the relation L to 7; there is the probability that 7 is in the relation M to Z; whence there is the probability a /3 that X is in the relation L of M to Z. 76 "... The copula of cause and effect, of motive and action, of all which post hoc is of the form and propter hoc (perhaps) of the matter, will one day be carefully considered in a more complete system of logic." 77 75 Ibid., pp. 177-78. 76 Ibid., p. 339. 77 Ibid., pp. 179-80. The Development of Symbolic Logic 45 De Morgan is thus led to a study of the categories of exact thinking in general, and to consideration of the types and properties of relations. His division of categories into logico-mathematical, logico-physical, logico- metaphysical, and logico-contraphysical, 78 is inauspicious, and nothing much comes of it. But in connection with this, and an attempt to rebuild logic in the light of it, he propounds the well-known theorem: "The con trary [negative] of an aggregate [logical sum] is the compound [logical product] of the contraries of the aggregants: the contrary of a compound is the aggregate of the contraries of the components." 79 For the logic of relations, X, Y, and Z will represent the class names; L, M, N, relations. X . . LY will signify that A" is some one of the objects of thought which stand to Y in the relation L, or is one of the L s of 7. 80 X . LY will signify that X is not any one of the L s of Y. X . . (LM) Y or X . . LM Y will express the fact that AT is one of the L s of one of the M s of y, or that X has the relation L to some Z which has the relation M to Y. X . LM Y will mean that X is not an L of any M of Y. It should be noted that the union of the two relations L and M is what we should call today their " relative product " ; that is, A" . . LY and Y . . MZ together give A^ . . LM Z, but A . . LY and A . . MY do not give A" . . LM Y. If L is the relation "brother of" and M is the relation "aunt of ", A . . LM Y will mean " X is a brother of an aunt of Y". (Do not say hastily, " X is uncle of 7". "Brother of an aunt" is not equivalent to "uncle" since some uncles have no sisters.) L, or M, written by itself, will represent that which has the relation L, or M, that is, a brother, or an aunt, and LY stands for any X which has the relation L to F, that is, a brother of T. 81 In order to reduce ordinary syllogisms to the form in which the copula has that abstractness which he seeks, that is, to the form in which the copula may be any relation, or any relation of a certain type, it is necessary to introduce symbols of quantity. Accordingly LM* is to signify an L of every M, that is, something which has the relation L to every member of the class M (say, a lover of every man). L*M is to indicate an L of none but M s (a lover of none but men). The mark of quantity, * or *, always 78 See ibid., p. 190. 79 Ibid., p. 208. See also Sytt., p. 41. Pp. 39-60 of Syll. present in summary the ideas of the paper, "On the Syllogism, No. 3, and on Logic in General." 80 Camb. Phil. Trans., x, 341. We follow the order of the paper from this point on. 81 1 tried at first to make De Morgan s symbolism more readily intelligible by intro ducing the current equivalents of his characters. But his systematic ambiguities, such as the use of the same letter for the relation and for that which has the relation, made this impossible. For typographical reasons, I use the asterisk where he has a small accent. 46 A Survey of Symbolic Logic goes with the letter which precedes it, but L*M is read as if *] modified the letter which follows. To obviate this difficulty, De Morgan suggests that L*M be read, "An every-!, of If; an L of M in every way in which it is an Z, " but we shall stick to the simpler reading, "An L of none but M s". LM*X means an L of every M of X: L*MX, an L of none but M s of X: L*M*, an L of every M and of none but 3f s: LMX*, an L of an M of every X, and so on. Two more symbols are needed. The converse of L is symbolized by L~ l . If L is "lover of", L- 1 is "beloved of"; if L is "aunt", L- 1 is "niece or nephew ". The contrary (or as we should say, the negative) of L is symbol ized by 1; the contrary of M by m. In terms of these relations, the following theorems can be stated : (1) Contraries of converses are themselves contraries. (2) Converses of contraries are contraries. (3) The contrary of the converse is the converse of the contrary. (4) If the relation L be contained in, or imply, the relation M, then (a) the converse of L, L~ l , is contained in the converse of M, M~ l \ and (6) the contrary of M, m, is contained in the contrary of L, I. For example, if "parent of" is contained in "ancestor of", (a) "child of" is contained in "descendent of", and (b) "not ancestor of" is contained in "not parent of". (5) The conversion of a compound relation is accomplished by converting both components and inverting their order; thus, (LM) 1 = M~ l L~ l . If X be teacher of the child of Y, Y is parent of the pupil of X. When a sign of quantity is involved in the conversion of a compound relation, the sign of quantity changes its place on the letter; thus, If X be teacher of every child of F, 7 is parent of none but pupils of X. (6) When, in a compound relation, there is a sign of quantity, if each component be changed into its contrary, and the sign of quantity be shifted from one component to the other and its position on the letter changed, the resulting relation is equivalent to the original; thus LM* = l*m and L*M = lm*. A lover of every man is a non-lover of none but non-men; and a lover of none but men is a non-lover of everv non-man. The Development of Symbolic Logic 47 (7) When a compound relation involves no sign of quantity, its contrary is found by taking the contrary of either component and giving quantity to the other. The contrary of LM is IM* or L*m. "Not (lover of a man) " is "non-lover of every man" or "lover of none but non-men"; and there are two equivalents, by ((>). But if there be a sign of quantity in one component, the contrary is taken by dropping that sign and taking the contrary of the other component. The contrary of LM* is IM; of L*M is Lm. "Not (lover of every man)" is "non-lover of a man"; and "not (lover of none but men) " is "lover of a non-man ". So far as they do not involve quantifications, these theorems are familiar to us today, though it seems not generally known that they are due to De Morgan. The following table contains all of them: Converse of Contrary Combination Converse Contrary Contrary of Converse LM M- l L~ l /J/* or L*M J/*- 1 /- 1 or m~ l L- 1 * LM*mhm M*~ l L~ l or m~H- 1 * IM M~ l l~ l L*Morlm* M^L- 1 * or m*- } l~ l Lm m~ l L~ l The sense in which one relation is said to be "contained in" or to "imply" another should be noted: L is contained in M in case every X which has the relation L to any Y has also the relation M to that Y. This must not be confused with the relation of class inclusion between two rela tive terms. Every grandfather is also a father, the class of grandfathers is contained in the class of fathers, but "grandfather of" is not contained in "father of", because the grandfather of Y is not also the father of Y. The relation "grandfather of" is contained in "ancestor of", since the grand father of F is also the ancestor of Y. But De Morgan appropriately uses the same symbol for the relation " L contained in M" that he uses for "All L is M", where L and M are class terms, that is, L))M. In terms of this relation of relations, the following theorems can be stated : (8) If L))M, then the contrary of M is contained in the contrary of L, that is, L))M gives m))l. Applying this theorem to compound relations, we have: (8 -) LM))N gives w))/J/* and n))L*m. (8") If LM))N, then L~ l n))m and wJ/- 1 ))/. Proof: If LM))N, then n))lM*. Whence nM- l ))lM*M~ l . But an / of 48 A Survey of Symbolic Logic every M of an M~ l of Z must be an Z of Z. Hence nM~ l ))l. Again; if LM))N, then ri))L*m. Whence L~ l n))L- l L*m. But . whatever has the relation converse-of-Z to an L of none but m s must be itself an m. Hence L~ l n))m. De Morgan calls this "theorem K" from its use in Baroko and Bokardo. (9) If LM = N, then L))NM~ l and M))L~ 1 N. Proof: If LM = N, then LMM~ l = NM~ l and L^LM = Z~W. Now for any X, MM~ 1 X and L~ 1 LX are classes which contain X; hence the theorem. We do not have L = NM~ l and M == L~ 1 N, because it is not generally true that MM~ 1 X == X and Lr l LX --= X. For example, the child of the parent of X may not be X but A" s brother : but the class " children of the parent of X" will contain X. The relation MM~ l or M~ 1 M will not always cancel out. MM~ l and M~ 1 M are always symmetrical relations ; if XMM~ l Y then YMM~ 1 X. If X is child of a parent of Y, then Y is child of a parent of X. But MM- 1 and M~ 1 M are nctf exclusively reflexive. XMM^X does not always hold. If we know that a child of the parent of X is a celebrated linguist we may not hastily assume that X is the linguist in question. With reference to transitive relations, we may quote : 82 "A relation is transitive when a relative of a relative is a relative of the same kind; as symbolized in ZZ))Z, whence ZZZ))ZZ))Z; and so on. "A transitive relation has a transitive converse, but not necessarily a transitive contrary: for L~ l L~ l is the converse of LL, so that ZZ))Z gives L 1 L *))L l . From these, by contraposition, and also by theorem K and its contrapositions, we obtain the following results: L is contained in LL- 1 *, Z*H, HZ*, L*~ 1 L I ZZ- 1 , Z-!Z ...... Z- 1 " I omit demonstration, but to prevent any doubt about correctness of printing, I subjoin instances in words: Z signifies ancestor and L~ l descendent. 82 Camb. Phil. Trans., x, 346. For this discussion of transitive relations, De Morgan treats all reciprocal relations, such as XLL^Y, as also reflexive, though not necessarily exclusively reflexive. The Development of Symbolic Logic 49 "An ancestor is always an ancestor of all descendents, a non-ancestor of none but non-descendents, a non-descendent of all non-ancestors, and a descendent of none but ancestors. A descendent is always an ancestor of none but descendents, a non-ancestor of all non-descendents, a non-descend ent of none but non-ancestors, and a descendent of all ancestors. A non- ancestor is always a non-ancestor of all ancestors, and an ancestor of none but non-ancestors. A non-descendent is a descendent of none but non- descendents, and a non-descendent of all descendents. Among non- ancestors are contained all descendents of non-ancestors, and all non- ancestors of descendents. Among non-descendents are contained all ancestors of non-descendents, and all non-descendents of ancestors." In terms of the general relation, L, or M, representing any relation, the syllogisms of traditional logic may be tabulated as follows: 83 1 2 3 4 X ..LY X .LY X ..LY X .LY I Y ..LZ Y . . MZ Y .MZ Y .MZ X . . LMZ X . . LMZ X . . LmZ X . . ImZ X .LY X ..LY X ..LY X .LY II Z . . MY Z . . MY Z . MY Z . MY X . . IM-W X . . LM~ 1 Z X . . Lm~ l Z X . . l m -y Y . . LX Y . LX Y . . LX Y .LX III Y .MZ Y . . MZ Y . . MZ Y .MZ X . . L~ l mZ X . . 1-iMZ X . . L-^MZ X . . l~ l rnZ Y . LX Y . . LX Y .LX Y . . LX IV Z .MY Z . MY Z ..MY Z ..MY X . l- l m~ l Z X .L- l m~ l Z X . 1~ 1 M~ 1 Z X .L- 1 M~ 1 Z" The Roman numerals here indicate the traditional figures. All the con clusions are given in the affirmative form; but for each affirmative con clusion, there are two negative conclusions, got by negating the relation and replacing it by one or the other of its contraries. Thus A" . . LMZ gives A . IH*Z and A . L*mZ; X . . 1M~ 1 Z gives A . LM~ l *Z and A . hm- l Z, and so on for each of the others. 63 Ibid., p. 350. 5 50 A Survey of Symbolic Logic When the copula of all three propositions is limited to the same transitive relation, L, or its converse, the table of syllogisms will be: 84 X..LY X.LY X..LY I Y..LZ Y..L-1Z Y.L~ 1 Z X ..LZ X .LZ X . L~ 1 Z X . LY X . .LY X ..LY II z . .LY Z . .Lr l Y Z .LY X . LZ X . .LZ X .L~ 1 Z Y . . LX Y .LX Y ..LX III Y . LZ Y ..LZ Y . . L~\ X . LZ X . L-^Z X . . L~\ Y ..LX Y .LX Y ..LX IV Z.L- 1 Y Z..L~ 1 Y Z..LY X.LZ X.L~ 1 Z X..L~ 1 Z" Here, again, in the logic of relations, De Morgan would very likely have done better if he had left the traditional syllogism to shift for itself. The introduction of quantifications and the systematic ambiguity of L, M, etc., which are used to indicate both the relation and that which has the relation, hurry him into complications before the simple analysis of rela tions, and types of relations, is ready for them. This logic of relations was destined to find its importance in the logistic of mathematics, not in any applications to, or modifications of, Aristotelian logic. And these compli cations of De Morgan s, due largely to his following the clues of formal logic, had to be discarded later, after Peirce discovered the connection between Boole s algebra and relation theory. The logic of relative terms has been reintroduced by the work of Frege and Peano, and more especially of Whitehead and Russell, in the logistic development of mathematics. But it is there separated and has to be separated from the simpler analysis of the relations themselves. Nevertheless, it should always be remembered that it was De Morgan who laid the foundation; and if some part of his work had to be discarded, still his contribution was indispensable and of permanent value. In concluding his paper on relations, he justly remarks : 85 84 Ibid., p. 354. 85 Ibid., p. 358. The Development of Symbolic Logic 51 "And here the general idea of relation emerges, and for the first time in the history of knowledge, the notions of relation and relation of relation are symbolized. And here again is seen the scale of graduation of forms, the manner in which what is difference of form at one step of the ascent is difference of matter at the next. But the relation of algebra to the higher developments of logic is a subject of far too great extent to be treated here. It will hereafter be acknowledged that, though the geometer did not think it necessary to throw his ever-recurring principium et exemplum into imita tion of Omnis homo est animal, Sortes est homo, etc., yet the algebraist was living in the higher atmosphere of syllogism, the unceasing composition of relation, before it was admitted that such an atmosphere existed." M V. BOOLE The beginning from which symbolic logic has had a continuous develop ment is that made by George Boole. 87 His significant and vital contribution was the introduction, in a fashion more general and systematic than before, of mathematical operations. Indeed Boole allows operations which have no direct logical interpretation, and is obviously more at home in mathe matics than in logic. It is probably the great advantage of Boole s work that he either neglected or was ignorant of those refinements of logical theory which hampered his predecessors. The precise mathematical development of logic needed to make its own conventions and interpreta tions; and this could not be done without sweeping aside the accumulated traditions of the non-symbolic Aristotelian logic. As we shall see, all the nice problems of intension and extension, of the existential import of uni- versals and particulars, of empty classes, and so on, return later and demand consideration. It is well that, with Boole, they are given a vacation long enough to get the subject started in terms of a simple and general procedure. Boole s first book, The Mathematical Analysis of Logic, being an Essay toward a Calculm of Deductive Reasoning, was published in 1847, on the 86 1 omit, with some misgivings, any account of De Morgan s contributions to prob ability theory as applied to questions of authority and judgment. (See SylL, pp. 67-72; F. L., Chap, ix, x; and Camb. Phil. Trans., vm, 384-87, and 393-405.) His work on this topic is less closely connected with symbolic logic than was Boole s. The allied subject of the "numerically definite syllogism" (see Syll., pp. 27-30; F. L., Chap, vm; and Camb. Phil. Trans., x, *355-*358) is also omitted. 87 George Boole (1815-1864) appointed Professor of Mathematics in Queen s College, Cork, 1849; LL.D. (Dublin, 1852), F.R.S. (1857), D.C.L. (Oxford, 1859). For a biographi cal sketch, by Harley, see Brit. Quart. Rev., XLIV (1866), 141-81. See also Proc. Roy. Soc., xv (1867), vi-xi. 52 A Survey of Symbolic Logic o ~*same day as De Morgan s Formal Logic. 88 The next year, his article, "The Calculus of Logic," appeared in the Cambridge Mathematical Journal. This article summarizes very briefly and clearly the important innovations pro posed by Boole. But the authoritative statement of his system is found in An Investigation of the Laws of Thought, on which are founded the Mathe matical Theories of Logic and Probability, published in 1854. 89 Boole s algebra, unlike the systems of his predecessors, is based squarely upon the relations of extension. The three fundamental ideas upon which his method depends are: (1) the conception of " elective symbols"; (2) the Jaws of thought expressed as rules for operations upon these symbols; (3) the observation that these rules of operation are the same which would hold for an algebra of the numbers and I. 90 For reasons which will appear shortly, the " universe of conceivable objects" is represented by 1. All other classes or aggregates are supposed to be formed from this by selection or limitation. This operation of electing, in 1, all the A"s, is represented by l-.r or x; the operation of electing all the T s is similarly represented by 1-y or y, and so on. Since Boole does not distinguish between this operation of election represented by x, and the result of performing that operation an ambiguity common in mathe matics .r becomes, in practice, the symbol for the class of all the A^ s. Thus x, y, z, etc., representing ambiguously operations of election or classes, are the variables of the algebra. Boole speaks of them as "elective symbols" to distinguish them from coefficients. This operation of election suggests arithmetical multiplication: the suggestion becomes stronger when we note that it is not confined to 1. 1 -x -y or xy will represent the operation of electing, first, all the A r s in the " universe", and from this class by a second operation, all the Fs. The result of these two operations will be the class whose members are both A"s and F s. Thus xy is the class of the common members of x and y; xyz, the class of those things which belong at once to x, to y, and to z, and so on. And for any x, l-x = x. The operation of "aggregating parts into a whole" is represented by + . x + y symbolizes the class formed by combining the two distinct classes, x and y. It is a distinctive feature of Boole s algebra that x and y in x + y must have no common members. The relation may be read, "that which 88 See De Morgan s note to the article "On Propositions Numerically Definite", Camb. Phil Trans., xi (1871), 396. 89 London, Walton and Maberly. 90 This principle appears for the first time in the Laws of Thought. See pp. 37-3g. Work hereafter cited as L. of T. The Development of Symbolic Logic 53 is either x or y but not both". Although Boole does not remark it, x + y cannot be as completely analogous to the corresponding operation of ordinary algebra as xy is to the ordinary algebraic product. In numerical algebras a number may be added to itself: but since Boole conceives the terms of any logical sum to be " quite distinct ", 91 mutually exclusive classes, x + x cannot have a meaning in his system. As we shall see, this is very awkward, because such expressions still occur in his algebra and have to be dealt with by troublesome devices. But making the relation x + y completely disjunctive has one advantage it makes possible the inverse relation of "subtraction". The "separa tion of a part, x, from a whole, ?/", is represented by y x. If x + z = y, then since x and z have nothing in common, y x = z and y z = x. Hence [ + ] and [ ] are strict inverses. x + y, then, symbolizes the class of those things which are either members of x or members of y, but not of both, x-y or xy symbolizes the class of those things which are both members of x and members of y. x y repre sents the class of the members of x which are not members of y the x s except the y s. [ = ] represents the relation of two classes which have the same members, i. e., have the same extension. These are the fundamental relations of the algebra. The entity (1 .r) is of especial importance. This represents the universe except the .r s, or all things which are not x s. It is, then, the supplement or negative of x. With the use of this symbolism for the negative of a class, the sum of two classes, x and y, which have members in common, can be represented by xy + x(l -#) + (! - x)y. The first term of this sum is the class which are both x s and y s; the second, those which are x s but not y s; the third, those which are y s but not x s. Thus the three terms represent classes which are all mutually exclusive, and the sum satisfies the meaning of + . In a similar fashion, x + y may be expanded to x(l - y) + (l - x)y. Consideration of the laws of thought and of the meaning of these sym bols will show us that the following principles hold : (1) xy = yx What is both x and y is both y and x. (2) x + y = y + x What is either x or y is either y or .r. 91 See L. of T., pp. 32-33. 54 A Survey of Symbolic Logic (3) z(x + y) = zx + zy That which is both z and (either .r or y) is either both z and x or both z and y. (4) z(.r y) = zx zy That which is both z and (a; but not y) is both z and x but not both 2 and y. (5) If .T = y, then Z.T = zy z + x = z + y x-z = y - z (6) .r - y = - y + .r This last is an arbitrary convention: the first half of the expression gives the meaning of the last half. It is a peculiarity of "logical symbols" that if the operation .r, upon 1, be repeated, the result is not altered by the repetition: l-x = l-x-x = 1 x x x . . . . Hence we have : (7) .T 2 = X Boole calls this the "index law". 92 All these laws, except (7), hold for numerical algebra. It may be noted that, in logic, "If .r = y, then zx = zy" is not reversible. At first glance, this may seem to be another difference between numerical algebra and the system in question. But "If zx = zy, then x = y" does not hold in numerical algebra when z = 0. Law (7) is, then, the distinguishing principle of this algebra. The only finite numbers for which it holds are and 1. All the above laws hold for an algebra of the numbers and 1. With this observation, Boole adopts the entire procedure of ordinary algebra, modified by the law x 2 = x, introduces numerical coefficients other than and 1, and makes use, on occasion, of the operation of division, of the properties of functions, and of any algebraic transformations which happen to serve his purpose. 93 This borrowing of algebraic operations which often have no logical interpretation is at first confusing to the student of logic; and commen tators have seemed to smile indulgently upon it. An example will help: the derivation of the "law of contradiction" or, as Boole calls it, the "law of duality", from the "index law". 94 92 In Mathematical Analysis of Logic he gives it also in the form x n = x, but in L. of T. he avoids this, probably because the factors of x n x (e. g., z 3 x) are not always logically iriterpretable. 93 This procedure characterizes L. of T. Only and 1, and the fractions which can be formed from them appear in Math. An. of Logic, and the use of division and of fractional coefficients is not successfully explained in that book. 94 L. of T., p. 49. The Development of Symbolic Logic 55 Since x 2 = .r, x a- 2 = 0. Hence, factoring, .r(l x) = 0. This transformation hardly represents any process of logical deduction. Whoever says "What is both x and a-, a* 2 , is equivalent to x; therefore what is both x and not-z is nothing" may well be asked for the steps of his reason ing. Nor should we be satisfied if he reply by interpreting in logical terms the intermediate expression, .r .r 2 = 0. Nevertheless, this apparently arbitrary way of using uninterpretable algebraic processes is thoroughly sound. Boole s algebra may be viewed as an abstract mathematical system, generated by the laws we have noted, which has two interpretations. On the one hand, the "logical" or "elec tive" symbols may be interpreted as variables whose value is either numeri cal or numerical 1, although numerical coefficients other than and 1 are admissible, provided it be remembered that such coefficients do not obey the "index law" which holds for "elective" symbols. All the usual alge braic transformations will have an interpretation in these terms. On the other hand, the "logical" or "elective" symbols may be interpreted as logical classes. For this interpretation, some of the algebraical processes of the system and some resultant expressions will not be expressible in terms of logic. But whenever they are interpretable, they will be valid conse quences of the premises, and even when they are not interpretable, any further results, derived from them, which are interpretable, will also be valid consequences of the premises. It must be admitted that Boole himself does not observe the proprieties of his procedure. His consistent course would have been to develop this al gebra without reference to logical meanings, and then to discuss in a thorough fashion the interpretation, and the limits of that interpretation, for logical classes. By such a method, he would have avoided, for example, the difficulty about .1- + .r. We should have .1- + x = 2.r, the interpretation of which for the numbers and 1 is obvious, and its interpretation for logical classes would depend upon certain conventions which Boole made and which will be explained shortly. The point is that the two interpretations should be kept separate, although the processes of the system need not be limited by the narrower interpretation that for logical classes. Instead of making this separation of the abstract algebra and its two interpretations, Boole takes himself to be developing a calculus of logic; he observes that its "axioms" are identical with those of an algebra of the numbers and 1; 95 95 L. of T., pp. 37-38. 56 A Survey of Symbolic Logic hence he applies the whole machinery of that algebra, yet arbitrarily rejects from it any expressions which are not finally interpretable in terms of logical relations. The retaining of non-interpretable expressions which can be transformed into interpretable expressions he compares to "the employ ment of the uninterpretable symbol V 1 in the intermediate processes of trigonometry. " 96 It would be a pretty piece of research to take Boole s algebra, find independent postulates for it (his laws are entirely insufficient as a basis for the operations he uses), complete it, and systematically investi gate its interpretations. But neglecting these problems of method, the expression of the simple logical relations in Boole s symbolism will now be entirely clear. Classes will be represented by x, y, z, etc.; their negatives, by (1 x), (1 y), etc. That which is both x and y will be xy\ that which is x but not y will be .r(l y), etc. That which is x or y but not both, will be x + y, or ;r(l y) + (1 x}y. That which is x or y or both will be x + (1 x)y i. e., that which is x or not x but y or xy + x(l - y) + (1 - x)y that which is both x and y or x but not y or y but not x. 1 represents the "universe" or "everything". The logical significance of is determined by the fact that, for any y, Oy = 0: the only class which remains unaltered by any operation of electing from it whatever is the class "nothing". Since Boole s algebra is the basis of the classic algebra of logic which is the topic of the next chapter it will be unnecessary to comment upon those parts of Boole s procedure which were taken over into the classic algebra. These will be clear to any who understand the algebra of logic in its current form or who acquaint themselves with the content of Chapter II. We shall, then, turn our attention chiefly to those parts of his method which are peculiar to him. Boole does not symbolize the relation "x is included in ?/". Conse quently the only copula by which the relation of terms in a proposition can be represented is the relation =. And since all relations are taken in extension, x = y symbolizes the fact that x and y are classes with identical membership. Propositions must be represented by equations in which something is put = or == 1, or else the predicate must be quantified. Boole uses both methods, but mainly relies upon quantification of the predicate. This involves an awkward procedure, though one which still survives the introduction of a symbol v or w, to represent an indefinite 96 L. of T., p. 69. The Development of Symbolic Logic 57 class and symbolize "Some". Thus "All x is (some) i/" is represented by x = vy: "Some x is (some) #", by wx = vy. If v, or w. were here "the indefinite class" or "any class", this method would be less objectionable. But in such cases v, or w, must be very definitely specified: it must be a class "indefinite in all respects but this, that it contains some members of the class to whose expression it is prefixed". 97 The universal affirmative can also be expressed, without this symbol for the indeterminate, as .r(l y) = 0; "All xisy" means "That which is x but not y is nothing". Negative propositions are treated as affirmative propositions with a negative predi cate. So the four typical propositions of traditional logic are expressed as follows: 98 All x is y: x = vy, or, x(l y) = 0. Xo x is y: .r = v(l y), or xy = 0. Some x is y: v.r = w(\ y), or, v = xy. Some .r is not y: vx = w(l y), or, v = x(l y). Each of these has various other equivalents which may be readily deter mined by the laws of the algebra. To reason by the aid of this symbolism, one has only to express his premises explicitly in the proper manner and then operate upon the resultant equation according to the laws of the algebra. Or, as Boole more explicitly puts it, valid reasoning requires: " " 1st, That a fixed interpretation be assigned to the symbols employed in the expression of the data; and that the laws of the combination of these symbols be correctly determined from that interpretation. "2nd, That the formal processes of solution or demonstration be con ducted throughout in obedience to all the laws determined as above, with out regard to the question of the interpretation of the particular results obtained. "3rd, That the final result be interpretable in form, and that it be actually interpreted in accordance with that system of interpretation which has been employed in the expression of the data." As we shall see, Boole s methods of solution sometimes involve an uninterpretable stage, sometimes not, but there is provided a machinery by 97 L. of T., p. 63. This translation of the arbitrary v by "Some" is unwarranted, and the above statement is inconsistent with Boole s later treatment of the arbitrary coefficient. There is no reason why such an arbitrary coefficient may not be null. 98 See Math. An. of Logic, pp. 21-22; L. of T., Chap. iv. 99 L. of T., p. 68. 58 A Survey of Symbolic Logic which any equation may be reduced to a form which is interpretable. To comprehend this we must first understand the process known as the develop ment of a function. With regard to this, we can be brief, because Boole s method of development belongs also to the classic algebra and is essentially the process explained in the next chapter. 100 Any expression in the algebra which involves x or (1 x) may be called a function of x. A function of x is said to be developed when it has the form Ax + B(l .r). It is here required that x be a "logical symbol", susceptible only of the values and 1. But the coefficients, A and B, are not so limited: A, or B, may be such a "logical symbol" which obeys the "law of duality", or it may be some number other than or 1, or involve such a number. If the function, as given, does not have the form Ax + B(1 .r), it may be put into that form by observing certain interesting laws which govern coefficients. Let /(.r) = Ax + B(l - x) Then /(I) = A-1 + B(1 ~1) = A And /(O) - A-Q + B(l - 0) = B Hence f(x) = /(I) -x +/(0) (1 - x) Thus if f(x) = ~, Hence f(x) = 2x + ; (1 - x) A developed function of two variables, x and y } will have the form: x)(l - y) And for any function, /(.r, y), the coefficients are determined by the law: f(*,y) = /(I, !).?# +/(!,()) x(l -y) +/((), !)(! -x)y [ See Math. An. of Logic, pp. 60-69; L. of T., pp. 71-79; "The Calculus of Logic," Cambridge and Dublin Math. Jour., m, 188-89. That this same method of development should belong both to Boole s algebra and to the remodeled algebra of logic, in which + is not completely disjunctive, is at first surprising. But a completely developed function, m either algebra, is always a sum of terms any two of which have nothing in common. This accounts for the identity of form where there is a real and important difference in the meaning of the symbols. The Development of Symbolic Logic 59 Thus if f( x , y) = ax + 2by, /(I, 1) = a-1 + 26-1 = a + 26 /(I, 0) = a- 1 + 26-0 = a /((), 1) = a-0 + 26-1 = 26 /((), 0) = tt-0 + 26-0 = Hence /(.r, y) = ( a + 21) xy + ay (I - y) + 26(1 - .r)y An exactly similar law governs the expansion and the determination of coefficients, for functions of any number of variables. In the words of Boole: 101 "The general rule of development will . . . consist of two parts, the first of which will relate to the formation of the constituents of the expansion, the second to the determination of their respective coefficients. It is as follows : "1st. To expand any function of the symbols x, y, z Form a series of constituents in the following manner: Let the first constituent be the product of the symbols: change in this product any symbol z into 1 z, for the second constituent. Then in both these change any other symbol y into 1 y, for two more constituents. Then in the four constituents thus obtained change any other symbol .r into 1 .r, for four new constit uents, and so on until the number of possible changes has been exhausted. "2ndly. To find the coefficient of any constituent If that constituent involves x as a factor, change in the original function .r into 1 ; but if it involves 1 x as a factor, change in the original function .r into 0. Apply the same rule with reference to the symbols y, z, etc.: the final calculated value of the function thus transformed will be the coefficient sought." Two further properties of developed functions, which are useful in solutions and interpretations, are: (1) The product of any two constituents is 0. If one constituent be, for example, xyz, any other constituent will have as a factor one or more of the negatives, 1 .r, 1 y, 1 z. Thus the product of the two will have a factor of the form x(l .r). And where .r is a "logical symbol ", susceptible only of the values and 1, x(l x) is always 0. And (2) if each constituent of any expansion have the coef ficient 1, the sum of all the constituents is 1. All information which it may be desired to obtain from a given set of premises, represented by equations, will be got either (1) by a solution, to determine the equivalent, in other terms, of some "logical symbol" .r, or 101 L. o/T 7 ., pp. 75-76. 60 A Survey of Symbolic Logic (2) by an elimination, to discover what statements (equations), which are independent of some term x, are warranted by given equations which in volve x, or (3) by a combination of these two, to determine the equivalent of x in terms of /, u, v, from equations which involve x, t, u, v, and some other logical" symbol or symbols which must be eliminated in the desired result. " Formal " reasoning is accomplished by the elimination of "middle" terms. The student of symbolic logic in its current form knows that any set of equations may be combined into a single equation, that any equation involving a term x may be given the form Ax + B(l x) = 0, and that the result of eliminating x from such an equation is AB = 0. Also, the solution of any such equation, provided the condition AB = be satisfied, will be x = B + v(l A), where v is undetermined. Boole s methods achieve these same results, but the presence of numerical coefficients other than and 1, as well as the inverse operations of subtraction and division, necessarily complicates his procedure. And he does not present the matter, of solutions in the form in which we should expect to find it but in a more complicated fashion which nevertheless gives equivalent results. We have now to trace the procedures of interpretation, reduction, etc. by which Boole obviates the difficulties of his algebra which have been mentioned. The simplest form of equation is that in which a developed function, of any number of variables, is equated to 0, as: Ax + B(l -x) = 0, or, Axy + B.r(l - y) + C(l - x)y + D(l - .r)(l - y) = 0, etc. It is an important property of such equations that, since the product of any two constituents in a developed function is 0, any such equation gives any one of its constituents, whose coefficient does not vanish in the develop ment, = 0. For example, if we multiply the second of the equations given by xy, all constituents after the first will vanish, giving Axy = 0. Whence we shall have xy = 0. Any equation in which a developed function is equated to 1 may be reduced to the form in which one member is by the law; If V = 1, 1 -- V = 0. The more general form of equation is that in which some " logical symbol", w, is equated to some function of such symbols. For example, suppose x = yz, and it be desired to interpret z as a function of x and y. = yz gives z = x/y- but this form is not in terpre table. We shall, then, x The Development of Symbolic Logic 61 develop x/y by the law ).(! - x)y +/(0,0)-(1 -x)(l -y) By this law: 3* If z = -, then = x+-x(l 7) + 0(1 + ? These fractional coefficients represent the sole necessary difference of Boole s methods from those at present familiar a difference due to the presence of division in his system. Because any function can always be de veloped, and the difference between any two developed functions, of the same variables, is always confined to the coefficients. If, then, we can interpret and successfully deal with such fractional coefficients, one of the difficulties of Boole s system is removed. The fraction 0/0 is indeterminate, and this suggests that a proper inter pretation of the coefficient 0/0 would be to regard it as indicating an unde termined portion of the class whose coefficient it is. This interpretation may be corroborated by considering the symbolic interpretation of "All x is ?/", which is x(l y) = 0. If x(l y) = 0, then x xy = and x = xy. Whence y = x/x. Developing x/x, we have y = x + - (1 x). If "All x is ?/", the class y is made up of the class x plus an undetermined portion of the class not-.r. Whence 0/0 is equivalent to an arbitrary parameter v, which should be interpreted as "an undetermined portion of" or as "All, some, or none of". The coefficient 1/0 belongs to the general class of symbols which do not obey the "index law", x~ = .r, or its equivalent, the "law of duality", .r(l x) = 0. At least Boole says it belongs to this class, though the numerical properties of 1/0 would, in fact, depend upon laws which do not belong to Boole s system. But in any case, 1/0 belongs with the class of such coefficients so far as its logical interpretation goes. Any constituent of a developed function which does not satisfy the index law must be separately equated to 0. Suppose that in any equation w = At + P 62 A Survey of Symbolic Logic w be a " logical symbol", and t be a constituent of a developed function whose coefficient A does not satisfy the index law, A 2 = A. And let P be the sum of the remaining constituents whose coefficients do satisfy this law. Then w 2 = w, t* = t, and P 2 = P Since the product of any two constituents of a development is 0, w 2 = (At+P) 2 = A 2 t 2 + P 2 Hence w = A 2 t+P Subtracting this from the original equation, (A - A 2 )t = = A(l - A)t Hence since A(l - A) 4= 0, t = Hence any equation of the form w = P+OQ+ IR+IS is equivalent to the two equations w = P + vR and S = which together represent its complete solution. It will be noted that a fraction, in Boole s algebra, is always an am biguous function. Hence the division operation must never be performed: the value of a fraction is to be determined by the law of development only, except for the numerical coefficients, which are elsewhere discussed. We have already remarked that ax = bx does not give a = b, because .r may have the value 0. But we may transform ax = bx into a = bx/x and determine this fraction by the law f(b,x) = /(!, l).fcr+/(l,0).&(l -*)+/<) !! - bx We shall then have bx a= -== bx * 5 (1 ~ ^ and this is not, in general, equivalent to 6. Replacing 0/0 by indeterminate coefficients, v and w, this gives us, If ax = bx, then a = - x) The Development of Symbolic Logic 63 And this result is always valid. Suppose, for example, the logical equation rational men = married men and suppose we wish to discover who are the rational beings. Our equation will not give us rational = married but instead rational = married men + v married non-men + w - non-married non-men That is, our hypothesis is satisfied if the class "rational beings" consist of the married men together with any portion (which may be null) of the class "married women" and a similarly undetermined portion of the class "unmarried women". If we consider Boole s system as an algebra of and 1, and the fact that for any fraction, x/y, x 1 --a*+ 6 *(l-)+ 6 (l -*)(!-) we shall find, by investigating the cases (1) x = 1 and y = 1; (2) x = 1, y - 0; (3) x = 0, y = 1; and (4) x = 0, y = 0, that it requires these three possible cases: . 5 - Or, to speak more accurately, it requires that 0/0 be an ambiguous function susceptible of the values and 1. Since there are, in general, only four possible coefficients, 1, 0, 0/0, and such as do not obey the index law, of which 1/0 is a special case, this means that any equation can be interpreted, and the difficulty due to the presence of an uninterpretable division operation in the system has disappeared. And any equation can be solved for any "logical symbol" .r, by trans ferring all other terms to the opposite side of the equation, by subtraction or division or both, and developing that side of the equation. Any equation may be put in the form in which one member is by 64 A Survey of Symbolic Logic bringing all the terms to one side. When this is done, and the equation fully expanded, all the coefficients which do not vanish may be changed to unity, except such as already have that value. Boole calls this a "rule of interpretation". 102 Its validity follows from two considerations: (1) Any constituent of an equation with one member 0, whose coefficient does not vanish in development, may be separately equated to 0; (2) the sum of the constituents thus separately equated to will be an equation with one member in which each coefficient will be unity. Negative coefficients may be eliminated by squaring both sides of any equation in which they appear. The " logical symbols" in any function are not altered by squaring, and any expression of the form (1 x), where x is a "logical symbol", is not altered, since it can have only the values and 1. Hence no constituent is altered, except that its coefficient may be altered. And any negative coefficient will be made positive. Xo new terms will be introduced by squaring, since the product of any two terms of a developed function is always null. Hence the only change effected by squaring any developed function is the alteration of any negative coef ficients into positive. Their actual numerical value is of no consequence, because coefficients other than 1 can be dealt with by the method described above. For reducing any two or more equations to a single equation, Boole first proposed the "method of indeterminate multipliers", 103 by which each equation, after the first, is multiplied by an arbitrary constant and the equations then added. But these indeterminate multipliers complicate the process of elimination, and the method is, as he afterward recognized, an inferior one. More simply, such equations may be reduced, by the methods just described, to the form in which one member is 0, and each coefficient is 1. They may then be simply added; the resulting equation will combine the logical significance of the equations added. Any "logical symbol" which is not wanted in an equation may be eliminated by the method which is familiar to all students of symbolic logic. To eliminate x, the equation is reduced to the form Ax + B(l - a-) = The result of elimination will be 104 AB = 102 L. of T., p. 90. 103 See Math. An. of Logic, pp. 78-81; L. of T., pp. 115-120. 104 See L. of T., p. 101. We do not pause upon this or other matters which will be entirely clear to those who understand current theory. The Development of Symbolic Logic 65 By these methods, the difference between Boole s algebra and the classic algebra of logic which grew out of it is reduced to a minimum. Any logical results obtainable by the use of the classic algebra may also be got by Boole s procedures. The difference is solely one of ease and mathematical neatness in the method. Two important laws of the classic algebra which do not appear among Boole s principles are: (1) x + x = x, and (2) x = x + xy These seem to be inconsistent with the Boolean meaning of + ; the first of them does not hold for x =-- 1; the second does not hold for x = 1, y = 1. But although they do not belong to Boole s system as an abstract algebra, the methods of reduction which have been discussed will always give x in place of x + x or of x + xy, in any equation in which these appear. The expansion of x + x gives 2x-, the expansion of x + xy gives 2xy + x(l y). By the method for dealing with coefficients other than unity, 2x may be replaced in the equation by x, and 2xy + x(l - y) by xy + x(l - y), which is equal to x. The methods of applying the algebra to the relations of logical classes should now be sufficiently clear. The application to propositions is made by the familiar device of correlating the " logical symbol", x, with the times when some proposition, A , is true, xy will represent the times when X and r are both true; x(l y), the times when A" is true and 1" is false, and so on. Congruent with the meaning of + , x + y will represent the times when either A" or 1 (but not both) is true. In ord-r to symbolize the times when A or Y or both are true, we must write x + (1 x)y, or xy + x(l - y)+ (1 - x)y. 1, the " universe", will represent "all times" or "always"; and will be "no time" or "never", x = 1 will represent "A is always true"; x = or (i - .r) == 1, "A" is never true, is always false". Just as there is, with Boole, no symbol for the inclusion relation of classes, so there is no symbol for the implication relation of propositions. For classes, "All A" is T" or "A" is contained in Y" becomes x = vy. Cor respondingly, "All times when A" is true are times when Y is true" or "If A then ] " or "A implies F" is x = vy. x = y will mean, "The times when A" is true and the times when Y is true are the same" or "A implies Y and Y implies X \ The entire procedure for "secondary propositions" is summarized as follows: 105 105 L. of T., p. 178. G 66 A Survey of Symbolic Logic "Rule. Express symbolically the given propositions. . . . "Eliminate separately from each equation in which it is found the indefinite symbol . "Eliminate the remaining symbols which it is desired to banish from the final solution: always before elimination, reducing to a single equation those equations in which the symbol or symbols to be eliminated are found. Collect the resulting equations into a single equation [one member of which isO], V = 0. "Then proceed according to the particular form in which it is desired to express the final relation, as 1st. If in the form of a denial, or system of denials, develop the function V, and equate to all those constituents whose coefficients do not vanish. 2ndly. If in the form of a disjunctive proposition, equate to 1 the sum of those constituents whose coefficients vanish. 3rdly. If in the form of a conditional proposition having a simple element, as x or 1 x, for its antecedent, determine the algebraic expression of that element, and develop that expression. 4thly. If in the form of a conditional proposition having a com pound expression, as xy, xy + (1 .r)(l y), etc., for its antecedent, equate that expression to a new symbol t, and determine t as a developed function of the symbols which are to appear in the consequent. . . . 5thly. ... If it only be desired to ascertain whether a particular elementary proposition x is true or false, we must eliminate all the symbols but x\ then the equation x = 1 will indicate that the proposi tion is true, x = that it is false, = that the premises are insuf ficient to determine whether it is true or false." It is a curious fact that the one obvious law of an algebra of and 1 which Boole does not assume is exactly the law which would have limited the logical interpretation of his algebra to propositions. The law If x 4= 1, x = and if x 4= 0, x = 1 is exactly the principle which his successors added to his system when it is to be considered as a calculus of propositions. This principle would have made his system completely inapplicable to logical classes. For propositions, this principle means, " If x is not true, then x is false, and if x is not false, it is true". But careful attention to Boole s interpre tation for "propositions" shows that in his system x = should be inter- The Development of Symbolic Logic 67 preted "x is false at all times (or in all cases)", and x = 1 should be in terpreted "x is true at all times". This reveals that fact that what Boole calls " propositions" are what we should now call " prepositional functions ", that is, statements which may be true under some circumstances and false under others. The limitation put upon what we now call "propositions" namely that they must be absolutely determinate, and hence simply true or false does not belong to Boole s system. And his treatment of "prepo sitional symbols" in the application of the algebra to probability theory gives them the character of " prepositional functions" rather than of our absolutely determinate propositions. The last one hundred and seventy-five pages of the Laws of Thought are devoted to an application of the algebra to the solution of problems in probabilities. 106 This application amounts to the inyention of a new method a method whereby any logical analysis involved in the problem is performed as automatically as the purely mathematical operations. We can make this provisionally clear by a single illustration : All the objects belonging to a certain collection are classified in three ways as ^4 s or not, as B s or not, and as C s or not. It is then found that (1) a fraction m/n of the .4 s are also B s and (2) the C s consist of the A s which are not B s together with the B s which are not A s. Required: the probability that if one of the A s be taken at random, it will also be a C. By premise (2) C = A(l - B) + (l - A)B Since A, B, and C are "logical symbols", A 2 = A and A (I - A) = 0. Hence, AC = A* (I - B) + .1(1 - A)B = A(l - B). The A s which are also C s are identical with the A s which are not B s. Thus the probability that a given A is also a C is exactly the probability that it is not a B ; or by premise (1 ), 1 m/n, which is the required solution. In any problem concerning probabilities, there are usually two sorts of difficulties, the purely mathematical ones, and those involved in the logical analysis of the situation upon which the probability in question depends. The methods of Boole s algebra provide a means for expressing the relations of classes, or events, given in the data, and then transforming these logical 106 Chap. 16 ff. See also the Keith Prize essay "On the Application of the Theory of Probabilities to the Question of the Combination of Testimonies or Judgments", Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, xxi, 597 ff. Also a series of articles in Phil. Mag., 1851-54 (see Bibl). An article on the related topic "Of Propositions Numerically Definite" appeared posthumously; Carafe. Phil. Trans., xi, 396-411. 68 A Survey of Symbolic Logic equations so as to express the class which the quaesitum concerns as a func tion of the other classes involved. It thus affords a method for untangling the problem often the most difficult part of the solution. The parallelism between the logical relations of classes as expressed in Boole s algebra and the corresponding probabilities, numerically expressed, is striking. Suppose x represent the class of cases (in a given total) in which the event X occurs or those which "are favorable to" the occurrence of A". 107 And let p be the probability, numerically expressed, of the event X. The total class of cases will constitute the logical "universe", or 1; the null class will be 0. Thus, if x = 1 if all the cases are favorable to X then p = 1 the probability of X is "certainty". If x = 0, then p 0. Further, the class of cases in which X does not occur, will be expressed by 1 x] the probability that X will not occur is the numerical 1 p. Also, x + (1 x) = 1 and p + (1 p) = 1. This parallelism extends likewise to the combinations of two or more events. If x represent the class of cases in which X occurs, and y the class of cases in which Y occurs, then xy will be the class of cases in which X and 1 both occur; x(l y), the cases in which X occurs without Y; (1 x)y, the cases in which Y occurs without X; (1 x)(l y), the cases in which neither occurs; x(l y~) + y(l x), the cases in which X or Y occurs but not both, and so on. Suppose that X and Y are " simple " and "independent" events, and let p be the probability of X, q the prob ability of Y. Then we have: Combination of events Corresponding probabilities expressed in Boole s algebra numerically expressed xy pq x(l - y) p(l - q) (1 - x)y (1 - q)p (1 -*)(! -y) (1 -p)(l -q) x(l - y) + (1 - x)y p(l - q) + (1 - p)q Etc. etc. In fact, this parallelism is complete, and the following rule can be formulated: 108 107 Boole prefers to consider x as representing the times when a certain proposition, asserting an occurrence, will be true. But this interpretation comes to exactly the same thing. 108 L. ofT., p. 258. The Development of Symbolic Logic 69 "If p, q, r, . . . are the respective probabilities of unconditioned simple events, x, y, z, . . . , the probability of any compound event V will be [V], this function [V] being formed by changing, in the function F, the symbols x, y, z, . . . into p, q, r, . . . . "According to the well-known law of Pascal, the probability that if the event V occur, the event V will occur with it, is expressed by a fraction whose numerator is the probability of the joint occurrence of V and V, and whose denominator is the probability of the occurrence of V. We can then extend the rule just given to such cases: "The probability that if the event V occur, any other event V will [V V] also occur, will be - - , where [V V] denotes the result obtained by multiplying together the logical functions V and V, and changing in the result x, y, z, . . . into p, q, r, . . . ." The inverse problem of finding the absolute probability of an event when its probability upon a given condition is known can also be solved. Given : The probabilities of simple events x, y, z, . . . are respectively p, q, r, . . . when a certain condition V is satisfied. To determine: the absolute probabilities /, m, n, . . . of x, y, z, . . . . By the rule just given, U f] [yV] [zV] [ I > W\ > And the number of such equations will be equal to the number of unknowns, I, m, 7i, ... to be determined. 109 The determination of any logical expres sion of the form xV is peculiarly simple since the product of x into any developed function V is the sum of those constituents of V which contain x as a factor. For example: if V = xyz + x(l - y)z + (1 - x)y(l - z) + (1 - *)(! - y)z, xV = xyz + x(l - y)z yV = xyz+(l -x)y(l - z) zV = xyz + x(l - y)z + (1 - .r)(l - y)z Thus any equation of the form 109 On certain difficulties in this connection, and their solution, see Cayley, "On a Question in the Theory of Probability" (with discussion by Boole), Phil. Mag., Ser. iv, xxm (1862), 352-65, and Boole, "On a General Method in the Theory of Probabilities", ibid., xxv (1863), 313-17. 70 A Survey of Symbolic Logic is readily determined as a numerical equation. Boole gives the following example in illustration: no " Suppose that in the drawings of balls from an urn, attention had only been paid to those cases in which the balls drawn were either of a particular color, white/ or of a particular composition, marble/ or were marked by both of these characters, no record having been kept of those cases in which a ball which was neither white nor of marble had been drawn. Let it then have been found, that whenever the supposed condition was satisfied, there was a probability p that a white ball would be drawn, and a probability q that a marble ball would be drawn: and from these data alone let it be required to find the probability m that in the next drawing, without refer ence at all to the condition above mentioned, a white ball will be drawn; also a probability n that a marble ball will be drawn. "Here if x represent the drawing of a white ball, y that of a marble ball, the condition F will be represented by the logical function xy + x(l - y) + (1 - x)y Hence we have xV = xy + x(l y) = or yV = xy + (1 - x)y = y Whence [xV] = m, [yV] = n and the final equations of the problem are m = P mn + m(l n) + (1 m)n n mn + m(l n) + (1 m)n = q from which we find p + q p + q m = - n = - q p ... To meet a possible objection, I here remark that the above reasoning does not require that the drawings of a white and a marble ball should be independent, in virtue of the physical constitution of the balls. "In general, the probabilities of any system of independent events being given, the probability of any event X may be determined by finding a logical equation of the form x = A+OB + ^C + ID 110 L. of T., p. 262. I have slightly altered the illustration by a change of letters. The Development of Symbolic Logic 71 where A, B, C, and D are functions of the symbols of the other events. As has already been shown, this is the general type of the logical equation, and its interpretation is given by x = A + vC, where v is arbitrary and D = By the properties of constituents, we have also the equation, A+B+C+D = 1 and, since D = 0, A+B + C = 1 A + B + C thus gives the universe of the events in question, and the prob abilities given in the data are to be interpreted as conditioned by A + B + C = 1, since D = is the condition of the solution x = A + vC. If the given probability of some event S is p, of T is q, etc., then the supposed absolute probabilities of S, T, etc., may be determined by the method which has been described. Let V = A+B+C, then [sV] [IV] W] -=P, M -?, where [sV], [tV], etc. are the "absolute probabilities" sought. These, being determined, may be substituted in the equation [A + vC] Prob. w = \yr~ which will furnish the required solution. "The term vC will appear only in cases where the data are insufficient to determine the probability sought. Where it does appear, the limits of this probability may be determined by giving v the limiting values, and 1. Thus \A] Lower limit of Prob. w = - [A + cr Upper limit With the detail of this method, and with the theoretical difficulties of its application and interpretation, we need not here concern ourselves. Suffice it to say that, with certain modifications, it is an entirely workable method and seems to possess certain marked advantages over those more generally in use. It is a matter of surprise that this immediately useful application of symbolic logic has been so generally overlooked. 72 A Survey of Symbolic Logic VI. JEVONS It has been shown that Boole s "calculus of logic" is not so much a system of logic as an algebra of the numbers and 1, some of whose ex pressions are capable of simple interpretation as relations of logical classes, or propositions, and some of whose transformations represent processes of reasoning. If the entire algebra can, with sufficient ingenuity, be inter preted as a system of logic, still Boole himself failed to recognize this fact, and this indicates the difficulty and unnaturalness of some parts of this interpretation. Jevons 111 pointed a way to the simplification of Boole s algebra, dis carding those expressions which have no obvious interpretation in logic, and laying down a procedure which is just as general and is, in important respects, superior. In his first book on this subject, Jevons says: l12 "So long as Professor Boole s system of mathematical logic was capable of giving results beyond the power of any other system, it had in this fact an impregnable stronghold. Those who were not prepared to draw the same inferences in some other manner could not quarrel with the manner of Professor Boole. But if it be true that the system of the foregoing chapters is of equal power with Professor Boole s system, the case is altered. There are now two systems of notation, giving the same formal results, one of which gives them with self-evident force and meaning, the other by dark and symbolic processes. The burden of proof is shifted, and it must be for the author or supporters of the dark system to show that it is in some way superior to the evident system." He sums up the advantages of his system, compared with Boole s, as follows: 113 "1. Even- process is of self-evident nature and force, and governed by laws as simple and primary as those of Euclid s axioms. "2. The process is infallible, and gives us no uninterpretable or anom alous results. "3. The inferences may be drawn with far less labor than in Professor Boole s system, which generally requires a separate computation and development for each inference." 111 William Stanley Jevons (1835-1882), B.A., M.A. (London), logician and economist; professor of logic and mental and moral philosophy and Cobden professor of political economy in Owens College, Manchester, 1866-76; professor of political economy, Uni versity College, London, 1876-80. 112 Pure Logic, or the Logic of Quality apart from Quantity, p. 75. 113 Ibid., p. 74. The Development of Symbolic Logic 73 The third of these observations is not entirely warranted. Jevons unduly restricts the operations and methods of Boole in such wise that his own procedure is often cumbersome and tedious where Boole s would be expeditious. Yet the honor of first pointing out the simplifications which have since been generally adopted in the algebra of logic belongs to Jevons. He discards Boole s inverse operations, a b and a/6, and he interprets the sum of a and b as " either a or 6, where a and b are not necessarily exclusive classes". (We shall symbolize this relation by a + b: Jevons has A + B or A I -J^.) 114 Thus, for Jevons, a + a = a, whereas for Boole a + a is not interpretable as any relation of logical classes, and if it be taken as an expression in the algebra of and 1, it obeys the usual arithmetical laws, so that a + a = 2a. As has been indicated, this is a source of much awk ward procedure in Boole s system. The law a + a = a eliminates numerical coefficients, other than and 1, and this is a most important simplification. Jevons supposes that the fundamental difference between himself and Boole is that Boole s system, being mathematical, is a calculus of things taken in their logical extension, while his own system, being "pure logic", is a calculus of terms in intension. It is true that mathematics requires that classes be taken in extension, but it is not true that the calculus of logic either requires or derives important advantage from the point of view of intension. Since Jevons s system can be interpreted in extension without the slightest difficulty, we shall ignore this supposed difference. The fundamental ideas of the system are as follows : (1) a b denotes that which is both a and b, or (in intension) the sum of the meanings of the two terms combined. (2) a + b denotes that which is either a or b or both, or (in intension) a term with one of two meanings. 115 (3) a = b a is identical with 6, or (in intension) a means the same as b. (4) -b Not-6, the negative of b, symbolized in Boole s system by 1 - 6. 116 (o) According to Jevons, indicates that which is contradictory or "excluded from thought". He prefers it to appear as a factor rather than 114 A + B in Pure Logic; A \ B in the other papers. (See Bibl.) 115 Jevons would add "but it is not known which". (See Pure Logic, p. 25.) But this is hardly correct; it makes no difference if it is known which, since the meaning of a + 6 does not depend on the state of our knowledge. Perhaps a better qualification would be "but it is not specified which". 113 Jevons uses capital roman letters for positive terms and the corresponding small italics for their negatives. Following De Morgan, he calls A and a "contrary" terms. 74 A Survey of Symbolic Logic by itself. 117 The meaning given is a proper interpretation of the symbol in intension. Its meaning in extension is the null-class or "nothing", as with Boole. Jevons does not use any symbol for the "universe", but writes out the "logical alphabet". This "logical alphabet", for any number n of ele ments, a, 6, c, . . . , consists of the 2 n terms which, in Boole s system, form the constituents of the expansion of 1. Thus, for two elements, a and 6, the "logical alphabet" consists of a b, a-b, -ab, and -a -b. For three terms, x y y, z, it consists of x y z, x y -z, x -y z, x -y -z, x y -z, -x -y z, and - x -y - Zf Jevons usually writes these in a column instead of adding them and putting the sum == 1. Thus the absence of 1 from his system is simply a whim and represents no real difference from Boole s procedure. The fundamental laws of the system of Jevons are as follows: (1) If a = b and b = c } then a = c. (2) a b = b a. (3) a a = a. (4) a -a = 0. (5) a + b = b + a. (6) a + a = a. (7) a + = a. This law is made use of but is not stated. (8) a(b + c) = a b + a c and (a + b)(c + d) =ac + ad + bc + bd. (9) a + a b = a. This law, since called the "law of absorption", allows a direct simplification which is not possible in Boole. Its analogue for multiplication a(a+ b) = a follows from (8), (3), and (9). The law of absorption extends to any number of terms, so that we have also a + ab + ac + ab d+ . . . = a (10) a = a(b + -b)(c + -c) .... This is the rule for the expansion of any term, a, with reference to any other terms, b, c, etc. For three terms it gives us a = a(b + -b) (c + -c) = abc + ab-c + a-bc + a-b-c This expansion is identical with that which appears in Boole s system, except for the different meaning of + . But the product of any two terms of such an expansion will always have a factor of the form a -a, and hence, by (4), will be null. Thus the terms of any expansion will always represent classes 117 See Pure Logic, pp. 31-33. The Development of Symbolic Logic 75 which are mutually exclusive. This accounts for the fact that, in spite of the different meaning of + , developed functions in Boole s system and in Jevons s always have the same form. (11) The "logical alphabet" is made up of any term plus its negative, a + -a. It follows immediately from this and law (10) that the logical alphabet for any number of terms, a, b, c, . . . , will be and will have the character which we have described. It corresponds to the expansion of 1 in Boole s system because it is a developed function and its terms are mutually exclusive. A procedure by which Jevons sets great store is the "substitution of similars ", of a for b or b for a when a = b. Not only is this procedure valid when the expressions in which a and b occur belong to the system, but it holds good whatever the rational complex in which a and b stand. He considers this the first principle of reasoning, more fundamental than Aristotle s dictum de omni et nullo. 11 * In this he is undoubtedly correct, and yet there is another principle, which underlies Aristotle s dictum, which is equally fundamental the substitution for variables of values of these variables. And this procedure is not reducible to any substitution of equivalents. The only copulative relation in the system is [ = ]; hence the expression of simple logical propositions is substantially the same as with Boole: All a is b: a = a b No a is b : a = a -b Some a is b: c a = c ab or U a = V a b "U" is used to suggest " Unknown". The methods of working with this calculus are in some respects simpler than Boole s, in some respects more cumbersome. But, as Jevons claims, they are obvious while Boole s are not. Eliminations are of two sorts, "intrinsic" and " extrinsic". Intrinsic eliminations may be performed by substituting for any part of one member of an equation the whole of the other. Thus from a = b c d, we get a = a c d = ab d = a c = a d This rule follows from the principles a a = a, a b = b a, and if a = b, ac = be. For example If a = b c d a-a = bed-bed = bb-cc-dd = bcd-d = ad. 118 See Substitution of Similars, passim. 76 A Survey of Symbolic Logic Also, in cases where a factor or a term of the form a(b + -6), or of the form a -a, is involved, eliminations may be performed by the rules a(b + -b) = a and a -a = 0. Extrinsic elimination is that simplification or "solution" of equations which may occur when two or more are united. Jevons does not add or multiply such equations but uses them as a basis for striking out terms in the same "logical alphabet". This method is equivalent, in terms of current procedures, to first forming the expansion of 1 (which contains the terms of the logical alphabet) and then putting any equations given in the form in which one member is and "subtracting" them from the expansion of 1. But Jevons did not hit upon the current procedures. His own is described thus: 119 "1. Any premises being given, form a combination containing every term involved therein. Change successively each simple term of this into its contrary [negative], so as to form all the possible combinations of the simple terms and their contraries. [E. g., if a, b, and c are involved, form the "logical alphabet" of all the terms in the expansion of (a + -a)(6 + -&)(c + -c).] "2. Combine successively each such combination [or term, as a be,] with both members of a premise. When the combination forms a con tradiction [an expression having a factor of the form (a -a)] with neither side of a premise, call it an included subject of the premise; when it forms a contradiction with both sides, call it an excluded subject of the premise; when it forms a contradiction with one side only, call it a contradictory com bination or subject, and strike it out. "We may call an included or excluded subject a possible subject as distinguished from a contradictory combination or impossible subject. "3. Perform the same process with each premise. Then a combination is an included subject of a series of premises, when it is an included subject of any one; it is a contradictory subject when it is a contradictory subject of any one; it is an excluded subject when it is an excluded subject of every premise. "4. The expression of any term [as a or b] involved in the premises consists of all the included and excluded subjects containing the term, treated as alternatives [in the relation + ]. "5. Such expressions may be simplified by reducing all dual terms [of 119 Pure Logic, pp. 44-46. The Development of Symbolic Logic 77 the form a(b + -b)], and by intrinsic elimination of all terms not required in the expression. " 6. When it is observed that the expression of a term contains a com bination which would not occur in the expression of any contrary of that term, we may eliminate the part of the combination common to the term and its expression. . . . "7. Unless each term of the premises and the contrary of each appear in one or other of the possible subjects, the premises must be deemed in consistent or contradictory. Hence there must always remain at least two possible subjects. " Required by the above process the inferences of the premise a = b c. "The possible combinations of the terms a, b, c, and their contraries are as given [in the column at the left, which is, for this case, the logical alphabet ]. Each of these being combined with both sides of the premise, we have the following results: abc ale = ab c abc included subject ab-c ab-c = a b c -c = ab -c contradiction a-b c a-b c = ab-bc = a -b c contradiction a -b -c a-b -c = a b -b c -c = a -b -c contradiction -abc = a -a b c = -a b c -abc contradiction -ab-c = a -a b -c = -ab c -c = -a b -c excluded subject -a -be = a -a -b c = -ab-b c =0 -a -b c excluded subject -a -b -c = a -a -b -c = -ab -b c -c = -a -b -c excluded subject "It appears, then, that the four combinations ab-c to -abc are to be struck out, and only the rest retained as possible subjects. Suppose we now require an expression for the term -b as inferred from the premise a = b c. Select from the included and excluded subjects such as contain -6, namely -a -b c and -a -b -c. "Then -b = -a -b c + -a -b -c, but as -a c occurs only with -b, and not with 6, its contrary, we may, by Rule 0, eliminate -b from -a-b c , hence -b = -a c + -a -b -c." This method resembles nothing so much as solution by means of the Venn diagrams (to be explained in Chapter III). The "logical alphabet" is a list of the different compartments in such a diagram ; those marked "contradiction" are the ones which would be struck out in the diagram by transforming the equations given into the form in which one member is 0. 78 A Survey of Symbolic Logic The advantage which Jevons claims for his method, apart from its obvious ness, namely, that the solutions for different terms do not require to be separately performed, is also an advantage of the diagram, which exhibits all the possibilities at once. If any problem be worked out by this method of Jevons and also that of Boole, it will be found that the comparison is as follows: The " logical alphabet" consists of the terms which when added give 1, or the universe. Any term marked " contradiction " will, by Boole s method, have the coef ficient or 1/0; any term marked "included subject" will have the coef ficient 1; any marked "excluded subject" will have the coefficient 0/0, or v where v is arbitrary. If, then, we remember that, according to Boole, terms with the coefficient 1/0 are equated to and thus eliminated, we see that the two methods give substantially the same results. The single important difference is in Boole s favor: the method of Jevons does not distinguish decisively between the coefficients 1 and v. If, for example, the procedure of Jevons gives x = x -y z, Boole s will give either x = -y z or x = v -y z. One further, rather obvious, principle may be mentioned : 12 Any subject of a proposition remains an included, excluded, or con tradictory subject, after combination with any unrelated terms. This means simply that, in any problem, the value of a term remains its value as a factor when the term is multiplied by any new terms which may be introduced into the problem. In a problem involving a, 6, and c, let a -be be a "contradictory" term. Then if x be introduced, a-bcx and a -b c -x will be "contradictory". On the whole Jevons s methods are likely to be tedious and have little of mathematical nicety about them. Suppose, for example, we have three equations involving altogether six terms. The "logical alphabet" will consist of sixty-four members, each of which will have to be investigated separately for each equation, making one hundred and ninety-two separate operations. Jevons has emphasized his difference from Boole to the extent of rejecting much that would better have been retained. It remained for others, notably Mrs. Ladd-Franklin and Schroder, to accept Jevons s amended meaning of addition and its attendant advantages, yet retain Boole s methods of development and similar methods of elimination and solution. But Jevons should have credit for first noting the main clue to this simplification the laws a + a = a and a + a b = a. 120 Pure Logic, p. 48. The Development of Symbolic Logic 79 VII. PEIRCE The contributions of C. S. Peirce 121 to symbolic logic are more numerous and varied than those of any other writer at least in the nineteenth century. He understood how to profit by the work of his predecessors, Boole and De Morgan, and built upon their foundations, and he anticipated the most important procedures of his successors even when he did not work them out himself. Again and again, one finds the clue to the most recent developments in the writings of Peirce. These contributions may be summed up under three heads: (1) He improved the algebra of Boole by distinguishing the relations which are more characteristic of logical classes (such as multiplication in Boole s algebra) from the relations which are more closely related to arithmetical operations (such as subtraction and division in Boole). The resulting algebra has certain advantages over the system of Jevons because it retains the mathematical methods of develop ment, transformation, elimination, and solution, and certain advantages over the algebra of Boole because it distinguishes those operations and relations which are always interpretable for logical classes. Also Peirce introduced the "illative" relation, "is contained in", or "implies", into symbolic logic. (2) Following the researches of De Morgan, he made marked advance in the treatment of relations and relative terms. The method of dealing with these is made more precise and "mathematical", and the laws which govern them are related to those of Boole s algebra of classes. Also the method of treating "some" and "all" propositions as sums (2) and products (II) respectively of "propositions" containing variables was here first introduced. This is the historic origin of "formal implication" and all that has been built upon it in the more recent develop ment of the logic of mathematics. (3) Like Leibniz, he conceived symbolic logic to be the science of mathematical form in general, and did much to revive the sense of logistic proper, as we have used that term. He worked out in detail the derivation of various multiple algebras from the calculus of relatives, and he improved Boole s method of applying symbolic logic to problems in probability. 121 Charles Saylnders Peirce (1839-1914), son of Benjamin Peirce, the celebrated mathematician, A.B. (Harvard, 1859), B.S. (Harvard, 1863), lecturer in logic at Johns Hopkins, ^596- ?. For a number of years, Peirce was engaged in statistical researches for the U. S. Coast Survey, and was at one time head of the Department of Weights and Measures. His writings cover a wide variety of topics in the history of science, meta physics, mathematics, astronomy, and chemistry. According to William James, his articles on "Some Illustrations of the Science of Logic", Pop. Sri. Mo., 1877-78, are the source of pragmatism. 80 A Survey of Symbolic Logic We shall take up these contributions in the order named. The improvement of the Boolian algebra is set forth mainly in the brief article, "On an Improvement in Boole s Calculus of Logic", 122 and in two papers, "On the Algebra .of Logic". 123 It will be remembered that Boole s calculus has four operations, or rela tions : a + b indicates the class made up of the two mutually exclusive classes, a and 6; [ ] is the strict inverse of [ + ] t so that if x + b = a, then x = a b; ax b or a b denotes the class of those things which are common to a and 6; and division is the strict inverse of multiplication, so that if x b = a, then x = afb. These relations are not homogeneous in type. Boole s [+] and [ ] have properties which approximate closely those of arithmetical addition and subtraction. If [n]x indicate the number of members of the class x, [n]a+ [n]b = [n](a + b) because a and b are mutually exclusive classes, and every member of a is a member of (a + b) and every member of b is a member of (a + b). This relation, then, differs from arithmetical addition only by the fact that a and b are not necessarily to be regarded as numbers or quantities. Simi larly, [n]a - [n]b = [n](a - b) But in contrast to this, for Boole s a x b or a b, [n]ax [n]b = [n] (a b) will not hold except for and 1 : this relation is not of the type of its arith metical counterpart. And the same is true of its inverse, a/6. Thus, in Boole s calculus, addition and subtraction are relations of the same type as arithmetical addition and subtraction; but multiplication and division are different in type from arithmetical multiplication and division. Peirce rounds out the calculus of Boole by completing both sets of these relations, adding multiplication and division of the arithmetical type, and addition and subtraction of the non-arithmetical type. 124 The general character of these relations is as follows : 122 Proc. Amer. Acad., vn, 250-61. This paper will be referred to hereafter as "Boole s Calculus ". 123 Amer. Jour. Math., in (1880), 15-57, and vn (1885), 180-202. These two papers will be referred to hereafter as Alg. Log. 1880, and Alg. Log. 1885, respectively. 124 "Boole s Calculus," pp. 250-54. The Development of Symbolic Logic 81 A. The " N on- Arithmetical" or Logical Relations (1) a+ b denotes the class of those things which are either a s or 6 s or both. 125 (2) The inverse of the above, a \-b, is such that if x + b = a, then x a \-b. Since x and 6, in x + b, need not be mutually exclusive classes, a h b is an ambiguous function. Suppose x + b = a and all b is x. Then a \- b = x, and a h b = a Thus a h b has an upper limit, a. But suppose that x + b = a and no b isx. Then a \- b coincides with a b (a which is not 6) i. e., a f- b = x, and a \- b = a b Thus a f- b has a lower limit, a 6, or (as we elsewhere symbolize it) a -b. And in any case, a (- b is not interpretable unless all b is a, the class b contained in the class a. We may summarize all these facts by a h b = a -6 + v a b + [0] - b where v is undetermined, and [0] indicates that the term to which it is prefixed must be null. (3) a b denotes the class of those things which are both a s and 6 s. This is Boole s a b. (4) The inverse of the preceding, a/b such that if b x = o, then x = a/6. This is Boole s a/b. a/b is an ambiguous function. Its upper limit is a + -b; its lower limit, a. 126 It is uninterpretable unless b is contained in a i. e., a/b = a b + v -a -b + [0] a -b B. The "Arithmetical" Relations (5) a + b denotes the class of those things which are either a s or 6 s, where a and 6 are mutually exclusive classes. This is Boole s a + 6. a + 6 = a -6 + -a 6 + [0] a 6 (6) The inverse of the preceding, a b signifies the class "a which is not 6". As has been mentioned, it coincides with the lower limit of a [-6. (7) a X 6 and a -f- 6 are strictly analogous to the corresponding relations 125 p e i rce indicates the logical relations by putting a comma underneath the sign of the relation: that which is both a and b is a, b. 126 Peirce indicates the upper limit by a : 6, the lower limit by a -5- 6.- These occur only in the paper " Boole s Calculus". 7 82 A Survey of Symbolic Logic of arithmetic. They have no such connection with the corresponding " logical" relations as do a + b and a b. Peirce does not use them except in applying this system to probability theory. For the "logical" relations, the following familiar laws are stated: m a + a = a a a = a a + b = b + a ab = b a (a + b) + c = a + (b + c) (a b)c = a(b c) (a + b)c = ac + bc a b + c = (a + c) (b + c) The last two are derived from those which precede. Peirce s discussion of transformations and solutions in this system is inadequate. Any sufficient account would carry us quite beyond what he has given or suggested, and require our report to be longer than the original paper. We shall be content to suggest ways in which the methods of Boole s calculus can be extended to functions involving those relations which do not appear in Boole. As has been pointed out, if any function be developed by Boole s laws, /(*) =/(!)- x +/(0).-z, <f>(*> y} = <p(l, l)-xy + <p(l, Q)-x-y + ^(0, !) -xy + <p(Q, 0)- -x-y, Etc., etc., the terms on the right-hand side of these equations will always represent mutually exclusive classes. That is to say, the difference between the "logical" relation, +, and the "arithmetical" relation, +, here vanishes. Thus any relation in this system of Peirce s can be interpreted by developing it according to the above laws, provided that we can interpret these rela tions when they appear in the coefficients. And the correct interpretation of these coefficients can always be discovered. Developing the "logical" sum, x + y, we have, x + y = (l + l)-xy+(l + Q)-x-y+(0+l)- -zy+(0 + 0)- -x-y Comparing this with the meaning of x + y given above, we find that (1 + 1) = 1, (1 + 0) == 1, (0+1) == 1, and (0+0) = 0. Developing the "logical" difference, a \-b, we have x \-y = (1 \-l)-xy+(l hO)-z-2/+(0 hi)- -x y + (0 f-0) . - x - y Comparing this with the discussion of x \-y above, we see that (1 hi) is equivalent to the undetermined coefficient 0; that (1 hO) = 1; that 127 "Boole s Calculus," pp. 250-53. The Development of Symbolic Logic 83 (0 hi) is equivalent to [0], which indicates that the term to which it is prefixed must be null, and that (0 |-0) = 0. The interpretation of the "arithmetical" relations, X and ^, in coef ficients of class-symbols is not to be attempted. These are of service only in probability theory, where the related symbols are numerical in their significance. The reader does not require to be told that this system is too complicated to be entirely satisfactory. In the " Description of a Notation for the Logic of Relatives", all these relations except -f- are retained, but in later papers we find only the " logical" relations, a + b and a b. The relation of "inclusion in" or "being as small as" (which we shall symbolize by c) 128 appears for the first time in the "Description of a Notation for the Logic of Relatives". 129 Aside from its treatment of relative terms and the use of the "arithmetical" relations, this monograph gives the laws of the logic of classes almost identically as they stand in the algebra of logic today. The following principles are stated. 130 (1) If x cy and y cz, then x cz. (2) If acb, then there is such a term x that a + x = b. (3) If a c b, then there is such a term y that b y = a. (4) If b x = a, then a c b. (5) If a c 6, (c + a) c (c + b) . (6) If a cb, c a cc b. (7) If a cb, a c cb c. (8) abca. (9) xc(x + y). (10) x + y = y + x. (11) (x + y) + z = x + (y + z). (12) x(y + z) = xy + xz. (13) x y = y x. (14) (xy)z = x(yz). (15) x x = x. (16) x -x = O. 131 (17) x + -x = 1. 128 Peirce s symbol is < which he explains as meaning the same as < but being sim pler to write. 129 Memoirs of the Amer. Acad., n. s., ix (1867), 317-78. 130 "Description of a Notation for the Logic of Relatives," loc. cit., pp. 334-35, 338-39, 342. 131 In this paper, not-x is symbolized by n 1 , "different from every x, " or by <r~ z . 84 A Survey of Symbolic Logic (18) z + = x. (19) x + l = 1. (20) <p(x) = ?(1) *+*>(()) -a. (21) <K.r) - [*(!) (22) If <p(x) = 0, (23) If <p(x) = 1, The last of these gives the equation of condition and the elimination re sultant for equations with one member 1. Boole had stated (22), which is the corresponding law for equations with one member 0, but not (23). Most of the above laws, beyond (9), had been stated either by Boole or by Jevons. (1) to (9) are, of course, novel, since the relation c appears here for the same time since Lambert. Later papers state further properties of the relation c , notably, If x c y, then -y c -x. And the methods of elimination and solution are given in terms of this relation. 132 Also, these papers extend the relation to propositions. In this interpretation, Peirce reads x cy, "If a; is true, y is true," but he is well aware of the difference between the meaning of x cy and usual significance of "a; implies y". He says: 133 "It is stated above that this means if a: is true, y is true . But this meaning is greatly modified by the circumstance that only the actual state of things is referred to. ... Now the peculiarity of the hypothetical proposition [ordinarily expressed by if x is true, y is true ] is that it goes out beyond the actual state of things and declares what would happen were things other than they are or may be. The utility of this is that it puts us in possession of a rule, say that if A is true, B is true , such that should we afterward learn something of which we are now ignorant, namely that A is true, then, by virtue of this rule, we shall find that we know something else, namely, that B is true. [In contrast to this] . . . the proposition, a c b, is true if a is false or if b is true, but is false if a is true while b is false. . . . For example, we shall see that from -(x cy) [the negation of x cy] we can infer z ex. This does not mean that because in the actual state of things x is true and y false, therefore in every state of things either z is false or x true ; but it does mean that in whatever state of things we find x true and y false, in that state of things either z is false or x is true [since, ex hypothesi, x is true anyway]." 132 Alg. Log. 1880, see esp. 2. 133 Alg. Log. 1885, pp. 186-87. The Development of Symbolic Logic 85 We now call this relation, x cy, " material implication," and the peculiar theorems which are true of it are pretty well known. Peirce gives a number of them. They will be intelligible if the reader remember that x c y means, "The actual state of things is not one in which x is true and y false". (1) arc (yea:). This is the familiar theorem: "A true proposition is implied by any proposition". (2) [(xcy) ex] ex. If "x implies y" implies that x is true, then x is true. (3) [(a: cy) ca] ex, where a is used in such a sense that (ar cy) c a means that from x cy every proposition follows. The difference between "material implication" and the more usual meaning of "implies" is a difficult topic into which we need not go at this time. 134 But it is interesting to note that Peirce, who introduced the relation, understood its limitations as some of his successors have not. Other theorems in terms of this relation are: (4) ar c x. (5) [xc(ycz)] c [yc(xcz)]. (6) xc[(xcy)cy]. (7) (ar cy)c[(ycz)c (xcz)].. This is a fundamental law, since called the "Principle of the Syllogism". Peirce worked most extensively with the logic of relatives. His interest here reflects a sense of the importance of relative terms in the analyses of mathematics, and he anticipates to some extent the methods of such later researches as those of Peano and of Principia Mathematica. To follow his successive papers on this topic would probably result in complete con fusion for the reader. Instead, we shall make three divisions of this entire subject as treated by Peirce: (1) the modification and extension of De Morgan s calculus of relatives by the introduction of a more "mathe matical" symbolism for the most part contained in the early paper, "Description of a Notation for the Logic of Relatives"; (2) the calculus of relations, expressed without the use of exponents and in a form which makes it an extension of the Boolean algebra a later development which may be seen at its best in "The Logic of Relatives", Note B in the Studies in Logic by members of Johns Hopkins University; and (3) the systematic consideration of the theory of relatives, which is scattered throughout the papers, but has almost complete continuity. 134 But see below, Chap, iv, Sect, i, and Chap, v, Sect. v. 86 A Survey of Symbolic Logic The terms of the algebra of relatives may usually be regarded as simple relative terms, such as "ancestor", "lover," etc. Since they are also class names, they will obey all the laws of the logic of classes, which may be taken for granted without further discussion. But relative terms have additional properties which do not belong to non-relatives; and it is to these that our attention must be given. If w signifies "woman" and s, "servant," logic is concerned not only with such relations as s iv, the "logical product" "servant woman", s + w, the "logical sum" "either servant or woman (or both) ", and s cw, "the class servants is contained in the class women , relations which belong to class-terms in general but also with the relations first symbolized by De Morgan, "servant of a woman," "servant of every woman, " and "servant of none but women". We may represent "servant of a woman" by s\w. U5 This is a kind of "multiplication" relation. It is associative, s\(l\w) = (s\l)\w "Servant of a lover-of-a-woman " is " servant-of-a-lover of a woman". Also, it is distributive with respect to the non-relative "addition" symbol ized by + , s\(m + w) = s\m + s w "Servant of either a man or a woman" is "servant of a man or servant of a woman ". But it is not commutative : s\lis not l\s, " servant of a lover " is not equivalent to "lover of a servant". To distinguish s w from s w, or s x w the class of those who are both servants and women we shall call s | w the relative product of s and w. For "servant of every woman" Peirce proposed s w , and for "servant of none but women" s w. As we shall see, this notation is suggested by certain mathematical analogies. We may represent individual members of the class w as W ly W 2 , W 3 , etc., and the class of all the Ws as W l + W 2 + W 3 + .... Remembering the interpretation of + , we may write w = W 1 + W 2 + W, + . . . and this means, "The class-term, w, denotes W l or W 2 or W 3 or ...," that is, w denotes an unspecified member of the class of PF s. The servant of a (some, any) woman is, then, s w. sw = "A woman" is either W } or W 2 or W 3 , etc.; "servant of a woman" is either 135 Peirce s notation for this is s w, he uses s, w for the simple logical product. The Development of Symbolic Logic 87 servant of W l or servant of W 2 or servant of PF 3 , etc. Similarly, "servant of every woman" is servant of W l and servant of W z and servant of W z , etc. ; or remembering the interpretation of x , where, of course, s\ W n represents the relative product, "s of W n ," and x represents the non-relative logical product translated by "and". The above can be more briefly symbolized, following the obvious mathematical analogies, w = 2 W s\w = 2 w (s | W) s w = H w (s\W) Unless w represent a null class, we shall have or jc*w The class "servants of every woman" is contained in the class "servants of a woman". This law has numerous consequences, some of which are: A lover of a servant of all women is a lover of a servant of a woman. Kc (/]*) A lover of every servant-of-all-women stands to every woman in the rela tion of lover-of-a-servant of hers (unless the class s w be null). I s w c I s | w A lover of every servant-of-a-woman stands to a (some) woman in the relation of lover-of-a -servant of hers. From the general principle, 136 m\[U x f(x)]cU f (m\f(x)] 136 The proof of this theorem is as follows : a = abc ... +ab -c ... +a -b c ... + ..., or a = a b c . . . + P, where P is the sum of the remaining terms. Whence, if O represent any relation distributive with respect to + , mOa = mQabc . . . +mQP Similarly, mOb = mQa be . . . + mOQ mOc = mQa b c . . . + rnQR Etc., etc. Now let a, 6, c, etc., be respectively /(.Ci), f(x*), fM, etc., and multiply together all the above equations. On the left side, we have 88 A Survey of Symbolic Logic we have also, ^c*, or 8cs A lover of a (some) servant-of-every-woman stands to every woman in the relation of lover-of-a-servant of hers. We have also the general formulae of inclusion, If / c s, then l w c s w and, If s c w, then l w c I s The first of these means: If all lovers are servants, then a lover of every woman is also a servant of every woman. The second means : If all servants are women, then a lover of every woman is also a lover of every servant. These laws are, of course, general. We have also: m (l\s)\w = I (s\w) s x The last of these is read: A lover of every person who is either a servant or a woman is a lover of every servant and a lover of every woman. An interesting law which remainds us of Lambert s "Newtonian formula" is, (I + s ) w = l w + 2 q (l w -<* x s 9 ) + s w One who is either-lover-or-servant of every woman, is either lover of every woman or, for some portion q of the class women, is lover of every woman except members of q and servant of every member of q, or, finally, is servant of every woman. Peirce also gives this law in a form which approximates even more closely the binomial theorem. The corresponding law for the product is simpler, (I xs) w = l w xs w which is On the right side, we have (mOabc ...) + (raOP) + (mQQ) + (mOR) + . .., or (mQabc...)+K where K is a sum of other terms. But (mOabc ...} is ?nQ[f(x 1 ) x f(x 2 ) x /(z 3 ) . . .], which is mOH x f(x) Hence [mOHf(x)]+K = U x [mOf(x)]. Hence m O n /Or) c n x [m Of(x) ] . Peirce does not prove this theorem, but illustrates it briefly for logical multiplication (see "Description of a Notation", p. 346). 137 "Description of a Notation, p. 334. The Development of Symbolic Logic 89 One who is both-lover-and-servant of every woman, is both a lover of every woman and a servant of every woman. Peirce introduces a fourth term, and summarizes in a diagram the inclu sion relations obtained by extending the formulae already given. 138 The number of such inclusions, for four relatives, is somewhat more than one hundred eighty. He challenges the reader to accomplish the precise formulation of these by means of ordinary language and formal logic. An s of none but members of w, Peirce symbolizes by 8 w. He calls this operation "backward involution", and relatives of the type a w he refers to as " infinitesimal relatives", on account of an extended and difficult mathe matical analogy which he presents. 139 The laws of this relation are analo gous to those of s w . If s c w, then l s c l w If all servants are women, then a lover of none but servants is lover of none but women. If / c s, then 8 w c l w If all lovers are servants, then a servant of none but women is a lover of none but women. i(* w ) = ("OH; The lovers of none but servants-of-none-but-women are the lovers-of- servants of none but women. i+*w = l w x s w Those who are either-lovers-or-servants of none but women are those who are lovers of none but women and servants of none but women. (w xv) = s w x s v The servants of none but those who are both women and violinists are those who are servants of none but women and servants of none but vio linists. <">MJC )& Whoever is lover-of-a-servant of none but women is a lover-of-every- servant of none but women. l\ w c <*>w A lover of one who is servant to none but women is a lover-of-none-but- servants to none but women. l s w c l (s | w) 138 Ibid., p. 347. 139 Ibid., pp. 348 jf. 90 A Survey of Symbolic Logic Whoever stands to a woman in the relation of lover-of-nothing-but-servants of hers is a lover of nothing but servants of women. The two kinds of involution are connected by the laws: A lover of none but those who are servants of every woman is the same as one who stands to every woman in the relation of a lover of none but servants of hers. i s = -/ - HO Lover of none but servants is non-lover of every non-servant. It appears from this last that x and x y are connected through negation : -(I s ) = -l\s, Not a lover of every servant is non-lover of a servant. -O) = l\-s, Not a lover of none but servants is lover of a non- servant. l -s = ~(l\s} = -I s , A lover of none but non-servants is one who is not lover-of-a-servant, a non-lover of every servant. -i s = -(-/| -s) = l~ s , A non-lover of none but servants is one who is not a non-lover-of-a-non-servant, a lover of every non-servant. We have the further laws governing negatives: 141 In the early paper, "On the Description of a Notation for the Logic of Relatives", negatives are treated in a curious fashion. A symbol is used for "different from " and the negative of s is represented by n s , " differ ent from every s". Converses are barely mentioned in this study. In the paper of 1880, converses and negatives appear in their usual notation, "relative addition" is brought in to balance "relative multiplication", and the two kinds of involution are retained. But in " The Logic of Relatives " in the Johns Hopkins Studies in Logic, published in 1882, involution has disappeared, converses and negatives and "relative addition" are retained. This last represents the final form of Peirce s calculus of relatives. We have here, (1) Relative terms, a, b, ... x, y, z. (2) The negative of x, -x. 140 See ibid., p. 353. Not-z is here symbolized by (1 - z) 141 Alg. Log. 1880, p. 55. The Development of Symbolic Logic 91 (3) The converse of x, ^x. If x is "lover", ^.r is "beloved"; if KC is "lover", a; is "beloved". (4) Non-relative addition, a + b, "either a or 6". (5) Non-relative multiplication, a x6, or a b, "both a and 6". (6) Relative multiplication, a\b, "a of a 6". (7) Relative addition, a t b, "a of everything but 6 s, a of every non-6 ". (8) The relations = and c , as before. (9) The universal relation, 1, "consistent with," which pairs every term with itself and with every other. (10) The null-relation, 0, the negative of 1. (11) The relation "identical with", 7, which pairs every term with itself. (12) The relation "different from", N, which pairs any term with every other term which is distinct. 142 In terms of these, the fundamental laws of the calculus, in addition to those which hold for class-terms in general, are as follows: (1) .(.a) - a (2) -(wo) = w(- ) (3) (a c b) = (-6 c w ) (4) If acb, then (a\x)c(b\x) and (x\a)c(x\b). (5) If acb, then (a t x) c (6 t x) and (x t a) c (x t 6). (6) x\(a\b) = (x a)|6 (7) x t (a t b) = (x t a) t b (8) x\(a-tb)c(x a) t6 (9) (a t b) x c a t (6 x) (10) (a\x) + (b\x)c(a+b)\x (11) z|(at&)c(3ta)(a:t&) (12) (a+b)xc(a\x) + (b\x) (13) (at*)(6tz)c(a|6) to: (14) -(at 6) - -a | -6 (15) -(a 1 6) = -at -6 (16) ^(a+ 6) = ^a+ ^b (17) (a b) = a ^6 (18) w(a t 6) = ^a t ^6 (19) w( |6) = v a |w6 For the relations 1, 0, /, and N, the following additional formulae are given : 142 1 have altered Peirce s notation, as the reader may see by comparison. 92 A Survey of Symbolic Logic (20) Ocx (21) xcl (22) x + = x (23) x-l = x (24) .r + 1 = 1 (25) z-0 = (26) ztl = 1 (27) z|0 = (28) 1 t.T = 1 (29) 0\x = (30) sttf = x (31) z|/-cg (32) Art* = x (33) /|z = x (34) or + -x = 1 (35) x -x = (36) 7c[a;1X-aO] (37) fcr| (-*)] ctf This calculus is, as Peirce says, highly multiform, and no general prin ciples of solution and elimination can be laid down. 143 Not only the variety of relations, but the lack of symmetry between relative multiplication and relative addition, e. g., in (10)-(13) above, contributes to this multiformity. But, as we now know, the chief value of any calculus of relatives is not in any elimination or solution of the algebraic type, but in deductions to be made directly from its formulae. Peirce s devices for solution are, there fore, of much less importance than is the theoretic foundation upon which his calculus of relatives is built. It is this which has proved useful in later research and has been made the basis of valuable additions to logistic development. This theory is practically unmodified throughout the papers dealing with relatives, as a comparison of "Description of a Notation for the Logic of Relatives" with "The Logic of Relatives" in the Johns Hopkins studies and with the paper of 1884 will indicate. "Individual" or "elementary" relatives are the pairs (or triads, etc.) of individual things. If the objects in the universe of discourse be A, B, C: etc., then the individual relatives will constitute the two-dimensional array, A:A,A\B,A:e,A:D, ... B : A, B : B, B : C, B : D, ... C:A, C:B, C:C, C:D, ... . . . Etc., etc. It will be noted that any individual thing coupled with itself is an individual relative but that in general A : B differs from B : A individual relatives are ordered couples. A general relative is conceived as an aggregate or logical sum of such 143 "Logic of Relatives" in Studies in Logic by members of Johns Hopkins University, p. 193. The Development of Symbolic Logic 93 individual relatives. If b represent "benefactor", then b = Z,S y (6) t .,.(/ : ,/), where (&)/ is a numerical coefficient whose value is 1 in case / is a bene factor of J, and otherwise 0, and where the sums are to be taken for all the individuals in the universe. That is to say, b is the logical sum of all the benefactor-benefitted pairs in the universe. This is the first formulation of "definition in extension", now widely used in logistic, though seldom in exactly this form. By this definition, b is the aggregate of all the individual relatives in our two-dimensional array which do not drop out through having the coefficient 0. It is some expression of the form, b = (X: y)!+(Z: Y) 2 +(X : } r ) 3 +... If, now, we consider the logical meaning of + , we see that this may be read, "b is either (X : F), or (X : F) 2 or (X : F) 8 or ... ". To say that 6 repre sents the class of benefactor-benefitted couples is, then, inexact: b repre sents an unspecified individual relative, any one of this class. (That it should represent "some" in a sense which denotes more than one at once which the meaning of + in the general case admits is precluded by the fact that any two distinct individual relatives are ipso facto mutually exclusive.) A genera) relative, so defined, is what Mr. Russell calls a "real variable". Peirce discusses the idea of such a variable in a most illuminating fashion. 144 "Demonstration of the sort called mathematical is founded on suppo sition of particular cases. The geometrician draws a figure; the algebraist assumes a letter to signify a certain quantity fulfilling the required condi tions. But while the mathematician supposes a particular case, his hypoth esis is yet perfectly general, because he considers no characters of the individual case but those which must belong to every such case. The ad vantage of his procedure lies in the fact that the logical laws of individual terms are simpler than those which relate to general terms, because indi viduals are either identical or mutually exclusive, and cannot intersect or be subordinated to one another as classes can. . . . "The old logics distinguish between indimduum signatum and indi mduum vagum. Julius Caesar is an example of the former; a certain man , of the latter. The indimduum vagum, in the days when such con ceptions were exactly investigated, occasioned great difficulty from its having a certain generality, being capable, apparently, of logical division. 144 "Description of a Notation, pp. 342-44. 94 A Survey of Symbolic Logic If we include under indimduum vagum such a term as any individual man , these difficulties appear in a strong light, for what is true of any individual man is true of all men. Such a term is in one sense not an individual term; for it represents every man. But it represents each man as capable of being denoted by a term which is individual; and so, though it is not itself an individual term, it stands for any one of a class of such terms. . . . The letters which the mathematician uses (whether in algebra or in geometry) are such individuals by second intention. . . . All the formal logical laws relating to individuals will hold good of such individuals by second intention, and at the same time a universal proposition may be substituted for a proposition about such an individual, for nothing can be predicated of such an individual which cannot be predicated of the whole class." The relative b, denoting ambiguously any one of the benefactor-bene- fitted pairs in the universe, is such an individual by second intention. It is defined by means of the " prepositional function", "I benefits J", as the logical sum of the (7 : J) couples for which "I benefits J" is true. The compound relations of the calculus can be similarly defined. If a = S,-Sy(a)iy(Z : J), and b = SiSy(&)<y(/ : J), then a + b = S,-Sy[(a),-y + (&),-,](/ : J) That is, if "agent" is the logical sum of all the (7 : J) couples for which "7 is agent of J" is true, and "benefactor" is the sum of all the (7 : J) couples for which "7 benefits J" is true, then "either agent or benefactor" is the logical sum of all the (7 : J) couples for which " Either 7 is agent of J or 7 benefits J" is true. We might indicate the same facts more simply by defining only the "prepositional function", (a + 6) t -,-. 145 The definition of a + b given above, follows immediately from this simpler equation. The definitions of the other compound relations are similar: (ax6) - = (a) t -yx(6) iy or a xb = SiSy[(a) tV x (6) iy ](7 : J) "Both agent and benefactor" is the logical sum of the (7 : J) couples for which "7 is agent of J and 7 is benefactor of J" is true. (a I &).-/ = S*{(a)*x(6) Ay } or a\b = S,-Sy[S*{(a) <A x (b) hi ]](I : J) 145 See "Logic of Relatives ", loc. cit., p. 188. The Development of Symbolic Logic 95 "Agent of a benefactor" is the logical sum of all the (7 : J) couples such that, for some //, "I is agent of 77 and // is benefactor of J" is true. There are two difficulties in the comprehension of this last. The first concerns the meaning of "agent of a benefactor". Peirce, like De Morgan, treats his relatives as denoting ambiguously either the relation itself or the things which have the relation either relations or relative terms. a is either the relation "agent of" or the class name "agent". Now note that the class name denotes the first term in the pairs which have the relation. With this in mind, the compound relation, a\b, will become clear. "Agent of a benefactor" names the 7 s in the / : J pairs which make up the field of the relation, " agent of a benefactor of ". Any reference to the J s at the other end of the relation is gone, just as "agent" omits any reference to the J s in the field of the relation "agent of". The second difficulty concerns the operator, SA, which we have read, "For some H". Consider any statement involving a "prepositional function", <pz, where z is the variable representing the individual of which <p is asserted. That is, 2 z <pz symbolizes "Either <p is true of Zi or <p is true of Z 2 or (p is true of Z 3 or ... ", and this is most simply expressed by "For some z (some 2 or other), <pz". In the particular case in hand, <pz is (o)t*x(6) A y, "/ is agent of // and // is benefactor of J". The terms, I and J, which stand in the relation "7 is agent of a benefactor of J", are those for which there is some H or other such that 7 is agent of H and H is benefactor of J. Suppose we consider any " propositional function", <pz with the oper ator n. Tl 2 (pz = <f>Zi x (pZ/z x <pZs x ... That is, U z <pz symbolizes " <p is true of Z\ and <p is true of Z 2 and <p is true of Z 3 and . . . ", or " <p is true for every z". This operator is needed in the definition of a t b. (ot&),/- n A {(a) t - A +(6) A ,-} " 7 is agent of everyone but benefactors of J" is equivalent to " For every 77, either 7 is agent of 77 or H is benefactor of J". ot6- 2&[Il h {(a) ik +(b) h j}](I:J) "Agent of all non-benefactors" is the logical sum of all the (7 : J) couples such that, for every H, either 7 is agent of H or 77 is benefactor of J. The same considerations about the ambiguity of relatives denoting either the 96 A Survey of Symbolic Logic relation itself or those things which are first terms of the relation applies in this case also. We need not, for the relations still to be discussed, con sider the step from the definition of the compound "prepositional func tions", (a t b)a in the above, to the definition of the corresponding relation, a t b. This step is always taken in exactly the same way. The converse, converse of the negative, and negative of the converse, are very simply defined. That the negative of the converse is the converse of the negative follows from the obvious fact that -(6).-/ = (-6)/ f . All the formulae of the calculus of relatives, beyond those which belong also to the calculus of non-relative terms, 146 may be proved from such definitions. For example: To prove, v(a + b) = ^a + ^b (a + &),-/ = (a + &),-,- = (a) /t -+ (&)/< But (a)ji = (a) t -/, and (6) yf = (w6) tV Hence (a + &)/ = ( w o) t -/+ (W>)v Hence S<S,Ka + 6),-,-} (7 : J) = S;Z y {(-a) t7 + (&)/}(/ : J) Q.E.D. For the complete development of this theory, there must be a discussion of the laws which govern such expressions as (a) ,-,-, or in general, expressions of the form (px, where <px is a statement which involves a variable, x, and (px is either true or false whenever any individual value of the variable is specified. Such expressions are now called " propositional functions". 147 (a)*, or in the more convenient notation, <px, is a propositional function of one variable; (a),-/, or <p(x, y), may be regarded as a propositional function of two variables, or as a function of the single variable, the individual rela tive (7 : J), or (X : Y). This theory of propositional functions is stated in the paper of 1885, On the Algebra of Logic". It is assumed, as also in earlier papers, that 4 he laws of the algebra of classes hold for propositions as well. 148 The Additional law which propositions obey is stated here for the first time. 46 The formulae of the calculus of classes can also be derived from these, considered as themselves laws of the calculus of propositions (see below, Chap, vi, Sec. iv). 147 Peirce has no name for such expressions, though he discusses their properties acutely (see Alg. Log. 1880, 2). 148 This assumption first appears in Alg. Log. 1880. The Development of Symbolic Logic 97 The current form of this law is "If x 4= 0, then x = 1", which gives immediately "If & * 1, then x = 0" "If x is not false, then x is true, and if x is not true, then x is false". Peirce uses v and / for "true" and "false", instead of 1 and 0, and the law is stated in the form (x -f)(v-x) =0 But the calculus of propositional functions, though derived from the algebra for propositions, is not identical with it. "x is a man" is neither true nor false. A propositional function may be true in some cases, false in some cases. "If a: is a man, then x is a mortal" is true in all cases, or true of any x; "x is a man" is true in some cases, or true for some values of x. For reasons already suggested, 2 x <px represents " <?x is true for some value of the variable, x that is, either <px } is true or <px 2 is true or <px 3 is true or . . ." Similarly, TL x <px = (pxi x <px 2 x <px 3 x ... TL t <px represents tf tpx is true for all values of the variable, x that is, <pxi is true and <px 2 is true and #r 3 is true and ..." If (a) xy , or more conveniently, <p(x, y), represent "x is agent of y", and (b) xy , or more conveniently, \f/(x, y), mean "x is benefactor of y", then IL x 2 y [<p(x,y) *t(x, y)] will mean that for all values of x and some values of y, "x is agent of y and x is benefactor of y" is true that is, it represents the proposition "Everyone is both agent and benefactor of someone". This will appear if we expand n x 2 y [<f>(x, y) x^(.r, y)]: , 2/0 xiKzi, 2/i)] + [<?Oi, 2/2) x {[<p(x 2 , 2/j) x^(.r 2 , yi)] + [<f>(x z , y z ) x^(z z , y 2 )] + . ..) x U</>(>3, 2/i) x^(.r 3 , 2/i)] + [^(.r 3 , 2/2) x^(.r 3 , 2/2)]+ . - . ! x ... Etc., etc. This expression reads directly " {Either [xi is agent of y\ and x\ is bene factor of yi] or [xi is agent of y 2 and Xi is benefactor of y z ] or . . .[ and {either [x z is agent of 2/1 and a: 2 is benefactor of y\] or [x 2 is agent of y 2 and x 2 is bene factor of y 2 ] or . . .} and {either [x s is agent of y\ and x 3 is benefactor of 2/i] or [# 3 is agent of y 2 and .r 3 is benefactor of y z ] or . . f ] and . . . Etc., etc". 8 98 A Survey of Symbolic Logic The operator Z, which is nearer the argument, or "Boolian" as Peirce calls it, indicates the operation, + , within the lines. The outside operator, II, indicates the operation, x, between the lines i. e., in the columns; and the subscript of the operator nearer the Boolian indicates the letter which varies within the lines, the subscript of the outside operator, the letter which varies from line to line. Three operators would give a three-dimen sional array. With a little patience, the reader may learn to interpret any such expression directly from the meaning of simple logical sums and logical products. For example, with the same meanings of <p(x, y) and t(x, y), lUZj^Cr, y) xifr(y, x)] will mean "Everyone (x) is agent of some (y) benefactor of himself". (Note the order of the variables in the Boolian.) And will symbolize " There is some x and some y such that, for every z, either x is agent of z or z is benefactor of y"; or, more simply, "There is some pair, x and y, such that x is agent of all non-benefactors of y". The laws for the manipulation of such Boolians with n and 2 operators are given as follows : 149 "1st. The different premises having been written with distinct indices (the same index not being used in two propositions) are written together, and all the n s and Z s are to be brought to the left. This can evidently be done, for [Or in the more convenient, and probably more familiar, notation, Il x <f>x Xll y <py = U x U y (<px x <py) x <py)] "2d. Without deranging the order of the indices of any one premise, the n s and Z s belonging to different premises may be moved relatively to one another, and as far as possible the Z s should be carried to the left 149 Alg. Log. 1885, pp.- 196-98. The Development of Symbolic Logic 99 of the II s. We have n,-ny.T t -y = n ; itey [Or, mix*, y ) = nji^or, y)] S.-SyZiy = SyZtf.-y [Or, S.S^fo y) = S y S z ^(a-, y)] and also Silly&.-yy = n/Z^y [Or, SJI y (^r x ^) = n y S x (^r x^y)J But this formula does not hold when i and j are not separated. We do have, however, SillyZiy -< IlyZtf.v [Or, ZJI^ar, y) c n,2 x ^(.r, y)] It will, therefore, be well to begin by putting the 2 s to the left as far as possible, because at a later stage of the work they can be carried to the right but not [always] to the left. For example, if the operators of two premises are II ^II* and 2 JI tf 2 z , we can unite them in either of the two orders and shall usually obtain different conclusions accordingly. There will often be room for skill in choosing the most suitable arrangement. . . . "oth. The next step consists in multiplying the whole Boolian part, by the modification of itself produced by substituting for the index of any n any other index standing to the left of it in the Quantifier. Thus, for Silly/,-,- [Or, for 2JI tf *>(.r, y), we can write 2 JI//^ 2JI tf ( <p(x, y) x ^(.r, x)}] "6th. The next step consists in the re-manipulation of the Boolian part, consisting, 1st, in adding to any part any term we like; 2d, in dropping from any part any factor we like, and 3d, in observing that xx = /, x + x = v, so that xxy + z = z (x + x + y)z = z "7th. n s and S s in the Quantifier whose indices no longer appear in the Boolian are dropped. "The fifth step will, in practice, be combined with part of the sixth and seventh. Thus, from 2 !! ,-/,-/ we shall at once proceed to 2 t / lt if we like." We may say, in general, that the procedures which are valid in this calculus are those which can be performed by treating 2 x v?.r as a sum, <pxi + <.r 2 + <px 3 + . . . , and Il x <px as a product, tpx\ x <^.r 2 x <^.r 3 x . . . ; 2 JI,,^(,r, y) as a sum, for the various values of x, of products, each for 100 A Survey of Symbolic Logic the various values of y, and so on. Thus this calculus may be derived from the calculus of propositions. But Peirce does not carry out any proofs of the principles of the system, and he notes that this method of proof would be theoretically unsound. 150 "It is to be remarked that SjX,- and IliXi are only similar to a sum and a product; they are not strictly of that nature, because the individuals of the universe may be innumerable." Another way of saying the same thing would be this: The laws of the calculus of propositions cannot extend to 2iX t - and Ito, because the extension of these laws to aggregates in general, by the method which the mathemati cal analogies of sum and product suggest, would require the principle of mathematical induction, which is not sufficient for proof in case the aggre gate is infinite. The whole of the calculus of relatives may be derived from this calculus of propositional functions by the methods which have been exemplified that is, by representing any relation, 6, as 2*2/(&){/(7 : J), and defining the relations, such as "converse of", "relative-product," etc., which dis tinguish the calculus, as II and 2 functions of the elementary relatives. We need not enter into the detail of this matter, since Sections II and III of Chapter IV will develop the calculus of propositional functions by a modification of Peirce s method, while Section IV of that chapter will show how the calculus of classes can be derived from this calculus of propositional functions, Section V will indicate the manner in which the calculus of rela tions may be similarly derived, and Section VI will suggest how, by a further important modification of Peirce s method, a theoretically adequate logic of mathematics may be obtained. It remains to consider briefly Peirce s studies toward the derivation of other mathematical relations, operations, and systems from symbolic logic. The most important paper, in this connection, is "Upon the Logic of Mathematics". 151 Certain portions of the paper, "On an Improvement in Boole s Calculus of Logic", and of the monograph, "Description of a Nota tion for the Logic of Relatives", are also of interest. The first-mentioned of these is concerned to show how the relations + , =, etc., of arithmetic can be defined in terms of the corresponding logi cal relations, and the properties of arithmetical relations deduced from theorems concerning their logical analogues. 152 "Imagine ... a particular case under Boole s calculus, in which the 150 Alg. Log. 1885, p. 195. 151 Proc. Amer. Acad., vn, 402-12. 152 Loc. tit., pp. 410-11. The Development of Symbolic Logic 101 letters are no longer terms of first intention, but terms of second intention, and that of a special kind. ... Let the letters . . . relate exclusively to the extension of first intensions. Let the differences of the characters of things and events be disregarded, and let the letters signify only the differ ences of classes as wider or narrower. In other words, the only logical comprehension which the letters considered as terms will have is the greater or less divisibility of the class. Thus, n in another case of Boole s calculus might, for example, denote New England States ; but in the case now supposed, all the characters which make these states what they are, being neglected, it would signify only what essentially belongs to a class which has the same relation to higher and lower classes which the class of New England States has, that is, a collection of six. 11 In this case, the sign of identity will receive a special meaning. For, if m denotes what essentially belongs to a class of the rank of sides of a cube , then [the logical] m = n will imply, not that every New England State is the side of a cube, and conversely, but that whatever essentially belongs to a class of the numerical rank of New England States essentially belongs to a class of the rank of sides of a cube , and conversely. Identity of this particular sort may be termed equality. ..." If a, b, c, etc. represent thus the number of the classes, a, b, c, etc., then the arithmetical relations can be defined as logical relations. The logical relation a + 6, already defined, will represent arithmetical addition: And from the fact that the logical + is commutative and associative, it will follow that the arithmetical + is so also. Arithmetical multiplication is more difficult to deal with but may be defined as follows: 153 a X b represents an event when a and b are events only if these events are independent of each other, in which case a X b = a b [where a b is the logical product]. By the events being independent is meant that it is possible to take two series of terms, A\, A 2 , A 3 , etc., and B\, B 2 , B 3 , etc., such that the following conditions are satisfied. (Here x denotes any individual or class, not nothing; A m , A n , B m , B n , any members of the two series of terms, and 2 A, 2 B, 2 (.4 B) logical sums of some of the A n s, the B n s, and the (A n BJ s respectively.) Condition 1. No A m is A n 2. No m is n 3. x = 2 (.4 B) 4. a = 2 A 153 Loc. cit., p. 403. 102 A Survey of Symbolic Logic Condition 5. b = 2 B 6. Some A m is B n This definition is somewhat involved: the crux of the matter is that a b will, in the case described, have as many members as there are combina tions of a member of a with a member of b. Where the members of a are distinct (condition 1) and the members of 6 are distinct (condition 2), these combinations will be of the same multitude as the arithmetical a X b. It is worthy of remark that, in respect both to addition and to multi plication, Peirce has here hit upon the same fundamental ideas by means of which arithmetical relations are defined in Principia Mathematical The "second intention" of a class term is, in Principia, Nc ; a + b, in Peirce s discussion, corresponds to what is there called the "arithmetical sum" of two logical classes, and a X b to what is called the "arithmetical product". But Peirce s discussion does not meet all the difficulties that could hardly be expected in a short paper. In particular, it does not define the arithmetical sum in case the classes summed have members in common, and it does not indicate the manner of defining the number of a class, though it does suggest exactly the mode of attack adopted in Prin cipia, namely, that number be considered as a property of cardinally similar classes taken in extension. The method suggested for the derivation of the laws of various numerical algebras from those of the logic of relatives is more comprehensive, though here it is only the order of the systems which is derived from the order of the logic of relatives; there is no attempt to define the number or multitude of a class in terms of logical relations. 155 We are here to take a closed system of elementary relatives, every individual in which is either a T or a P and none is both. Let c = (T : T) s = (P:P) p = (P:T) t = (T :P) Suppose T here represent an Individual teacher, and P an individual pupil : the system will then be comparable to a school in which every person is either teacher or pupil, and none is both and every teacher teaches every pupil. The relative term, c, will then be defined as the relation of one 354 See Vol. n, Section A. 155 "Description of a Notation, pp. 359 jf. The Development of Symbolic Logic 103 teacher to another, that is, " colleague". Similarly, s is (P : P), the rela tion of one pupil to another, that is, "schoolmate". The relative term, p, is (P : T), the relation of any pupil to any teacher, that is, " pupil". And the relative term, t, is (T : P), the relation of any teacher to any pupil, that is, "teacher". Thus from the two non-relative terms, T and P, are generated the four elementary relatives, c, s, t, and p. The properties of this system will be clearer if we venture upon certain explanations of the properties of elementary relatives which Peirce does not give and to the form of which he might object. For any such relative (7 : J), where the / s and the J s are distinct, we shall have three laws: (1) (I:J)\J = 1 Whatever has the (7 : J) relation to a J must be an 7: whoever has the teacher-pupil relation to a pupil must be a teacher. (2) (7:./)l/ = Whatever has the teacher-pupil relation to a teacher (where teachers and pupils are distinct) does not exist. (3) (I :J)\(II:K) = [(I : J)\H] : K The relation of those which have the (7 : J) relation to those which have the (77 : K) relation is the relation of those-which-have-the-(7 : J)-relation- to-an-77 to a K. It is this third law which is the source of the important properties of the system. For example: t\p = (T :P)|(P : T) = [(T : P) |P] : T = (T : 7 1 ) = c The teachers of any person s pupils are that person s colleagues. (Our illustration, to fit the system, requires that one may be his own colleague or his own schoolmate.) c\c = (T : T)\(T : T) = [(T : T)\ T] : T = (T : T) = c The colleagues of one s colleagues are one s colleagues. t t = (T : P) | (T : P) = [(T : P) T] : P = (0 : P) = There are no teachers of teachers in the system. p s = (P : T) | (P : P) = [(P : T) \P] : P = (0 : P) = There are no pupils of anyone s schoolmates in the system. The results may be summarized in the following multiplication table, in which the multipliers are in the column at the right and the multiplicands 104 A Survey of Symbolic Logic at the top (relative multiplication not being commutative) : 156 t p c t c t p s p s The symmetry of the table should be noted. The reader may easily in terpret the sixteen propositions which it gives. To the algebra thus constituted may be added modifiers of the terms, symbolized by small roman letters. If f is "French", f will be a modifier of the system in case French teachers have only French pupils, and vice versa. Such modifiers are "scalars" of the system, and any expression of the form a c + bt+ c p + d s where c, t, p, and s are the relatives, as above, and a, b, c, d are scalars, Peirce calls a "logical quaternion". The product of a scalar with a term is commutative, bt = tb since this relation is that of the non-relative logical product. Inasmuch as any (dyadic, triadic, etc.) relative is resolvable into a logical sum of (pairs, triads, etc.) elementary relatives, it is plain that any general relative what ever is resolvable into a sum of logical quaternions. If we consider a system of relatives, each of which is of the form az + bj + ck + dl+ ... where i, j, k, I, etc. are each of the form mu + nv + oiv+ ... where m, n, o, etc. are scalars, and u, v, w, etc. are elementary relatives, we shall have a more complex algebra. By such processes of complication, multiple algebras of various types can be generated. In fact, Peirce says: 157 "I can assert, upon reasonable inductive evidence, that all such [linear associative] algebras can be interpreted on the principles of the present notation in the same way as those given above. In other words, all such algebras are complications and modifications of the algebra of (156) [for which the multiplication table has been given]. It is very likely that this 155 Ibid., p. 361. 157 Ibid., pp. 363-64. The Development of Symbolic Logic 105 is true of all algebras whatever. The algebra of (156), which is of such a fundamental character in reference to pure algebra and our logical nota tion, has been shown by Professor [Benjamin] Peirce to be the algebra of Hamilton s quaternions." Peirce gives the form of the four fundamental factors of quaternions and of scalars, tensors, vectors, etc., with their logical interpretations as relative terms with modifiers such as were described above. One more item of importance is Peirce s modification of Boole s calculus of probabilities. This is set forth with extreme brevity in the paper, "On an Improvement in Boole s Calculus of Logic". 158 For the expression of the relations involved, we shall need to distinguish the logical relation of identity of two classes in extension from the relation of numerical equality. We may, then, express the fact that the class a has the same membership as the class b, or all a s are all fe s, by a = b, and the fact that the number of members of a is the same as the number of members of b, by a = b. Also we must remember the distinction between the logical relations ex pressed by a + b, ab, a \-b, and the corresponding arithmetical relations expressed by a + b, a X b, and a - b. Peirce says: 159 "Let every expression for a class have a second meaning, which is its meaning in a [numerical] equation. Namely, let it denote the proportion of individuals of that class to be found among all the individuals examined in the long run. "Then we have If a = b a = b " Let b a denote the frequency of the 6 s among the a s. Then considered as a class, if a and b are events b a denotes the fact that if a happens b happens. X b a ab " It will be convenient to set down some obvious and fundamental proper ties of the function b a . a Xb a = b X a b <p(b a , C a ) = <p(b, C) a (1 - b) a = 1 - b a 158 Proc. Amer. Acad., vn, 255 ff. 159 Ibid., pp. 255-56. 106 A Survey of Symbolic Logic I - a & = 1 --- 7 - X 0(l_a) The chief points of difference between this modified calculus of prob abilities and the original calculus of Boole are as follows: (1) Where Boole puts p, q, etc. for the "probability of a, of b, etc.", in passing from the logical to the arithmetical interpretation of his equa tions, Peirce simply changes the relations involved from logical relations to the corresponding arithmetical relations, in accordance with the foregoing, and lets the terms a, b, etc. stand for the frequency of the a s, o s, etc. in the system under discussion. (2) Boole has no symbol for the frequency of the a s amongst the 6 s, which Peirce represents by a b . As a result, Boole is led to treat the probabilities of all unconditioned simple events as independent a pro cedure which involved him in many difficulties and some errors. (3) Peirce has a complete set of four logical operations, and four analogous operations of arithmetic. This greatly facilitates the passage from the purely logical expression of relations of classes or events to the arithmetical expression of their relative frequencies or probabilities. Probably there is no one piece of work which would so immediately reward an investigator in symbolic logic as would the development of this calculus of probabilities in such shape as to make it simple and practicable. Except for a monograph by Poretsky and the studies of H. MacColl, 160 the subject has lain almost untouched since Peirce wrote the above in 1867. Peirce s contribution to our subject is the most considerable of any up to his time, with the doubtful exception of Boole s. His papers, however, are brief to the point of obscurity: results are given summarily with little or no explanation and only infrequent demonstrations. As a consequence, the most valuable of them make tremendously tough reading, and they have never received one-tenth the attention which their importance de serves. 161 If Peirce had been given to the pleasantly discursive style of De Morgan, or the detailed and clearly accurate manner of Schroder, his work on symbolic logic would fill several volumes. 160 Since the above was written, a paper by Couturat, posthumously published, gives an unusually clear presentation of the fundamental laws of probability in terms of symbolic logic. See Bibl. 161 Any who find our report of Peirce s work unduly difficult or obscure are earnestly requested to consult the original papers. The Development of Symbolic Logic 107 VIII. DEVELOPMENTS SINCE PEIRCE Contributions to symbolic logic which have been made since the time of Peirce need be mentioned only briefly. These are all accessible and in a form sufficiently close to current notation to be readily intelligible. Also, they have not been superseded, as have most of the papers so far discussed; consequently they are worth studying quite apart from any relation to later work. And finally, much of the content and method of the most * important of them is substantially the same with what will be set forth in later chapters, or is such that its connection with what is there set forth will be pointed out. But for the sake of continuity and perspective, a summary account may be given of these recent developments. We should first mention three important pieces of work contemporary with Peirce s later treatises. 162 Robert Grassmann had included in his encyclopedic Wissenschaftslehre a book entitled Die Be griff slehre oder Logik, 3 containing (1) Lehre von den Begriffen, (2) Lehre von den Urtheilen, and (3) Lehre von den Schlussen. The Begriffslehre is the second book of Die Formerdehre oder Mathematik, and as this would indicate, the development of logic is entirely mathematical. An important character of Grassmann s procedure is the derivation of the laws of classes, or Begriffe, as he insists upon calling them, from the laws governing individuals. For example, the laws a + a = a and a- a = a, where a is a class, are derived from the laws e + e = e, e-e = e, e\-e<i 0, where e, e\, e 2 represent individuals. This method has much to commend it, but it has one serious defect the supposition that a class can be treated as an aggregate of individuals and the laws of such aggregates proved generally by mathematical induction. As Peirce has observed, this method breaks down when the number of individuals may be infinite. Another difference between Grassmann and others is the use throughout of the language of intension. But the method and the laws are those of extension, and in the later treatise, there are diagrammatic illustrations in which "concepts" are represented by areas. Although somewhat incomplete, in 162 Alexander MacFarlane, Principles of the Algebra of Logic, 1879, gives a masterly presentation of the Boolean algebra. There are some notable extensions of Boole s methods and one or two emendations, but in general it is the calculus of Boole unchanged. Mac- Farlane s paper "On a Calculus of Relationship" (Proc. Roy. Soc. Edin., x, 224-32) re sembles somewhat, in its method, Peirce s treatment of "elementary relatives". But the development of it seems never to have been continued. 163 There are two editions, 1872 and 1890. The later is much expanded, but the plan and general character is the same. 108 A Survey of Symbolic Logic other respects Grassmann s calculus is not notably different from others which follow the Boolean tradition. Hugh MacColl s first two papers on "The Calculus of Equivalent Statements", 164 and his first paper "On Symbolical Reasoning", 165 printed in 1878-80, present a calculus of propositions which has essentially the properties of Peirce s, without II and 2 operators. In others words, it is a calculus of propositions, like the Two-Valued Algebra of Logic as we know it today. And the date of these papers indicates that their content was arrived at independently of Peirce s studies which deal with this touic. In fact, MacColl writes, in 1878, that he has not seen Boole. 166 The calculus set forth in MacColl s book, Symbolic Logic and its Application*, 167 is of an entirely different character. Here the funda mental symbols represent propositional functions rather than propositions; and instead of the two traditional truth values, "true" and "false", we have "true", "false", "certain", "impossible" and "variable" (not cer tain and not impossible). These are indicated by the exponents r, i, e, 77, 8 respectively. The result is a highly complex system, the fundamental ideas and procedures of which suggest somewhat the system of Strict Implication to be set forth in Chapter V. The calculus of Mrs. Ladd-Franklin, set forth in the paper "On the Algebra of Logic" in the Johns Hopkins studies, 168 differs from the other systems based on Boole by the use of the copula v . Where a and b are classes, a v b represents "a is-partly 6", or "Some a is 6", and its negative, a v b, represents " a is-wholly-not-6 ", or " No a is b ". Thus a v 6 is equiva lent to a b =h 0, and a v b to a b = 0. These two relations can, between them, express any assertable relation in the algebra, a cb will be a v-6, and a = b is represented by the pair, (a v-b)(-a v b). For propositions, a v b denotes that a and b are consistent a does not imply that b is false and b does not imply that a is false. And a v6 symbolizes "a and b are inconsistent" if a is true, b is false; if 6 is true, a is false. The use of the terms "consistent" and "inconsistent" in this connection is possibly mis leading: any two true propositions or any two false propositions are con- 164 (1) Proc. London Math. Soc., ix, 9-20; (2) ibid., ix, 177-86. Mind, v (1880), 45-60. 166 Proc. London Math. Soc., ix, 178. 167 Longmans, 1906. 38 The same volume contains an interesting and somewhat complicated system by O. H. Mitchell. Peirce acknowledged this paper as having shown us how to express uni versal and particular propositions as n and S functions. B. I. Oilman s study of relative number, also in that volume, belongs to the number of those papers which are important in connecting symbolic logic with the theory of probabilities. The Development of Symbolic Logic 109 sistent in this sense, and any two propositions one of which is true and the other false are inconsistent. This is not quite the usual meaning of "consistent" and " inconsistent "it is related to what is usually meant by these terms exactly as the " material implication a c b is related to what is usually meant by "b can be inferred from a". That a given class, x, is empty, or a given proposition, x, is false, x = 0, may be expressed by x v oo, where co is "everything" in most systems represented by 1. That a class, y, has members, is symbolized by y v oo. This last is of doubtful interpretation where y is a proposition, since Mrs. Ladd-Franklin s system does not contain the assumption which is true for propositions but not for classes, usually expressed, "If x =(= 0, then x = 1, and if x =|= 1, then x = 0". x v oo may be abbreviated to xv, a b v co to a b v , and T/VGO to yv , c dv co to c d v , etc., since it is always understood that if one term of a relation v or v is missing, the missing term is oo . This convention leads to a very pretty and convenient opera tion: v or v may be moved past its terms in either direction. Thus, (a v 6) = (a by) = ( v a 6) and (xvy) = (xyv) = ( v x y) But the forms (va6) and (vxy) are never used, being redundant both logically and psychologically. Mrs. Ladd-Franklin s system symbolizes the relations of the traditional logic particularly well : All a is b. a v -b, or a -6 v No a is b. avb, or a b v Some a is b. avb, or a b v Some a is not 6. a v -6, or a -6 v Thus v characterizes a universal, v a particular proposition. And any pair of contradictories will differ from one another simply by the difference between v and v . The syllogism, " If all a is b and all b is c, then all a is c, " will be represented by (a v -b) (b v -c) v (a v c) where v, or v, within the parentheses is interpreted for classes, and v between the parentheses takes the propositional interpretation. This ex pression may also be read, " All a is b and all b is c is inconsistent with the negative (contradictory) of Some a is not c ". It is equivalent to (a v -b) (b v -c) (a v -c) v 110 A Survey of Symbolic Logic "The three propositions, All a is 6 , All b is c, and Some a is not c , are inconsistent they cannot all three be true". This expresses at once three syllogisms: (1) (a v-6)(6 v-c) v (a v-c) "If all a is b and all 6 is c, then all a is c"; (2) (a v -b) (a v -c) v (b v -c) "If all a is 6 and some a is not c, then some b is not c"; (3) (b v -c) (a v -c) v (a v -6) " If all b is c and some a is not c, then some a is not b ". Also, this method gives a perfectly general formula for the syllogism (a v -b) (b v c) (a v c) v where the order of the parentheses, and their position relative to the sign v which stands outside the parentheses, may be altered at will. This single rule covers all the modes and figures of the syllogism, except the illicit particular conclusion drawn from universal premises. We shall revert to this matter in Chapter III. 169 The copulas v and v- have several advantages over their equivalents, = and =j= 0, or c and its negative: (1) v and v are symmetrical rela tions whose terms can always be interchanged; (2) the operation, mentioned above, of moving v and v with respect to their terms, accomplishes trans formations which are less simply performed w r ith other modes of expressing the copula; (3) for various reasons, it is psychologically simpler and more natural to think of logical relations in terms of v and v than in terms of = and =|= 0. But v and v have one disadvantage as against = , 4= , and c , they do not so readily suggest their mathematical analogues in other algebras. For better or for worse, symbolic logicians have not generally adopted v and v . Of the major contributions since Peirce, the first is that of Ernst Schroder. In his Operationskreis des Logikkalkuls (1877), Schroder pointed out that the logical relations expressed in Boole s calculus by subtraction and divi sion were all otherwise expressible, as Peirce had already noted. The meaning of + given by Boole is abandoned in favor of that which it now has, first introduced by Jevons. And the "law of duality", which con nects theorems which involve the relation + , or + and 1, with corresponding theorems in terms of the logical product x, or x and 0, is emphasized. 169 See below, pp. 188 ff. The Development of Symbolic Logic 111 (This parallelism of formulae had been noted by Peirce, in his first paper, but not emphasized or made use of.) The resulting system is the algebra of logic as we know it today. This system is perfected and elaborated in Vorlesungen uber die Algebra der Logik (1890-95). Volume I of this work covers the algebra of classes; Volume II the algebra of propositions; and Volume III is devoted to the calculus of relations. The algebra of classes, or as we shall call it, the Boole-Schroder algebra, is the system developed in the next chapter. 170 We have somewhat elabo rated the theory of functions, but in all essential respects, we give the algebra as it appears in Schroder. There are two differences of some importance between Schroder s procedure and the one we have adopted. Schroder s assumptions are in terms of the relation of subsumption, c , instead of the relations of logical product and =; which appear in our postulates. And, second, Schroder gives and discusses the various methods of his predecessors, as well as those characteristically his own. The calculus of propositions (Aussagenkalkid) is the extension of the Boole-Schroder algebra to propositions by a method which differs little from that adopted in Chapter IV, Section I, of this book. The discussion of relations is based upon the work of Peirce. But Peirce s methods are much more precisely formulated by Schroder, and the scope of the calculus is much extended. We summarize the funda mental propositions which Schroder gives for the sake of comparison both with Peirce and with the procedure we shall adopt in Sections II and III of Chapter IV. 1) A, B, C, D, E . . symbolize "elements" or individuals. 171 These are distinct from one another and from 0. I 1 symbolizes the universe of individuals or the universe of discourse of the first order. 3) 2, j, k, /, m, n, p, q represent any one of the elements A, B, C, D, ... of I 1 . 4) I 1 = Sri 70 For an excellent summary by Schroder, see Abriss der Algebra der Logik ; ed. Dr. Eugen Miillor, 1909-10. Parts i and n, covering Vols. i and n of Schroder s Vorlesungen, have so far appeared. 171 The propositions here noted will be found in Vorksungen uber die Algebra der Logik, in, 3-42. Many others, and much discussion of theory, have been omitted. 112 A Survey of Symbolic Logic 5) i : j represents any two elements, i and j, of I 1 in a determined order. 6) (i = j) = (i : j = j : i), (i 4= j) - ( : j * j : for every z and j. 7) i:j*0 Pairs of elements of I 1 may be arranged in a "block": A:A, A:B, A:C, A:D, ... B:A, B:B, B:C, B:D, ... C:A, C:B, C : C, C : D, ... D :A, D:B, D:C, D:D, These are the "individual binary relatives". I 2 = (A : A) + (A : B) + (A : C) + . + (B : A) + (B : B) + (B : C) + . . + (C : A) + (C : B) + (C : C) + . . I 2 represents the universe of binary relatives. 10) I 2 = S,-S,- (i : j) = S t -S,- (i :j) = S iy (i : j) 9) and 10) may be summarized in a simpler notation: 1 = Ziji :j = A :A+A :B + A :C+ ... + B :A + B :B + B : C+ . 11) + C :A + C :B + C : C+ ... + ........ 12) i :j : h will symbolize an "individual ternary relative". 13) 1 = S^SyS,- (i : j : A) = 2 A t:j:A Various types of ternary relatives are 14) A : A : A, B : A : A, A : B : A, A : A : B, A : B : C It is obvious that we may similarly define individual relatives of the fourth, fifth, ... or any thinkable order. The Development of Symbolic Logic 113 The general form of a binary relative, a, is a = Sy an (i : j) where a i; is a coefficient whose value is 1 for those (i : j) pairs in which i has the relation a to j, and is otherwise 0. 1 == Ziii-.j = the null class of individual binary relatives. /= S t -/(i =j)(i:j) = 2i(i:i) 172 JV = S,- y (i=t= j)(i:j) (a b)ij = aij bij (a + 6) i? - = a, + &,-/ -a.-/ = (-a),-,- = -(a,y) (a 1 &);y = 2 A a,-* 6 A/ (a t 6), v = n* (a* + fe*,-) The general laws which govern propositional functions, or Aussagen- schemata, such as (ab) iit 2 h a ih b hi , U h (a ih + b hj ), II a a i} , S a a,-y, etc., are as follows : A u symbolizes any statement about u\ U U A U will have the value 1 in case, and only in case, A u = 1 for every u; 2 U A U will have the value 1 if there is at least one u such that A u == 1. That is to say, U U A U means "A u for every u" t and 2 U A U means " A u for some u". a) U u A u cA v c2 u A u , -[2uA u ]c-A v c-[U u A u ] j8) K U A U = A V U V A U1 2 U A U = A v + 2 U A U (The subscript u, in a and 0, represents any value of the variable u.) 7) -[n u ,4 u ] = 2 U -/i u , -[s^ ] = n u -A* d) If ^4 M is independent of u, then U U A U = A, and S u .4 tt = A. e) U u (AcB u ) = (Acn u B u ), U u (A u cB) = (2 u A u cB) r) n, r or n M n,(^ M c5 i; ) = (2 u ^l M cn y 5 v ) 77) 2 u (A u cB) = (n u A u cB), 2 u (AcB u ) = (Ac2 u B u ) 0) S f , or 2 u 2 v (A u cB v ) = (H u A u c2,B 9 ) I n w (.-i w = i) = (n u .4 = i), n u (,i u = 0) = (z M ,i M = o) \2u(A u = 0) = (n u /l u = 0), S B (.4 == 1) = (S tt .4 = 1) 172 We write I_ where Schroder has 1 ; N where he has ; (a | 6) for (a; 6); (a f 6) for (a j 6); -a for a; <-a for a. 9 114 A Survey of Symbolic Logic \ (U U A U c U U B U ) K ) H u (A u cB u )c] [ (S.4 tt c Z U (The reader should note that U U (A U ^B U ) is "formal implication", in Principia Mathematica, (x).<px o\f/x.) X) A 2 U B U = S M A B U) A + U U B U = U U (A + B u ) //) (2 U A U )(2 V B V ) = S ttf A u B V) II U A U + U V B V = n, V (A U + B v ) yl n u M = n u A B u , A + 2 U B U = ? U (A + B u ) ) (U U A U )(U V B V ) = U U , V A U B V = U U A U B U , o) 2 u n^4 M , v c Ii v S u A u , v From these fundamental propositions, the whole theory of relations is developed. Though Schroder carries this much further than Peirce, the general outlines are those of Peirce s calculus. Perhaps the most inter esting of the new items of Schroder s treatment are the use of "matrices" in the form of the two-dimensional array of individual binary relatives, and the application of the calculus of relatives to Dedekind s theory of "chains ", as contained in Was sind und was sollen die Zahlen. Notable contributions to the Boole-Schroder algebra were made by Anton Poretsky in his three papers, Sept lois fondamentales de la theorie des egalites logiques (1899), Quelques lois ulterieures de la theorie des egalites logiques (1901), and Theorie des non-egalites logiques (1904). (With his earlier works, published in Russian, 1881-87, we are not familiar.) Poret- sky s Law of Forms, Law of Consequences, and Law of Causes will be given in Chapter II. As Couturat notes, Schroder had been influenced overmuch by the analogies of the algebra of logic to other algebras, and these papers by Poretsky outline an entirely different procedure which, though based on the same fundamental principles, is somewhat more "natural" to logic. Poretsky s method is the perfection of that type of procedure adopted by Jevons and characteristic of the use of the Venn diagrams. The work of Frege, though intrinsically important, has its historical interest largely through its influence upon Mr. Bertrand Russell. Although the Begrifsschrift (1879) and the Grundlagen der Arithmetik (1884) both The Development of Symbolic Logic 115 precede Schroder s Vorlesungen, Frege is hardly more than mentioned there; and his influence upon Peano and other contributors to the Formu- laire is surprisingly small when one considers how closely their task is re lated to his. Frege is concerned explicitly with the logic of mathematics but, in thorough German fashion, he pursues his analyses more and more deeply until we have not only a development of arithmetic of unprecedented rigor but a more or less complete treatise of the logico-metaphysical problems concerning the nature of number, the objectivity of concepts, the relations of concepts, symbols, and objects, and many other subtleties. In a sense, his fundamental problem is the Kantian one of the nature of the judgments involved in mathematical demonstration. Judgments are analytic, de pending solely upon logical principles and definitions, or they are synthetic. His thesis, that mathematics can be developed wholly by analytic judg ments from premises which are purely logical, is likewise the thesis of Russell s Principles of Mathematics. And Frege s Grundgesetee der Arith- metik, like Principia Mathematica, undertakes to establish this thesis for arithmetic by producing the required development. Besides the precision of notation and analysis, Frege s work is important as being the first in which the nature of rigorous demonstration is suf ficiently understood. His proofs proceed almost exclusively by substitu tion for variables of values of those variables, and the substitution of defined equivalents. Frege s notation, it must be admitted is against him: it is almost diagrammatic, occupying unnecessary space and carrying the eye here and there in a way which militates against easy understanding. It is probably this forbidding character of his medium, combined with the unprecedented demands upon the reader s logical subtlety, which accounts for the neglect which his writings so long suffered. But for this, the revival of logistic proper might have taken place ten years earlier, and dated from Frege s Grundlagen rather than Peano s Formulaire. The publication, beginning in 1894, of Peano s Formulaire de Mathe- matiques marks a new epoch in the history of symbolic logic. Heretofore, the investigation had generally been carried on from an interest in exact logic and its possibilities, until, as Schroder remarks, we had an elaborated instrument and nothing for it to do. With Peano and his collaborators, the situation is reversed : symbolic logic is investigated only as the instrument of mathematical proof. As Peano puts it: 173 " The laws of logic contained in what follows have generally been found 173 Formulaire, i (1901), 9. 116 A Survey of Symbolic Logic by formulating, in the form of rules, the deductions which one comes upon in mathematical demonstrations." The immediate result of this altered point of view is a new logic, no less elaborate than the old destined, in fact, to become much more elabo rate but with its elaboration determined not from abstract logical con siderations or by any mathematical prettiness, but solely by the criterion of application. De Morgan had said that algebraists and geometers live in "a higher realm of syllogism": it seems to have required the mathe matical intent to complete the rescue of logic from its traditional inanities. The outstanding differences of the logic of Peano from that of Peirce and Schroder are somewhat as follows: m (1) Careful enunciation of definitions and postulates, and of possible alternative postulates, marking an increased emphasis upon rigorous deductive procedure in the development of the system. (2) The prominence of a new relation, e, the relation of a member of a class to the class. (3) The prominence of the idea of a prepositional function and of "formal implication" and " formal equivalence", as against "material implication" and "material equivalence". (4) Recognition of the importance of "existence" and of the properties of classes, members of classes, and so on, with reference to their "existence". (5) The properties of relations in general are not studied, and "relative addition" does not appear at all, but various special relations, prominent in mathematics, are treated of. The disappearance of the idea of relation in general is a real loss, not a gain. (6) The increasing use of substitution (for a variable of some value in its range) as the operation which gives proof. We here recognize those characteristics of symbolic logic which have since been increasingly emphasized. The publication of Principia Mathematica would seem to have deter mined the direction of further investigation to follow that general direction indicated by the work of Frege and the Formulaire. The Principia is con cerned with the same topics and from the same point of view. But we see here a recognition of difficulties not suggested in the Formulaire, a deeper and more lengthy analysis of concepts and a corresponding complexity of procedure. There is also more attention to the details of a rigorous method of proof. 174 All these belong also to the Logica Mathematica of C. Burali Forti (Milan, 1894). The Development of Symbolic Logic 117 The method by which the mathematical logic of Principia Mathematica is developed will be discussed, so far as we can discuss it, in the concluding section of Chapter IV. We shall be especially concerned to point out the connection, sometimes lost sight of, between it and the older logic of Peirce and Schroder. And the use of this logic as an instrument of mathematical analysis will be a topic in the concluding chapter. CHAPTER II THE CLASSIC, OR BOOLE-SCHRODER, ALGEBRA OF LOGIC I. GENERAL CHARACTER OF THE ALGEBRA. THE POSTULATES AND THEIR INTERPRETATION The algebra of logic, in its generally accepted form, is hardly old enough to warrant the epithet "classic". It was founded by Boole and given its present form by Schroder, who incorporated into it certain emendations which Jevons had proposed and certain additions particularly the relation "is contained in" or " implies" which Peirce had made to Boole s system. It is due to Schroder s sound judgment that the result is still an algebra, simpler yet more powerful than Boole s calculus. Jevons, in simplifying Boole s system, destroyed its mathematical form; Peirce, retaining the mathematical form, complicated instead of simplifying the original calculus. Since the publication of Schroder s Vorlesungen uber die Algebra der Logik certain additions and improved methods have been offered, the most notable of which are contained in the studies of Poretsky and in Whitehead s Uni versal Algebra. 1 But if the term "classic" is inappropriate at present, still we may venture to use it by way of prophecy. As Whitehead has pointed out, this system is a distinct species of the genus "algebra", differing from all other algebras so far discovered by its non-numerical character. It is certainly the simplest mathematical system with any wide range of useful applications, and there are indications that it will serve as the parent stem from which other calculuses of an important type will grow. Already sev eral such have appeared. The term "classic" will also serve to distinguish the Boole-Schroder Algebra from various other calculuses of logic. Some of these, like the system of Mrs. Ladd-Franklin, differ through the use of other relations than + , x , c , and = , and are otherwise equivalent 1 For Poretsky s studies, see Bibliography; also p. 114 above. See Whitehead s Uni versal Algebra, Bk. n. Whitehead introduced a theory of "discriminants" and a treatment of existential propositions by means of umbral letters. This last, though most ingenious and interesting, seems to me rather too complicated for use; and I have not made use of "discriminants ", preferring to accomplish similar results by a somewhat extended study of the coefficients in functions. 118 The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 119 that is to say, with a " dictionary" of equivalent expressions, any theorem of these systems may be translated into a theorem of the Boole-Schroder Algebra, and vice versa. Others are mathematically equivalent as far as they go, but partial. And some, like the calculus of classes in Principia Mathematica, are logically but not mathematically equivalent. And, finally, there are systems such as that of Mr. MacColl s Symbolic Logic which are neither mathematically nor logically equivalent. Postulates for the classic algebra have been given by Huntington, by Schroder (in the Abriss}, by Del Re, by Sheffer and by Bernstein. 2 The set here adopted represents a modification of Huntington s third set.* It has been chosen not so much for economy of assumption as for " natural ness" and obviousness. Postulated: A class K of elements a, b, c, etc., and a relation x such that: 1-1 If a and b are elements in K, then a x b is an element in K, uniquely determined by a and b. 1 2 For any element a, a x a = a. 1 3 For any elements a and 6, a x b = b x a. 1 4 For any elements a, b, and c, a x (b x c) = (a x 6) x c. 1 5 There is a unique element, 0, in K such that a x = for every ele ment a. 1 6 For every element a, there is an element, -a, such that 1-61 If x x-a = 0, then x xa = x, and 1-62 If y x a = y and y x -a = y, then y = 0. The element 1 and the relations + and c do not appear in the above. These may be defined as follows : 1-7 1 = -0 Def. 1-8 o + 6 = -(-ax-6) Def. 1-9 a c b is equivalent to a x6 = a Def. It remains to be proved that -a is uniquely determined by a, from which it will follow that 1 is unique and that a + b is uniquely determined by a and b. 2 See Bibl. 3 See "Sets of Independent Postulates for the Algebra of Logic", Trans. Amer. Math. Soc., v (1904), 288-309. Our set is got by replacing + in Huntington s set by x , and replacing the second half of G, which involves 1, by its analogue with 0. Thus 1 can be defined, and postulates E and H omitted. Postulate J is not strictly necessary. 120 A Survey of Symbolic Logic The sign of equality in the above has its usual mathematical meaning; j. e ., j = j is a relation such that if x = y and <p(x) is an unambiguous function in the system, then <p(x) and <p(y) are equivalent expressions and interchangeable. It follows from this that if $(x) is an ambiguous function in the system, and x = y, every determined value of ifr(x), expressible in terms of x, is similarly expressible in terms of y. Suppose, for example, that -a, "negative of a", is an ambiguous function of a. Still we may write -a to mean, not the function "negative of a" itself, but to mean some (any) determined value of that function any one of the negatives of a and if -a = b, then <p(-a) and <p(b) will be equivalent and interchangeable. This principle is important in the early theorems which involve negatives. We shall develop the algebra as an abstract mathematical system: the terms, a, b, c, etc., may be any entities which have the postulated properties, and x , + , and c may be any relations consistent with the postulates. But for the reader s convenience, we give two possible applications: (1) to the system of all, continuous and discontinuous, regions in a plane, the null-region included, and (2) to the logic of classes. 4 (1) For the first interpretation, a x b will denote the region common to a and b (their overlapping portion or portions), and a + b will denote that which is either a or 6 or both, a c b will represent the proposition, "Region a is completely contained in region b (with or without remainder)". will represent the null-region, contained in every region, and 1 the plane itself, or the "sum" { + } of all the regions in the plane. For any region a, -a will be the plane except a, all that is not-a. The postulates will then hold as follows: 1 1 If a and b are regions in the plane, the region common to a and b, a x b, is in the plane. If a and 6 do not overlap, then a x b is the null- region, 0. 1 2 For any region a, the region common to a and a, a x a, is a itself. 1 3 The region common to a and b is the region common to b and a. 1 4 The region common to a and b x c is the region common to a x b and c is the region common to all three. 1-5 The region common to any region a and the null-region, 0, is 0. 1 6 For every region a, there is its negative, -a, the region outside or 4 Both of these interpretations are more fully discussed in the next chapter. The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 121 not contained in a, and this region is such that 1-61 If -a and any region x have only the null-region in common, then the region common to x and a is x itself, or x is contained in a; and 1-62 If the region common to y and a is y, or y is contained in a, and the region common to y and -a is y, or y is contained in -a, then y must be the null-region which is contained in every region. That the definitions, 1-7, 1-8, and 1-9, hold, will be evident. (2) For the second interpretation, a, b, c, etc., will be logical classes, taken in extension that is, a = b will mean that a and b are classes composed of identically the same members, a x b will represent the class of those things which are members of a and of b both; a + b, those things which are either members of a or members of b or both, a c b will be the proposi tion that all members of a are also members of b, or that a is contained in b (with or without remainder). is the null-class or class of no members; and the convention is required that this class is contained in every class. 1 is the "universe of discourse" or the class w r hich contains every entity in the system. For any class a, -a represents the negative of a, or the class of all things which are not members of a. The postulates will hold as fol lows : 1-1 If a and b are logical classes, taken in extension, the members com mon to a and b constitute a logical class. In case a and b have no members in common, this class is the null-class, 0. 1-2 The members common to a and a constitute the class a itself. 1 3 The members common to a and b are the same as those common to b and a. 1 -4 The members common to a, b, and c, all three, are the same, whether we first find the members common to b and c and then those common to a and this class, or w r hether we first find the common members of a and b and then those common to this class and c. 1 5 The members common to any class a and the null-class are none, or the null-class. 1 6 For every class a, there is its negative, -a, constituted by all members of the " universe of discourse" not contained in a, and such that: 1-61 If -a and any class x have no members in common, 122 A Survey of Symbolic Logic then all members of x are common to x and a, or x is contained in a; and 1-62 If all members of any class y are common to y and a, and common also to y and -a, then y must be null. 1-7 The "universe of discourse", "everything", is the negative of the null-class, "nothing". 1 8 That which is either a or 6 or both is identical with the negative of that which is both not-a and not-6. 1-9 That "a is contained in b " is equivalent to "The class a is identical with the common members of a and b ". That the postulates are consistent is proved by these interpretations. In the form given, they are not independent, but they may easily be made so by certain alternations in the form of statement. 5 The following abbreviations and conventions will be used in the state ment and proof of theorems: 1. ax6 will generally be abbreviated to a b or a -b, ax(bxc) to a (be), ax-(6x-c) to a-(fc-c) or a--(&-c), etc. 2. In proofs, we shall sometimes mark a lemma which has been established as (1), or (2), etc., and thereafter in that proof refer to the lemma by this number. Also, we shall sometimes write "Q.E.D." instead of repeating the theorem to be proved. 3. The principles (postulates, definitions, or previous theorems) by which any step in proof is taken will usually be noted by a reference in square brackets, thus: If x = 0, then [1-5] a x = 0. Reference to principles whose use is more or less obvious will gradually be omitted as we proceed. Theorems will be numbered decimally, for greater convenience in the insertion of theorems without alteration of other numbers. The non- decimal part of the number will indicate some major division of theorems, as 1- indicates a postulate or definition. Theorems which have this digit and the one immediately following the decimal point in common will be different forms of the same principle or otherwise closely related. II. ELEMENTARY THEOREMS 2-1 If a = 6, then a c = b c and c a = c b. This follows immediately from the meaning of = and 1 1. v 2 2 a = b is equivalent to the pair, a c b and b c a. If a = 6, then [1-2] ab = a and b a = b. 6 On this point, compare with Huntington s set. The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 123 And if a b = a and b a = b, then [1 -3] a = a b = b a = b. But [1 -9] a b = a is equivalent to a c b and b a = b to 6 c a. Equality is, then, a reciprocal inclusion relation. 2-3 aca. a = a, hence [2-2] Q.E.D. Every element is "contained in" itself. 2-4 a -a = = -a a. [1-2] a a = a. Hence [2-1, 1-4, 1 -3] a -a = (a a) -a = a (a -a) = (a -a) a. Also [1-2] -a -a = -a. Hence a -a = a (-a -a) = (a -a) -a. But [1-62] if (a -a) a = (a -a) -a = a -a, then a -a = 0. And [1-3] -a a = a -a. Hence also, -a a = 0. Thus the product of any element into its negative is 0, and is the modulus of the operation x . / 2-5 a -b = is equivalent to a b = a and to a c b. If a b = a, then [1-4-5,. 2-1-4] a -b = (a b) -6 = a (b -b) And [1-61] if a -6 = 0, then ab = a (2) By (1) and (2), a -b = and ab = a are equivalent. And [1 9] a b = a is a c 6. We shall derive other equivalents of a c 6 later. The above is required immediately. In this proof, we have written "1-4-5" and "2-1-4" instead of "1-4, 1-5" and "2-1, 2-4". This kind of abbreviation in references will be continued. 2-6 If acO, then a = 0. If a cO, then [1-9] o-O = a. But [1-5] a-0 = 0. 2-7 If a c b, then a c c b c, and c a c c b. If acb, then [1-9] a b = a and [2-1] ( b) c = a c (1) But [1-2-3-4] (a b) c = (b a) c = b (ac) = (ac) b = [a (c c) b] = [(ac) c] b = (ac)(cb) = (ac)(bc) (2) Hence, by (1) and (2), if a c 6, then (a c)(b c) = ac and [1 -9] a c c b c. And [1-3] c a = ac and c b = b c. Hence also c a c c b. 2-8 -(-a) = a. [2-4] -(-a) --a - 0. Hence [2-5] -(-a) ca (1) By (1), -[-(-)] c-a. Hence [2-7] a- -[-(-a)] ca-a. 124 A Survey of Symbolic Logic But [2-4] a -a = 0. Hence a --[-(-a)] cO. Hence [2-G] a --[-(-a)] = and [2-5] a c-(-a) (2) [2-2] (1) and (2) are equivalent to -(-a) = a. 3-1 a c b is equivalent to -b c -a. [2-5] a c 6 is equivalent to a -6 = 0. And [2-8] a-b = -ba = -b-(-a). And -6 -(-a) = is equivalent to -b c-a. The terms of any relation c may be transposed by negating both. If region a is contained in region b, then the portion of the plane not in b is contained in the portion of the plane not in a: if all a s are 6 s, all non-6 s are non-a s. This theorem gives immediately, by 2-8, the two corollaries: 3-12 a c -b is equivalent to b c-a; and 3-13 -a c 6 is equivalent to -6 c a. 3-2 a = b is equivalent to -a = -6. [2-2] a = b is equivalent to (a cb and bed). [3-1] a cb is equivalent to -b c-a, and b ca to -a c-6. Hence a = b is equivalent to (-a c-b and -6 c-a), which is equiva lent to -a = -6. The negatives of equals are equals. By 2-8, we have also 3-22 a = -b is equivalent to -a = b. Postulate 1-6 does not require that the function "negative of" be unambiguous. There might be more than one element in the system having the properties postulated of -a. Hence in the preceding theorems, -a must be read "any negative of a ", -(-6) must be regarded as any one of the negatives of any given negative of 6, and so on. Thus what has been proved of -a, etc., has been proved to hold for every element related to a in the manner required by the postulate. But we can now demonstrate that for every element a there is one and only one element having the properties postulated of -a. 3-3 -a is uniquely determined by a. By 1-6, there is at least one element -a for every element a. Suppose there is more than one: let -a x and -a 2 represent any two such. Then [2-8] -(- Gl ) = a = -(-a 2 ). Hence [3-2] -a, = -a 2 . Since all functions in the algebra are expressible in terms of a, b, c, etc., the relation x , the negative, and 0, while is unique and a x b is uniquely The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 125 determined by a and b, it follows from 3-3 that all functions in the algebra are unambiguously determined when the elements involved are specified. (This would not be true if the inverse operations of "subtraction" and "division" were admitted.) 3-33 The element 1 is unique. [1-5] is unique, hence [3-3] -0 is unique, and [1-7] 1 = -0. 3-34 -1 = 0. [1-7] 1 = -0. Hence [3-2] Q.E.D. 3-35 If a and b are elements in K, a + 6 is an element in K uniquely deter mined by a and b. The theorem follows from 3.3, 1-1, and 1 8. 3-37 If a = 6, then a + c = b + c and c + a = c + b. The theorem follows from 3-35 and the meaning of =. , 3-4 -(a + 6) = -a -b. [1-8] a + b = -(-a -b). Hence [3-3, 2-8] -(a + b) = -[-(-a-b)} = -a -b. .3-41 -(a 6) = -a + -6. [1-8, 2-8] -a + -6 = -[-(-a) --(-6)] = -(a 6). 3-4 and 3-41 together state De Morgan s Theorem: The negative of a sum is the product of the negatives of the summands; and the negative of a product is the sum of the negatives of its factors. The definition 1-8 is a form of this theorem. Still other forms follow at once from 3-4 and 3-41, by 2-8: 3-42 -(-a + -b) = ab. 3-43 -(a + -6) = -ab. 3-44 -(-a + b) = a-b. 3-45 -(a-b) = -a + b. 3-46 -(-ab) = a + -b. From De Morgan s Theorem, together with the principle, 3-2, "The negatives of equals are equals", the definition 1-7, 1 = -0, and theorem 3-34, -1 = 0, it follows that for every theorem in terms of x there is a corresponding theorem in terms of + . If in any theorem, each element be replaced by its negative, and x and + be interchanged, the result is a valid theorem. The negative terms can, of course, be replaced by positive, 126 A Survey of Symbolic Logic since we can suppose x = -a, y = -b, etc. Thus for every valid theorem in the system there is another got by interchanging the negatives and 1 and the symbols x and + . This principle is called the Law of Duality. This law is to be illustrated immediately by deriving from the postulates their correlates in terms of + . The correlate of 1 1 is 3 35, already proved. 4-2 a + a = a. , [1-2] -a-a = -a. Hence [1-8, 3-2, 2-8] a + a = -(-a -a) = -(-a) = a. 4-3 a + b = b + a. [1-3] -a -b = -b -a. Hence [3-2] -(-a -6) = -(-6 -a). Hence [1-8] Q.E.D. 4-4 a + (b + c) = (a + b) + c. \1 4.1 n ( A ^\ - ( h\ Hence [3-2] -[-a (-b -c)} = -[(-a -6) -c]. But [3-46, 1-8] -[-a(-fc-c)] = a + -(-6-c) = a+(6 + c). And [3-45, 1-8] -[(-a-6)-c] = -(-a-b)+c = (a + b)+c. 4-5 a+1 = 1. [1-5] -a-0 = 0. Hence [3-2] -(-a-0) = -0. Hence [3-46] a + -0 = -0, and [1-7] a+1 = 1. 4-61 If -x + a = 1, then x a = x. If -x + a = 1, then [3-2-34-44] x -a = -(-z + a) =-1=0. And [2-5] x -a = is equivalent to x a = x. 4-612 If -a; + a = 1, then x + a = a. [4-61] If -a + x = 1, then a x = a, and [3-2] -a + -x = -a (1) By (1) and 2-8, if -x + a = 1, x + a = a. 4-62 If y + a = y and y + -a = y, then y = 1. If y + a = y, [3-2] -y -a = -(y + a) = -y. And if y + -a = y, -y a = -(y + -a) = -y. But [1-62] if -y a = -y and -y -a = -y, -y = and y = -0 = 1. 4-8 a + -a = l=-a + a. (Correlate of 2-4) [2-4] -a a = 0. Hence [3-2] a + -a = -(-a a) =-0 = 1. Thus the modulus of the operation + is 1. 4-9 -a + 6 = 1, a + b = b, a -6 = 0, a b = a, and a c b are all equivalent. [2 5] a -b 0, a 6 = a, and a cb are equivalent. [3-2] -a + 6 = 1 is equivalent to a -b = -(-a + b) =-1=0. n -M,V) The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 127 [4-612] If -a + b = 1, a + b = b. And if a + b = b, [3 37] -a + b = -a + (a + b) = (-a + a) + 6 = 1+6 = 1. Hence a + b = b is equivalent to -a + b = 1. We turn next to further principles which concern the relation c . 5-1 If a c 6 and b cc, then ace. [1-9] a cb is equivalent to a b = a, and 6 cc to b c = b. If a b = a and b c = b, a c = (a b) c = a (b c) = a b = a. But a c = a is equivalent to a c c. This law of the transitivity of the relation c is called the Principle of the Syllogism. It is usually included in any set of postulates for the algebra which are expressed in terms of the relation c . v 5-2 a b ca and ab cb. (a b) a = a (a b) = (a a) b = a b. But (a b) a = a b is equivalent to ab ca. Similarly, (a b) b = a (b b) = a b, and ab cb. 5-21 a c a + b and b ca + b. [5 2] -a -b c -a and -a -b c -b. Hence [3-12] ac-(-a-b) and 6c-(-a-6). But -(-a -b) = (a + b). Note that 5-2 and 5-21 are correlates by the Law of Duality. In general, having now deduced the fundamental properties of both x and + , we shall give further theorems in such pairs. A corollary of 5-21 is: 5-22 a b ca + b. [5- 1-2- 21] 5-3 If a c b and c c d, then a c c b d. [1-9] If a c b and c cd, then a b = a and c d = c. Hence (a c) (b d) = (a b) (c d) = a c, and a c c b d. 5-31 If a c b and c c d, then a + c c b + d. If a c 6 and c cd, [3-1] -b c -a and -d c -c. Hence [5-3] -b-dc-a-c, and [3-1] -(-a -c) c-(-fc-d). Hence [1-8] Q.E.D. By the laws, aa = a and a + a = a, 5-3 and 5-31 give the corollaries: 5-32 If a c c and b cc, then ab cc. 128 A Survey of Symbolic Logic 5-33 If a c c and b c c, then a + 6 c c. 5-34 If a c 6 and ace, then a cb c. 5-35 If a c 6 and ace, then a c 6 + c. 5-37 If a c6, then a + c c6 + c. (Correlate of 2-7) [2-3]cce. Hence [5-31] Q.E.D. 5-4 a + ab = a. [5-21] aca + ab (1) [2-3] a c a, and [5-2] ab ca. Hence [5 33] a + a 6 c a (2) [2-2] If (1) and (2), then Q.E.D. 5-41 a (a + b) = a. [5-4] -a + -a-b = -a. Hence [3-2] -(-a + -a-b) = -(-a) = a. But [3-4] -(-a + --&) = a --(-a -6) =0(0 + 6). 5-4 and 5-41 are the two forms of the Law of Absorption. We have next to prove the Distributive Law, which requires several lemmas. 5-5 a (b + c) = ab + ac. Lemma 1: ab + acca(b + c). [5-2] a6ca and acca. Hence [5-33] a b + a c ca (1) [5-2] a b c b and a c c c. But [5-21] b c 6 + c and c c b + c. Hence [5-1] a b c b + c and ac cb + c. Hence [5 33] a b + a c c 6 + c (2) [5-34] If (1) and (2), then a b + a c ca (b + c). Lemma 2 : If p c q is false, then there is an element x, 4= 0, such that x c p and x c -q. p-q is such an element, for [5-2] p-qcp and p-qc-q- and [4-9] if p-q = 0, then pcq, hence if p c q is false, then p -q 4= 0. (This lemma is introduced in order to simplify the proof of Lemma 3.) Lemma 3 : a (6 + c) c b + a c. Suppose this false. Then, by lemma 2, there is an element x, 4= 0, such that xca(b + c) (1) and .TC-(6 + ac) But [3-12] if xc-(b + ac), then b + acc-x (2) [5-1] If (1), then since [5-2] o (6 + oc) co, z co (3) and also, since a(6 + a c) c 6 + c, .r c 6 + c (4) [5-1] If (2), then since [5-21] b cb + a c, b c -x and [3-12] xc-b (5) Also [5 1] if (2), then since [5 21] a c c b + a c, a c c -x and [3-12] zc-(oc) (6) The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 129 From (6) and (3), it follows that xcc must be false; for if .TCC and (3) x c a, then [5 34] x c a c. But if x c a c and (6) x c -(a c), then [1-62] x = 0, which contradicts the hypothesis x 4= 0. But if x c c be false, then by lemma 2, there is an element y, 4= 0, such that ycx (7) and ?/c-c, or [3-12] cc-y (8) [5-1] If (7) and (5), then y c-b and [3-12] bc-y (9) If (8) and (9), then [5-33] b + cc-y and [3-12] yc-(b + c) (10) If (7) and (4), then [5-1] ycb + c (11) [1-9] If (11), then y(b + c) =y, and if (10), y~(b + c) = y (12) But if (12), then [1-62] y = 0, which contradicts the condition, y *0. Hence the supposition that a(b + c)cb + ac be false is a false supposition, and the lemma is established. Lemma 4 : a(b + c)cab + ac. By lemma 3, a (b + c) c b + a c. Hence [2-7] a [a (b + c)] c a (b + a c) . But a [a (b + c)] = (a a)(b + c) = a (b + c). And a (b + a c) = a (a c + b). Hence a (b + c) c a (a c + b). But by lemma 3, a (a c + b) c a c + a b. And a c + a b = a b + a c. Hence a (b + c) c a b + a c. Proof of the theorem: [2-2] Lemma 1 and lemma 4 are together equiva lent to a (b + c) = a b + a c. This method of proving the Distributive Law is taken from Huntington, "Sets of Independent Postulates for the Algebra of Logic ". The proof of the long and difficult lemma 3 is due to Peirce, who worked it out for his paper of 1880 but mislaid the sheets, and it was printed for the first time in Huntington s paper. 6 5-51 (a + b)(c + d) = (a c + b c) + (a d + b d). [5 5] (a + b)(c + d) = (a + b) c + (a + b) d = (a c + b c) + (a d + b d). 5-52 a + b c = (a + b)(a + c). (Correlate of 5 5) [5-51] (a + b) (a + c) = (a a + b a) + (a c + b c) = [(a + a b) + a c] + b c. But [5-4] (a + a b) + a c = a + a c = a. Hence Q.E.D. Further theorems which are often useful in working the algebra and which follow readily from the preceding are as follows: 6 See "Sets of Independent Postulates, etc.", loc. rit., p. 300, footnote. 10 130 A Survey of Symbolic Logic 5-6 a-1 = a = 1 -a. [1-5] a-0 = 0. Hence a--l = 0. But [1-01] if a--l = 0, then a-1 = a. 5-61 acl. [1-9] Since a-1 = a, acl. -a--0 = -a-1 = -a. Hence [3 2] a + = -(-a--0) = -(-a) = a. 5-63 Oca. 0-a = a-0 = 0. Hence [1-9] Q.E.D. 5-64 1 ca is equivalent to a = 1. [2-2] a = 1 is equivalent to the pair, acl and 1 ca. But [5-61] a c 1 holds always. Hence Q.E.D. 5-65 a c is equivalent to a = 0. [2 2] a = is equivalent to the pair, a c and c a. But [5-63] ca holds always. Hence Q.E.D. 5-7 If a + 6 = a; and a = 0, then 6 = x. If a = 0, a + 6 = + 6 = 6. 5-71 If a 6 = x and a = 1, then 6 = x. If a = 1, a 6 = 1-6 = 6. 5-72 a + 6 = is equivalent to the two equations, a = and 6 = 0. If a = and 6 = 0, then a + 6 = + = 0. And if a + 6 = 0, -a -6 = -(a + 6) = -0 = 1. But if -a -6 = 1, a = a-1 = a(-a -6) = (a -a) -6 = 0--6 = 0. And [5-7] if a + 6 = and a = 0, then 6 = 0. 5-73 a 6 = 1 is equivalent to the two equations, a = 1 and 6 = 1. If a == 1 and 6 = 1, then a 6 = 1 - 1 = 1. And if a 6 = 1, -a + -6 = -(a 6) =-1=0. Hence [5-72] -a = and -6 = 0. But [3-2] if -a = 0, a == 1, and if -6 = 0, 6 = 1. 5-7 and 5-72 are important theorems of the algebra. 5-7, "Any null term of a sum may be dropped", would hold in almost any system; but 5-72, "If a sum is null, each of its summands is null", is a special law characteristic of this algebra. It is due to the fact that the system con tains no inverses with respect to + and 0. a and -a are inverses with The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 131 respect to x and and with respect to + and 1. 5-71 and 5-73, the correlates of 5-7 and 5-72, are less useful. 5-8 a (b + -b) = a b + a -b = a. [5-5] a (b + -6) = a b + a -b. And [4-8] b + -b = 1. Hence a (b + -b) = a-l = a. 5-85 a + b = a + -a b. [5-8] b = ab + -ab. Hence a + b = a + (a b + -a b) = (a + a b) + a flb. But [5-4] a + a b = a. Hence Q.E.D. It will be convenient to have certain principles, already proved for two terms or three, in the more general form which they can be given by the use of mathematical induction. Where the method of such extension is obvious, proof will be omitted or indicated only. Since both x and + are associative, we can dispense with parentheses by the definitions: 5-901 a + b + c=(a + b)+c Def. 5-902 abc = (ab) c Def. 5-91 a = a (b + -b) (c + -c) (d + -d) . . . [5-8] 5-92 1 - (a + -a)(6 + -6)(c + -c)... [4-8] 5-93 a = a + ab + ac + ad+... [5-4] 5 93 1 a = a (a + b) (a + c) (a + d) . . . [5-41] 5-94 a (b + c + d + ...) = ab + ac + ad+ ... [5-5] 5-941 a + bcd.,.. --= (a + b)(a + c)(a + d) . . . [5-52] 5-95 -(a + b + c + . . . ) = -a -b -c ... If the theorem hold for n terms, so that -(ai + a 2 + . . . + a n ) = -a-i -a z . . . -a n then it will hold for n + 1 terms, for by 3-4, And [3-4] the theorem holds for two terms. Hence it holds for any number of terms. 132 A Survey of Symbolic Logic 5-951 -(a bed...) = -a + -b + -c + -d+ . . . Similar proof, using 3-41. 5-96 1 = a + b + c + . . . +-a-b -c . . . [4-8, 5-951] 5-97 a + b + c + . . . = is equivalent to the set, a = 0, 6 = 0, c = 0, . . . [5-72] 5-971 abed... --= 1 is equivalent to the set, a == 1, b = 1, c = I, . . . [5-73] 5-98 a-b c d . . . =ab-ac-ad... [1-2] a a a a . . . = a. 5-981 a + (b + c + d + . . . ) = (a + b) + (a + c) + (a + d) + . . . [4-2] a + a + a + . . . = a. The extension of De Morgan s Theorem by 5-95 and 5-951 is especially important. 5-91, 5-92, and 5-93 are different forms of the principle by which any function may be expanded into a sum and any elements not originally involved in the function introduced into it. Thus any expression whatever may be regarded as a function of any given elements, even though they do not appear in the expression, a peculiarity of the algebra. 5-92, the expression of the universe of discourse in any desired terms, or expansion of 1, is the basis of many important procedures. The theorems 5-91-5-981 are valid only if the number of elements involved be finite, since proof depends upon the principle of mathematical induction. III. GENERAL PROPERTIES OF FUNCTIONS We may use/Or), $(x, y), etc., to denote any expression which involves only members of the class K and the relations x and + . The further requirement that the expression represented by /(.r) should involve x or its negative, -x, that $0, y) should involve x or -.r and y or -y, is unnecessary, for if .r and -x do not appear in a given expression, there is an equivalent expression in which they do appear. By 5-91, a = a (x + -.r) = a x + a -x = (a x + a -x) (y + -?/) = axy + ax-y + a-xy + a -x -y, etc. a x + a -x may be called the expansion, or development, of a with reference to x. And any or all terms of a function may be expanded with reference to x, the result expanded with reference to y, and so on for any elements and any number of elements. Hence any expression involving only ele- The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 133 ments in K and the relations x and + may be treated as a function of any elements whatever. If we speak of any a such that x = a as the "value of x ", then a value of x being given, the value of any function of x is determined, in this algebra as in any other. But functions of .r in this system are of two types: (1) those whose value remains constant, however the value of x may vary, and (2) those such that any value of the function being assigned, the value of x is thereby determined, within limits or completely. Any function which is symmetrical with respect to x and -x will belong to the first of these classes; in general, a function which is not completely symmetrical with respect to x and -x will belong to the second. But it must be remembered, in this connection, that a symmetrical function may not look symmetrical unless it be completely expanded with reference to each of the elements involved. For example, a + -a b + -b is symmetrical with respect to a and -a and with respect to b and -b. Ex panding the first and last terms, we have a (b + -b) + - b + (a + -a) -b = a b + a -b + -a b + -a -b = 1 whatever the value of a or of b. Any function in which an element, .r, does not appear, but into which it is introduced by expanding, will be symmetrical with respect to x and -x. The decision what elements a given expression shall be considered a function of is, in this algebra, quite arbitrary except so far as it is deter mined by the form of result desired. The distinction between coefficients and "variables" or "unknowns" is not fundamental. In fact, we shall frequently find it convenient to treat a given expression first as a function- say of x and y, then as a function of z, or of x alone. In general, coef ficients will be designated by capital letters. The Normal Form of a Function. Any function of one variable, /(.r), can be given the form A x + B -x where A and B are independent of x. This is the normal form of functions of one variable. 6 1 Any function of one variable, /(.r), is such that, for some A and some B which are independent of .r, /(.r) = A x + B -x 134 A Survey of Symbolic Logic Any expression which involves only elements in the class K and the relations x and + will consist either of a single term a single element, or elements related by x or of a sum of such terms. Only four kinds of such terms are possible: (1) those which involve x, (2) those which involve -x, (3) those which involve both, and (4) those which involve neither. 7 Since the Distributive Law, 5 5, allows us to collect the coefficients of x, of -x and of (x -x), the most general form of such an expres sion is px + q -x + r (x -x) + s where p, q, r, and s are independent of x and -x. But [2-4] r(x-x) = r-0 - 0. And [5-9] s = s x + s -x. Hence px + q -x + r (x -x) + s = (p + s) x + (q + s) -x. Therefore, A = p + s, B = q + s, gives the required reduction. The normal form of a function of n + 1 variables, C 2 , X n , +! may be defined as the expansion by the Distributive Law of f(Xi, X 2 , ... X n ) -X n +i +/ (.Tl, .T 2 , . . . X n ) -X n+ i where/ and/ are each some function of the n variables, Xi, x*>, ... x n , and in the normal form. This is a "step by step" definition; the normal form of a function of two variables is defined in terms of the normal form of functions of one variable; the normal form of a function of three variables in terms of the normal form for two, and so on. 8 Thus the normal form of a function of two variables, $(x, y), will be found by expanding (A x + B -x) y+(Cx + D -x) -y It will be, Axy + B -x y + C x -y + D -x -y The normal form of a function of three variables, ty(x, y, z), will be Axyz + B-xyz + Cx-yz + D-x-yz + Exy-z + F-xy-z + G x -y -z + II -x -y -2 And so on. Any function in the normal form will be fully developed with 7 By a term which "involves" x is meant a term which either is x or has x "as a factor". But "factor" seems inappropriate in an algebra in which h x is always contained in x, h x ex. 8 This definition alters somewhat the usual order of terms in the normal form of func tions. But it enables us to apply mathematical induction and thus prove theorems of a generality not otherwise to be attained. The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 135 reference to each of the variables involved that is, each variable, or its negative, will appear in every term. 6-11 Any function may be given the normal form. (a) By (> 1 , any function of one variable may be given the normal form. (6) If functions of n variables can be given the normal form, then functions of n + 1 variables can be given the normal form, for, Let $(1, Xz, ... x n , Xn+i) be any function of n + 1 variables. By definition, its normal form will be equivalent to f(Xi, Xz, ... X n ) Xn+l +f (Xi, X Z , ... X n ) -Xn+l wLere / and / are functions of x\, x 2 , ... x n and in the normal form. By the definition of a function, $(#1, x 2) . . . x n , x n +i) may be re garded as a function of x n +i. Hence, by 6-1, for some A and some B which are independent of x n ^ i $(Xi, Xz, . . . X n , Xn+l) = A X n+ i + B -X n +l Also, by the definition of a function, for some/ and some/ 7 A = f(xi, x 2 , ... x n ) and B = / r (xi, Xz, . . . x n ) Hence, for some / and / which are independent of x n +\ &(Xi, X 2 , . . . X n , Xn+l) f(Xi, -To, . . . X n ) X n +l + / (.Ti, X Zt X n )Xn+l Therefore, if the functions of n variables, / and / , can be given the normal form, then $(0*1, Xz, . . . x n > x n +\) can be given the normal form. (c) Since functions of one variable can be given the normal form, and since if functions of n variables can be given the normal form, functions of n + 1 variables can be given the normal form, therefore functions of any number of variables can be given the normal form. The second step, (6), in the above proof may seem arbitrary. That it is valid, is due to the nature of functions in this algebra. 6-12 For a function of n variables, &(xi, x 2 , . . - x n ), the normal form will be a sum of 2 n terms, representing all the combinations of x it positive or negative, with x z , positive or negative, with . . . with .r n , positive or negative, each term having its coefficient. 136 A Survey of Symbolic Logic (a) A normal form function of one variable has two terms, and by definition of the normal form of functions of n + 1 variables, if functions of k variables have 2* terms, a function of k + 1 variables will have 2 k + 2 k , or 2 A+1 , terms. (b) A normal form function of one variable has the further character described in the theorem; and if normal form functions of k variables have this character, then functions of k -f- 1 variables will have it, since, by definition, the normal form of a function of k + 1 variables will -consist of the combinations of the (k + l)st variable, positive or negative, with each of the combinations repre sented in functions of k variables. Since any coefficient may be 0, the normal form of a function may con tain terms which are null. Where no coefficient for a term appears, the coefficient is, of course, 1. The order of terms in the normal form of a function will vary as the order of the variables in the argument of the function is varied. For example, the normal form of 3>(x, y) is, by defini tion, A x y + B -x y + C x -y + D -x -y and the normal form of V(y, x) is P yx + Q-yx + Ry-x + S-y -x Except for the coefficients, these differ only in the order of the terms and order of the elements in the terms. And since + and x are both associa tive and commutative, such a difference is not material. 6-15 Any two functions of the same variables can differ materially only in the coefficients of the terms. The theorem follows immediately from 6-12. In consequence of 6-15, we can, without loss of generality, assume that, for any two normal form functions of the same variables with which we may be concerned, the order of terms and the order of variables in the arguments of the functions is the same. And also, in any function of n + 1 variables, 3>( Xl , x 2 , . . . x n , .r n+1 ), which is equated to /Ol, .1-2, . . . Xn) X n+1 +f (X,, .To, . . . X n ) -X n +l x n+l may be any chosen one of the n + 1 variables. The convention that it is always the last is consistent with complete generality of the proofs. 6-17 The product of any two terms of a function in the normal form is null. The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 137 By 6-12, for any two terms of a function in the normal form, there will be some variable, x n , such that x n is positive in one of them and negative in the other; since otherwise the two terms would represent the same combination of x\ t positive or negative, with 0*2, positive or negative, etc. Consequently, the product of any two terms will involve a factor of the form x n -or n , and will therefore be null. Unless otherwise specified, it will be presumed hereafter that any func tion mentioned is in the normal form. The Coefficients in a Function. The coefficients in any function can be expressed in terms of the function itself. 6-21 If f(x) = A y. + 11 -.r, then /(I) = A. For /(I) = A-1 + U--1 = A + B-0 = A. 6-22 If /(.r) = A x + B -.r, then /(O) = B. For/(0) = A-O + B-Q = + 7M == B. 6-23 /(.r) =/(!) a; +/(0)~z. The theorem follows immediately from 6-1, 0-21 and 0-22. These laws, first stated by Boole, are very useful in reducing compli cated expressions to normal form. For example, if ^(.r) = a c (d x + -d -x) + (c + .r) d reduction by any other method would be tedious. But we have *(1) = ac (VM+-d-0) + (c+l) d = acd+cd+d = d and *(0) = a c (d-Q + -rf-1) + (c + 0) d = a c -d + c d Hence the normal form of ty(x) is given by \F(.r) = d x + (a c -d + c d) -x Laws analogous to 6-23, also stated by Boole, may be given for functions of more than one variable. For example, /(.r, y) = /(I, l)-x y +/(0, 1) -a y +/(!, 0) -.r -y +/((), 0) -.* -// and $(.r, y, z) = $(1, 1, l)-.r ?/ z + $(0, 1, 1) -.)* y z + <I>(1, 0, l)-x-ijz + $(0,0, l)--.r-z/2+ $(1, l,0)-.r z/-s + $(0, 1,0) --.r y-z + $(1, 0, 0) x -y -z + $(0, 0, 0) -.r -// -z We can prove that this method of determining the coefficients extends to functions of anv number of variables. 138 A Surrey of Symbolic Logic 6-24 If C { f be any term of ^(.TI, xz, x 3 , ... #)> then I -.TI -.i- 2 -.r 3 . . . -x n J ^ -j [- will be the coefficient, C. I 0, 0, 0, ... J (a) By 6-23, the theorem holds for functions of one variable. (6) If the theorem hold for functions of A* variables, it will hold for functions of k + 1 variables, for, By 6-11, any function of k + 1 variables, $(#1, Xz, ... .T*, . is such that, for some / and some / , * 0, 0, ... j Therefore, if every term of / be of the form {1,1, ... ll f .n xz... x k \ J I 0, 0, ... j I -x, -x 2 . . . -x k } then every term of $ in which x k+ i is positive will be of the form f fi,i,...ii r x, x^.. x k \ ] I 0, 0, ... J I -.n -x 2 . . . -x k J and the coefficient of any such term will be / \ r , which, (^ U, U, ... U J And similarly, if every term of / be of the form .,f 1,1, ... 11 I 0, 0, ... j -.rj -,r, . . . -x t j then every term of * in which x/,+i is negative will be of the form fl, 1, ... l| f . Tl x,... .r t l Mo.o,. .ol i-.,,-.,,. .-,,| - The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 139 and the coefficient of any such term will be / f , which, Hence every term of < will be of the form r 1,1,. ..MI r x 2 ... . I 0, 0, ... 0, j I -.?! -.r 2 . . . -x k -x k+l (c) Since the theorem holds for functions of one variable, and since if it hold for functions of k variables, it will hold for functions of k + 1 variables, therefore it holds for functions of any number of variables. For functions of one variable, further laws of the same type as 6-23 but less useful have been given by Peirce and Schroder. If f(x) = Ax + B-x: 6-25 /(I) = f(A + B) = f(-A + -B). 6-26 /(()) =f(A-B) =f(-A-B). 6-27 j(A) = A + B =/(-J8) = f(A-B) =f(A+-B) 6-28 f(B) = A-B = /(-4) = f(-A-B) = f(-A + B) The proofs of these involve no difficulties and may be omitted. In theorems to be given later, it will be convenient to denote the coef ficients in functions of the form $(.?!, x 2 , . . . x n ) by A\, A z , A 3 , . . . A^, or by Ci, C 2 , C 3 , . . ., etc. This notation is perfectly definite, since the order of terms in the normal form of a function is fixed. If the argument of any function be (a*i, .r 2 , . . . x n ), then any one of the variables, x k , will be positive in the term of which C m is the coefficient in case p-2 k ~ l < m ^ (p + l)-2 k ~ l where p = any even integer (including 0). Otherwise .r^ will be negative in the term. Thus it may be determined, for each of the variables in the function, whether it is positive or negative in the term of which C m is the coefficient, and the term is thus completely specified. We make no use of this law, except that it validates the proposed notation. Occasionally it will be convenient to distinguish the coefficients of those terms in a function in which some one of the variables, say x k , is positive from the coefficients of terms in which x k is negative. We shall do this 140 A Survey of Symbolic Logic by using different letters, as PI, P 2 , PS, . . . , for coefficients of terms in which Xk is positive, and Q b Q 2 , Q 3 , for coefficients of terms in which Xk is negative. This notation is perfectly definite, since the number of terms, for a function of n variables, is always 2 n , the number of those in which Xk is positive is always equal to the number of those in which it is negative, and the distribution of the terms in which x k is positive, or is negative, is determined by the law given above. The sum of the coefficients, Ai + Ao + A 3 + . . ., will frequently be indi cated by ^A or ^A h , the product, Ai-A 2 A 3 ... by JJ/l or YL^h- h h Since the number of coefficients involved will always be fixed by the func tion which is in question, it w r ill be unnecessary to indicate numerically the range of the operators ^ and IJ . The Limits of a Function. The lower limit of any function is the prod uct of the coefficients in the function, and the upper limit is the sum of the coefficients. 6-3 A B cAx + B-xcA + B. (A B)(A x + B -x) = A B x + AB -x = A B Hence [1-9] ABcAx + B-x. And (A x + B -x)(A + B) = Ax + AB -x + ABx + B -x = (A B + A) x + (AB + B) -x. But [5-4] A B + A == A, and AB + B = B. Hence (.1 x + B -x) (A + B) = A x + B -x, and [1-9] A x + B -x cA + B. 6-31 f(B)cf(x)cf(A). [(3-3 and 6-26, 6-27] 6-32 If the coefficients in any function, F(x lf x 2 , . . . ;i-), be C lt C 2 , C 3 , then (a) By 6 3, the theorem holds for functions of one variable. (b) Let $(xi, x z , . . . x k , x k +i) be any function of k + 1 variables. By (Ml, for some / and some / , $(.ri, *2, . . . x k , Xk+i) = f(x lt x z , . . . x k ) -iCfc+i + / (.TI, x 2 , . . . x k ) -x k+ i (1) Since this last expression may be regarded as a function of Xk+i in which the coefficients are the functions / and / , [6-3] i, x 2 , . . . x k ) x/ (#,, x 2 , . . . x h ) c $(.ri, x 2 , . . . x k , x k +i) The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 141 Let Ai{$}, Ai[3>\, A 3 {3>}, etc., be here the coefficients in <J>; Ai{f\, ^2 {/I, A*\f}, etc., the coefficients in/; and A,{f f \, J 2 {/ [, A 3 {f }, etc., the coefficients in / . If rU{/} c/and IU{/ } c/ , then [0-3] and, by (1), EU {/J x JL 1 !/ } c <. But since (1) holds, any coefficient in $ will be either a coefficient in / or a coefficient in / , and hence lUf/! xIL-i{/ ! ==IU!*i Hence if the theorem hold for functions of k variables, so that II A {/} c/Cd, * 2 , . . . x k ) and EU {/ ) c/ (x lt x 2 , . . . x k ), then II^l^! c$(a-i, x z , ... x k , x k+} ). Similarly, since (1) holds, [0-23] $c/+/ . Hence if /c .!{/} and / c Z^f/ l, then [5-31] *<=Z^{/1 + Z^{/ ) But since any coefficient in $ is either a coefficient in / or a coef ficient in / , z^f/i + z^m == z^j. Hence $ c ^A{$}. Thus if the theorem hold for functions of k variables, it will hold for functions of k + 1 variables. (c) Since the theorem holds for functions of one variable, and since if it hold for functions of k variables, it will hold for functions of k -f 1 variables, therefore it holds generally. As we shall see, these theorems concerning the limits of functions are the basis of the method by which eliminations are made. Functions of Functions. Since all functions of the same variables may be given the same normal form, the operations of the algebra may frequently be performed simply by operating upon the coefficients. 6-4 If f(x) = A x + B -x, then 4/0)] - -.-1 .r + -B -x. [3-4] -(A x + B -x) = -(A x)(B -.r) = (-A + -x) (-B + .r) = -.1 -B + -.1 .T + -B -x = (-A -B + -A) x + (-A -B + -B) -x But [5-4] -.1 -B + -.1 == -A and -.1 -B + -B = -B. Hence -(,1 x + B -x) = -A x + -B -.r. 142 A Survey of Symbolic Logic 6-41 The negative of any function, in the normal form, is found by re placing each of the coefficients in the function by its negative. (a) By 6-4, the theorem is true for functions of one variable. (b) If the theorem hold for functions of k variables, then it will hold for functions of k + 1 variables. Let F(XI, xz, . Xk, Xk+i) be any function of k + 1 variables. Then by 6-11 and 3 2, for some / and some / , +f (xi, x 2 , . . . x k )--x k+l ] But f(xi, Xz, . . . x k )-x k+ i +f Oi> ^, Zk) -Xk+i may be regarded as a function of a^+i. Hence, by 6-4, , a-o, . . . x k ) -x k+l +/ (xi, x z , . . . x k ) -x k+ i] Hence if the theorem be true for functions of k variables, so that the negative of / is found by replacing each of the coefficients in / by its negative and the negative of / is found by replacing each of the coefficients in / by its negative, then the negative of F will be found by replacing each of the coefficients in F by its negative, for, as has just been shown, any term of -x l} xz, . . . x kj in which x k +i is positive is such that its coefficient is a coefficient in -[/(>!, X 2 , ... X k )] and any term of -[F(x lt xz, . . . x k , in which x k +\ is negative is such that its coefficient is a coefficient in -[/ (* X* ... .T, ; )] (c) Since (a) and (b) hold, therefore the theorem holds generally. Since a difference in the order of terms is not material, 6-41 holds not only for functions in the normal form but for any function which is com pletely expanded so that every element involved appears, either positive or negative, in each of the terms. It should be remembered that if any term of an expanded function is missing, its coefficient is 0, and in the negative of the function that term will appear with the coefficient 1. The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 143 6-42 The sum of any two functions of the same variables, $(0:1, T 2 , . . . x n ) and V(xi, #2, . . . x n ), is another function of these same variables, F(Xi, To, ... X n ), such that the coefficient of any term in F is the sum of the coefficients of the corresponding terms in $ and ^. By 6-15, $(0:1,0:2, ... x n ) and V(xi, x 2 , ... x n ) cannot differ except in the coefficients of the terms. Let AI, At, A 3 , etc., be the coefficients in $; BI, B 2 , B 3 , etc., the coefficients of the corresponding terms in ^. For any two such cor- r J TI TO . . . T n I f TI x* . x n ] responding terms, A k 1 r and B k l L -0*1 -.1 2 . . . ~.l n J I -.Ti -.r 2 . . . -X n } f f *1 * 2 ... .! 1 f T! 0: 2 ... Tn 1 Ah ] r + n k -j f- I -Ti -1 2 -Xn } t -Xi -X 2 . . . X n } Ti T 2 . . . X n -TI -T 2 . . -x n And since addition is associative and commutative, the sum of the two functions is equivalent to the sum of the sums of such corre sponding terms, pair by pair. 6-43 The product of two functions of the same variables, $(1, o: 2 , ... x n ) and ^f(xi, 0*2, ... x n ), is another function of these same variables, F(Xi, .T 2 , - Xn), such that the coefficient of any term in F is the product of the coeffi cients of the corresponding terms in $ and ^. T J Xi X 2 . . . X n } f Ti T 2 ... X n } . Let Ak "j r and Bk ] r be any two L -TI -T 2 . . . -x n J I -T! -T 2 . . . -x n } corresponding terms in $ and ^. , [ TI T 2 . . . O n 1 J Tl 0*2 ... X n ] A k \ fx5 & H ( -Ti -T^ . . . -X n J I -Ti -T 2 . . . -X n J -(4*Jfc>{ t -Ti -To . . . -T n J By 6-15, $ and ^ do not differ except in the coefficients, and by 6-17, whatever the coefficients in the normal form of a function, the product of any two terms is null. Hence all the cross-products of terms in $ and ^ will be null, and the product of the functions will 144 A Survey of Symbolic Logic be equivalent to the sum of the products of their corresponding terms, pair by pair. Since in this algebra two functions in which the variables are not the same may be so expanded as to become functions of the same variables, these theorems concerning functions of functions are very useful. TV. FUNDAMENTAL LAWS OF THE THEORY OF EQUATIONS We have now to consider the methods by which any given element may be eliminated from an equation, and the methods by which the value of an " unknown " may be derived from a given equation or equations. The most convenient form of equation for eliminations and solutions is the equation with one member 0. Equivalent Equations of Different Forms. If an equation be not in the form in which one member is 0, it may be given that form by multiplying each side into the negative of the other and adding these two products. 7-1 a = b is equivalent to a -b + -a b = 0. [2-2] a = 6 is equivalent to the pair, a c b and b c a. [4-9] a c b is equivalent to a -b = 0, and b c a to -a b = 0. And [5 72] a -b = and -a b = are together equivalent to a -b + -a b = 0. The transformation of an equation with one member 1 is obvious: 7-12 a = 1 is equivalent to -a = 0. [3-2] By 6-41, any equation of the form f(xi, ,r 2 , . . . x n ) = 1 is reduced to the form in which one member is simply by replacing each of the coefficients in / by its negative. Of especial interest is the transformation of equations in which both members are functions of the same variables. 7-13 If <J>(a,-i, .T 2 , . . . Xn) and ty(x 1} x 2 , ... x n ) be any two functions of the same variables, then is equivalent to F(XI, x 2 , . . . x n ) = 0, where F is a function such that if A i, A 2 , A 3 , etc., be the coefficients in <, and B 1} B 2 , B s , etc., be the coef ficients of the corresponding terms in ty, then the coefficients of the corre sponding terms in F will be (Ai -Bi + -A l #0, (A 2 -B 2 + -A 2 B 2 ), (A 3 -J5 3 + -.4 3 # 3 ), etc. The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 145 By 7- 1, $ = ^ is equivalent to ($ x-\F) + (-<!> x ^) = 0. By 6-41, -< and -^ are functions of the same variables as < and ^. Hence, by 6-43, $ x-^ and -$ x ^ will each be functions of these same variables, and by (i-42, (3> x-^) + (-$ x ty) will also be a function of these same variables. Hence 3>, ^, -<, -^, <J> x-^, -$ x ^, and ($ x-^) + (-< x ^) are all functions of the same variables and, by 6-15, will not differ except in the coefficients of the terms. If Ate be any coefficient in <, and B k the corresponding coefficient in ^, then by 6-41, the corresponding coefficient in -$ will be -A k and the corresponding coefficient in -^ will be -B k . Hence, by 6-43, the corresponding coefficient in $x-^ will be Ak -B k , and the corresponding coefficient in -3> x fy will be -A k B k . Hence, by 0-42, the corresponding coefficient in (< x-^) + (-< x ^) will be A k -B k + -A k B k . Thus ($ x-^) + (-$ x >^) is the function F, as described above, and the theorem holds. By 7- 1, for every equation in the algebra there is an equivalent equation in the form in which one member is 0, and by 7 13 the reduction can usually be made by inspection. One of the most important additions to the general methods of the algebra which has become current since the publication of Schroder s work is Poretsky s Law of Forms. 9 By this law, given any equation, an equiva lent equation of which one member may be chosen at will can be derived. 7-15 a = is equivalent to t = a -t + -a t. If a - 0, a-t + -at = Qt+l-t = t. And if t = a -t + -a t, then [7-1] (a -t + -a t) -t + (a t + -a -t) t = = a -t + a t = a Since t may here be any function in the algebra, this proves that every equation has an unlimited number of equivalents. The more general form of the law is : 7-16 a = b is equivalent to t = (a b + -a -6) t + (a -b + -a b) -t. [7 1] a = b is equivalent to a -b + -a b = 0. And [6-4] -(a -b + -ab) = ab + -a -b. Hence [7-15] Q.E.D. The number of equations equivalent to a given equation and expressible 9 See Sept lois fondamentales de la theorie des egaliies logiques, Chap. i. 11 146 A Survey of Symbolic Logic in terms of n elements will be half the number of distinct functions which can be formed from n elements and their negatives, that is, 2 ~ n /2. The sixteen distinct functions expressible in terms of two elements, a and b, are: a, -a, b, -b, (i. e., a -a, b -b, etc.), 1 (i. e., a + -a, b + -b, etc.), a b, a -^ _ a i f _ rt -^ a + 6, a + -6, -a + 6, -a + -b, ab + -a -b, and a -b + -a b. In terms of these, the eight equivalent forms of the equation a = b are: a = b ; -=-&; = a -6 + -a & ; 1 = a 6 + -a -6 ; ab = a + b; a -b = -ab; -a -b = -a + -b: and a + -6 = -a + b. Each of the sixteen functions here appears on one or the other side of an equation, and none appears twice. For any equation, there is such a set of equivalents in terms of the elements which appear in the given equation. And every such set has what may be called its "zero member" (in the above, = a -b + -a b) and its "whole member" (in the above, 1 = a & + --&). If we observe the form of 7-10, we shall note that the functions in the "zero member" and "whole member" are the functions in terms of which the arbitrarily chosen t is determined. Any t the t which contains the function { = 0} and is contained in the function { = 1 } . The validity of the law depends simply upon the fact that, for any t, Octfcl, i. e., t = 1-/ + 0--/. It is rather surprising that a principle so simple can yield a law so powerful. Solution of Equations in One Unknown. Every equation which is pos sible according to the laws of the system has a solution for each of the un knowns involved. This is a peculiarity of the algebra. We turn first to equations in one unknown. Every equation in x, if it be possible in the algebra, has a solution in terms of the relation c . 7-2 A x + B -x = is equivalent to B c x c -A. [5-72] A x + B -x = is equivalent to the pair, Ax = and B -x = 0. [4-9] B -x = is equivalent to B ex. And A x = is equivalent to x -(-A) = 0, hence to x c-A. 7-21 A solution in the form // c x c A" is indeterminate whenever the equa tion which gives the solution is symmetrical with respect to x and -.T. First, if the equation be of the form A x + A -x = 0. The solution then is, A ex c-A. But if A x + A -x = 0, then A --= A (x + -x) = A x + A -x = 0, and -A = 1. The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 147 Hence the solution is equivalent to Oc.rcl, which [5-61-63] is satisfied by every value of x. In general, any equation symmetrical with respect to x and -x which gives the solution, // c x c K, will give also // c -x c K. But if H c x and // c -x, then [4 9] // x = H and // -x = H. Hence [1-62] II = 0. And if xcK and -xcK, then [5-33] x + -xcK, and [4-8, 5-63] K = I. Hence H ex c K will be equivalent to c a: c 1. It follows directly from 7-21 that if neither x nor -x appear in an equa tion, then although they may be introduced by expansion of the functions involved, the equation remains indeterminate with respect to x. 7-22 An equation of the form A x + B -x = determines x uniquely when ever A = -B, B = -A. [3-22] A = -B and -.1 = B are equivalent; hence either of these conditions is equivalent to both. [7 21 A x + B -x = is equivalent to B c x c -A. Hence if B = -A, it is equivalent to B ex cB and to -.1 c.r c-.4, and hence [2-2] to x = B = -A. In general, an equation of the form A x + B -x = determines x be tween the limits B and -A. Obviously, the solution is unique if, and only if, these limits coincide; and the solution is wholly indeterminate only when they are respectively and 1, the limiting values of variables generally. 7-221 The condition that an equation of the form A x + B -x = be pos sible in the algebra, and hence that its solution be possible, is A B = 0. By 6-3, A B cAx + B-x. Hence [5-65] if A x + B -x = 0, then A B = 0. Hence if A B =(= 0, then A x + B -x = must be false for all values of x. And A x + B -x = and the solution B ex c-A are equivalent. A B = is called the " equation of condition" of A x + B -x = 0: it is a necessary, not a sufficient condition. To call it the condition that A x + B -x = have a solution seems inappropriate: the solution Bc.xc.-A is equivalent to A x + B -x = 0, whether A x + B -x = be true, false, or impossible. The sense in which A B = conditions other forms of the solution of A x + B -x = will be made clear in what follows. The equation of condition is frequently useful in simplifying the solution. 148 A Survey of Symbolic Logic (In this connection, it should be borne in mind that A B = follows from A x + B -x = 0.) For example, if a b x + (a + 6) -x = then (a + b) c.r c-(a b). But the equation of condition is a b (a + b) = ab = 0, or, -(a b) = 1 Hence the second half of the solution is indeterminate, and the complete solution may be written a + b ex However, this simplified form of the solution is equivalent to the original equation only on the assumption that the equation of condition is satisfied and a b = 0. Again suppose ax + b -x + c = Expanding c with reference to x, and collecting coefficients, we have (a + c) x + (b + c) -x = and the equation of condition is (a + c)(b + c) = a b + a c + b c + c = ab + c = The solution is b + c c x c -a -c But, by 5-72, the equation of condition gives c = 0, and hence -c = 1. Hence the complete solution may be written b c x c -a But here again, the solution b ex c-a is equivalent to the original equation only on the assumption, contained in the equation of condition, that c = 0. This example may also serve to illustrate the fact that in any equation one member of which is 0, any terms which do not involve x or -x may be dropped without affecting the solution for x. If a x + b-x + c = 0, then by 5-72, a x + b -x = 0, and any addition to the solution by retaining c will be indeterminate. All terms which involve neither the unknown nor its negative belong to the "symmetrical constituent" of the equation to be explained shortly. Poretsky s Law of Forms gives immediately a determination of x which is equivalent to the given equation, whether that equation involve x or not. 7 23 A x + B -x = is equivalent to x = -A x + B -x. [7-15] A x + B -x = is equivalent to x = (A x + B -x) -x + (-A x + -B -r) r - B -x + -Ax The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 149 This form of solution is also the one given by the method of Jevons. 10 Although it is mathematically objectionable that the expression which gives the value of x should involve x and -.r, this is in reality a useful and logically simple form of the solution. It follows from 7-2 and 7-23 that x = -A x + B -x is equivalent to B c x c -.1. Many writers on the subject have preferred the form of solution in which the value of the unknown is given in terms of the coefficients and an undetermined (arbitrary) parameter. This is the most "mathematical" form. 7-24 If A E = 0, as the equation A x + B -x = requires, then A x + B -x = is satisfied by x = B -u + -A u, or x = B + u -A, where u is arbitrary. And this solution is complete because, for any x such that A x + B -x = there is some value of u such that x = B -u + -A u = B + u -A . (a) By 6-4, if x B -u + -A u, then -x = -B -u + A u. Hence if x = B -u + -A ?/, then A x + B -x = A (B -u + -B u) + B (-B -u + A u) = A B -?/ + A B u = A B Hence if A B = and .r = B -u + -A u, then whatever the value of u, A x + B -x = 0. (b) Suppose x known and such that A x + B -x = 0. Then if x = B -u + -A u, we have, by 7-1, (B -u + -A if) -x + (-B -u + A n) x = (A x + -A -x) u + (B -x + -B x) -u = The condition that this equation hold for some value of u is, by 7 221, (A x + -A -x) (B -x + -B x) = A -B x + -.1 B -x = This condition is satisfied if A x + B -x = 0, for then A (B + -B) x + (A + -A) B -.r = AB + A -B x + -A B -x = and by 5-72, A -B x + -A B -x = 0. (c) If A B = 0, then B -u + -A u = B + u-A, for: If A B = 0, then A B u = 0. Hence B -u + -A u = B -u + -A (B + -B) u + A B u = B -u + (A + -A) B u + -.1 -B u = B (-u + u) + -A -B u = B + -A -B u. But [5-85] B + -A -Bu = B+n -A. 10 See above, p. 77. 150 A Survey of Symbolic Logic Only the simpler form of this solution, x = B + u -A, will be used hereafter. The above solution can also be verified by substituting the value given for x in the original equation. We then have A (B -u + -A ?/) + B (-B -u + Au) = A B-u + ABu = A B And if A B = 0, the solution is verified for every value of u. That the solution, x = B-u + -Au = B + u-A, means the same as B ex c-A, will be clear if we reflect that the significance of the arbitrary parameter, u, is to determine the limits of the expression. If u = 0, B -u + -A u = B + u -A = B. If u = 1, B-u + -Au = -A and B + u-A = B + -A. But when AB = 0, B + -A = -A B + -A = -A. Hence x = B -u + -A u = B + u-A simply expresses the fact, otherwise stated by B ex c-A, that the limits of x are B and -A. The equation of condition and the solution for equations of the form C x + D -x = 1, and of the form A x + B -x = C x + D -x, follow readily from the above. 7 25 The equation of condition that C x + D -x = 1 is C + D = 1, and the solution of C x + D -x = 1 is -D c x c C. (a) By 6-3, Cx + D-xcC + D. Hence if there be any value of x for which C x + D -x = 1, then necessarily C + D = 1. (6) If Cx + D-x == 1, then [6-4] -Cx + -D-x = 0, and [7-2] -DcxcC. 7-26 If C + D = 1, then the equation Cx + D-x = 1 is satisfied by x = -D + uC, where u is arbitrary. Since [6-4] Cx + D-x = 1 is equivalent to -Cx + -D-x = 0, and C + D = 1 is equivalent to -C -D = 0, the theorem follows from 7-24. 7-27 If A x + B -x = C x + D -x, the equation of condition is (A -C + -A C)(B -D + -BD) =0 and the solution is B -D + -B D c x c A C + -A -C, or x = B -D +-B D + u (A C + -A -C), where u is arbitrary. By 7 13, A x + B -x = C x + D -x is equivalent to (A-C + -AC)x + (B-D + -Bd-x = 0. The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 151 Hence, by 7-221, the equation of condition is as given above. And by 7-2 and 7-24, the solution is B -D + -B D c x c - (A -C + -A C) , or x = B -D +-B D + u--(A -C + -A C), where u is arbitrary. And [6-4] -(A -C + -AC) = A C + -A -C. The subject of simultaneous equations is very simple, although the clearest notation we have been able to devise is somewhat cumbersome. 7-3 The condition that n equations in one unknown, A l x + B 1 -x = 0, A*x + B 2 -x = 0, . . . A n x + B n -x 0, may be regarded as simultaneous, is the condition that (A h B k ) = fi, k And the solution which they give, on that condition, is ^B k cxc H-A k k k or x = ^B k + u> II -^* where u is arbitrary. k k By 6-42 and 5-72, A l x + 5 1 -x = 0, A*x + B 2 -x = 0, A n x + B n -x = 0, are together equivalent to (A 1 + A 2 + . . . + A n )x + (B 1 + B* + . . . + B") -x = or , z + k k -* = By 7 23, the equation of condition here is A* x B k = A: A But ZM* x Z fc = (.I 1 + , I 2 +...+.4 A- k = A 1 B l + A 1 B- + . . . + A 1 B n + A 2 B 1 + A* B 2 + . . + A 2 B + A*B l + A* B 2 + . . . + A* B- + . . . + A" B 1 + . . . + A n B = Z(^*). h,k And by 7-2 and 7-24, the solution here is or *= - A- A- And by 5-95, -{^M == II ~A k . k k It may be noted that from the solution in this equation, ?i 2 partial solu 152 A Survey of Symbolic Logic tions of the form B h c.r c-A> can be derived, for Wc^B* and H -A* c-A> . k k Similarly, 2 2 " 1 partial solutions can be derived by taking selections of members of ^Z H k an d II -A k . Symmetrical and Unsymmetrical Constituents of Equations. Some of the most important properties of equations of the form A x + B -x = are made clear by dividing the equation into two constituents the most comprehensive constituent which is symmetrical with respect to .r and -x, and a completely unsymmetrical constituent. For brevity, these may be called simply the "symmetrical constituent" and the unsymmetrical constituent ". In order to get the symmetrical constituent complete, it is necessary to expand each term with reference to every element in the function, coefficients included. Thus in .1 x + B -x = it is necessary to expand the first term with respect to B, and the second with respect to A. A (B + -B) x + (A + -A) B -x = A Bx + AB -x + A -B x + -A B -x = By 5 72, this is equivalent to the two equations, .1 B (x + -.r) = .1 B = and .1 -B x + -.4 B -x = The first of these is the symmetrical constituent; the second is the unsym metrical constituent. The symmetrical constituent will always be the equa tion of condition, while the unsymmetrical constituent will give the solution. But the form of the solution will most frequently be simplified by con sidering the symmetrical constituent also. The unsymmetrical constituent will always be such that its equation of condition is satisfied a priori. Thus the equation of condition of A -B x + -A B -x = is (.1 -B)(-A B) = 0, which is an identity. By this method of considering symmetrical and unsymmetrical con stituents, equations which are indeterminate reveal that fact by having no unsymmetrical constituent for the solution. Also, the method enables us to treat even complicated equations by inspection. Remembering that any term in which neither x nor -x appears belongs to the symmetrical constituent, as does also the product of the coefficients of x and -.1-, the separation can be made directly. For example, (c + x) d + -c -d + (-a + -x) b = The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 153 will have as its equation of condition c d + -c -d + -a b + b d = and the solution will be b c .r c -d Also, as we shall see shortly, the symmetrical constituent is always the complete resultant of the elimination of x. The method does not readily apply to equations which do not have one member 0. But these can always be reduced to that form. Plow it extends to equations in more than one unknown will be clear from the treatment of such equations. Eliminations. The problem of elimination is the problem, what equa tions not involving x or -x can be derived from a given equation, or equa tions, which do involve x and -.r. In most algebras, one term can, under favorable circumstances, be eliminated from two equations, two terms from three, n terms from n + 1 equations. But in this algebra any number of terms (and their negatives) can be eliminated from a single equation; and the terms to be eliminated may be chosen at will. The principles whereby such eliminations are performed have already been provided in theorems concerning the equation of condition. 7-4 A B = contains all the equations not involving .r or -.r which can be derived from A x + B -x = 0. By 7-24, the complete solution of A x + B -.r = is x = B -?/ + -A u Substituting this value of x in the equation, we have .1 (B -u + -A 11) + B (-B -u + A u) = A B -u + A B u = A B = Hence A B = is the complete resultant of the elimination of .r. It is at once clear that the resultant of the elimination of x coincides with the equation of condition for solution and with the symmetrical con stituent of the equation. 7-41 If n elements, x\, .r 2 , .r 3 , . . . x n , be eliminated from any equation, F(XI, # 2 , ,T 3 , . . . x n ) = 0, the complete resultant is the equation to of the product of the coefficients in F(x it x 2 , .r 3 , . . . x n ). (a) By 6-1 and 7-4, the theorem is true for the elimination of one element, .r, from any equation, /(.r) = 0. (b) If the theorem hold for the elimination of k elements, x\, X 2 , 154 A Survey of Symbolic Logic . . . x k , from any equation, $(.TI, x Zt ... x k ) = 0, then it will hold for the elimination of k + 1 elements, .TI, .T L >, . . . x k , Xk+i, from any equation, V(xi, x z , . . . x ki x k +i) = 0, for: By (Ml, V(xi, .1-2, ... x k , x k+ i) = /(.ri, x z , . . . x k )-x k+i +f (xi, x z , . . . x k )--Xk+i- And the coefficients in will be the coefficients in / and / . By 7-4, the complete resultant of eliminating x k +i from /(.Ti, .To, . . . X k ) Xk+i + / (Xi, X Z , - . . Xk)~X k+ i = is f(xi, .T 2 , . . . x k ) x/ Oi, .r 2 , . a *) = And by 6-43, /(.TI, .T 2 , . . . x k ) X/ (.TI, or 2 , . . . a**) = is equivalent to <(.TI, 2*2., ... a;*;) = 0, where $ is a function such that if the coefficients in/ be PI, P 2 , P 3 , etc., and the corresponding coefficients in/ be Qi, Q z , Q s , etc., then the corresponding coefficients in < will be PiQi, P 2 2, PsQa, etc. Hence if the theorem hold for the elimina tion of k elements, .TI, x Z) ... x k , from $(.TI, x z , . . . x k ) = 0, this elimination will give (P.Qi)(ft<2.)(PiC.). . (f iftft- .ddQ.. ) = 0, where PiP^Pz- -QiQzQs- - is the product of the coefficients in 3>, or in / and / i. e., the product of the coefficients in SF. Hence if the theorem hold for the elimination of k elements, .TI, x z , . . . x k , from <(.TI, x z , . . . x k ) = 0, it will hold for the elimination of k + 1 elements, Xi, x z , ... x k , x k+ i, from ^(.TI, x z , . . . x k , x k+ i) = 0, provided x k+ i be the first eliminated. But since the order of terms in a function is immaterial, and for any order of elements in the argument of a function, there is a normal form of the function, x k+ i in the above may be any of the k + 1 elements in \F, and the order of elimination is immaterial. (c) Since (a) and (b) hold, therefore the theorem holds for the elimination of any number of elements from the equation to of any function of these elements. By this theorem, it is possible to eliminate simultaneously any number of elements from any equation, by the following procedure: (1) Reduce the equation to the form in which one member is 0, unless it already have that form; (2) Develop the other member of the equation as a normal-form function of the elements to be eliminated; (3) Equate to the product of the coefficients in this function. This will be the complete elimination resultant. The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 155 Occasionally it is convenient to have the elimination resultant in the form of an equation with one member 1, especially if the equation which gives the resultant have that form. 7-42 The complete resultant of eliminating n elements, x\ t x 2 , ... x n , from any equation, F(XI, x 2 , ... x n ) == 1, is the equation to 1 of the sum of the coefficients in F(XI, x 2 , ... x n ). Let AI, A 2 , A 3 , etc., be the coefficients in F(XI, x 2 , . . . x n ). F(XI, xz, ... x n ) = 1 is equivalent to -[F(xi, Xz, ... x n )] = 0. And by 6-41, -[F(xi, x 2 , ... x n )] is a function, $(xi, x 2 , ... x n ), such that if any coefficient in F be AU, the corresponding coefficient in $ will be -A/c. Hence, by 7-41, the complete resultant of eliminating x\ 9 x 2 , ... x n , from F(XI, Xz, ... x n ) = 1 is U-A =0, or -{ 11-^1 1 -= 1 But [5-95] -{ 11-4} =-- Z A. Hence Q.E.D. For purposes of application of the algebra to ordinary reasoning, elimina tion is a process more important than solution, since most processes of reasoning take place through the elimination of "middle" terms. For example : If all b is x, b c x, b -x = and no a is x, a x = 0, then ax + b -x = 0. Whence, by elimination, a b = 0, or no a is b. Solution of Equations in more than one Unknown. The complete solu tion of any equation in more than one unknown may be accomplished by eliminating all the unknowns except one and solving for that one, repeating the process for each of the unknowns. Such solution will be complete because the elimination, in each case, will give the complete resultant which is independent of the unknowns eliminated, and each solution will be a solution for one unknown, and complete, by previous theorems. How ever, general formulae of the solution of any equation in n unknowns, for each of the unknowns, can be proved. 7 5 The equation of condition of any equation in n unknowns is identical with the resultant of the elimination of all the unknowns; and this resultant is the condition of the solution with respect to each of the unknowns sepa rately. (a) If the equation in n unknowns be of the form z , . . x n ) = 0: 156 A Survey of Symbolic Logic Let the coefficients in F(XI, x 2 , ... x n ) be AI, A 2 , A 3 , etc. Then, by 6 -32, II A c F(xi, x 2 , ... x n ) and [5-65] JJ A = is a condition of the possibility of F(x lt 0-2, . . . z) - And [7-41] U A = is the resultant of the elimination of Xi, x 2 , . . . x n , from F(x\, 0*2, . . . x n ) = 0. (6) If the equation in n unknowns have some other form than F(XI, x 2) . . . Xn) = 0, then by 7-1, it has an equivalent which is of that form, and its equation of condition and its elimination resultant are the equivalents of the equation of condition and elimination resultant of its equivalent which has the form F(x lf X 2 , ... X n ) =0 (c) The result of the elimination of all the unknowns is the equation of condition with respect to any one of them, say x k , because : (1) The equation to be solved for Xk will be the result of eliminat ing all the unknowns but Xk from the original equation; and (2) The condition that this equation, in which Xk is the only unknown, have a solution for Xk is, by (a) and (6), the same as the result of eliminating Xk from it. Hence the equation of condition with respect to Xk is the same as the result of eliminating, from the original equation, first all the other unknowns and then x^ And by 7-41 and (6), the result of eliminating the unknowns is independent of the order in which they are eliminated. Since this theorem holds, it will be unnecessary to investigate separately the equation of condition for the various forms of equations; they are already given in the theorems concerning elimination. 7-51 Any equation in n unknowns, of the form F(XI, x 2 , . . . x n ) = 0, provided its equation of condition be satisfied, gives a solution for each of the unknowns as follows: Let x k be any one of the unknowns; let P], P 2 , Pa, etc., be the coefficients of those terms in F(XI, x 2 , . . . x n ) in which Xk is positive, and Qi, Q 2 , Q 3 , etc., the coefficients of those terms in which Xk is negative. The solution then is II Q ex* c 2 -P, or Xk = II Q + u- 2 -P, where u is arbitrary. The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 157 (a) By (Ml, for some / and some / , F(x\, .TO, . . . x, n ) = is equivalent to /(.ri, .r 2 , . . . .r n _i)-.r n +/ (.ri, .T 2 , . . . .r n _i)--.r n --= 0. Let the coefficients in / be PI, P 2 , P 3 , etc., in / be ^i, Q z , Qs, etc. Then PI, P 2 , P 3 , etc., will be the coefficients of those terms in F in which Xk is positive, Qi, Q*, Q 3 , the coefficients of terms in F in which Xk is negative. If /(.TI, .T 2 , .T n _])-.r n be regarded as a function of the variables, .TI, .TO, . . . n _i, its coefficients will be Pi.r n , P 2 .r n , P 3 .T n , etc. And if / Oi, .r 2 , . . . r n -i) -x n be regarded as a function of .TI, o* 2 , . . . x n -i, its coefficients will be Q 1 -x n , Q 2 -x n , (? 3 -x n , etc. Hence, by 6-42, /(.?!, X 2 , X n -l) X n + / (1, .T 2 , . . . Xn-i) -X n = is equivalent to ^(.TI, .TO, . . . x n -i) = 0, where ^ is a function in which the coefficients are (PiX n + Qi-x n ), (P 2 x n + Q 2 -.r n ), (P 3 ^n + 3-^ n ), etc. And ^(iCi, T 2 , ... .r n _i) = is equivalent to F(XI, .r 2 , . . x n ) = 0. By 7-41, the complete resultant of the elimination of 0*1, .r 2 , . . .r n _i from ty(xi, x 2 , . . . x n -i) = will be the equation to of the product of its coefficients, But any expression of the form P n r n + Q r -x n is a normal form func tion of x n . Hence, by 6 43, By 7-2 and 7-24, the solution of H P^n+ Qr -^ = is And [5-951] -{II P] ---- T.-P- (b) Since the order of terms in a function is immaterial, and for any order of the variables in the argument of a function there is a normal form of the function, x n in the above may be any one of the variables in F(x^ .T 2 , . . . .T n ), and /(.TI, .i 2 , . . . .r n _ t ) and / (.n, .r 2 , . . . .T n _0 each some function of the remaining n 1 variables. Therefore, the theorem holds for any one of the variables, x k . That a single equation gives a solution for any number of unknowns is another peculiarity of the algebra, due to the fact that from a single equation any number of unknowns may be eliminated. 158 A Survey of Symbolic Logic As an example of the last theorem, we give the solution of the exemplar equation in two unknowns, first directly from the theorem, then by elimina tion and solution for each unknown separately. (1) A x y + B -x y + C x -y + D -x -y = has the equation of condition, ABCD = Provided this be satisfied, the solutions for x and y are BDcxc-A+-C, or x = B D + u (-A + -C) CDcyc-A+-B, or y = C D + u (-A+-B) (2) A x y + B -x y + C x -y + D -x -y = is equivalent to (a) (Ax + B -x) y+(Cx + D -x) -y = and to (b) (A y + C -y) x + (B y + D -y) -.r = Eliminating y from (a), we have (Ax + B-x)(Cx + D-x) = ACx + BD-x = The equation of condition with respect to x is, then, (AC)(BD) = ABCD = And the solution for x is BDcxc-(A C), or x = BD + u--(A C). And -(A C) = -A + -C Eliminating x from (6), we have (Ay+C-y)(By + D-y) = A B y + C D -y = The equation of condition with respect to y is, then, A BCD = 0. And the solution for y is CDcyc-(AB), or y = CD + v-(AB). And -(A B) = -A+-B Another method of solution for equations in two unknowns, x and y, would be to solve for y and for -y in terms of the coefficients, with x and u as undetermined parameters, then eliminate y by substituting this value of it in the original equation, and solve for x. By a similar substitution, x may then be eliminated and the resulting equation solved for y. This method may inspire more confidence on the part of those unfamiliar with this algebra, since it is a general algebraic method, except that in other algebras more than one equation is required. The solution of A x y + B -x y + C x -y + D -x -y = for y is y = (C x + D -x) + u--(A x + B -x) = (C + u -A) x +(D + u -B) -x The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 159 The solution for -y is -y = (A x + B -x) + v-(C x + D -x) = (A + v -C) x + (B + v -D) -x Substituting these values for y and -y in the original equation, (A x + B -x)[(C + u -A) x + (D + n -B) -x] + (Cx + D -x)[(A + v -C) x + (B + v -D) -x\ = A (C + u -A) x + B (D + u -B) -x + C (A + v -C) x + 1) (B + v -D) -x = AC x + 7? D -x = 0. Hence B D ex c-A + -C. Theoretically, this method can be extended to equations in any number of unknowns: practically, it is too cumbersome and tedious to be used at all. 7 52 Any equation in n unknowns, of the form F(XI, x 2 , ... x n ) = f(xi, x 2 , ... x n ) gives a solution for each of the unknowns as follows: Let x k be any one of the unknowns; let PI, P 2 , P 3 , Qi, Qi, Q.a, ... be the coefficients in F, and J/i, If 2 , 3/3, . . . AI, A T 2 , A T 3 , ... the coefficients of the corresponding terms in /, so that P r and 1/V are coefficients of terms in which x k is positive, and Q r and N r are coefficients of terms in which Xk is negative. The solu tion for Xk then is II (Qr N r + -Q, N r ) C Xk C (P r M r + ~P, - J/ r ) or Xk = II (Qr -N r + -Qr N r ) + U (Pr ^ r r By 7-13, 7 X.i i, ;i 2 , ... .r n ) = /Oi, 2 , ... .r n ) is equivalent to i, #2, -I n) = 0, where $ is a function such that if A r and l? r be coefficients of any two corresponding terms in F and /, then the coefficient of the corresponding term in $ will be A r -B r + -A r B,. Hence, by 7-51, the solution will be II (Qr "N r + -Qr N r) C X k C -(P r -M r + -P r 3/ r ) Or = II (Qr -N r + -Q r N r ) + H -(P r - J/ r + -P, J/r) And [0-4] -(P r -J/ r + -P r J/ r ) = (P r J/ r + -P r -J/ r ). 7-53 The condition that m equations in n unknowns, each of the form F(XI, x, . . . x n ) = 0, may be regarded as simultaneous, is as follows: Let the coefficients of the terms in F 1 , in the equation F l (x lf .r 2 , . . x n ) = 0, be Pi 1 , Pa 1 , P3 1 , . Qi 1 , QJ, Qs 1 , 5 let the coefficients of the corre- 160 A Survey of Symbolic Logic spending terms in F 2 , in the equation F 2 (.ri, ,r 2 , . . . .r n ) = 0, be Pi 2 , P 2 2 , Pa 2 , Q\~, Qz~, Qs 2 , . . ; the coefficients of the corresponding terms in F m , in the equation F m (x lt x z , . - . x n ) = 0, be PI W , P 2 m , P 3 W , . . . Qi m , Q z m , z m , .... The condition then is ; A r h Or if C r * be any coefficient, whether P or Q, in P\ the condition is And the solution which n such equations give, on this condition, for any one of the unknowns, Xk, is as follows: Let PI^, P/, P 3 7i , ... be the coef ficients of those terms, in any one of the equations F h = 0, in which x-k is positive, and let Qi h , Qi h , Q 3 h , ... be the coefficients of those terms, in F h = 0, in which Xk is negative. The solution then is nizvic^czn-w] r h r ft or ** = ![ tZ Qr ] + w-Z III -Pr"] r h r h By 6-42, m equations in n unknowns, each of the form F(x\, x z , . . . x n ) = 0, are together equivalent to the single equation &(x-i, x z , . . . x n ) 0, where each of the coefficients in < is the sum of the corresponding coefficients in F 1 , F 2 , F 3 , . . . F m . That is, if P r l , P, 2 , . . . P r m be the coefficients of corresponding terms in P 1 , F 2 , . . . F m , then the coefficient of the corresponding term in < will be P, 1 + P r 2 + . . . + P, .-, or 2 Pr h h and if Qr 1 , Qr 2 , . . . Q r m be the coefficients of corresponding terms in F 1 , F 2 , . . . F m , then the coefficient of the corresponding term in < will be h The equation of condition for <> = 0, and hence the condition that F 1 = 0, F 2 = 0, ... F m = may be regarded as simultaneous, is the equation to of the product of the coefficients in $; that is, h h h h h h or nizjvixiiizcr i-o r h r h And by 7-51, the solution of $(#1, - T 2, #n) = for Xk is II I S Qr h ] c T A c V The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 161 or % = And by 5-95, -[ P\ = -P/. h h 7 54 The condition that m equations in n unknowns, each of the form F(XI, x 2 , ... x n ) = f(xi, x 2 , ... x n ) may be regarded as simultaneous, is as follows: Let the coefficients in F l , in the equation F 1 =f l , be Px 1 , P, 1 , Pj 1 , . . . QJ, Q 1 , Q. 1 , . . . , and let the coefficients of the corresponding terms in / l , in the equation F 1 = f l , be Mi 1 , MJ, Ms 1 , . . . Ni 1 , As 1 , AY, . . . ; let the coefficients of the corresponding terms in F 2 , in the equation F 2 =f 2 , be P^, P 2 2 , P 3 2 , . . . QS, Q 2 2 , Q 3 2 , and let the coefficients of the corresponding terms in / 2 be M i 2 , M 2 2 , Ms 2 , . . . Ni 2 , A 2 2 , A 3 2 , . . . ; let the coefficients of the corresponding terms in F m , in the equation F m = f m , be Pi m , P 2 m , P 3 m , . . . Qi m , Qz m , $3 W , . . ., and let the coefficients of the corresponding terms in / m be Mi m , M z m , Ms m , . . . A T i m , A 2 m , A T 3 m , .... The condition then is II I H (Pr h -MS + ~Pr h MS)] X JJ I E (Qr* -N, + -(? r * A/)] = r h r h or if A r h represent any coefficient in F h , whether P or Q, and B r h represent the corresponding coefficient in / h , whether M or A, the condition is II IZ (Ar h -BS + -A r h B r h )} = And the solution which m such equations give, on this condition, for any one of the unknowns, .TA-, is as follows: Let P r h and M r h be the coefficients of those terms, in any one of the equations F h = f h , in which a^ is positive, and let Q r h and N r h be the coefficients of the terms, in F h = f h , in which x k is negative. The solution then is or a* - II [ Z (Qr -A 7 / + -9," AV)] + E [II By 7-13, ^(.TI, #2, . ar n ) = / A (-TI a? 2 , ... n) is equivalent to i, .r 2 , . . . x n ) = 0, where ^ is a function such that if Q r h and N r h be coefficients of corresponding terms in F h and / h , the coefficient of the corresponding term in * will be Q r h -N r h + -Q r * AV, and if P r h and Jf r A be coefficients of corresponding terms in F h and / h , the coefficient of the corresponding term in ^ will be P r h -M r h + -P r h M r h . And -(P r h -MS + -P r h M r h ) = P r h M r h + -P/ -M r \ Hence the theorem follows from 7 53. 12 162 A Survey of Symbolic Logic F(XI, .1*2, . . . x n ) = f(xi, x z , . . . a- n ) is a perfectly general equation, since F and / may be any expressions in the algebra, developed as functions of the variables in question. 7-54 gives, then, the condition and the solution of any number of simultaneous equations, in any number of unknowns, for each of the unknowns. This algebra particularly lends itself to generaliza tion, and this is its most general theorem. It is the most general theorem concerning solutions in the whole of mathematics. Boole s General Problem. Boole proposed the following as the general problem of the algebra of logic. 11 Given any equation connecting the symbols x, y, ... w, z, .... Re quired to determine the logical expression of any class expressed in any way by the symbols x, y, ... in terms of the remaining symbols u\ z, .... We may express this: Given t = f(x, y, . . .) and $>(.r, y, . . .) = ty(w, z, . . . ) ; to determine t in terms of w, z, .... This is perfectly general, since if x, y, . . . and w, z, . . . are connected by any number of equations, there is, by 7-1 and 5-72, a single equation equivalent to them all. The rule for solution may be stated: Reduce both t = f(x, y, . . .) and 3>(.r, y, . . .) = V(w, 2, . . .) to the form of equations with one member 0, combine them by addition into a single equation, eliminate x, y, . . . , and solve for t. By 7-1, the form of equation with one member is equivalent to the other form. And by 5-72, the sum of two equations with one member is equivalent to the equations added. Hence the single equation resulting from the process prescribed by our rule will contain all the data. The result of eliminating will be the complete resultant which is independent of these, and the solution for t will thus be the most complete determination of t in terms of w, z, . . . afforded by the data. Consequences of Equations in General. A word of caution with refer ence to the manipulation of equations in this algebra may not be out of place. As compared with other algebras, the algebra of logic gives more room for choice in this matter. Further, in the most useful applications of the algebra, there are frequently problems of procedure which are not resolved simply by eliminating this and solving for that. The choice of method must, then, be determined with reference to the end in view. But the following general rules are of service: (1) Get the completest possible expression = 0, or the least inclusive possible expression == 1. a + b + c+ . . . = gives a = 0, 6 = 0, c = 0, . . . , a + 6 = 0, a + c = 0, of Thought, p. 140. The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 163 etc. But a will not generally give a + b = 0, etc. Also, a == 1 gives a + b = 1, a + . . . == 1, but a + b == 1 will not generally give a == 1. (2) Reduce any number of equations, with which it is necessary to deal, to a single equivalent equation, by first reducing each to the form in which one member is and then adding. The various constituent equations can always be recovered if that be desirable, and the single equation gives other derivatives also, besides being easier to manipulate. Do not forget that it is possible so to combine equations that the result is less general than the data. If we have a = and 6 = 0, we have also a = b, or a b = 0, or a + b = 0, according to the mode of combination. But a + b = is equivalent to the data, while the other two are less comprehensive. A general method by which consequences of a given equation, in any desired terms, may be derived, was formulated by Poretsky, 12 and is, in fact, a corollary of his Law of Forms, given above. We have seen that this law may be formulated as the principle that if a = b, and therefore a-b + -ab = and a b + -a -b = 1 , then any t is such that a -b + -a b c t and tcab + -a-b, or any t = the t which contains the "zero member" of the set of equations equivalent to a = b, and is contained in the " whole member" of this set. Now if x c t, u x c t, for any u whatever, and thus the "zero member" of the Law of Forms may be multiplied by any arbitrarily chosen u which we choose to introduce. Similarly, if tcy, then tcy + v, and the "whole member" in the Law of Forms may be increased by the addition of any arbitrarily chosen v. This gives the Law of Consequences. 7-6 If a = b, then t = (ab + -a -b + u) t + v (a -b + -a b) -/, where u and v are arbitrary. [7 1 12] If a = b, then a -b + -ab = and ab + -a-b = 1. Hence (a b + -a -b + it) t + v (a -b + -a b) -t = (1 + ?/) t + v-0--t -- t. This law includes all the possible consequences of the given equation. First, let us see that it is more general than the previous formulae of elimina tion and solution. Given the equation A .r + B -x = 0, and choosing .1 B for t. we should get the elimination resultant. ItAx + B -x = 0, then AB = (-A x + -B -x + u) A B Since u and v are both arbitrary and may assume the value 0, there fore A B = 0. 12 Sept lois, etc., Chap. xn. 164 A Survey of Symbolic Logic But this is only one of the unlimited expressions for A B which the law gives. Letting u = 0, and v = 1, we have A B = A -B x + -A B -x Letting u = A and v = B, we have AB = AB + -AB-x And so on. But it will be found that every one of the equivalents of A B which the law gives will be null. Choosing x for our t, we should get the solution. If A x + B -x = 0, then x = (-A x + -B -x + u) x + v (A x + B -x) -x = (-A + u) x + v B -x. Since u and v may both assume the value 0, x = -A x, or x c -A (1) And since u and v may both assume the value 1, x = x + B -x, or B -x ex But if B -x c x, then B -x = (B -.T) x = 0, or B c x (2) Hence, (1) and (2), B cxc-A. When u = and v = 1, the Law of Consequences becomes simply the Law of Forms. For these values in the above, x = -A x + B -x which is the form which Poretsky gives the solution for x. The introduction of the arbitraries, u and v, in the Law of Consequences extends the principle stated by the Law of Forms so that it covers not only all equivalents of the given equation but also all the non-equivalent inferences. As the explanation which precedes the proof suggests, this is accomplished by allowing the limits of the function equated to t to be expressed in all possible ways. If a = b, and therefore, by the Law of Forms, t = (a b + -a -b) t + (a -6 + -a b) -t the lower limit of t, 0, is expressed as a -b + -a 6, and the upper limit of /, 1, is expressed as ab + -a -b. In the Law of Consequences, the lower limit, 0, is expressed as v (a-b + -ab), that is, in all possible ways which can be derived from its expression as a-b + -ab; and the upper limit, 1, is expressed as a b + -a -6 + u, that is, in all possible ways which can be derived from its expression as a b + -a -b. Since an expression of the form t = (a b + -a -b) t + (a -b + -a b) -t The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 165 or of the form t = (a b + -a -b + u) t + v (a -b + -a b) -t determines t only in the sense of thus expressing its limits, and the Law of Consequences covers all possible ways of expressing these limits, it covers all possible inferences from the given equation. The number of such inferences is, of course, unlimited. The number expressible in terms of n elements will be the number of derivatives from an equation with one member and the other member expanded with reference to n elements. The number of constituent terms of this expanded member will be 2 n , and the number of combinations formed from them will be 2 2 ". Therefore, since pi + pz + p$ + . . . =0 gives pi = 0, p z = 0, p s = 0, etc., this is the number of consequences of a given equation which are expressible in terms of n elements. As one illustration of this law, Poretsky gives the sixteen determinations of a in terms of the three elements, a, b, and c, which can be derived from the premises of the syllogism in Barbara: 13 If all a is b, a-b = 0, and all 6 is c, b -c = 0, then a-b + b -c = 0, and hence, a = a (b + -c) = a (b + c) = a (-b + c) = a + 6 -c = a b = a (b c + -b -c) = 5 _ c + a (b c + _5 _ c ) = a c = b -c + a c = a (-b + c) + -a b -c = a b c = b -c + ab c = a (b c + -b -c) + -a b -c = a c + -a b -c = a 6 c + -a b -c The Inverse Problem of Consequences. Just as the Law of Conse quences expresses any inference from a = b by taking advantage of the fact that if a-b + -ab = 0, then (a-b + -ab)v = 0, and if ab + -a-b = 1, then a b + -a -b + u = 1 ; so the formula for any equation which will give the inference a = b can be expressed by taking advantage of the fact that if fl( a 5 + _ a _fr) = i } then ab + -a-b = 1, and if a-b + -ab + u = 0, then a -b + - a l> = o. We thus get Poretsky s Law of Causes, or as it would be better translated, the Law of Sufficient Conditions. 14 7-7 If for some value of u and some value of v t = v (ab + -a -b) t + (a -b + -a b + u) -t, then a = b. If t = v(ab + -a-b)t+(a-b + -ab + u)-t, then [7-1, 5-72] [v (a b + -a -b) t + (a -b + -a b + u) -t] -t = ( a -^ + - a 1) + u ) -t = (a-b + -a b) -t + u -i = 13 Ibid., pp. 98 /. 14 Ibid., Chap. xxm. 166 A Survey of Symbolic Logic Hence (a -b + -a b) -t = (1) Hence also [5-7] t = v (a b + -a -b) t, and [4-9] t--[v (a b + -a -b)] = = t (-v + a -b + -a b) = t-v + (a -b + -ab) t Hence [5 72] (a -b + -a b) t = (2) By (1) and (2), ( a -b + -a b) (t + -t) = = a -6 + -a 6. Hence [7-1] a = b. Both the Law of Consequences and the Law of Sufficient Conditions are more general than the Law of Forms, which may be derived from either. Important as are these contributions of Poretsky, the student must not be misled into supposing that by their use any desired consequence or sufficient condition of a given equation can be found automatically. The only sense in which these laws give results automatically is the sense in which they make it possible to exhaust the list of consequences or conditions expressible in terms of a given set of elements. And since this process is ordinarily too lengthy for practical purposes, these laws are of assistance principally for testing results suggested by some subsidiary method or by "intuition ". One has to discover for himself what values of the arbitrages u and v will give the desired result. V. FUNDAMENTAL LAWS OF THE THEORY OF INEQUATIONS In this algebra, the assertory or copulative relations are = and c . The denial of a = b may conveniently be symbolized in the customary way: 8-01 a 4= b is equivalent to "a - b is false ". Def. We might use a symbol also for "a c b is false.". But since a c b is equiva lent to a b = a and to a -b = 0, its negative may be represented by a b 4= a or by a -b 4= 0. It is less necessary to have a separate symbolism for "a c b is false ", since "a is not contained in b" is seldom met with in logic except where a and b are mutually exclusive, in which case a b = 0. For every proposition of the form "If P is true, then Q is true ", there is another, " If Q is false, then P is false ". This is the principle of the rednctio ad absurdum,oT the simplest form of it. In terms of the relations = and =|=, the more important forms of this principle are: (1) "If a = b, then c = d", gives also, "If c 4= d, then a 4= b ". (2) "If a = 6, then c = d&ndh = k", gives also, "Ifc =(= <Z, then a 4= b", and "If h 4= k, then a 4= b ". (3) "If a = b and c - d, then h = k", gives also, "If a = b and h 4= k, then c 4= d", and "If c = d and h 4= k, then a 4= b ". The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 167 (4) "a = b is equivalent to c = d" , gives also, "a 4= b is equivalent toe 4= d". (5) "a = b is equivalent to the set, c = <7, h = k, . ..," gives also, "a 4= 6 is equivalent to Either c 4= </ or h 4= A , or ... ". 16 The general forms of these principles are themselves theorems of the "calculus of propositions" the application of this algebra to propositions. But the calculus of propositions, as an applied logic, cannot be derived from this algebra without a circle in the proof, for the reasoning in demon stration of the theorems presupposes the logical laws of propositions at every step. We must, then, regard these laws of the reductio ad absurdum, like the principles of proof previously used, as given us by ordinary logic, which mathematics generally presupposes. In later chapters, 16 we shall discuss another mode of developing mathematical logic the logistic method which avoids the paradox of assuming the principles of logic in order to prove them. For the present, our procedure may be viewed simply as an application of the reductio ad absurdum in ways in which any mathe matician feels free to make use of that principle. Since the propositions concerning inequations follow immediately, for the most part, from those concerning equations, proof will ordinarily be unnecessary. Elementary Theorems. The more important of the elementary propo sitions are as follows: 8-1 If ac 4= be, then a 4= b. [2-1] 8-12 If a + c =t= b + c, then a 4= b. [3-37] 8-13 a 4= b is equivalent to -a 4" -b. [3-2] 8-14 a + b 4= b, a b 4= a, -a + b 4= 1, and a -b 4= are all equivalent. [4-9] 8-15 If a + b = x and b 4= x, then a 4= [5-7] 8-151 If a = and b 4= x, then a + b 4= x. [5-7] 8-16 If a b = x and b 4= .r, then a 4= 1. [5-71] 15 "Either ... or ..." is here to be interpreted as not excluding the possibility that both should be true. 1(5 Chap, iv, Sect, vi, and Chap. v. 168 A Survey of Symbolic Logic 8-161 If a = 1 and b 4= x, then a b 4= x. [5-71] 8-17 If a + b 4= and a = 0, then b 4= 0. [5-72] 8-18 If a b 4= 1 and a = 1, then b 4= 1. [5-73] 8-17 allows us to drop null terms from any sum 4= 0- In this, it gives a rule by which an equation and an inequation may be combined. Suppose, for example, a + b 4= and x = 0. a + b = (a + b)(x + -x) =ax+bx+a-x+b -x. Hence ax + bx + a-x + b-x 4= 0. But if x = 0, then a x = and b x = 0. Hence [8 17] a-x + b -x 4= 0. 8-2 If a 4= 0, then a + b 4= 0. [5-72] 8-21 If a 4= 1, then 064=!. [5-73] 8-22 If a 6 4= 0, then a 4= and b 4= 0. [1-5] 8-23 If + 6 4= 1, then a 4= 1 and b 4= 1. [4-5] 8-24 If a b 4- x and a = x, then b 4= x. [1-2] 8-25 If a 4= and a c6, then 64-0. [1-9] If ac6, then a b = a. Hence if a 4= and a c 6, then a 6 4= 0. Hence [8-22] 6 + 0. 8-26 a + 6 4- is equivalent to "Either a 4= or 6 4= ". [5-72] 8-261 ai + a 2 + a 3 + . . . 4= is equivalent to "Either a x 4= or a 2 4= or a s 4= 0, or ... ". 8-27 a 6 4= 1 is equivalent to "Either a 4= 1 or 6 4= 1 ". [5-73] 8-271 aia 2 3 . +1 is equivalent to "Either ai 4= 1 or a 2 4= 1 or 3 + 1 or ... ". The difference between 8-26 and 8-27 and their analogues for equa tions 5-72 a + b = is equivalent to the pair, a = and 6 = 0, and The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 169 5-73 a b = 1 is equivalent to the pair, a == 1 and b = 1 points to a neces sary difference between the treatment of equations and the treatment of inequations. Two or more equations may always be combined into an equivalent equation; two or more inequations cannot be combined into an equivalent inequation. But, by 8-2, a+ b 4= is a consequence of the pair, a 4= and b =|= 0. Equivalent Inequations of Different Forms. The laws of the equiva lence of inequations follow immediately from their analogues for equations. 8-3 a 4= b is equivalent to a -b + -a b 4 1 0. [7-1] 8-31 a 4= 1 is equivalent to -a =h 0- [7-12] 8-32 If &(xi, 2 , ... x n ) and V(xi, .r 2 , . . . x n ) be any two functions of the same variables, then , X 2 , . . . X n ) 4= is equivalent to F(XI, .T 2 , . . . x n ) 4= 0? where F is a function of these same variables and such that, if Ai, A z , A 3 , etc., be the coefficients in $ and Bi f B 2 , B 3 , etc., be the coefficients of the corresponding terms in ^, then the coefficients of the corresponding terms in F will be Ai-Bi + -AiBi, A, -B 2 + -A z B 2 , A 3 -B 3 + -At B,, etc. [7-13] Poretsky s Law of Forms for inequations will be : 8-33 a 4= is equivalent to t 3= a -t+ -at. [7-15] Or in more general form : 8-34 a 4= b is equivalent to t =h (ab + -a -b) t + (a -b + -a b) -t. [7-16] Elimination. The laws governing the elimination of elements from an inequation are not related to the corresponding laws governing equations by the reductio ad absurdum. But these laws follow from the same theorems concerning the limits of functions. 8-4 It A x + B -x 4= 0, then A + B + 0. [6-3\Ax + B -x cA+B. Hence [8 25] Q.E.D. 8-41 If the coefficients in anv function of n variables, F(XI, x z , . . . x n ), 170 A Survey of Symbolic Logic be Ci, C 2 , To, etc., and if F(x 1} .r 2 , - . . .r n ) =f= 0, then ZC=NO [0-32] F(x lf .r, . . . a- n ) cC. Hence [8-25] Q.E.D. Thus, to eliminate any number of elements from an inequation with one member 0, reduce the other member to the form of a normal function of the elements to be eliminated. The elimination is then secured by putting =f= the sum of the coefficients. The form of elimination resultants for inequations of other types follows immediately from the above. It is obvious that they will be analogous to the elimination resultants of equa tions as follows: To get the elimination resultant of any inequation, take the elimination resultant of the corresponding equation and replace = by =f= , and x by + . A universal proposition in logic is represented by an equation: "All a is b " by a -b = 0, " No a is b " by a b = 0. Since a particular proposition is always the contradictory of some universal, any particular proposition may be represented by an inequation: "Some a is b" by a b =f= 0, "Some a is not b" by a -b =j= 0. The elimination of the "middle" term from an equation which represents the combination of two universal premises gives the equation which represents the universal conclusion. But elimina tion of terms from inequations does not represent an analogous logical process. Two particulars give no conclusion: a particular conclusion requires one universal premise. The drawing of a particular conclusion is represented by a process which combines an equation with an inequation, by 8-17, and then simplifies the result, by 8-22. For example, All aisb, a-b = 0. . . a -b c = 0. Some a is c, a c =J= 0. . . a b c + a -b c =h 0. . . abc 4= 0. [8-17] Some fr is c. . . 6c4=0. [8-22] " Solution " of an Inequation. An inequation may be said to have a solution in the sense that for any inequation involving x an equivalent inequation one member of which is x can always be found. 8-5 A x + B -x 4= is equivalent to x 4= -A x + B -x. [7-23] 8-51 A x + B -x 4= is equivalent to "Either B -x ^ or A x ^ ", i. e., to "Either B ex is false or xc-A is false ". [7-21 The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 171 Neither of these "solutions" determines x even within limits. " B ex is false " does not mean " B is excluded from x"; it means only " B is not wholly within x". " Either Bex is false or xc-A is false" does not determine either an upper or a lower limit of x; and limits x only by ex cluding B + u-A from the range of its possible values. Thus "solutions" of inequations are of small significance. Consequences and Sufficient Conditions of an Inequation. By Poret- sky s method, the formula for any consequence of a given inequation follows from the Law of Sufficient Conditions for equations. 17 If for some value of u and some value of v, t = x (a b + -a -6) t + (a -b + -a b + u) -t then a = b. Consequently, we have by the reductio ad absurdum: 8-52 If a 4= b, then t ^= v (a b + -a -b) t + (a -b + -a b + u) -t, where u and v are arbitrary. [7-7] The formula for the sufficient conditions of an inequation similarly fol lows from the Law of Consequences for equations. If a = b, then t = (a b + -a -b + u) t + v (a -b + -a b) -t where u and v are arbitrary. Consequently, by the reductio ad absurdum: 8-53 If for some value of u and some value of v, t 3= (a b + -a -b + u) t + v (a -b + -a b) -t then a =|= b. [7-6] System of an Equation and an Inequation. If we have an equation in one unknown, x, and an inequation which involves x, these may be combined in either of two ways: (1) each may be reduced to the form in which one member is and expanded with reference to all the elements involved in either. Then all the terms which are common to the two may, by 8 17, be dropped from the inequation; (2) the equation may be solved for x, and this value substituted for x in the inequation. 8-6 If A x + B -x = and Cx + D -x * 0, then -.1 C x + -BD -.r 4= 0. [5-8] If Cx + D-x =(= 0, then ACx + -ACx + BD-x + -B D -.r + 17 See Poretsky, Theorie des non-egaliUs logiques, Chaps. 71, 76. 172 A Survey of Symbolic Logic [5-72] If Ax + B-x = 0, then A x = and B -x = 0, and hence A C x = and B D -x = 0. Hence [8 17] -.4 C x + -B D -x 4= 0. The result here is not equivalent to the data, since for one reason the equation A C x + B D -x = is not equivalent to A x + B -x = 0. Nevertheless this mode of combination is the one most frequently useful. 8-61 The condition that the equation A x + B -x = and the inequation C x + D -x 4= may be regarded as simultaneous is, A B = and -A C + -B D 4= 0, and the determination of x which they give is x 4= (-A -C + A-D)x + (BC + -B D) -x [7-23] A x + B -x = is equivalent to x = -A x + B -x. Substi tuting this value of x in the inequation, C (-A x + B -x) + D (A x + -B -x) 4= or (-A C + A D) x+(B C + -BD) -x 4= 0. [8-4] A condition of this inequation is 4=0, or (-A+B) C+(A + -B) D 4= 0. But the equation A x + B -x = requires that ^45 = 0, and hence that -A + B = -A and -B + A = -B. Hence if the equation be possible and A B = 0, the condition of the inequation reduces to -A C + -B D 4= 0. [8-4] If the original inequation be possible, then C + D 4= 0. But this condition is already present in -A C + -B D 4= 0, since -A C c C and hence [8-25] if -.4(74=0, then C 4= 0, and -BDcD and hence if -B D 4= 0, then D 4= 0, while [8-26] C + D 4= is equivalent to " Either C 4= or D 4= ", and -A C + -B D 4= is equivalent to "Either -A C 4= or -B D 4= ". Hence the entire condition of the system is expressed by A B = and -A C + -B D 4= And [8 5] the solution of the inequation, (-AC + AD)x + (BC + -BD)-x 4= 0, is x 4= (-A-C + A-D)x + (BC + -BD)-x This method gives the most complete determination of x, in the form of an inequation, afforded by the data. The Classic, or Boole-Schroder, Algebra of Logic 173 VI. NOTE ON THE INVERSE OPERATIONS, "SUBTRACTION" AND "DIVISION" It is possible to define "subtraction" { } and "division" { : j in the algebra. Let a b be x such that b + x = a. And let a : b be y such that by = a. However, these inverse operations are more trouble than they are worth, and should not be admitted to the system. In the first place, it is not possible to give these relations a general meaning. We cannot have in the algebra: (1) If a and 6 are elements in A", then a : b is an element in K; nor (2) If a and 6 are elements in K, then a b is an element in K. If a : b is an element, y, then for some y it must be true that b y = a. But if b y = a, then, by 2-2, a cb y and, by 5-2, a cb. Thus if a and b be so chosen that a cb is false, then a : b cannot be any element in K. To give a : b a general meaning, it would be required that every element be contained in every element that is, that all elements in K be identical. Similarly, if a b be an element, x, in A, then for some x, it must be true that 6 + x = a. But if b + x = a, then, by 2-2, b + xca and, by 5-21, be a. Thus if a and b be so chosen that b c a is false, then a b cannot be any element in A". Again, a b and a : b are ambiguous. It might be expected that, since a + -a = 1, the value of 1 a would be unambiguously -a. But 1 a = x is satisfied by any x such that -a c x. For 1 a = x is equiva lent to x + a = 1, which is equivalent to -(x + a) = -1 = = -a -x And -a -x = is equivalent to -a c x. Similarly, it might be expected that, since a -a = 0, the value of : a would be unambiguously -a. But : a = y, or a y = 0, is satisfied by any y such that y c -a. a y = and y c -a are equivalent. Finally, these relations can always be otherwise expressed. The value of a : b is the value of y in the equation, b y = a. b y = a is equivalent to -a b y + a -b + a -y = The equation of condition here is a -b = 0. And the solution, on this condition, is y = a + u (a + -b) = ab + u-a-b, where u is undetermined. The value of a b is the value of x in the equation, b + x = a. b + x = a is equivalent to -a b + -a x + a -b -x = 174 A Survey of Symbolic Logic The equation of condition here is, -a b = 0. And the solution, on this condition, is x = a -b + v a = a -b + v a 6, where v is undetermined. In each case, the equation of condition gives the limitation of the meaning of the expression, and the solution expresses the range of its possible values. CHAPTER III APPLICATIONS OF THE BOOLE-SCHRODER ALGEBRA There are four applications of the classic algebra of logic which are commonly considered: (1) to spatial entities, (2) to the logical relations of classes, (3) to the logical relations of propositions, (4) to the logic of relations. The application to spatial entities may be made to continuous and discontinuous segments of a line, or to continuous and discontinuous regions in a plane, or to continuous and discontinuous regions in space of any dimensions. Segments of a line and regions in a plane have both been used as diagrams for the relations of classes and of propositions, but the application to regions in a plane gives the more workable diagrams, for obvious reasons. And since it is only for diagrammatic purposes that the application of the algebra to spatial entities has any importance, we shall confine our attention to regions in a plane. I. DIAGRAMS FOR THE LOGICAL RELATIONS OF CLASSES For diagrammatic purposes, the elements of the algebra, a, b, c, etc., will denote continuous or discontinuous regions in a given plane, or in a circumscribed portion of a plane. 1 represents the plane (or circumscribed portion) itself. is the null-region which is supposed to be contained in every region. For any given region, a, -a denotes the plane exclusive of a, i. e., not-a. The "product", a xb or a b, is that region which is com mon to a and b. If a and 6 do not "overlap ", then a b is the null-region, 0. The "sum", a + b, denotes the region which is either a or b (or both). In determining a + b, the common region, a b, is not, of course, counted twice over. a + b = a -b + a b + -a b. This is a difference between + in the Boole-Schroder Algebra and the + of arithmetic. The equation, a = b, signifies that a and b denote the same region. ac6 signifies that a lies wholly within b, that a is included or contained in b. It should be noted that whenever a = b, a c b and b c a. Also, a c a holds always. Thus the relation c is analogous not to < in arithmetic but to . 175 176 A Survey of Symbolic Logic While the laws of this algebra hold for regions, thus denoted, however those regions may be distributed in the plane, not every supposition about their distribution is equally convenient as a diagram for the relations of classes. All will be familiar with Euler s diagrams, invented a century earlier than Boole s algebra. "All a is 6" is represented by a circle a wholly within a circle b; " No a is b " by two circles, a and b, which nowhere intersect; "Some a is 6" and "Some a is not 6" by intersecting circles, sometimes with an asterisk to indicate that division of the diagram which represents the proposition. The defects of this style of diagram are obvious : x-*>c^\ ^-^^\ cuto; All a is 6 No a is b Some a is & Some a is not 6 FIG. 1 the representation goes beyond the relation of classes indicated by the propo sition. In the case of "All a is &", the circle a falls within b in such wise as to suggest that we may infer "Some b is not a", but this inference is not valid. The representation of "No a is b" similarly suggests "Some things are neither a nor b", which also is unwarranted. With these dia grams, there is no way of indicating whether a given region is null/ But the general assumption that no region of the diagram is null leads to the misinterpretations mentioned, and to others which are similar. Yet Euler s diagrams were in general use until the invention of Venn, and are still doing service in some quarters. The Venn diagrams were invented specifically to represent the relations of logical classes as treated in the Boole-Schroder Algebra. 1 The principle of these diagrams is that classes be represented by regions in such relation to one another that all the possible logical relations of these classes can be indicated in the same diagram. That is, the diagram initially leaves room for any possible relation of the classes, and the actual or given relation, can then be specified by indicating that some particular region is null or is not- null. Initially the diagram represents simply the "universe of discourse", or 1. For one element, a, 1 = a + -a. 2 For two elements, a and b, 1 = (a + -a) (b + -b) = a b + a -b + -a b + -a -b 1 See Venn, Symbolic Logic, Chap. v. The first edition of this book appeared before Schroder s Algebra der Logik, but Venn adopts the most important alteration of Boole s original algebra the non-exclusive interpretation of a + b. 2 See above, Chap, n, propositions 4-8 and 5-92. Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 177 For three elements, a, b, and c, 1 = (a + -a) (b + -b) (c + -c) = a b c + a b -c + a -b c + -a b c + a -b -c + -a b -c + -a -b c + -a -6 -c Thus the " universe of discourse" for any number of elements, n, must correspond to a diagram of 2 r( divisions, each representing a term in the expansion of 1. If the area within the square in the diagram represent -a -a-b FIG. 2 the universe, and the area within the circle represent the element a, then the remainder of the square will represent its negative, -a. If another element, 6, is to be introduced into the same universe, then b may be repre sented by another circle whose periphery cuts the first. The divisions, (1) into a and, -a, (2) into b and -b, will thus be cross-divisions in the uni verse. If a and b be classes, this arrangement represents all the possible subclasses in the universe; a b, those things which are both a and b; a-b, those things which are a but not b; -ab, those things which are 6 but not a; -a -6, those things which are neither a nor b. The area which represents the product, a b, will readily be located. We have enclosed by a broken line, in figure 2, the area which represents a + b. The negative of any entity is always the plane exclusive of that entity. For example, -(a b + -a -6), in the above, will be the sum of the other two divisions of the diagram, a -b + -a 6. If it be desired to introduce a third element, c, into the universe, it is necessary to cut each one of the previous subdivisions into two one part which shall be in c and one part which shall be outside c. This can be be accomplished by introducing a third circle, thus It is not really necessary to draw the square, 1, since the area given to the figure, or the whole page, may as well be taken to represent the universe. But when the square is omitted, it must be remembered that the unenclosed 13 178 A Survey of Symbolic Logic area outside all the lines of the figure is a subdivision of the universe the entity -a, or -a -ft, or -a -b -c, etc., according to the number of elements involved. -a-b-c FIG. 3 If a fourth element, d, be introduced, it is no longer possible to repre sent each element by a circle, since a fourth circle could not be introduced in figure 3 so as to cut each previous subdivision into two parts one part in d and one part outside d. But this can be done with ellipses. 3 Each -a-b-c-d FIG. 4 3 We have deformed the ellipses slightly and have indicated the two points of junction. This helps somewhat in drawing the diagram, which is most easily done as follows: First, draw the upright ellipse, a. Mark a point at the base of it and one on the left. Next, Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 179 one of the subdivisions in figure 4 can be "named" by noting whether it is in or outside of each of the ellipses in turn. Thus the area indicated by 6 is a b c -d, and the area indicated by 12 is -a -b c d. With a diagram of four elements, it requires care, at first, to specify such regions as a + c, a c + b d, b + -d. These can always be determined with certainty by developing each term of the expression with reference to the missing ele ments. 4 Thus ac + b d = ac (b + -b) (d + -d) + b d (a + -a) (c + -c) = a b c d + a b c -d + a -b c d + a -b c -d + a b -c d + -a b c d + -a b -c d The terms of this sum, in the order given, are represented in figure 4 by the divisions numbered 10, 6, 9, 5, 14, 11, 15. Hence ac + bd is the region which combines these. With a little practice, one may identify such regions without this tedious procedure. Such an area as b + -d is more easily identified by inspection: it comprises 2, 3, 6, 7, 10, 11, 14, 15, and 1, 4, 5, 8. Into this diagram for four elements, it is possible to introduce a fifth, e, if we let e be the region between the broken lines in figure 5. The principle of the "square diagram" (figure 6) is the same as Venn s: it represents all FIG. 5 draw the horizontal ellipse, d, from one of these points to the other, so that the line con necting the two points is common to a and d. Then, draw ellipse 6 from and returning to the base point, and ellipse c from and returning to the point on the left. If not done in this way, the first attempts are likely to give twelve or fourteen subdivisions instead of the required sixteen. 4 See Chap, n, 5-91. 180 A Survey of Symbolic Logic the subclasses in a universe of the specified number of elements. No diagram is really convenient for more than four elements, but such are -a -a a-b -a b -a -b FIG. 6 frequently needed. The most convenient are those made by modifying slightly the square diagram of four terms, at the right in figure 6. 5 Figure 7 -a -b b< -e h -h FIG. 7 -e d gives, by this method, the diagrams for five and for six elements. We give also the diagram for seven (figure 8) since this is frequently useful and not easy to make in any other way. The manner in which any function in the algebra may be specified in a diagram of the proper number of divisions, has already been explained. We must now consider how any asserted relation of elements any inclu- 6 See Lewis Carroll, Symbolic Logic, for the particular form of the square diagram which we adopt. Mr. Dodgson is able, by this method, to give diagrams for as many as 10 terms, 1024 subdivisions (p. 176). Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 181 sion, a c b, or any equation, a = b, or inequation, a =)= b may be repre sented. Any such relation, or any set of such relations, can be completely specified in these diagrams by taking advantage of the fact that they can always be reduced either to the form of an expression = or to the form of an expression 4= 0- Any inclusion, a c b, is equivalent to an equa tion, a -6 = O. 6 And every equation of the form a = b is equivalent to one of the form a -b + -a b = O. 7 Thus any inclusion or equation can be represented by some expression = 0. Similarly, any inequation of the form a --r b is equivalent to one of the form a-b + -ab =H O. 8 Thus any asserted relation whatever can be specified by indicating that some region (continuous or discontinuous) either is null, { = Oj, or is not-null, j 4 1 0}. We can illustrate this, and at the same time indicate the manner in which such diagrams are useful, by applying the method to a few syllogisms. Given: All a is 6, . and All b is c, 6 See Chap, n, 4-9. 7 See Chap, n, 6-4. 8 See Chap, n, 7-1. a cb, b cc, a -b = 0. b -c = 0. 182 A Survey of Symbolic Logic We have here indicated (figure 9) that a -b the a which is not b is null by striking it out (with horizontal lines). Similarly, w T e have indicated that all b is c by striking out b -c (with vertical lines). Together, the two operations have eliminated the whole of a -c, thus indicating that a -c = 0, or "All a is c ". FIG. 9 For purposes of comparison, we may derive this same conclusion by algebraic processes. 9 Since a -b = = a -b (c + -c) = a -b c + a -b -c, and b -c = = b -c (a + -a) = a b -c + -a b -c, therefore, a -b c + a -b -c + a b -c + -a b -c = 0, and [5-72] a b -c + a -b -c = = a -c (b + -b) = a -c. The equation in the third line, which combines the two premises, states exactly the same facts which are represented in the diagram. The last equation gives the conclusion, which results from eliminating the middle term, b. Since a diagram will not perform an elimination, we must there "look for" the conclusion. One more illustration of this kind : Given: All a is b, a -b = 0. and No b is c, b c = 0. The first premise is indicated (figure 10) by striking out the area a -b (with horizontal lines), the second by striking out be (with vertical lines). To gether, these operations have struck out the whole of a c, giving the con clusion ac = 0, or "No a is c". 9 Throughout this chapter, references in square brackets give the number of the the orem in Chap, u by which any unobvious step in proof is taken. Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 183 In a given diagram where all the possible classes or regions in the uni verse are initially represented, as they are by this method of diagramming, we cannot presume that a given subdivision is null or is not-null. The actual state of affairs may require that some regions be null, or that some be not-null, or that some be null and others not. Consequently, even when we have struck out the regions which are null, we cannot presume that all the regions not struck out are no/-null. This would be going beyond the premises. All we can say, when we have struck out the null-regions, is that, so far as the premises represented are concerned, any region not struck out may be not-null. If, then, we wish to represent the fact that a given region is definitely not-null that a given class has members, that there is some expression 4= we must indicate this by some distinctive mark in the diagram. For this purpose, it is convenient to use asterisks. That a b =}= 0, may be indicated by an asterisk in the region a b. But here a further difficulty arises. If the diagram involve more than two elements, say, a, b, and c, the region a b will be divided into two parts, a b c and a b -c. Now the inequation, a b 4= 0, does not tell us that a b c =}= 0, and it does not tell us that a 6 -c 4= 0- It tells us only that a b c + a b -c =|= 0. If, then, we wish to indicate a b 4= by an asterisk in the region a b, we shall not be warranted in putting it either inside the circle c or outside c. It belongs in one or the other or both that is all we know. Hence it is convenient to indicate a b 4= by placing an asterisk in each of the divisions of a b and connecting them by a broken line, to signify that at least one of these regions is not-null (figure 11). ab =0 FIG. 11 We shall show later that a particular proposition is best interpreted by an inequation; "Some a is 6", the class a b has members, by ab * 0. 184 A Survey of Symbolic Logic Suppose, then, we have: Given: All a is b, a-b = 0. and Some a is c, a c H= 0. The conclusion, "Some b is c", is indicated (figure 12) by the fact that one of the two connected asterisks must remain the whole region a b c + a -be cannot be null. But one of them, in a -b c, is struck out in indi cating the other premise, a -6 = 0. Thus a b c =}= 0, and hence a c 4= 0. FIG. 12 The entire state of affairs in a universe of discourse may be represented by striking out certain regions, indicating by asterisks that certain regions are not-null, and remembering that any region which is neither struck out nor occupied by an asterisk is in doubt. Also, the separate subdivisions of a region occupied by connected asterisks are in doubt unless all but one of these connected asterisks occupy regions which are struck out. And any regions which are left in doubt by a given set of premises might, of course, be made specifically null or not-null by an additional premise. In complicated problems, the use of the diagram is often simpler and more illuminating than the use of transformations, eliminations, and solu tions in the algebra. All the information to be derived from such opera tions, the diagram gives (for one who can "see" it) at a glance. Further illustrations will be unnecessary here, since we shall give diagrams in con nection with the problems of the next section. II. THE APPLICATION TO CLASSES The interpretation of the algebra for logical classes has already been explained. 10 a, b, c, etc., are to denote classes taken in extension; that is 10 Chap, n, pp. 121-22. Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 185 to say, c signifies, not a class-concept, but the aggregate of all the objects denoted by some class-concept. Thus if a = b, the concept of the class a may not be a synonym for the concept of the class b, but the classes a and b must consist of the same members, have the same extension, acb sig nifies that every member of the class a is also a member of the class b. The " product", a b, denotes the class of those things which are both mem bers of a and members of b. The "sum ", a + 6, denotes the class of those things which are either members of a or members of b (or members of both). denotes the null-class, or class without members. Various concepts may denote an empty class "immortal men", "feathered invertebrates", "Julius Caesar s twin," etc. but all such terms have the same extension; they denote nothing existent. Thus, since classes are taken in extension, there is but one null-class, 0. Since it is a law of the algebra that, for every x, ex, we must accept, in this connection, the convention that the null-class is contained in every class. All the immortal men are mem bers of any class, since there are no such. 1 represents the class "every thing ", the "universe of discourse ", or simply the "universe ". This term is pretty well understood. But it may be defined as follows: if a n be any member of the class a, and A" represent the class-concept of the class x, then the "universe of discourse" is the class of all the classes, x, such that "a n is an X" is either true or false. If "The fixed stars are blind" is neither true nor false, then "fixed stars" and the class "blind" do not belong to the same universe of discourse. The negative of a, -a, is a class such that a and -a have no members in common, and a and -a between them comprise everything in the universe of discourse: a -a = 0, "Nothing is both a and not-a", and + -a == 1, "Everything is either a or -a". Since inclusions, a c 6, equations, a = b, and inequations, a 4= b, repre sent relations which are asserted to hold between classes, they are capable of being interpreted as logical propositions. And the operations of the algebra transformations, eliminations, and solutions are capable of interpretation as processes of reasoning. It would hardly be correct to say that the operations of the algebra represent the processes of reasoning from given premises to conclusions: they do indeed represent processes of reasoning, but they seldom attain the result by just those operations which are supposed to characterize the customary processes of thinking. In fact, it is the greater generality of the symbolic operations which makes their application to reasoning valuable. * 186 A Survey of Symbolic Logic The representation of propositions by inclusions, equations, and in equations, and the interpretation of inclusions, equations, and inequations in the algebra as propositions, offers certain difficulties, due to the fact that the algebra represents relations of extension only, while ordinary logical propositions quite frequently concern relations of intension. In discussing the representation of the four typical propositions, we shall be obliged to consider some of these problems of interpretation. The universal affirmative, " All a is 6", has been variously represented as, (1) a = a b, (2) fl-c6, (3) a = v b, where v is undetermined, (4) a -b = 0. All of these are equivalent. 11 The only possible doubt concerns (3) a = v b, where v is undetermined. But its equivalence to the others may be demon strated as follows: [7- 1] a = v b is equivalent to a--(v b) + -a v b = 0. But a -(v b) + -a v b = a (-v + -b) + -a v b = a -v + a -b + -a v b. Hence [5-72] if a = vb, then a -b = 0. And if a = a b } then for some value of v (i. e., v = a), a = v b. These equivalents of "All a is 6" would most naturally be read: (1) The a s are identical with those things which are a s and 6 s both. (2) a is contained in b: every member of a is also a member of b. (3) The class a is identical with some (undetermined) portion of the class 6. (4) The class of those things which are members of a but not members of 6 is null. If we examine any one of these symbolic expressions of "All a is 6", we shall discover that not only may it hold when a = 0, but it always holds when a = 0. = 0-6, c 6, and 0--6 = 0, will be true for every element b. And "0 = b for some value of v" is always true for v = 0. Since a = means that a has no members, it is thus clear that the algebra requires that "All a is 6" be true whenever no members of a exist. The actual use of language is ambiguous on this point. We should hardly say that "All sea serpents have red wings, because there aren t any sea ser pents"; yet we understand the hero of the novel who asserts "Whoever 11 See Chap. n. 4-9. % Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 187 enters here must pass over my dead body". This hero does not mean to assert that any one will enter the defended portal over his body: his desire is that the class of those who enter shall be null. The difference of the two cases is this: the concept "sea serpent" does not necessarily involve the concept "having red wings", while the concept of "those who enter the portal" as conceived by the hero does involve the concept of passing over his body. We readily accept and understand the inclusion of an empty class in some other when the concept of the one involves the concept of the other when the relation is one of intension. But in this sense, an empty class is not contained in any and every class, but in some only. In order to understand this law of the algebra, "For every .r, ex", we must bear in mind two things: (1) that the algebra treats of relations in extension only, and (2) that ordinary language frequently concerns relations of intension, and is usually confined to relations of intension where a null class is involved. The law does not accord with the ordinary use of language. This is, however, no observation upon its truth, for it is a necessary law of the relation of classes in extension. It is an immediate consequence of the principle, "For every y, y cl", that is, "All members of any class, y, are also members of the class of all things". One cannot accept this last without accepting, by implication, the principle that, in extension, the null- class is contained in every class. The interpretation of propositions in which no null-class is involved is not subject to any corresponding difficulty, both because in such cases the relations predicated are frequently thought of in extension and because the relation of classes in extension is entirely analogous to their relation in intension except where the class or the class 1 is involved. But the interpretation of the algebra must, in all cases, be confined to extension. In brief: "All a is 6" must always be interpreted in the algebra as stating a relation of classes in extension, not of class-concepts, and this requires that, whenever a is an empty class, "All a is 6" should be true. The proposition, "No a is b", is represented by ab = "Nothing is both a and 6", or "Those things which are members of a and of b both, do not exist". Since "No a is 6" is equivalent to "All a is not-6", it may also be represented by a -b = -b, a c-6, 6c-a, or a = v -b, where v is undetermined. In the case of this proposition, there is no discrepancy between the algebra and the ordinary use of language. The representation of particular propositions has been a problem to symbolic logicians, partly because they have not clearly conceived the 188 A Survey of Symbolic Logic relations of classes and have tried to stretch the algebra to cover traditional relations which hold in -intension only. If "Some a is 6" be so interpreted that it is false when the class a has no members, then "Some a is 6" will not follow from "All a is 6", for "All a is 6" is true whenever a = 0. But on the other hand, if " Some a is b " be true when a = 0, we have two diffi culties: (1) this does not accord with ordinary usage, and (2) "Some a is 6" will not, in that case, contradict "No a is 6". For whenever there are no members of a (when a = 0), "No a is 6" (a b = 0) will be true. Hence if "Some a is 6" can be true when a = 0, then "Some a is b" and "No a is 6" can both be true at once. The solution of the difficulty lies in observing that "Some a is b" as a relation of extension requires that there be some a that at least one member of the class a exist. Hence, when propositions are interpreted in extension, "Some a is 6" does not follow from "All a is 6", precisely because whenever a = 0, "All a is 6" will be true. But "Some a is b" does follow from "All a is 6, and members of a exist". To interpret properly "Some a is 6", we need only remember that it is the contradictory of "No a is 6". Since "No a is 6" is interpreted by a b = 0, "Some a is 6" will be a b =(= 0, that is, "The class of things which are members of a and of b both is not-null". It is surprising what blunders have been committed in the representation of particular propositions. "Some x is y" has been symbolized by x y = v, where v is undetermined, and by u x = v y, where u and v are undetermined. Both of these are incorrect, and for the same reason: An "undetermined" element may have the value or the value 1 or any other value. Conse quently, both these equations assert precisely nothing at all. They are both of them true a priori, true of every x and y and in all cases. For them to be significant, u and v must not admit the value 0. But in that case they are equivalent to x y =J= 0, which is much simpler and obeys well- defined laws which are consonant with its meaning. Since we are to symbolize "All a is b" by a -b = 0, it is clear that its contradictory, "Some a is not 6", will be a -b =|= 0. To sum up, then: the four typical propositions will be symbolized as follows: A. All a is b, a -b = 0. E. No a is b, ab = 0. I. Some a is b, a b =|= 0. O. Some a is not b, a -b =}= 0. Each of these four has various equivalents: 12 12 See Chap. 11, 4 9 and 8 14. Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 189 A. a -b = 0, a = a b, -a + b = 1, -a + -b = -a, a c b, and -b c-a are all equivalent. E. a b = 0, a = a -b, -a + -b = 1, -a + b = -a, ac-6, and be -a are all equivalent. I. a b 4 1 0, a 4= a -&, -a + -6 4 1 1, and -a + 6 4 s -a are all equivalent. O. o -6 =}= 0, a 4= a 6, -a + 6 4 1 1, and -a + -b 4= -a are all equivalent. The reader will easily translate these equivalent forms for himself. With these symbolic representations of A, E, I and O, let us investigate the relation of propositions traditionally referred to under the topics, "The Square of Opposition", and "Immediate Inference". That the traditional relation of the two pairs of contradictories holds, is at once obvious. If a -b = is true, then a -6 =f= is false; if a -b = is false, then a -b =)= is true. Similarly for the pair, a b = and a b 4= 0. The relation of contraries is defined: Two propositions such that both may be false but both cannot be true are "contraries". This relation is traditionally asserted to hold between A and E. It does not hold in ex tension: it fails to hold in the algebra precisely whenever the subject of the two propositions is a null-class. If a = 0, then a -b = and a b = O. 13 That is to say, if no members of a exist, then from the point of view of extension, "All a is 6" and "No a is 6" are both true. But if it be assumed or stated that the class a has members (a =|= 0), then the relation holds. a = a (b + -b) = a b + a -b. Hence if a 4= 0, then a b + a -b 4= 0. [8-17] If a b + a -b 4= and a -b = 0, then a b 4= 0. (1) And if a b + a -b =h and a b = 0, then a -b 4= 0. (2) We may read the last two lines : (1) If there are members of the class a and all a is b, then "No a is 6" is false. (2) If there are members of the class a and no a is b, then "All a is 6" is false. By tradition, the particular affirmative should follow from the universal affirmative, the particular negative from the universal negative. As has been pointed out, this relation fails to hold when a = 0. But it holds when ever a 4= 0. W T e can read a b 4= 0, in (1) above, as "Some a is 6" instead of " No a is b is false", and a -b 4= 0, in (2), as "Some a is not 6" instead of " All a is b is false ". We then have : 13 See Chap, n, 1-5. 190 A Survey of Symbolic Logic (1) If there are members of a, and all a is b, then some a is b. (2) If there are members of a, and no a is b, then some a is not b. " Subcontraries " are propositions such that both cannot be false but both may be true. Traditionally "Some a is 6" and "Some a is not 6" are subcontraries. But whenever a = 0, a b 4= and a -6 =j= are both false, and the relation fails to hold. When a ^ 0, it holds. Since a b = is " Some a is b is false ", and a -b = is " Some a is not b 1 is false", we can read (1) and (2) above: (1) If there are members of a, and "Some a is 6" is false, then some a is not b. (2) If there are members of a and "Some a is not 6" is false, then some a is 6. To sum up, then: the traditional relations of the "square of opposition" hold in the algebra whenever the subject of the four propositions denotes a class which has members. When the subject denotes a null-class, only the relation of the contradictories holds. The two universal propositions are, in that case, both true, and the two particular propositions both false. The subject of immediate inference is not so well crystallized by tradi tion, and for the good reason that it runs against this very difficulty of the class without members. For instance, the following principles would all be accepted by some logicians : "No a is 6" gives "Xo b is a". "No b is a" gives "All b is not-a". "All b is not-a" gives "Some b is not-a". "Some b is not-a" gives "Some not-a is 6". Hence "Xo a is 6" gives "Some not-a is 6". Xo cows (a) are inflexed gasteropods (6) " implies "Some non-cows are inflexed gasteropods": "Xo mathematician (a) has squared the circle (b) " implies "Some non-mathematicians have squared the circle". These infer ences are invalid precisely because the class b inflexed gasteropods, suc cessful circle-squarers is an empty class; and because it was presumed that "All b is not-a" gives "Some b is not-a". Those who consider the algebraic treatment of null-classes to be arbitrary will do well to consider the logical situation just outlined with some care. The inference of any particular proposition from the corresponding universal requires the assumption that either the class denoted by the subject of the particular proposition or the class denoted by its predicate ("not-6" regarded as the predicate of "Some a is not 6") is a class which has members, Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 191 The " conversion" of the universal negative and of the particular affirma tive is validated by the law ab = b a. " Xo a is b ", a b = 0, gives b a = 0, "No b is a". And "Some a is 6", a 6 4= 0, gives b a 4= 0, "Some b is a". Also, "Some a is not 6", a -6 4 1 0, gives -6 a 4= 0, "Some not-6 is a". The "converse" of the universal affirmative is simply the "converse" of the corresponding particular, the inference of which from the universal has already been discussed. What are called "obverses" i. e., two equivalent propositions with the same subject and such that the predicate of one is the negative of the predicate of the other are merely alternative readings of the same equation, or depend upon the law, -(-a) = a 14 . Since x y = is " Xo x is y ", a -b = 0, which is "All a is 6", is also "Xo a is not-6". And since a b = is equiva lent to a -(-b) = 0, "Xo a is 6" is equivalent to "All a is not-6". A convenient diagram for immediate inferences can be made by putting S (subject) and P (predicate) in the center of the circles assigned to them, -S between the two divisions of -*S, and -P between its two constituent divisions. The eight arrows indicate the various ways in which the dia- (Mverl Prop, Converse -S-P FIG. 13 gram may be read, and thus suggest all the immediate inferences which are valid. For example, the arrow marked "converse" indicates the two terms which will appear in the converse of the given proposition and the order in which they occur. In this diagram, we must specify the null and 14 See Chap, n, 2-8. 192 A Survey of Symbolic Logic not-null regions indicated by the given proposition. And we may if we wish add the qualification that the classes, S and P, have members. If "No is P", and S and P have members: SP = P 4= o 5. -4. -S-P 7. 6. FIG. 14 Reading the diagram of figure 14 in the various possible ways, we have: 1. No S is P, and 1. Some S is not P. (According as we read what is indicated by the fact that S P is null, or what is indicated by the fact that S -P is not-null.) 2. All S is not-P, and 2. Some S is not-P. 3. All P is not-S, and 3. Some P is not-S. 4. No P is S, and 4. Some P is not-S. 5. Wanting. 6. Some not-S is P. 7. Some not-P is S. 8. Wanting. Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 193 Similarly, if "All S is P", and S and P have members: S -P = 0, S + 0, P 4= f. 5. * FIG. 15 Reading from the diagram (figure 15), we have: 1. All S is P, and 1. Some S is P. 2. No S is not-P. 3. Wanting. 4. Some P is S. 5. Some not-$ is not-P. 6. Wanting. 7. No not-P is S. 8. All not-P is not-S, and 8. Some not-P is not-S. The whole subject of immediate inference is so simple as to be almost trivial. Yet in the clearing of certain difficulties concerning null-classes the algebra has done a real service here. The algebraic processes which give the results of syllogistic reasoning have already been illustrated. But in those examples we carried out the 14 194 A Survey of Symbolic Logic operations at unnecessary lengths in order to illustrate their connection with the diagrams. The premises of any syllogism give information which concerns, altogether, three classes. The object is to draw a conclusion which gives as much of this information as can be stated independently of the "middle" term. This is exactly the kind of result which elimination gives in the algebra. And elimination is very simple. The result of eliminating x from A x + B -x is A B = O. 15 Whenever the conclusion of a syllogism is universal, it may be obtained by combining the premises in a single equation one member of which is 0, and eliminating the "middle" term. For example: No x is y, x y = 0. All z is x, z -x = 0. Combining these, x y + z -x = 0. Eliminating x, y z = 0. Hence the valid conclusion is "No y is z", or "No z is y". Any syllogism with a universal conclusion may also be symbolized so that the conclusion follows from the law, "If a c6 and b cc, then ace". By this method, the laws, -(-a) = a and "If a c b, then -b c-a", are some times required also. 16 For example: No x is y, x c -y. All z is x, z ex. Hence z c-y, or "No z is y", and y c-z, or "No y is z". There is no need to treat further examples of syllogisms with universal conclusions : they are all alike, as far as the algebra is concerned. Of course, there are other ways of representing the premises and of getting the con clusion, but the above are the simplest. When a syllogism has a particular premise, and therefore a particular conclusion, the process is somewhat different. Here we have given one equation 1=0) and one inequation {+0j. We proceed as follows: (1) expand the inequation by introducing the third element; (2) multiply the equation by the element not appearing in it; (3) make use of the prin ciple, " If a + b =f= and a = 0, then b 4= 0", to obtain an inequation with only one term in the literal member; (4) eliminate the element representing the "middle term" from this inequation. Take, for example, A 1 1 in 15 See Chap, n, 7-4. 16 See Chap, n, 2-8 and 3-1. Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 195 the third figure: All x is z, x -z = 0. Some x is y, x y =}= 0. x y = x y (z + -z) = x y z + x y -z. Hence, x y z + x y -z =f= 0. [1-5] Since x -z = 0. x y -z = 0. [8 17] Since xy z + xy -z 4= and # -.r = 0, therefore x y z =f= 0. Hence [8-22] yz 4= 0, or "Some y is a". An exactly similar process gives the conclusion for every syllogism with a particular premise. We have omitted, so far, any consideration of syllogisms with both premises universal and a particular conclusion those with "weakened" conclusions, and A A I and E A in the third and fourth figures. These are all invalid as general forms of reasoning. They involve the difficulty which is now familiar: a universal does not give a particular without an added assumption that some class has members. If we add to the premises of such syllogisms the assumption that the class denoted by the middle term is a class with members, this makes the conclusion valid. Take, for example, A A I in the third figure: All x is y, x-y = 0, and x has members, x =|= 0. All x is z, x -z = 0. Since x =k Q, xy + x -y 4= 0, and since x -y = 0, x y 4 1 0. Hence x y z + x y -z 4= 0. (1) Since x -z = 0, x y -z = 0. (2) By (1) and (2), x y z 4 0, and hence y z =f= 0, or "Some y is z". Syllogisms of this form are generally considered valid because of a tacit assumption that we are dealing with things which exist. In symbolic reasoning, or any other which is rigorous, any such assumption must be made explicit. An alternative treatment of the syllogism is due to Mrs. Ladd-Franklin. 17 If we take the two premises of any syllogism and the contradictory of its conclusion, we have what may be called an "inconsistent triad" three propositions such that if any two of them be true, the third must be false. For if the two premises be true, the conclusion must be true and its con- 17 See "On the Algebra of Logic", in Studies in Logic by members of Johns Hopkins University, ed. by Peirce; also articles listed in Bibl. We do not follow Mrs. Franklin s symbolism but give her theory in a modified form, due to Josiah Royce. 196 A Survey of Symbolic Logic tradictory false. And if the contradictory of the conclusion be true, i. e., if the conclusion be false, and either of the premises true, then the other premise must be false. As a consequence, every inconsistent triad corre sponds to three valid syllogisms. Any two members of the triad give the contradictory of the third as a conclusion. For example: Inconsistent Triad 1. All a: is y 2. All y is z 3. Some x is not z. Valid Syllogisms 1. Allan s?/ 1. M\ x is y 2. All y is 2 2. All y is z 3. Some x is not z 3. Some x is not 2 . . All x is 2. . . Some y is not z. . . Some x is not y. Omitting the cases in which two universal premises are supposed to give a particular conclusion, since these really have three premises and are not syllogisms, the inconsistent triad formed from any valid syllogism will consist of two universals and one particular. For two universals will give a universal conclusion, whose contradictory will be a particular; while if one premise be particular, the conclusion will be particular, and its contradictory will be the second universal. Representing universals and particulars as we have done, this means that if we symbolize any incon sistent triad, we shall have two equations { = Oj and one inequation { ={= 0}. And the two universals { = Oj must give the contradictory of the particular as a conclusion. This means that the contradictory of the particular must be expressible as the elimination resultant of an equation of the form a x + b -x = 0, because we have found all conclusions from two universals to be thus obtainable. Hence the two universals of any inconsistent triad will be of the form a x = and b -x = respectively. The elimination resultant of a x + b -x = is a b = 0, whose contradictory will be a b ^ 0. Hence every inconsistent triad will have the form : a x = 0, b -x = 0, a b =f where a and b are any terms whatever positive or negative, and x is any positive term. The validity of any syllogism m-ay be tested by expressing its proposi tions in the form suggested, contradicting its conclusion by changing it from {=0} to {=t=.0} or the reverse, and comparing the resulting triad Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 197 with the above form. And the conclusion of any syllogism may be got by considering how the triad must be completed to have the required form. Thus, if the two premises are No x is y, x y = and All not-z is y, -z -y = the conclusion must be universal. The particular required to complete the triad is x -z 4= 0. Hence the conclusion is x -z = 0, or "All x is z". (Incidentally it may be remarked that this valid syllogism is in no one of the Aristotelian moods.) Again, if the premises should be x y = and yz = 0, no conclusion is possible, because these two cannot belong to the same inconsistent triad. We can, then, frame a single canon for all strictly valid syllogistic reason ing: The premises and the contradictory of the conclusion, expressed in symbolic form, { = 0} or { 4= 0}, must form a triad such that (1) There are two universals { = 0} and one particular {4= 0). (2) The two universals have a term in common, which is once positive and once negative. (3) The particular puts 4= the product of the coefficients of the com mon term in the two universals. A few experiments with traditional syllogisms will make this matter clear to the reader. The validity of this canon depends solely upon the nature of the syllogism three terms, three propositions and upon the law of elimination resultants, "If a .r + b -x = 0, then a b = 0". Reasoning which involves conditional propositions hypothetical argu ments, dilemmas, etc. may be treated by the same process, if we first reduce them to syllogistic form. For example, we may translate "If A is J5, then C is D" by "All x is y", where x is the class of cases in which A is B, and y the class of cases in which C is Di. e., " All cases in which .1 is B are cases in which C is D". And we may translate "But A is B" by " All 2 is x ", where z is the case or class of cases under discussion. Thus the hypothetical argument: "If . 1 is B, C is D. But ,1 is B. Therefore, C is Z)", is represented by the syllogism: "All cases in which A is B are cases in which C is D. " But all the cases in question are cases in which A is B. "Hence all the cases in question are cases in which C is Z)." And all other arguments of this type are reducible to syllogisms in some similar fashion. Thus the symbolic treatment of the syllogism extends to 198 A Survey of Symbolic Logic them also. But conditional reasoning is more easily and simply treated by another interpretation of the algebra the interpretation for propositions. The chief value of the algebra, as an instrument of reasoning, lies in its liberating us from the limitation to syllogisms, hypothetical arguments, dilemmas, and the other modes of traditional logic. Many who object to the narrowness of formal logic still do not realize how arbitrary (from the logical point of view) its limitations are. The reasons for the syllogism, etc., are not logical but psychological. It may be worth while to exemplify this fact. We shall offer two illustrations designed to show, each in a different way, a wide range of logical possibilities undreamt of in formal logic. The first of these turns upon the properties of a triadic relation whose significance was first pointed out by Mr. A. B. Kempe. 18 It is characteristically human to think in terms of dyadic relations: we habitually break up a triadic relation into a pair of dyads. In fact, so ingrained is this disposition that some will be sure to object that a triadic relation is a pair of dyads. It would be exactly as logical to maintain that all dyadic relations are triads with a null member. Either statement is correct enough : the difference is simply one of point of view psychological preference. If there should be inhabitants of Mars whose logical sense coincided with our own, so that any conclusion which seemed valid to us would seem valid to them, and vice versa, but whose psychology otherwise differed from ours, these Martians might have an equally fundamental prejudice in favor of triadic relations. We can point out one such which they might regard as the elementary relation of logic as we regard equality or inclusion. In terms of this triadic relation, all their reasoning might be carried out with complete success. Let us symbolize by (ac/b), a-bc + -ab-c = 0. This relation may be diagrammed as in figure 16, since a-bc + -ab-c = is equivalent to accbc(a + c). (Note that (ac/b) and (ca/b) are equivalent, since a -be + -ab -c is symmetrical with respect to a and c.) This relation (ac/b) represents precisely the information which we habitually discard in drawing a syllogistic conclusion from two universal premises. If all a is b and all b is c, we have a -b = and 6 -c = Hence a -b (c + -c) + (a + -a) b -c = 0, 18 See his paper "On the Relation of the Logical Theory of Classes and the Geometrical Theory of Points/ , Proc. London Math. Soc., xxi, 147-82. But the use we here make of this relation is due to Josiah Royce. For a further discussion of Kempe s triadic relation, see below, Chap, vi, Sect. iv. Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 199 Or, a -6 c + a -b -c + a b -c + -a b -c = 0. [5-72] This equation is equivalent to the pair, (1) a -b -c + a b -c = a -c (b + -b) = a -c = 0, and (2) a -b c + -a b -c = 0. (1) is the syllogistic conclusion, "All a is c"; (2) is (ac/b). Perhaps most of us would feel that a syllogistic conclusion states all the information given by the premises: the Martians might equally well feel that precisely FIG. 16 what we overlook is the only thing worth mentioning. And yet with this curious "illogical" prejudice, they would still be capable of understanding and of getting for themselves any conclusion which a syllogism or a hypo thetical argument can give, and many others which are only very awkwardly stateable in terms of our formal logic. Our relation, a c6, or "All a is 6", would be, in their terms, (Ob/ a). (Qb/a) is equivalent to 1 a -6 + -a 6 = = a -b Hence the syllogism in Barbara would be " (06/a) and (Oc/6), hence (Oc/a) ". This would, in fact, be only a special case of a more general principle which is one of those we may suppose the Martians would ordinarily rely upon for inference: "If (xb/a) and (xc/b), then (arc/a)". That this general principle holds, is proved as follows: (xb/a) is -x a -6 + x -a b = (xc/b) is -x b -c + x -b c = These two together give : -x a-b (e + -c) + x -a b (c + -c) + -x b -c (a + -a) + x -b c (a + -a) = 0, or? - x a _5 c + - x a -b -c + x -a b c + x -a b -c + -x a b -c + -x -a b -c + x a -b c + x -a -6 c = 0. 200 A Survey of Symbolic Logic [5-72] This equation is equivalent to the pair, (1) -.r a b -c + -x a -b -c + x -ab c + x -a -b c = -x a-c (b + -b) + x -a c (b + -b) = -x a -c + a* -a c = 0. (2) x -a b -c + -x -a b -c + x a -b c + -x a -b c = -a b -c (x + -x) + a -b c (x + -x) = -a b -c + a -b c = 0. (1) is (xc/a), of which our syllogistic conclusion is a special case; (2) is a similar valid conclusion, though one which we never draw and have no language to express. Thus these Martians could deal with and understand our formal logic by treating our dyads as triads with one member null. In somewhat similar fashion, hypothetical propositions, the relation of equality, syllo gisms with a particular premise, dilemmas, etc., are all capable of state ment in terms of the relation (ac/b). As a fact, this relation is much more powerful than any dyad for purposes of reasoning. Anyone who will trouble to study its properties will be convinced that the only sound reason for not using it, instead of our dyads, is the psychological difficulty of keeping in mind at once two triads with two members in common but differently placed, and a third member which is different in the two. Our attention-span is too small. But the operations of the algebra are inde pendent of such purely psychological limitations that is to say, a process too complicated for us in any other form becomes sufficiently simple to be clear in the algebra. The algebra has a generality and scope which " formal " logic cannot attain. This illustration has indicated the possibility of entirely valid non- traditional modes of reasoning. We shall now exemplify the fact that by modes which are not so remote from familiar processes of reasoning, any number of non-traditional conclusions can be drawn. For this purpose, we make use of Poretsky s Law of Forms: 19 x = is equivalent to t = t -x + -t x This law is evident enough: if x = 0, then for any t, t-x = t-1 = t, and -tx = -t-0 = 0, while + = t. Let us now take the syllogistic premises, "All a is 6" and "All 6 is c", and see what sort of results can be derived from them by this law. All a is b, a-b = 0. All b is c, b-c = 0. 19 See Chap, n, 7-15 and 7-16. Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 201 Combining these, a-b + b -c = 0. And [3-4-41] -(a-b + b-c) = -(a -b) --(b -c) = (-a + b)(-b + c) = -a -b + -a c + b c. Let us make substitutions, in terms of a, 6, and c, for the t of this formula. a + b = (a + b) (-a -b + -a c + b c) + -a -b (a-b + b -c) = abc+-abc + bc = be What is either a or 6 is identical with that which is both b and c. This is a non-syllogistic conclusion from "All a is 6 and all b is c". Other such conclusions may be got by similar substitutions in the formula. a + c = (a + c) (-a -b + -a c + b c) + -a -c (a -b + b -c) = a b c + -a -b c + -a c + b c + -a b -c = a b c + -a (b + c) . What is either a or c is identical with that which is a, b, and c, all three, or is not a and either b or c. -5 c = -b c (-a -b + -a c + b c) + (b + -c) (a -b + b -c) = -a -b c + b -c + a -b -c = -a-b c + (a + b) -c That which is b but not c is identical with what is c but neither a nor b or is either a or b but not c. The number of such conclusions to be got from the premises, "All a is 6" and "All b is c", is limited only by the number of functions which can be formed with a, b, and c, and the limitation to sub stitutions in terms of these is, of course, arbitrary. By this method, the number of conclusions which can be drawn from given premises is entirely unlimited. In concluding this discussion of the application of the algebra to the logic of classes, we may give a few examples in which problems more involved than those usually dealt with by formal logic are solved. The examples chosen are mostly taken from other sources, and some of them, like the first, are fairly historic. Example I. 20 A certain club has the following rules: (a) The financial committee shall be chosen from among the general committee; (b) No one shall be a member both of the general and library committees unless he be also on the financial committee; (c) Xo member of the library committee shall be on the financial committee. Simplify the rules. 10 See Venn, Symbolic Logic, ed. 2, p. 331. 202 A Survey of Symbolic Logic Let / = member of financial committee. g = " " general / = " " library The premises then become: (a) fcg, or / -g = 0. (6) (gl)cf, or -fgl = 0. (c) // = 0. We can discover by diagramming whether there is redundancy here. In figure 17, (a) is indicated by vertical lines, (6) by horizontal, (c) by oblique. (a) and (c) both predicate the non-existence of / -g I. To simplify the rules, unite (a), (6), and (c) in a single equation: -g) = f -g + -f g l + fg l + f- g I [5-91] =f-g+(-f+f)gl=f-g + gl = 0. And [5-72] this is equivalent to the pair, f -g = and g I = 0. Thus the simplified rules will be : (a } The financial committee shall be chosen from among the general committee. (6 ) No member of the general committee shall be on the library com mittee. Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 203 Example 2. 21 The members of a certain collection are classified in three ways as a s or not, as 6 s or not, and as c s or not. It is then found that the class 6 is made up precisely of the a s which are not c s and the c s which are not a s. How is the class c constituted? Given: b = a -c + -a c. To solve for c. 22 b = b (c + -c) = 6 c + b -c. Hence, b c + b -c = a -c + -a c. Hence [7-27] a -6 + -a b c c c a -b + -a b. Or [2-2] c = a-b + -ab. The c s comprise the a s which are not 6 s and the 6 s which are not a s. Another solution of this problem would be given by reducing b = a -c + -ac to the form { = 0} and using the diagram. [7 1] b = a -c + -a c is equivalent to 6 --(a -c + -a c) + -b (a -c + -a c) = And [6 4] -(a -c + -a c) = a c + -a -c. Hence, a b c + -a 6 -c + a -6 -c + -a -6 c = 0. We observe here (figure 18) not only that c = a -b + -a b, but that the FIG. 18 relation of a, 6, and c, stated by the premise is totally symmetrical, so that we have also a = b -c + -6 c. 21 Adapted from one of Venn s, first printed in an article on "Boole s System of Logic", Mind, i (1876), p. 487. 22 This proof will be intelligible if the reader understands the solution formula referred to. 204 A Survey of Symbolic Logic Example 3. 23 If x that is not a is the same as 6, and a that is not x is the same as c, what is x in terms of a, 6, and c? Given: b = -ax and c = a -.r. To solve for .r. [7-1] 6 = -a .i f is equivalent to -(-a .T) 6 + -a -b x = = (a + -.r) 6 + -a -6 a: = a b + b -x + -a -6 .r = (1) And c = a -x is equivalent to -(a -x) c + a -c -x = = (-a + .T) c + a-c -x = -a c + c x + a -c -x = (2) Combining (1) and (2), a b + -a c + (-a -b + c) x + (b + a -c) -x = (3) Hence [5 72] (-a -b + c) x + (b + a -c) -# = (4) [7-221] This gives the equation of condition, (-a -b + c)(6 + a -c) = 6 c = (5) [7-2] The solution of (4) is (b + a -c) c # c -(-a -6 + c) And by (5), -(-a -6 + c) = -(-a -6 + c) + 6 c = (a + b) -c + b c = a -c + b (c + -c) = b + a -c Hence [2-2] x = b + a -c. FIG. 19 2S See Lambert, Logische Abhandlungen, i, 14. Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 205 This solution is verified by the diagram (figure 19) of equation (3), which combines all the data. Lambert gives the solution as x (a + b) -c This also is verified by the diagram. Example 4. 24 What is the precise point at issue between two disputants, one of whom, A, asserts that space should be defined as three-way spread having points as elements, while the other, E, insists that space should be defined as three-way spread, and admits that space has points as elements. Let s = space, t = three-way spread, p = having points as elements. A asserts: s = t p. B states: s = t and s cp. s = t p is equivalent to s--(tp)+-stp = = s -t + s -p + -s t p = (1) s c p is equivalent to s -p = (2) And s = t is equivalent to s -t + -s t = (3) (2) and (3) together are equivalent to s -t + s -p + -s t = (4) (1) represents .4 s assertion, and (4) represents # s. The difference between FIG. 20 the two is that between -s tp = and -* * = 0. (See figure 20.) - s t = -s t p + -s t -p 24 Quoted from Jevons by Mrs. Ladd-Franklin, loc, tit., p. 52. 206 A Survey of Symbolic Logic The difference is, then, that B asserts -st-p = 0, while A does not. It would be easy to misinterpret this issue, -st-p = is t-pcs, "Three- way spread not having points as elements, is space ". But B cannot sig nificantly assert this, for he has denied the existence of any space not having points as elements. Both assert s = t p. The real difference is this: B definitely asserts that all three-way spread has points as elements and is space, while A has left open the possibility that there should be three-way spread not having points as elements which should not be space. Example 5. Amongst the objects in a small boy s pocket are some bits of metal which he regards as useful. But all the bits of metal which are not heavy enough to sink a fishline are bent. And he considers no bent object useful unless it is either heavy enough to sink a fishline or is not metal. And the only objects heavy enough to sink a fishline, which he regards as useful, are bits of metal that are bent. Specifically what has he in his pocket which he regards as useful? Let x = bits of metal, y = objects he regards as useful, z = things heavy enough to sink a fishline, w = bent objects. Symbolizing the propositions in the order stated, we have xy * x -z c w, or x -z -w = y w c (z + -.i ), or x y -z w = zy ex ID, or -x y z + y z -w = Expanding the inequation with reference to z and w, x y z w + x y z -w + x y -z w + x y -z -w =H Combining the equations, x -z -w (y + -y) + x y -z w + -x y z (w + -w) + y z -w (x + -x) = or x y -z -w + x -y -z -w + x y -z w + -x y z w + -x y z-w + x y z -w = All the terms of the inequation appear also in this equation, with the exception of x y z w. Hence, by 8- 17, x y z w 4= 0. The small boy has Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 207 some bent bits of metal heavy enough to sink a fishline, which he considers useful. This appears in the diagram (figure 21) by the fact that while FIG. 21 some subdivision of x y must be not-null, all of these but x y z w is null. It appears also that anything else he may have which he considers useful may or may not be bent but is not metal. Example 6. 25 The annelida consist of all invertebrate animals having red blood in a double system of circulating vessels. And all annelida are soft-bodied, and either naked or enclosed in a tube. Suppose we wish to obtain the relation in which soft-bodied animals enclosed in tubes are placed (by virtue of the premises) with respect to the possession of red blood, of an external covering, and of a vertebral column. Let a = annelida, s = soft-bodied animals, n = naked, / = enclosed in a tube, i = invertebrate, r = having red blood, etc. Given: a = i r and a cs (n + t), with the implied condition, n t = 0. To eliminate a and find an expression for s t. 25 See Boole, Laws of Thought, pp. 144-46. 208 A Survey of Symbolic Logic a = i r is equivalent to -(i r) a + -a i r = a -i + a -r + -a i r = (1) a cs (n+t) is equivalent to a --(s n + s t) = 0. -0 n + s t) = -(s ii) - -(s t) = (-s + -n) (-s + -0 = -s + -n -t. Hence, a-s + a-n-t = (2) Combining (1) and (2) and n t = 0, a -i + a -r + -a i r + a -s + a -n -t + n t = (3) Eliminating a, by 7 4, (-i + -r + -s + -7i -2 + n t) (i r + n t) = n t + i r -s + i r -n -t = The solution of this equation for s is 26 i r cs. And its solution for tisir-nctc-n. Hence [5-3] ir-nc.stc.-n, or s t = ir-n+u--n, where u is un determined. The soft-bodied animals enclosed in a tube consist of the invertebrates FIG. 22 26 See Chap, n, Sect, iv, "Symmetrical and Unsymmetrical Constituents of an Equa tion". Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 209 which have red blood in a double system of circulating vessels and a body covering, together with an undetermined additional class (which may be null) of other animals which have a body covering. This solution may be verified by the diagram of equation (3) (figure 22). In this diagram, s t is the square formed by the two crossed rectangles. The lower half of this inner square exhibits the solution. Note that the qualification, -n, in i r -n c s t, is necessary. In the top row is a single undeleted area repre senting a portion of i r (n) which is not contained in s t. Example 7. 27 Demonstrate that from the premises "All a is either b or c", and "All c is a", no conclusion can be drawn which involves only two of the classes, a, 6, and c. Given: a c (b + c) and c c a. To prove that the elimination of any one element gives a result which is either indeterminate or contained in one or other of the premises. a c (b + c) is equivalent to a -6 -c = 0. And c c a is equivalent to -a c = 0. Combining these, a -b -c + -a c = 0. Eliminating a [7-4], (-b -c) c = 0, which is the identity, = 0. Eliminating c, (a -b) -a = 0, or = 0. Eliminating b, (-a c + a -c) -a c = -a c = 0, which is the second premise. Example 8. A set of balls are all of them spotted with one or more of the colors, red, green, and blue, and are numbered. And all the balls spotted with red are also spotted with blue. All the odd-numbered blue balls, and all the even numbered balls which are not both red and green, are on the table. De scribe the balls not on the table. Let e = even-numbered, -e = odd-numbered, r = spotted with red, b = spotted with blue, g = spotted with green, t = balls on the table. Given: (1) -r -b -g = 0. 27 See De Morgan, Formal Logic, p. 123. 15 210 A Survey of Symbolic Logic (2) r -6 = 0. (3) [-eb + e-(rg)]ct, or (-e b + e -r + e -g) -t = 0. To find an expression, x, such that -t c x, or -t x = -t. Such an expression should be as brief as possible. Consequently we must develop -t with respect to e, r, b, and g, and eliminate all null terms. (An alternative method would be to solve for -t, but the procedure suggested is briefer.) -t = -t(e + -e) (r + -r) (b + -6) (g + -g) = -t(erbg+erb-g+er-bg + e-rbg + -erbg + er-b-g + e -r b -g + -e r b -g + e -r -b g + -e -r b g + -e r -b g + e -r -b -g + -e r -b -g + -e -r b -g + -e -r -6 g + -e -r -b -g) (4) From (1), (2), and (3), -t (-e b + e -r + e -g + r -b + -r -b -g) = (5) Eliminating from (4) terms involved in (5), -t = -t (e r b g + -e -r -b g), or -t c (e r b g + -e -r -b g) All the balls not on the table are even-numbered and spotted with all three colors or odd-numbered and spotted with green only. g... Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 211 In the diagram (figure 23), equation (1) is indicated by vertical lines, (2) by oblique, (3) by horizontal. Example 9. 28 Suppose that an analysis of the properties of a particular class of sub stances has led to the following general conclusions: 1st. That wherever the properties a and b are combined, either the property c, or the property d, is present also; but they are not jointly present. 2d. That wherever the properties b and c are combined, the properties a and d are either both present with them, or both absent. 3d. That wherever the properties a and b are both absent, the proper ties c and d are both absent also; and vice versa, where the properties c and d are both absent, a and b are both absent also. Let it then be required from the above to determine what may be con cluded in any particular instance from the presence of the property a with respect to the presence or absence of the properties b and c, paying no regard to the property d. Given: (1) a b c (c -d + -c d). (2) bcc(ad + -a-d). (3) -a -b = -c -d. To eliminate d and solve for a. (1) is equivalent to a b--(c -d + -c d) = 0. (2) is equivalent to b c--(a d + -a -d) = 0. But [6-4] -(c-d + -cd) =cd + -c-d, and -(a d + -a -d) = -a d + a -d. Hence we have, a b (c d + -c -d) =abcd+ab-c-d = Q (4) and b c (-a d+ a -d) =-abcd+abc-d = () (5) (3) is equivalent to -a -b (c + d) + (a + b) -c -d = -a -b c + -a -b d + a -c -d + b -c -d = (0) Combining (4), (5), and (6), and giving the result the form of a function of d, (-a -b c + -a -6 + a b c + -a b c) d + (-a -b c + a -c + b -c + a b -c + a b c) -d = 28 See Boole, Laws of Thought, pp. 118-20. For furfher problems, see Mrs. Larld- Franklin, loc. cit., pp. 51-61, Venn, Symbolic Logic, Chap, xm, and Schroder, Algebra dcr Logik: Vol. I, Dreizehnte Vorlesung. 212 A Survey of Symbolic Logic Or, simplifying, by 5-4 and 5-91, (_ a -fc + b c ) d + (-a -b c + a -c + b -c + a b c) -d = Hence [7 4] eliminating d, (_ a -I) + I) c ) (-a -b c + a-c + b -c + ab c) = -a-b c + ab c = Solving this equation for a [7-2], -b c c a c (-b + -c). The property a is always present when c is present and b absent, and when ever a is present, either b is absent or c is absent. The diagram (figure 24) combines equations (4), (5), and (6). FIG. 24 As Boole correctly claimed, the most powerful application of this algebra is to problems of probability. But for this, additional laws which do not belong to the system are, of course, required. Hence we omit it. Some thing of what the algebra will do toward the solution of such problems will be evident if the reader imagine our Example 8 as giving numerically the proportion of balls spotted with red, with blue, and with green, and the quaesitum to be "If a ball not on the table be chosen at random, what is the probability that it will be spotted with all three colors? that it w r ill be spotted with green?" The algebra alone, without any additional laws, answers the last question. As the reader will observe from the solution, all the balls not on the ta*ble are spotted with green. Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 213 III. THE APPLICATION TO PROPOSITIONS If, in our postulates, a, b, c, etc., represent propositions, and the "prod uct", a b, represent the proposition which asserts a and b both, then we have another interpretation of the algebra. Since a+b is the negative of -a -6, a + b will represent "It is false that a and b are both false", or "At least one of the two, a and 6, is true". It has been customary to read a + b, " Either a or 6", or " Either a is true or b is true ". But this is some what misleading, since "Either ... or ..." frequently denotes, in ordinary use, a relation which is to be understood in intension, while this algebra is incapable of representing relations of intension. For instance, we should hardly affirm "Either parallels meet at finite intervals or all men are mortal". We might well say that the "Either . . . or . . . " relation here predicated fails to hold because the two propositions are irrelevant. But at least one of the two, " Parallels meet at finite intervals" and "All men are mortal", is a true proposition. The relation denoted by + in the algebra holds between them. Hence, if we render a + b by "Either a or 6", we must bear in mind that no necessary connection of a and 6, no relation of "relevance" or "logical import", is intended. The negative of a, -a, will be its contradictory, or the proposition "a is false". It might be thought that -a should symbolize the "contrary" of a as well, that if a be "All men are mortal ", then " Xo men are mortal " should be -a. But if the contrary as well as the contradictory be denoted by -a, then -a will be an ambiguous function of a, whereas the algebra requires that -a be unique. 29 The interpretation of and 1 is most easily made clear by considering the connection between the interpretation of the algebra for propositions and its interpretation for classes. The prepositional sign, a, may equally well be taken to represent the class of cases in which the proposition a is true, a b will then represent the class of cases in which a and b are both true; -a, the class of cases in which a is false, and so on. The " universe", 1, will be the class of all cases, or all "actual" cases, or the universe of facts. Thus a = 1 represents "The cases in which a is true are all cases", or "a is true in point of fact", or simply "a is true". Similarly is the class of no cases, and a = will mean "a is true in no case", or "a is false". It might well be asked: May not a, b, c, etc., represent statements which are sometimes true and sometimes false, such as "Today is Monday" or "The die shows an ace"? May not a symbolize the cases in which a is 29 See Chap, n, 3-3. 214 A Survey of Symbolic Logic true, and these be not all but only some of the cases? And should not a = 1 be read "a is always true", as distinguished from the less com prehensive statement, "a is true"? The answer is that the interpretation thus suggested can be made and that Boole actually made it in his chapters on "Secondary Propositions". 30 But symbolic logicians have come to distinguish between assertions which are sometimes true and sometimes false and propositions. In the sense in which "Today is Monday" is sometimes true and sometimes false, it is called a propositional function and not a proposition. There are two principal objections to interpreting the Boole-Schroder Algebra as a logic of propositional functions. In the first place, the logic of propositional functions is much more complex than this algebra, and in the second place, it is much more useful to restrict the algebra to propositions by the additional law "If a H= 0, then a = 1, and if a =^ 1, then a = 0", and avoid any confusion of propositions with asser tions which are sometimes true and sometimes false. In the next chapter, we shall investigate the consequences of this law, which holds for proposi tions but not for classes or for propositional functions. We need not pre sume this law at present : the Boole-Schroder Algebra, exactly as presented in the last chapter, is applicable throughout to propositions. But we shall remember that a proposition is either always true or never true : if a proposi tion is true at all, it is always true. Hence in the interpretation of the algebra for propositions, a == 1 means "a is true" or "a is always true" indifferently the two are synonymous. And a = means either "a is false" or "a is always false". The relation a c b, since it is equivalent to a -b = 0, may be read " It is false that a is true and b is false ", or loosely, "If a is true, then b is true". But acb, like a + b, is here a relation which does not signify "relevance" or a connection of "logical import". Suppose a = "2 + 2 = 4" and b = "Christmas is a holiday". We should hardly say "If 2 + 2 == 4, then Christmas is a holiday". Yet it is false that "2 + 2 = 4 and Christmas is not a holiday": in this example a -b = is true, and hence a c b will hold. This relation, a c b, is called "material implication "; it is a relation of extension, whereas we most frequently interpret "implies" as a relation of intension. But acb has one most important property in common with our usual meaning of "a implies 6" when a c b is true, the case in which a is true but b is false does not occur. If a c b holds, and a is true, then b will not be false, though it may be irrelevant. Thus "material 30 Laws of Thought, Chaps, xi-xiv. Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 215 implication" is a relation which covers more than the "implies" of ordinary logic: a c6 holds whenever the usual "a implies 6" holds; it also holds in some cases in which "a implies 6" does not hold. 31 The application of the algebra to propositions is so simple, and so resembles its application to classes, that a comparatively few illustrations will suffice. We give some from the elementary logic of conditional propo sitions, and conclude with one taken from Boole. Example 1. If A is B, C is D. (1) And A is B. (2) Let x = A is B-, y = C is D. The two premises then are : (1) xcy, or [4-9] -x + y == 1. (2) x = 1, or -x = 0. [5-7] Since -x + y = 1 and -x = 0, y = 1. y = 1 is the conclusion " C is D ". Example 2. (1) If A is B, C is D. (2) But C is not D. Let = A is B- y = C is D. (1) .re?/, or -x + y = 1. (2) y - 0. [5-7] Since -x + y = 1 and y = 0, -r = 1. -x = 1 is the conclusion "A is 1? is false", or "A is not B \ Example 3. (1) If A isB,C isD; and (2) if E is F, 6 is H. (3) But either A is B or C is Z). Let w = A isB; x = ClsD; y = E isF; z = G is //. (1) icc.x, or [4-9] w x = 10. (2) ycz, or 2/3 = # (3) w + y - 1. 31 "Material implication" is discussed more at length in Chap, iv, Sect, i, and Chap. v, Sect. v. 216 A Survey of Symbolic Logic Since w + y = 1, and w x = w and y z = ?y, icx + yz = 1. Hence [4 5] -w x + -w x + y z + -y z = 1 + -w x + -y z = 1. Hence # (ir + -w) + z (y + -y) = x + z = 1. #+3 = 1 is the conclusion Either C is Z) or 6? is //". This dilemma may be diagrammed if we put our equations in the equivalent forms (1) w-x = 0, (2) y-z = 0, (3) -10 -y = 0. In figure 25, w -z is struck FIG. 25 out with horizontal lines, y-z with vertical, -H> -# with oblique. That everything which remains is either x or z is evident. Example 4. (1) Either .1 is 7? or C is not 7). (2) Either C is 7) or E is F. (3) Either A is Z? or E is not /?. Let x = A is /*; y = C is 7); 2 = E is ^. (1) * + -2/= 1. (2) y + s = 1, or -y-z = 0. (3) + -3 = 1, or -xz = 0. By (1), a; + -# (3 + -3) = x + -?/ z + -y -3 = 1. Hence by (2), x + -yz = 1 = x + -y z (x + -x) = x + x -y z + -x -y z. And by (3), -x -y z = 0. Hence x + x -y z = x = 1. Thus these three premises give the categorical conclusion "A is 5", indi cating the fact that the traditional modes of conditional syllogism are by no means exhaustive. Applications of the Boole- Schroder Algebra 217 Example 5. 32 Assume the premises: 1. If matter is a necessary being, either the property of gravitation is necessarily present, or it is necessarily absent. 2. If gravitation is necessarily absent, and the world is not subject to any presiding intelligence, motion does not exist. 3. If gravitation is necessarily present, a vacuum is necessary. 4. If a vacuum is necessary, matter is not a necessary being. 5. If matter is a necessary being, the world is not subject to a presiding intelligence. Let x = Matter is a necessary being. y = Gravitation is necessarily present. z = The world is not subject to a presiding intelligence. w = Motion exists. t = Gravitation is necessarily absent. v A vacuum is necessary. The premises then are : 1 (1) xc(y + f), or x-y-t = 0. (2) t z c -w, or tzw = 0. (3) y cv, or y -v = 0. (4) v c -x, or v x = 0. (5) x c z, or x -z = 0. And since gravitation cannot be both present and absent, (6) y t = 0. Combining these equations : x-y -t + tz w + ij -v + v x + x -z + y t = (7) From these premises, let it be required, first, to discover any collection between x, "Matter is a necessary being", and y, "Gravitation is necessarily present". For this purpose, it is sufficient to discover whether any one of the four, x y = 0, x -y = 0, -x y = 0, or -.T -y = 0, since these are the relations which state any implication which holds between x, or -.r, and ?/, or -y. This can always be done by collecting the coefficients of x y, x -y, -x y, and -x -y, in the comprehensive expression of the data, such as equation (7), and finding which of them, if any, reduce to 1. But 32 See Boole, Laws of Thought, Chap. xiv. The premises assumed are supposed to be borrowed from Clarke s metaphysics. 218 A Survey of Symbolic Logic sometimes, as in the present case, this lengthy procedure is not necessary, because the inspection of the equation representing the data readily reveals such a relation. From (7), [5-72] vx + -vy = 0. Hence [1-5] v x y + -v x y = (v + -v) x y = x y = 0, or x c -y, y c -x. If matter is a necessary being, then gravitation is not necessarily present; if gravitation is necessarily present, matter is not a necessary being. Next, let any connection between x and w be required. Here no such relation is easily to be discovered by inspection. Remembering that if a = 0, then a b = and a -b = ; From (7), (-y -t + t z + y -v + v + -z + y t) w x + (t z + y -v + y t) w -x + (-y -t + y -v + v + -z + y t) -w x + (y-v + yt) -iv -x = (8) Here the coefficient of w x reduces to 1, for [5-85], y -i) + D = y + v, and t z + -z = t + -z and hence the coefficient is -y -t + y + t + v + -z + y t. But [5-90] (-y -t + y + ) + v + -z + y t = l+v + -z + yt = 1. Hence w x = 0, or w c -x, x c -iv. 7- -IV -y- --{ FIG. 26 Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 219 None of the other coefficients in (8) reduces to 1. Hence the conclusion which connects x and w is: "If motion exists, matter is not a necessary being; if matter is a necessary being, motion does not exist". Further conclusions, relating other terms, might be derived from the same premises. All such conclusions are readily discoverable in the dia gram of equation (7). In fact, the diagram is more convenient for such problems than the transformation of equations in the algebra. Another method for discovering the implications involved in given data is to state the data entirely in terms of the relation c , and, remembering that "If ac6 and bcc, then ace", as well as "acb is equivalent to -b c-a", to seek directly any connection thus revealed between the propo sitions which are in question. Although by this method it is possible to overlook a connection which exists, the danger is relatively small. IV. THE APPLICATION TO RELATIONS The application of the algebra to relations is relatively unimportant, because the logic of relations is immensely more complex than the Boole- Schroder Algebra, and requires more extensive treatment in order to be of service. We shall, consequently, confine our discussion simply to the explanation of this interpretation of the algebra. A relation, taken in extension, is the class of all couples, triads, or tetrads, etc., which have the property of being so related. That is, the relation "father of" is the class of all those couples, (x\y)> such that x is father of y: the dyadic relation R is the class of all couples (.r; y) such that x has the relation R to y, x R y. The extension of a relation is the class of things which have the relation. We must distinguish between the class of couples (x; y) and the class of couples (y- x), since not all relations are symmetrical and .r R y commonly differs from y R x. Since the properties of relations, so far as the laws of this algebra apply to them, are the same whether they are dyadic, triadic, or tetradic, etc., the discussion of dyadic relations will be sufficient. The " product ", R x S, or R S, will represent the class of all those couples (x; y) such that xRy and x S y are both true. The "sum ", R + S, will be the class of all couples ; y) such that at least one of the two, .r R y and x S y, holds. The negative of R, -R, will be the class of couples 0; y) for which x R y is false. The null-relation, 0, will be the null-class of couples. If the class of couples (t\ u) for which t R u is true, is a class with no members, and the 220 A Survey of Symbolic Logic class of couples (u; w) for which v S w is true is also a class with no members, then R and S have the same extension. It is this extension which repre sents. Thus R = signifies that there are no two things, t and u, such that t R u is true that nothing has the relation R to anything. Similarly, the universal-relation, 1, is the class of all couples (in the universe of dis course). The inclusion, RcS, represents the assertion that every couple (x; y) for which x R y is true is also such that x S y is true; or, to put it otherwise, that the class of couples (x; y) for which x R y is true is included in the class of couples (u; v) for which u S v is true. Perhaps the most satisfactory reading of R c S is " The presence of the relation R implies the presence of the relation $". R = S, being equivalent to the pair, RcS and S c R, signifies that R and S have the same extension that the class of couples (x; y) for which x Ry is true is identically the class of couples (u; v) for which u S v is true. It is obvious that all the postulates, and hence all the propositions, of the Boole-Schroder Algebra hold for relations, so interpreted. 1-1 If R and S are relations (that is, if there is a class of couples (x; y) such that x Ry is true, and a class of couples (u; v) such that u S -K is true), then R xS is a relation (that is, there is a class of couples (w; z) such that w R z and w S z are both true). If R and S be such that there is no couple (w; z) for which w R z and w S z both hold, then R x $ is the null-relation, i. e., the null-class of couples. 1-2 The class of couples (x; y) for which x Ry and x R y both hold is simply the class of couples for which x Ry holds. 1 3 The class of couples denoted by R x S is the same as that denoted by SxR namely, the class of couples (x t y) such that xRy and xSy are both true. 1-4 The class of couples (x m , y) for which xRy, x S y, and x T y all hold is identically the same in whatever order the relations be combined i. e., Rx(SxT) = (RxS) xT. 1-5 R xO = i. e., the product of the class of couples for which x R y holds and the null-class of couples is the null-class of couples. 1 For every relation, R, there is a relation -R, the class of couples for which x Ry is false, and -R is such that: 1-61 If the relation Rx-S is null (that is, if there is no couple such that x R y is true and x S y is false), then R xS = R (that is, the class of couples for which x R y is true is identically the class of couples for which x Ry and x S y are both true) ; and Applications of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 221 1-62 If R xS - R and Rx-S = R, then R = i. e., if the class of couples for which x R y and x S y are both true is identically the class of couples for which x R y is true, and if also the class of couples for which x R y is true and x S y is false is identically the class of couples for which x R y is true, then the class of couples for which x R y is true is null. 1-71= -0 i. e., the universal class of couples is the negative of the null-class of couples, within the universe of discourse of couples. 1-8 R+S = -(-Rx-S)-i. e., the class of couples (x\y) such that at least one of the two, x R y and x S y, is true is the negative of the class of couples for which x R y and x S y are both false. 1-9 RxS = Ris equivalent to R c S i. e., if the class of couples (x ; y) for which x R y and x S y are both true is identical with the class of couples for which x R y is true, then the presence of R implies the presence of S , and if the presence of R implies the presence of S, then the class of couples (x; y) for which x R y is true is identical with the class of couples for which x R y and x S y are both true. 33 33 For a further discussion of the logic of relations, see Chap, iv, Sect. v. CHAPTER IV SYSTEMS BASED ON MATERIAL IMPLICATION We are concerned, in the present chapter, with the " calculus of propo sitions" or calculus of "material implication", and with its extension to pro positional functions. We shall discover here two distinct modes of procedure, and it is part of our purpose to set these two methods side by side. The first procedure takes the Boole-Schroder Algebra as its foundation, interprets the elements of this system as propositions, and adds to it a postulate which holds for propositions but not for logical classes. The result is what has been called the "Two-Valued Algebra", because the additional postulate results in the law: For any x, if x =|= 1, then x = 0, and if x =t= 0, then x = 1. This Two- Valued Algebra is one form of the calculus of propositions. The extension of the Two-Valued Algebra to propositions of the form <px n , where x n is an individual member of a class composed of x { , a>, a* 3 , etc., gives the calculus of prepositional functions. II and 2 functions have a special significance in this system, and the relation of "formal implication", H x (<px c\j/x), is particularly important. In terms of it, the logical properties of relations including the properties treated in the last chapter but going beyond them can be established. This is the type of procedure used by Peirce and Schroder. The second method that of Principia Mathematica begins with the calculus of propositions, or calculus of material implication, in a form which is simpler and otherwise superior to the Two-Valued Algebra, then pro ceeds from this to the calculus of propositional functions and formal impli cation, and upon this last bases not only the treatment of relations but also the "calculus of classes". It is especially important for the comprehension of the whole subject of symbolic logic that the agreement in results and the difference of method, of these two procedures, should be understood. Too often they appear to the student simply unrelated. I. THE TWO-VALUED ALGEBRA 1 If the elements a, b, . . . p, q, etc., represent propositions, and a x b or a b represent the joint assertion of a and b, then the assumptions of the 1 See Schroder, Algebra der Logik: n, especially Fiinfzehnte Vorlesung. An excellent summary is contained in Schroder s Abriss (ed. M tiller), Teil n. 222 Systems Based on Material Implication 223 Boole-Schroder Algebra will all be found to hold for propositions, as was explained in the last chapter. 2 As was there made clear, p = will repre sent "p is false", and p = 1, "p is true". Since and 1 are unique, it follows that any two propositions, p and q, such that p = and q = 0, or such that p = 1 and q = 1, are also such that p = q. p = q, in the algebra, represents a relation of extension or "truth value", not an equiva lence of content or meaning. -p symbolizes the contradictory or denial of p. The meaning of p + q is readily determined from its definition, P + q = -(-P -q) p + q is the denial of "p is false and q is false", or it is the proposition "At least one of the two, p and q, is true", p + q may be read loosely, "Either p is true or q is true". The possibility that both p and q should be true is not excluded. p c q is equivalent to p q = p and to p -q = 0. ;; c q is the relation of material implication. We shall consider its properties with care later in the section. For the present, we may note simply that p c q means exactly "It is false that p is true and q false". It may be read "If p is true, q is true", or "p (materially) implies q". With the interpretations here given, all the postulates of the Boole- Schroder Algebra are true for propositions. Hence all the theorems will also be true for propositions. But there is an additional law which holds for propositions: p = (P = i) "The proposition, p, is equivalent to p is true ". It follows immediately from this that -P = (-P = 1) = (P = 0) "-p is equivalent to p is false ". It also follows that -p = -(p = 1), and hence -(P = 1) = (P = 0), and -(p = 0) = (p = 1) "p = 1 is false is equivalent to p = 0", and " p = is false is equivalent to p 1". Thus the calculus of propositions is a two-valued algebra: every proposition is either = or == 1, either true or false. We may, then, proceed as follows: All the propositions of the Boole-Schroder Algebra 2 However, many of the theorems, especially those concerning functions, eliminations, and solutions, are of little or no importance in the calculus of propositions. 224 A Survey of Symbolic Logic which were given in Chapter II may be regarded as already established in the Two- Valued Algebra. We may, then, simply add another division of propositions the additional postulate of the Two-Valued Algebra and the additional theorems which result from it. Since the last division of the orems in Chapter II was numbered 8-, we shall number the theorems of this section 9 . The additional postulate is: 9-01 For every proposition p, p (p = 1). And for convenience we add the convention of notation : 9-02 -(p = q) is equivalent to p =|= q> As a consequence of 9-01, we shall have such expressions as -(p = 1) and -(p = 0). 9-02 enables us to use the more familiar notation, p =|= 1 and p* 0. It follows immediately from 9-01 that the Two-Valued Algebra cannot be viewed as a wholly abstract mathematical system. For whatever p and 1 may be, p = 1 is a proposition. Hence the postulate asserts that any element, p, in the system, is a proposition. But even a necessary interpretation may be abstracted from in one important sense no step in proof need be allowed to depend upon this interpretation. This is the procedure we shall follow, though it is not the usual one. It will appear shortly that the validity of the interpretations can be demonstrated within the system itself. In presenting the consequences of 9-01 and 9-02, we shall indicate previous propositions by which any step in proof is taken, by giving the number of the proposition in square brackets. Theorems of Chapter II may, of course, be used exactly as if they were repeated in this chapter. 9-1 -p = (p = 0). [9-01] -p = (-p = 1). And [3-2] -p = 1 is equivalent to p = 0. 9-12 -p = (p + 1). [9-01] p = (p = 1). Hence [3-2] -p = -(p = 1) = (p + 1). 9-13 (p* 1) = (p = 0). [9-M2] 9-14 (p + 0) = (P = 1). [9-13, 3-2] 9-13 and 9-14 together express the fact that the algebra is two-valued. Every proposition is either true or false. Systems Based on Material Implication 225 Up to this point that is, throughout Chapter II we have written the logical relations "If . . . , then . . .", "Either . . . or . . .", "Both . . . and . . .", etc., not in the symbols of the system but just as they would be written in arithmetic or geometry or any other mathematical system. We have had no right to do otherwise. That "... c ..." is by interpretation "If . . . , then . . . ", and ". . . + . . ." is by inter pretation "Either . . . or . . .", does not warrant us in identifying the theorem "If a c 6, then -be -a" with " (a c b) c (-/; c -a) ". We have had no more reason to identify "If . . . , then . . ."in theorems with "... c ..." than a geometrician would have to identify the period at the end of a theorem with a geometrical point. The framework of logical relations in terms of which theorems are stated must be distinguished from the content of the system, even when that content is logic. But we can now prove that w r e have a right to interchange the joint assertion of p and q wath p xq, "If p, then <y", with pcq, etc. We can demonstrate that if p and q are members of the class A , then p c q is a member of K, and that "If p, then </", is equivalent to p cq. And we can demonstrate that this is true not merely as a matter of interpretation but by the necessary laws of the system itself. We can thus prove that writing the logical relations involved in the theorems "Either . . . or . . .," "Both ... and .. .," "If . . . , then . . ."in terms of +, x, c, etc., is a valid procedure. The theorems in which these things are proved are never needed here after, except in the sense of validating this interchange of symbols and their interpretation. Consequently we need not give them any section number. (1) If p is an element in A, p = 1 and /; = are elements in A . [9-01] If p is an element in A, p = 1 is an element in A. [1-0] If p is an element in A, -p is an element in A, and hence [9 1] /; = is an element in K. (2) The two, p and q, are together equivalent to p x q, or p q. [9-01] pq = (pq = 1). [5-73] pq = 1 is equivalent to the pair, p = 1 and q = 1, and hence [9-01] to the pair, p and q. (3) If p and q are elements in A, then p c q is an element in A. [4-9] p cq is equivalent to p -q = 0, and hence [9-1] to -(p-q). But if p and q are elements in A, [1 6, 1 1] -(p -q) is an element in A. (4) -p is equivalent to " p is false". [9-12] -p = (p 4= 1), and [8-01] p 4= 1 is equivalent to "p = 1 is false", and hence [9-01] to "p is false". 16 226 A Survey of Symbolic Logic (5) p c q is equivalent to "If p, then g". [5-64] p eg gives "If p = 1, then q = 1", and hence [9-01] "If p, then g". And "If p, then g" gives peg, for [9-01] it gives "If p = 1, then g = 1", and (a) Suppose as a fact p = 1. Then, by hypothesis, g = 1, and [2-2] peg. (6) Suppose that p ={= 1. Then [9-14] p = 0, and [5-63] peg. (6) If p and g are elements in K, then p = g is an element in K. [7-1] p = g is equivalent to p-g + -pg = 0, and hence [9-1] to-(p-g + -pg). Hence [1-6, 1-1, 3-35] Q.E.D. (7) p = g is equivalent to "p is equivalent to g". [2-2] p = g is equivalent to "peg and g cyj". By (5) above, "p eg and g cp" is equivalent to "If p, then g, and if g, then p". And this is equivalent to "p is equivalent to g". (8) If p and g are elements in K, then p 4= g is an element in K. [9-02] (p + g) =-(P = g). Hence, by (6) above and 1-6, Q.E.D. (9) p =|= 9 is equivalent to "p is not equivalent to g". By (4) and (2) above, Q.E.D. (10) p + g is equivalent to "At least one of the two, p and g, is true. [1-8] p+q = -(-p-g). By (4) and (2) above, -(-p-g) is equivalent to "It is false that (p is false and g is false) ". And this is equivalent to "At least one of the two, p and g, is true". In consideration of the above theorems, we can henceforth write ". . . " for "If . . . , then ...","... = ..." for ". . . is equivalent to ...","... + ..." for "Either, . . or . . .", etc., for we have proved that not only all expressions formed from elements in K and the relations x and + are elements in K, but also that expressions which in volve c, and =, and =j= are elements in the system of the Two-Valued Algebra. The equivalence of "If . . . , then ..." with ". . . c . . .", of "Both . . . and ..." with ". . . x . . .", etc., is no longer a matter of interpretation but a consequence of 9-01, p = (p = 1). Also, we can go back over the theorems of Chapter II and, considering them as propositions of the Two-Valued Algebra, we can replace "If . . . , then . . .", etc., Systems Based on Material Implication 227 by the symbolic equivalents. Each theorem not wholly in symbols gives a corresponding theorem which is wholly in symbols. But when we consider the Boole-Schroder Algebra, without the additional postulate, 9-01, this procedure is not valid. It is valid only where 9 -01 is one of the postulates i. e., only in the system of the Two-Valued Algebra. Henceforth we shall write all our theorems with pcq for " If p, then 7", p = q for "p is equivalent to r/", etc. But in the proofs we shall frequently use "If . . . , then ..." instead of ". . . c . . . ", etc., because the symbolism sometimes renders the proof obscure and makes hard reading. (That this is the case is due to the fact that the Two-Valued Algebra does not have what we shall hereafter explain as the true "logistic" form.) 9-15 + 1. = 0. Hence [9-13]0 4= 1. .9-16 (p4= q) = (-p = q) = (p = -?). (1) If p = q and p = 1, then q 4= 1 and [9-13] q = 0. And if p = 1, [3-2] -p = 0. Hence -p = q. (2) If p 4= q and p =h 1, then [9-13] p = 0, and [3-2] -p = 1. Hence if p =j= q, then q 4= 0, and [9- 14] q = 1 = -p. (3) If -p = q and q = 1, then -p = 1, and [3-2] p = 0. Hence [9-15] p 4= q. (4) If -p = q and q 4= 1, then -p 4= 1, and [9-13] -p = 0. Hence [3-2] p = 1, and p 4= q- By (1) and (2), if p 4= q, then -p = q. And by (3) and (4), if -p = q, then p =)= q- Hence p 4= q and -> = q are equivalent. And [3 -2] (-p = q) = (p = -q). This theorem illustrates the meaning of the relation, =, in the calculus of material implication. If p 4= (/. then either p = 1 and q = or 7; = and q = 1. But if p = 1, then -p = 0, and if p = 0, then -p = 1. Hence the theorem. Let p represent "Caesar died", and q represent "There is no place like home". If "Caesar died" is not equivalent to "There is no place like home", then "Caesar did not die" is equivalent to "There is no place like home". The equivalence is one of truth values { = 0} or { = 1} not of content or logical significance. 9-17 p = (p = 1) = (p 4= 0) = (-p = 0) = (-p 4= 1). [9-OM3-14-16] 9-18 -p = (p = 0) = (p 4= 1) = (-P = 1) = (-P * 0). [9-M3-14-16] 228 A Survey of Symbolic Logic 9-2 (p = l)(p = 0) = 0. [2-4] p-p = 0. And [9-01] p = (p = 1); [9-1] -p = (p = 0). No proposition is both true and false. 9-21 (p * l)(p * 0) = 0. [2-4] -pp = 0. And [9-18J -p = (p * 1); [9-17] p = (p * 0). 9-22 (7; = l) + (p = 0) == 1. [4-8] p + -p = 1. Hence [9-01-1] Q. E. D. Every proposition is either true or false. 9-23 (p* l) + (p* 0) == 1. [4-8, 9-01-1] Theorems of the same sort as the above, the proofs of which are obvious, are the following: 9-24 (p q) = (p = 1) = (p g * 0) = (p = l)(g = 1) = (p 4 s 0) (g =t= 0) = (p * 0)(g == 1) - (p = l)(g 4= 0) = -(-p + -g) = (-P + -g = 0) = [(p = 0) + (g = 0) = 0] = [(P * 1) + (g * 1) = 0], etc., etc. 9-25 (p + g) = (p + g = 1) = (p + g 4= 0) = (p = 1) + (g = 1) = (P * 0) + (g =(= 0) = -(-p -g) = [(p = 0)(g = 0) = 0] = [(P * l)(g * 1) 4= 1], etc., etc. These theorems illustrate the variety of ways in which the same logical relation can be expressed in the Two-Valued Algebra. This is one of the defects of the system its redundancy of forms. In this respect, the alternative method, to be discussed later, gives a much neater calculus of propositions. We turn now to the properties of the relation c . We shall include here some theorems which do not require the additional postulate, 9-01, for the sake of bringing together the propositions which illustrate the meaning of "material implication". 9-3 (per/) = (-p + q) = (p -q = 0). [4-9] (peg) = (p-g = 0) == (-p+g = 1). [9-01] (-p + g = 1) = (-p + g). "p materially implies g" is equivalent to "Either p is false or g is true", and to "It is false that p is true and g false". Since p c g has been proved to be an element in the system, " It is false that p materially implies g" may be symbolized by -(peg). Systems Based on Material Implication 229 9-31 -(p cry) = (-p + q = 0) = (p-q). [3 4] -(-p + q) = p -q. And [9 3] -(p c q) = -(-p + q) . [9 .02] -(-? + </) = (-/;+</ - 0). "p does not materially imply q" is equivalent to "It is false that either p is false or q is true", and to "p is true and q false". 9-32 (p = 0)c(pc<7). [5-03] Ocr/. Hence Q.E.D. If p is false, then for any proposition ry, p materially implies q. This is the famous or notorious theorem: "A false proposition implies any proposition". 9-33 (q=- })c(pcq). [5-01] pel. Hence Q.E.I). This is the companion theorem: "A true proposition is implied by any proposition". 9-34 -(pcq)c(p = 1). The theorem follows from 9-32 by the reductio ad absurdum, since if -(p c<y), then [9-32] p 4= 0, and [9-14] p = 1. If there is any proposition, q, which p does not materially imply, then p is true. This is simply the inverse of 9 32. A similar consequence of 9 33 is: 9-35 -(pcq)c(q = 0). If -(pcq), then [9-33] q =(= 1, and [9-13] q = 0. If p does not materially imply q, then q is false. 9-36 -(/; c q) c (7; c -q) ; -(p c q) c (-p c q) ; -(/; c q) c (-p c -q). [9-34-35] If -0; cry), then p = 1 and q = 0. [3-2] If p = 1, -y; = 0, and if q = 0, then -q =-- 1. [9-32] If -p = 0, then -p cq and -;; c-ry. [9-331 If -q = 1, then y;c-ry. If p does not materially imply r/, then y> materially implies the negative, or denial, of ry, and the negative of p implies r/, and the negative of p implies the negative of ry. If "Today is Monday" does not materially imply "The moon is made of green cheese", then "Today is Monday" implies "The moon is not made of green cheese", and "Today is not Monday" implies "The moon is made of green cheese", and "Today is not Monday" implies "The moon -is not made of green cheese". Some of the peculiar properties of material implication are due to the 230 A Survey of Symbolic Logic fact that the relations of the algebra were originally devised to represent the system of logical classes. But 9-36 exhibits properties of material implication which have no analogy amongst the relations of classes. 9-36 is a consequence of the additional postulate, p = (p = 1). For classes, c represents "is contained in": but if a is not contained in b, it does not follow that a is contained in not-6 a may be partly in and partly outside of b. 9-37 -(pcq) c(qcp). [9 36] If "(p c q), then -p c -q, and hence [3 1] q c p. Of any two propositions, p and q, if p does not materially imply q, then q materially implies p. 9-38 (pq) c[(pcq)(qcp)]. [9-24] pq = (p = l)(q == 1). Hence [9-33] Q.E.D. If p and q are both true, then each materially implies the other. 9-39 (-p-q)c[(pcq)(qcp)]. [9-24] -p-q = (-p = l)(-q = 1) = (p = 0)(g = 0). Hence [9-32] Q.E.D. If p and q are both false, then each materially implies the other. For any pair of propositions, p and q, there are four possibilities: 1) p = 1, q = 1: p true, q true. 2) p = 0, q = 0: p false, q false. 3) p = 0, q = 1 : p false, q true. 4) p = 1, q = 0: p true, q false. Now in the algebra, cO, 1 c 1, and c 1; but 1 cO is false. Hence in the four cases, above, the material implications and equivalences are as follows : 1) p c q, qcp, p = q. 2) p c q, qcp, p = q. 3) pcq, -(qcp), p 4= q. 4) ~(pcq), qcp, p ^ q. This summarizes theorems 9-31-9-39. These relations hold regardless of the content or meaning of p and q. Thus p cq and p = q are not the "implication" and "equivalence" of ordinary logic, because, strictly speak ing, p and q in the algebra are not "propositions" but simply the "truth values" of the propositions represented. In other words, material impli- Systems Based on Material Implication 231 cation and material equivalence are relations of the extension of proposi tions, whereas the "implication" and "equivalence" of ordinary logic are relations of intension or meaning. But, as has been mentioned, the material implication, pcq, has one most important property in common with "q can be inferred from p" in ordinary logic; if p is true and q false, pcq does not hold. And the relation of material equivalence, p = q, never connects a true proposition with a false one. These theorems should make as clear as it can be made the exact meaning and character of material implication. This is important, since many theorems whose significance would otherwise be very puzzling follow from the unusual character of this relation. Two more propositions, of some importance, may be given: 9-4 (p q c r) = (q p c r) = [p c (q c r)] = [q c (p c r)}. [1-3] pq = qp. Hence [3-2] -(p q) == -(q p), and [-(/; q) + r] But [9 3] [-(p q) + r] = (p q c r), and [-(q p) + r] = (q per). And [3 41] [-(p q) + r ] = [(-/> + -?) + r] = [-p + (-ry + r)] = (p c (q c r)} Similarly, [-(q p) + r] = Iqc(pcr)]. This theorem contains Peano s Principle of Exportation, [(p q)cr]c [p c(qc r)] "If pq implies r, then p implies that q implies r"; and his Principle of Importation, [y; c (q c r)] c [(p q) c r] " If p implies that q implies r, then if p and q are both true, r is true. " 9-5 [(pq)c r] = [(p -r) c -q] = [(q -r) c -y,]. [9 -3] [(p q) c r] = [-(p q) + r] = [(-p + -q) + r ] = [(-p + r) + -ry] = [(-</ + + -y;] - [-Q; -r) + -q] = [-(q -r) + -p]. [9-3] [-(p- r ) + -ry] -[(p-r)c-g], and [-(q-r)+-p] = l(q-r) c-p]. If p and q together imply r, then if p is true but r is false, q must be false, and if q is true but r is false, p must be false. This is a principle first stated by Aristotle, but especially important in Mrs. Ladd-Franklin s theory of the syllogism. We have now given a sufficient number of theorems to characterize the Two-Valued Algebra to illustrate the consequences of the additional 232 A Survey of Symbolic Logic postulate p = (p = 1), and the properties of p c q. Any further theorems of the system will be found to follow readily from the foregoing. A convention of notation which we shall make use of hereafter is the following: A sign =, unless enclosed in parentheses, takes precedence over any other sign ; a sign c , unless enclosed in parentheses, takes precedence over any + or x ; and the sign + , unless enclosed in parentheses, takes precedence over a relation x . This saves many parentheses and brackets. II. THE CALCULUS OF PROPOSITIONAL FUNCTIONS. FUNCTIONS OF ONE VARIABLE The calculus of prepositional functions is an extension of the Two- Valued Algebra to propositions which involve the values of variables. Fol lowing 3Ir. jlussell, 3 we may distinguish propositions from prepositional functions as follows: A proposition is any expression which is either true or false; a propositional function is an expression, containing one or more variables, which becomes a proposition when each of the variables is re placed by some one of its values. There is one meaning of " Today is Monday" for which today denotes ambiguously Jan. 1, or Jan. 2, or . . . , etc. For example, when we say Today is Monday implies Tomorrow is Tuesday ", we mean that if Jan. 1 is Monday, then Jan. 2 is Tuesday; if Jan. 2 is Monday, then Jan. 3 is Tuesday; if July 4 is Monday, then July 5 is Tuesday, etc. Today and tomorrow are here variables, whose values are Jan. 1, Jan. 2, Jan. 3, etc., that is, all the different actual days. When today is used in this variable sense, "Today is Monday" is sometimes true and sometimes false, or more accurately, it is true for some values of the variable today , and false for other values. "Today is Monday" is here a propositional function. There is a quite different meaning of "Today is Monday" for which today is not a variable but denotes just one thing Jan. 22, 1916. In this sense, if "Today is Monday" is true it is always true. It is either simply true or simply false: its meaning and its truth or falsity cannot change. For this meaning of today , " Today is Monday " is a proposition. Today, meaning Jan. 16, 1916, is one value of the variable today . When this value is substituted for the variable, then the propositional function is turned into a proposition. 3 See Principles of Mathematics, Chap, vii, and Principia Mathematica, i, p. 15. Mr. Russell carries out this distinction in ways which we do not follow. But so far as is here in question, his view is the one we adopt. Principia Mathematica is cited hereafter as Principia. Systems Based on Material Implication 233 We may use ^r, t(x, y), f (*, y t z ) t e tc., to represent prepositional functions, in which the variable terms are x, or x and y, or x, y, and z, etc. These propositional functions must be carefully distinguished from the functions discussed in Chapter II. We there used /, F, and the Greek capitals, $, *, etc., to indicate functions; here we use only Greek small letters. Also, for any function of one variable, we here omit any parenthesis around the variable <px, \l/y, x. f(x), V(x, y), etc., in Chapter II are confined to representing such expressions as can be formed from elements in the class A and the relations x and + . If x and y in *(*, y) are logical classes, then *(.r, y) is some logical class, such as x + y or a x + b -y. Or if x in /(.r) is a proposition, then /(.r) is some proposition such as a x or -.r + b. The propositional functions, <px, $(x t y}, (x, y, z), etc., are subject to no such restriction. <px becomes a proposition when a- is replaced by one of its values, but it does not necessarily become any such proposition as a x or -.r + b. x is Monday, x is a citizen of y, y is between x and z these are typical propositional functions. They are neither true nor false, but they become either true or false as soon as terms denoting individual things are sub stituted for the variables x, y, etc. All the functions in this chapter are such propositional functions, or expressions derived from them. A fundamental conception of the theory of propositional functions is that of the "range of significance ". The range of significance of a function is determined by the extent of the class, or classes, of terms which are values of its variables. All the terms which can be substituted for x, in <px, and make sense , constitute the range of ^.r. If <px be x is mortal , the range of this function is the aggregate of all the individual terms for which x is mortal is either true or false. Thus the "range of significance" is to propositional functions what the "universe of discourse" is to class terms. Two propositional functions, <px and r/^, may be such that the class of values of x in <px, or the range of <px, is identical with the class of values of y in \J/y, or the range of $y. Or the two functions may have different ranges of significance, .r is a man and .r is a poet will have the same range, though the values of .r for which they are true will differ. Any .r for which x is a man is either true or false, is also such that .r is a poet is either true or false. But some .r s for which .r is a poet is either true or false are such that x precedes .r + 1 is nonsense, .r is a poet and .r precedes x + 1 have different ranges. 4 It is important to note that the 4 According to Mr. Russell s "theory of types" (see Principia, i, pp. 41-42), the one fundamental restriction of the range of a propositional function is the principle that nothing 234 A Survey of Symbolic Logic range of <px is determined, not by x, but by <p. <px and vy are the same function. If we have a prepositional function of two variables, say x is a citizen of y , we must make two substitutions in order to turn it into a proposition which is either true or false. And we conceive of two aggregates or classes the class of values of the first variable, x, and the class of values of the second variable, y. These two classes may, for a given function, be identical, or they may be different. It depends upon the function. "John Jones is a citizen of Turkey" is either true or false; "Turkey is a citizen of John Jones" is nonsense. But "3 precedes 5" is either true or false, as is also "5 precedes 3". The range of x and of y in $(x, y) depends upon ^, not upon x and y. A convenient method of representing the values of x in <px is by x\, x 2 , x z , etc. This is not to presume that the number of such values of x in <px is finite, or even denumerable. Any sort of tag which would distinguish these values as individual would serve all the uses which we shall make of .TI, ,T 2 , 3, etc., equally well. If x, x 2 , x z , etc., are individuals, 5 then <px-i, <f>x*, <p%3, etc., will be propositions; and <px n will be a proposition. <pxz is a proposition about a specified individual; <px n is a proposition about a certain individual which is not specified. 6 Similarly, if the values of x in \I/(x, y) be Xi, x*, .r 3 , etc., and the values of y be yi, y z , ys, etc., then $(%*> 2/s), t(x z , y n ), t(x m , y n ), etc., are propositions. We shall now make a new use of the operators II and S, giving them a meaning similar to, but not identical with, the meaning which they had in Chapter II. To emphasize this difference in use, the operators are here set in a different style of type. We shall let 2 x <px represent <pXi + <px z + <f>Xz + . . . to as many terms as there are distinct values of x in <px. And U x <px will represent <pxi x <px z x <px s x . . . to as many terms as there are distinct values of x in <px. (W T e have heretofore abbreviated ax6 to a b or a -b. But where prepositional functions are involved, the form of expressions is that presupposes the function, or a function of the same range, can be a value of the func tion. It seems to us that there are other restrictions, not derived from this, upon the range of a function. But, fortunately, it is not necessary to decide this point here. 5 "Individuals" in the sense of being distinct values of x in <px which is the only conception of "individual" which we require. 6 It may be urged that <px n is not a proposition but a prepositional function. The question is most difficult, and we cannot enter upon it. But this much may be said: Whenever, and in whatever sense, statements about an unspecified individual can be asserted, <px n is a proposition. If any object to this, we shall reply "A certain gentle man is confused". Peirce has discussed this question most acutely. (See above, pp. 93-94.) Systems Based on Material Implication 235 likely to be complex. Consequently we shall, in this chapter, always write "products" with the sign x .) The fact that there might be an infinite set of values of x in <px does not affect the theoretical adequacy of our definitions. For nothing here depends upon the order of <px m , ^x n , <px p , and it is only required that the values of x which are distinct should be identifiable or "tagable". The ob jection that the values of x might not be even denumerable is more serious, but the difficulty may be met by a device to be mentioned shortly. Since <pxi, <px z , <f>x 3 , etc., are propositions, #TI + <px 2 + <px 3 + . . . is a proposition the proposition, "Either <pxi or <px 2 or #r 3 or ... etc.". Thus 2 x <px represents "For some value of x (at least one), <px is true". And 2 x <px is a proposition. Similarly, ^.TJ x <px 2 x ^.r 3 x ... is the joint assertion of <ATi and <px z and <px 3 , etc. Thus H t <px represents the proposition "For all values of x, <px is true ", We may translate Z x ^.r loosely by " <px is sometimes true", and n x <px loosely by " <px is always true". This trans lation fails of literal accuracy inasmuch as the variations of x in <px may not be confined to differences of time. The conception of a prepositional function, <px, and of the class of values of the variable in this function, thus give us the new types of proposition, <px 3 , (px n , 2 x <px, and U x( px. Since the laws of the Two-Valued Algebra hold for propositions generally, all the theorems of that system will be true when propositions such as the above are substituted for a, b, ... p, q, etc. (We must, of course, remember that while a, b, ... p, q, etc., in the Two-yalued Algebra represent propositions, x in yx, etc., is not a proposi tion but a variable whose values are individual things. In the theorems to follow, we shall sometimes need a symbol for propositions in which no variables are specified. To avoid any possible confusion, we shall represent such propositions by a capital letter, P.) We may, then, assume as already proved any theorem which can be got by replacing cr, 6, ... p, q, etc., in any proposition of the Two-Valued Algebra, by <px 3 , <px n , 2 x <px, or Ti x <px. Additional theorems, which can be proved for propositions involving values of variables, will be given below. These are to be proved by reference to earlier theorems, in Chapter II and in Section I of this chapter. As before, the number of the theorem by which any step in proof is taken will be given in square brackets. Since the previous theorems are numbered up to 9-, the additional theorems of this section will be numbered beginning with 10- . One additional assumption, beyond those of the Two- Valued Algebra, will be needed. The propositions which have been proved in sufficiently 236 A Survey of Symbolic Logic general form to be used where sums and products of more than three terms are in question all require for their demonstration the principle of mathe matical induction. If, then, AVC wish to use those theorems in the proofs of this section, we are confronted by the difficulty that the number of values of x in <f>x, and hence the number of terms in 2 x #r and H x <px may not be finite. And any use of mathematical induction, or of theorems dependent upon that principle for proof, will then be invalid in tttis con nection. Short of abandoning the proposed procedure, two alternatives are open to us: we can assume that the number of values of any variable in a propositional function is always finite; or we can assume that any law of the algebra which holds whatever finite number of elements be involved holds for any number of elements whatever. The first of these assumptions would obviously be false. But the second is true, and we shall make it. This also resolves our difficulty concerning the possibility that the number of values of x in <px might not be even denumerable, and hence that the notation <pxi + <px z + <px 3 + . . . and <pxi x tpx 2 x <px 3 x might be inadequate. We can make the convention that if the number of values of x in any function, <px, be not finite, <fXi+ <px 2 + <px s + . . . , or "2 x <px, and <?Xi x <px x (f>x 3 x . . . , or H x <px, shall be so dealt with that any theorem to be proved will be demonstrated to hold for any finite number of values of x in <px\ and this being proved, our assumption allows us to extend the theorem to any case in which the values of the variable in the function are infinite in number. This principle will be satisfactorily covered by the convention that <pxi + <px 2 + <px 3 + . . . and <pxi x <px 2 x <px 3 x . . . shall always be supposed to have a finite but undetermined number of terms, and any theorem thus proved shall be presumed independent of the number of distinct values of any variable, x, which is involved. 7 This postulate, and the convention which makes it operative, will be supposed to extend also to functions of any number of variables, and to sums, products, and negatives of functions. Xo further postulates are required, but the following definitions are needed : 10-01 2p.r = 2 x <px = <pxi+ <px z + tftf 3 + .... Def. 10-02 H(px = H x <px = <pxi x (f>x 2 x <pxz x . . .. Def. 10-03 -<p.r = -{<f>x}. Def. 7 This procedure, though not invalid, is far from ideal, as are many other details of this general method. We shall gather the main criticisms together in the last section of this chapter. But it is a fact that in spite of the many defects of the method, the results which it gives are without exception valid. Systems Based on Material Implication 237 10-031 - 9 x n = -{<px n }. Def. 10-04 -U x <px = -{n x <px}. Def. 10-05 -2 x <px = -{S,0*r} Def. The last four merely serve to abbreviate the notation. Elementary theorems concerning propositions which involve values of one variable are as follows: 10-1 2<px = -n-^.r. [5-951] <f>xi+ <f>x+ <px 3 + ... = -{-^.n x-^.T 2 x-^i-3 x . . . J. 10-12 U<px = -2-<px. [5-95] ^ix^r 2 10-1 states that "For some values of x, <px is true" is equivalent to the denial of "For all values of x, <px is false". 10-12 states that "For all values of x, <px is true" is equivalent to the denial of "For some values of x, <px is false". These two represent the extension of De Morgan s Theorem to propositions which involve values of variables. They might be otherwise stated: "It is true that all x is " is equivalent to "It is false that some x is not "; and "It is true that some x is " is equiva lent to "It is false that all x is not 10-2 Il(px c <px n . [5-99] <pxi x <px-~ x <**3 x . . . c <px { and <pxi x (px% x <px s x . . . c <px% and <px! x <^r 2 x <px 3 x . . . c ^.r 3 , etc., etc. 10-21 <px n c2<f>x. [5-991] ^c^+^roH.^*... and <pXz c (pXi + (px^ + <px$ + and <pXs c <pxi + pxz + <px s + . . . , etc., etc. By 10-2, if <px is true for all values of .r, then it is true for any given value of .r, or "What is true of all is true of any given one". By 10-21, If <px is true for one given value of .r, then it is true for some value of .r, or "What is true of a certain one is true of some". It might be thought that the implication stated by 10-21 is reversible. But we do not have 2^.r c ^.r n , because <px n may be <p.r 2 , and 2 <px c <px 2 would not hold generally. For example, let <^.r = "Today (x) is Monday". Then 2^.r will mean "Some day is Monday", but <px n will mean "Today (Jan. 1) is Monday", or will mean "Today (Feb. 23) is Monday", etc. "Some day is Monday" does 238 .1 Survey of Symbolic Logic not imply " Jan. 1 is Monday", and does not imply "Feb. 23 is Monday "- does not imply that any one given day is Monday. x n in <px n means " a certain value of .r" in a sense which is not simply equivalent to "some value of .r". Xo translation of <px n will give its exact significance in this respect. 10-22 II<>.r cS^.r. [5-1, 10-2-21] Whatever is true of all is true of some. 10-23 H<px is equivalent to "Whatever value of x, in <px, x n may be, <px n ". Ii<px = <pxi x <px z x <px 3 x . . . = (<pxi x <px 2 x <px 3 x . . . =1) [9-01] And [5-971] <pxi x <px 2 x <^r 3 x . . . ==1 is equivalent to the set <pXi = 1, <pX 2 = I, pXz = 1, .... And [9-01] <px n = I is equivalent to <px n . Hence tt<px is equivalent to the set <px lf <px z , <p.T 3 , .... This proposition is not tautological. It states the equivalence of the product <pxi x tpxz x <f>x 3 x . . with the system of separate propositions <pxi, <f>x z , <f>x s , etc. It is by virtue of the possibility of this proposition that the translation of tt<px as "For all values of x, ^x is true" is legitimate. In this proof we make use of the principle, p = (p = 1) the only case in which it is directly required in the calculus of propositional functions. By virtue of 10 23 we can pass directly from any theorem of the Two- Valued Algebra to a corresponding theorem of the calculus of propositional functions. If we have, for example, pc.p+q, we have also "Whatever value of x, in <px, x n may be, <px n c p.r n + P". And hence we have, by 10-23, U x [<px c <px + P]. We shall later see the importance of this: it gives us, for every theorem concerning "material implication", a cor responding theorem concerning "formal implication". Next, we give various forms of the principle by which any proposition may be imported into, or exported out of, the scope of a II or S operator. 10-3 Z#c + P = S^r + P). 2 <px + P = ( <.ri + <px<2 + <px 3 +...) + P P) + (^ 2 + P) + (^3 + P)+ ... [5-981] 10-31 P+Z^o- - ? X (P+ p. r ). Similar proof. 10-3 may be read; " Either for some x, <px is true, or P is true is equiva- Systems Based on Material Implication 239 lent to For some x, either <?x is true or P is true ". And 10-31 may be read: "Either P is true or, for some x, <px is true is equivalent to For some x, either P is true or <px is true ". 10-32 U<f>x + P = n x (<^.r + P). II (pX + P = (<pXiX <pXz X <pX 3 X . . . ) + P P) x... [5-941] 10-33 P+tt<px = U X (P + tpx). Similar proof. <( Either P is true or, for every x, <px is true" is equivalent to "For every x, either P is true or <px is true." 10-34 S X (^ + P) = S X (P +*>*). [4-3] 2<px + P = P + 2<px. Hence [10-3-31] Q.E.D. 10-35 ILOi + P) = n x (P+ <px). [10-32-33] Exactly similar theorems hold where the relation of the two propositions is x instead of + . The proofs are so simple that only the first need be given. 10-36 2<px xP = S*(#E xP). 2 px x P = ( ^.TI + <f>x z + <px 3 + . . . ) x P = (<^.ri xP) + (^-2 xP) + (cp.i-3 xP) + . . . [5-94] " <px is true for some x, and P is true", is equivalent to "For some .r, <px and P are both true". 10-361 P xS^.i- - 2 X (P x <r>.r). 10-37 n ^ x P = n j: ( <px x P). 10-371 Pxn^r = n x (Px^r). 10-38 S z (^ xP) = S,(P x ^.r). 10-381 H x (<px xP) = n x (P x <^.r). We should perhaps expect that a proposition, P, might be imported into and exported out of the scope of an operator when the relation of P to the other member of the expression is c . But here the matter is not quite so simple. 240 A Survey of Symbolic Logic 10-4 Pc?<px = S,(Pc <px). [9-3] PC 2(f>x = -P+2<px = -P [5-981] = (P c ^rO + (P c ^.r 2 ) + (P c ^.r s ) + - - . [9 3] = S X (P c <px) The relation c, in the above, is, of course, a material implication. But it is tedious to read continually "p materially implies g". We shall, then, translate pcq simply by "p implies 9", or by "If p, then g". 10-4 reads: "P implies that for some .r, <^.r is true" is equivalent to "For some .r, P implies that ^>.r is true". This seems clear and obvious, but consider the next : 10-41 Stf>.rcP = IlzO.rcP). [9-3] S^ccP = -S#r + P = U-<px + P [10-12] = (-^i x-^.r 2 X-^.TS x . . .) + P = (-^d + P) x (-<pxz + P) x (-^3 + P) . . . [5-941] = (^.TiCP) X(^.T 2 CP) X(^.T 3 CP)... [9-3] = U x (<pxcP) " <px is true for some x implies P" is equivalent to "For every x, <p x implies P". It is easy to see that the second of these two expressions gives the first also: If <px always implies P, then if <px is sometimes true, P must be true. It is not so easy to see that 2<px c P gives tt x (<px c P). But we can put it thus: "If <px is ever true, then P is true" must mean " <px always implies P". 10-42 PcU<px = Tl x (Pc<px). [9-3] P c U<px = -P + Il^.r == -P + (<pxi x ^r 2 x ^ 3 x . . .) = (-P + <pxi) x (-P + <px z ) x (-P + #c 8 ) x ... [5-941] - (P c <pxj x (P c <px 2 ) x (P c ^c s ) ... [9-3] = U t (P c <px) "P implies that <px is true for every x" is equivalent to "For every x t P implies <px". 10-43 n^TcP = 2 x (<pxcP). [9-3] n^rcp = -n^ + P - S-^.T + P [io-i] = - <X + - .1* + - <X3 + . . . + P Systems Based on Material Implication 241 = (-^1 + P) + (-^ 2 + P) + (-<pOr 3 + P) + . . . [5-981] C P) + (<^ 2 C P) + (^3 C P) + . . . [9-3] " <px is true for every x implies that P is true" is equivalent to "For some x, (px implies P". At first sight this theorem seems to commit the "fallacy of division" going one way, and the "fallacy of composition" going the other. It suggests the ancient example about the separate hairs and baldness. Suppose <px be "If x is a hair of Mr. Blank s, x has fallen out". And let P be "Mr. Blank is bald". Then H<px cP will represent "If all of Mr. Blank s hairs have fallen out, then Mr. Blank is bald". And 2 x (#rcP) will represent "There is some hair of Mr. Blank s such that if this hair has fallen out, Mr. Blank is bald". In this example, Ti(px cP is obviously true, but 2 x (<px cP) is dubious, and their equivalence seems likewise doubtful. The explanation of the equivalence is this: we here deal with material implication, and <px n c P means simply " It is false that (<px n is true but P is false) ". U<px cP means, in this example, " It is false that all Mr. Blank s hairs have fallen out but Mr. Blank is not bald"; and 2 I (#rcP) means "There is some one of Mr. Blank s hairs such that This hair has fallen out but Mr. Blank is not bald is false". No necessary connection is predicated between the falling out of any single hair and baldness material implication is not that type of relation. If we compare the last four theorems, we observe that an operator in the consequent of an implication is not changed by being extended in scope to include the whole relation, but an operator in the antecedent is changed from n to 2, from 2 to II. This is due to the fact that pcqis equivalent to -<p + q f where the sign of the antecedent changes but the consequent remains the same; and to the law -n() = 2-(), -2() = n-(). The above principles, connecting any proposition, P, with a preposi tional function and its operator, are much used in later proofs. In fact, all the proofs can be carried out simply by the various forms of this principle and theorems 10-1-10-23. Since P, in the above, may be any propo sition, #r n , 2#r, II#c, etc., can be substituted for P in these theorems. (<px + \l/x) and (<px x^j-) are, of course, functions of x. In order that ( par + \I/x) be significant, <?x must be significant and $x must be significant, and it is further requisite that "Either <px or $x" have meaning. Such considerations determine the range of significance of complex functions like (<px + \I/x) and (<px x^.r). A value of x in such a function must be at 17 242 A Survey of Symbolic Logic once a value of x in <px and a value of x in fa: x n in <px n and in fa n , in (<px n + fan), denotes identically the same individual. 10-5 2 <px + 2 fa = S x ( ^ + #r) . Since addition is associative and commutative, " Either for some .r, ^, or for some x, fa" is equivalent to "For some x, either <px or fa". If it be supposed that the functions, <px and fa, may have different ranges i. e., that the use of the same letter for the variable is not indicative of the range then S^.r + 2 fa might have meaning when 2 x (<p.r + fa) did not. But in such a case the proposition which states their equivalence will not have meaning. We shall make the convention that x n in <px n and x n in fa n are identical, not only in (<px n +fa n ) and (<f>x n xfa n ), but wherever <px and fa are connected, as in S^.r + S#r. Where there is no such presumption, it is always possible to use different letters for the variable, as S#e + 2^y. But even without this convention, the above theorem will always be true when it is significant i. e., it is never false and a similar remark applies to the other theorems of this section. 10-51 n <px x Ufa = n z ( <px x fa) . Since x is associative and commutative, similar proof. We might expect 2<pxx2fa = 2 x (<pxxfa) to hold, but it does not. "For some .r, x is ugly, and for some x, x is beautiful", is not equivalent to, "For some x, x is ugly and x is beautiful". Instead of an equivalence, we have an implication: 10-52 S x ( <px x fa) = ( (p.i-1 x fa [5-21 (<px n xfa n ) c <p.r n , and (<px n xfa n )cfa n Hence [5-31] 2 x (^.r xfa) cS^.r, and 2,(<px xfa) c^fa Hence [5-34] 2 x (<px xfa) c2<px xZfa Similarly, U<px + Hfa = U x (<f>x + fa) fails to hold. "Either for every x, x is ugly, or for every x, x is beautiful ", is not equivalent to, "For every x, either x is ugly or .r is beautiful ". Some .T S may be ugly and others beauti ful. But we have: Systems Based on Material Implication 243 10-53 II <px + Ufa ctt x (<px + #r) . [5-21] <px n c(<px n +\I/x n ), and $x n c Hence [5-3] H<px cH x (<px + \f/x), and Il^.r cU x ((px + if/x) Hence [5 33] II <px + n^x c n x ( <px + $x) In the proof of the last two theorems, we write a lemma for <px n instead of writing it for <pxi, for <pxz, for <px s , etc. For example, in 10-52 we write (<px n x^.r n ) c <px n , instead of writing (<pxi <px3, etc., etc. The proofs are somewhat more obvious with this explanation. This method of writing such lemmas will be continued. With two prepositional functions, <px and \f/x, we can form two impli cation relations, S x (#rc^) and IL^.r c i^.r). But 2 x (#rc#r) states only that there is a value of x for which either <px is false or \j/x is true: and this relation conveys so little information that it is hardly worth while to study its properties. U x (<px c^.c) is the relation of "jormal implication" "For every .r, at least one of the two, <f>x is false and $x is true , is a true statement" The negative of U x (<f>x c^x) is S x (^.r x-^.r), so that U x ( <px c i//.r) may also be read "It is false that there is any .r such that <px is true and $x false". The material implication, peg, states only "At least one of the two, l p is false and q is true , is a true statement"; or, "It is false that p is true and q false". The material implication, <px n c\l/x n , states only "At least one of the two, <p is false of x n } and ^ is true of x n , is a true statement"; or "It is false that <px n is true and ^.r n is false". But the formal impli cation, n s (^.rc^.r), states that however x n be chosen, it is false that <px n is true and $x n is false in the whole range of <px and $x, there is not a case in which <px is true and $x false. To put it another way, II X (^ c ^.r) means "Whatever has the predicate ^ has also the predicate ^" This relation has more resemblance to the ordinary meaning of "im plies" than material implication has. But formal implication, it should be remembered, is simply a class or aggregate of material implications; n x (>.r c i//.r) is simply the joint assertion of ^,r, c ^.ri, ^.r 2 c ^.r, ^.r 3 c tx~, etc., where each separate assertion is a material implication. 8 s The whole question of material implication, formal implication, and the usual mean ing of "implies", is discussed in Section v of Chap. v. 244 A Survey of Symbolic Logic The properties of formal implication are especially important, because upon this relation are based certain derivatives in the calculus of classes and in the calculus of relations. 10-6 n^arc^a-) = U x (-<px + fa) = H x -(<px x-fa). [9 3] (pX n Cfan = - <pX n + fan = -( <pX n X -fa n ) Hence [10-23] Q.E.D. 10-61 tt x (<pxcfa) c(<px n cfa n ). [10-2] If (px formally implies fa, then <px n materially implies fa n - 10-611 [II X ( <px c $x) x <px n ] c fa^ [9-4, 10-61] If <px formally implies fa and $ is true of ar n , then ^ is true of x n . This is one form of the syllogism in Barbara: for example, "If for every x, a; is a man implies x is a mortal , and Socrates is a man, then Socrates is a mortal". 10 -62 n x ( ??ar c #r) c S x ( <^x c fa) . [10-22] 10 63 n x ( <px c fa) c(Il<pxc Ufa). [10-61] If U x (<pxcfa), then <px n cfa n Hence [5-3] Q.E.D. 10-631 [U x (<pxcfa) xn^cn^o*. [9-4, 10-62] If (px always implies fa and <px is always true, then fa is always true. 10 -64 n x ( <^.r c fa) c(2<px c. 2 fa) . [10-61, 5-31] 10-641 [n x ( <f>x cfa)*2 <px] c 2 fa. [9-4, 10-64] If (px always implies fa and <px is sometimes true, then fa is sometimes true. 10 65 [n x ( <px c fa) x n x (^.T c fa;)] c n x ( ^.T c far). [10-61] If n x (^.rc^.iO and U x (fa c far), then <px r cfa n and iA.r n c far n . Hence [5-1] whatever value of .r, x n may be, <^.r n c far B . Hence [10-23] n x (^arcfar) Systems Based on Material Implication 245 This theorem states that formal implication is a transitive relation. It is another form of the syllogism in Barbara. For example let <px = x is a Greek , \f/x = x is a man , and x = ( x is a mortal ; 10-65 will then read: "If for every x, l x is a Greek implies x is a man , and for every x, x is a man implies .r is a mortal , then for every x, # is a Greek implies x is a mortal ". 10-65 may also be given the form: 10-651 U x (<px c #c) c [n x (#r c x) c U x (<px c fr)]. [9-4, 10-65] 10 652 U r (ifrx c fa;) c [U x ( <px c $x) c n x ( <px c far)]. [9-4, 10-65] 10 66 n x ( #r c i/a*) = n x (-#c c - #x) . [3-1] (^ci/O - Htfc -?.!) Hence [2-2, 5-3] Q.E.D. Any further theorems concerning formal implication can be derived from the foregoing. "Formal equivalence" is reciprocal formal implication, just as material equivalence is reciprocal material implication. The properties of formal equivalence follow immediately from those of formal implication. 10-67 U x (<px = jx) = [tt x (vx c $x) xll x (tx c <px)]. Whatever value of x, x n may be, [2-2] <px n = ^ is equivalent to the pair, <px n c \//x n and \f/x n c <px n . Hence [10-23] Q.E.D. 10-68 [U x (<px = jx) xn x (^.r = f-r)] cn x (^.i - T-r). Whatever value of .r, .r n may be, if <px = ^x and i: == far, then <px = rr. Hence [10-23] Q.E.D. 10-681 U x (<px = ^.r) c[II,(^.r = far) c [10-68, 9-4] 10-682 n z (^.r - f.c) c[H x (^r = ^.r) c [10-68, 9-4] Formal equivalence, as indicated by the last three theorems, is a transitive relation. and 10-69 U x (<p n x (^c - ^ ) [2-2, 10-61-62-63] 246 A Survey of Symbolic Logic 10-691 n(^c = $x) = U x (-<px = -#r). [3-2, 10-23] If we wish to investigate the propositions which can be formed from functions of the type of (<px xfy) and (<px + ty), where the range of sig nificance of <px may differ from that of \l/y, we find that these will involve two operators 2 Jl^r; ty), H tf S x (^r; ^), etc. And these are special cases of a function of two variables. (<px x\f/y) and (<px + \l/y) are special cases of f (.T, y). Hence we must first investigate functions of two variables in general. III. PROPOSITIONAL FUNCTIONS OF Two OR MORE VARIABLES A prepositional function of two variables, <p(x, y), gives the derivative propositions <p(x m , y n ), U*<P(X, y n ), S*2 tf p(a:, y), 2 y n x p(a:, y)-, etc. The range of significance of <p(x, y) will comprise all the pairs (x, y) such that <p(x, y) is either true or false. We here conceive of a class of individuals, #1, xz, .T 3 , etc., and a class of individuals, y lf y,, y s , etc., such that for any one of the x s and any one of the i/ s, <p(x, y) is either true or false. As has already been pointed out, the function may be such that the class of values of x is the same as the class of values of y, or the values of x may be distinct from the values of y. If, for example, <p(x, y) be "x is brother of #", the class of .r s for which <p(x, y) is significant consists of identically the same members as the class of y s for which <p(x, y) is sig nificant. 9 In such a case, the range of significance of <p(x, y) is the class of all the ordered couples which can be formed by combining any member of the class with itself or with any other. Thus if the members of such a class be i, G 2 > as, etc., the class of couples in question will be 10 (ai, ffi), (fli, a 2 ), (i, a-s), . (a z , ai), ( 2 , a,), (2, a 3 ), ... (a 3 , aO, ( 3 , a 2 ), (a 3 , a 3 ), ... . . . Etc., etc. But if <p(x, y) represent "x is a citizen of ?/", or "a: is a proposition about y", or "x is a member of the class y", the class of x s and the class of y s for which <p(x, y) is significant will be mutually exclusive. 9 Presuming that "A is brother of A" is significant i. e., false. 10 Schroder treats all relatives as derived from such a class of ordered couples. (See Alg. Log., in, first three chapters.) But this is an unnecessary restriction of the logic of relatives. Systems Based on Material Implication 247 Although <p(x, y) represents some relation of x and y, it does not neces sarily represent any relation of the algebra, such as x cy or x = y; and it cannot represent relations which are not assertable. <P(XI, y), <p(x*, y), etc., are prepositional functions of one variable, y. Hence H v v(xi, y), U v <p(x, y), ^ v <p(x lt y), etc., are propositions, the meaning and properties of which follow from preceding definitions and theorems. And U y <p(x,y), 2 v v(x,y), Il x <p(x,y), and 2 t <t>(x, y) are propositional functions of one variable. We can, then, define propositions involving two variables and two operators, as follows: 11-01 U x U y <f>(x, y) == ll t {n y <t>(x, y)}. Def 11-02 2 x U y <p(x,y) == 2 x lU y <p(x,y)}. Def. 1 1 03 n*Z tf <p(x, y) == n x { s y <p(x, y) } . Def. 11-04 S x S tf ?(.r, y) --= 2,{S^(.r, y)}. Def. It will be seen from these definitions that our explanation of the range of ^significance of functions of two variables was not strictly required; it follows from the explanation for functions of one variable. The same con vention regarding the number of values of variables and interpretation of the propositions is also extended from the theory of functions of one variable to the theory of functions of two. (Where the first variable has a subscript, the comma between the two will be omitted: <p(x_y) is p(.r 2 , y), etc.) Since U y <f>(x, y) is a propositional function of one variable, .r, the defini tion. 10-02, gives us IUIX*, y) == U^Il^x, y)} --= Tl y <p(x,y) xll y <f>(x z y) And the expansion of this last expression, again by 10-02, is { <p(xiyi) x ^Oi*/ 2 ) x <p(.ri?/s) x . x <x 2 i x <>x? 2 ) x ^(.r 2 z/ 3 ) x . x { <p(x*yi) x <p(x 3 y) x x ... Etc., etc. And similarly, by 10-01, SJlXz, y) = S x {n^(;r, y)} --= U And the expansion of the last expression, by 10-02, is x x x + . . . Etc., etc. 248 A Survey of Symbolic Logic Or, in general, any prepositional function with two operators is expanded into a two-dimensional array of propositions as follows: (1) The operator nearest the function indicates the relation (+ or x) between the constituents in each line. (2) The subscript of the operator nearest the function indicates the letter which varies within the lines. (3) The operator to the left indicates the relation ( + or x ) between each two lines. (4) The subscript of the operator to the left indicates the letter which varies from line to line. Some caution must be exercised in interpreting such propositions as 2 x U v <p(x, y}, etc. It is usually sufficient to read ZJI y "For some x. ami. every y", but strictly it should be "For some x, every y is such that". Thus 2 x H y <p(x, y} should be "For some x, every y is such that <p(x, y) is true". And H v 2 x <p(x, y) should be "For every y, some x is such that v(x, y) is true". The two here chosen illustrate the necessity of caution, which ma be made clear as follows: 2 x ll y <p(x t y) = That is, 2 x IIy<p(x, y) means "Either for x\ and every y, <p(x, y) is true, or for # 2 and every y, <p(x, y) is true, or for .T 3 and every y, <p(x, y) is true, ... or for some other particular x and every y, <p(x, y) is true". On the other hand, Tl y 2 x <p(x, y) = 2 x <p(x, i/i) xS x ^(.r, */ 2 ) xS x <^(.T, y That is, Uy^ x (p(x, y) means "For some x and yi, <p(x, y) is true, and for some x and y z , <p{x, y) is true, and for some x and y 3 , <p(x, y) is true, and . . ."; or "Given any y, there is one x (at least) such that <p(x, y) is true". The following illustration of the difference of these two is given in Principia Mathematical n Let <p(x, y) be the propositipnal function "If y is a proper fraction, then x is a proper fraction greater than y". Then for all values of y, we have 2 x <p(x, ?/), so that Ii y 2 x <p(x, y) is satisfied. In fact, U^ x <p(x,y) expresses the proposition: "If y is a proper fraction, then there is always a proper fraction greater than ?/". But 2 x li y <p(x, y) expresses the propo sition: "There is a proper fraction which is greater than any proper frac tion", which is false. In this example, if we should read S x n y "For some x and every #"; 11 See i, p. 161. Systems Eased on Material Implication 249 IlySz "For every y and some x", we should make equivalent these two very different propositions. But cases where this caution is required are infrequent, as w r e shall see. Where both operators are II or both 2, the two-dimensional array of propositions can be turned into a one-dimensional array, since every rela tion throughout will be in the one case x , in the other + , and both of these are associative and commutative. It follows from our discussion of the range of significance of a function of two variables that any such func tion, <p(x, y), may be treated as a function of the single variable, the ordered couple, (x, y). Hence we can make the further conventions: 11-05 SsSy^Gc, y) = S (x , V )<p(x, y) == S Xf y <f>(x, y). 11-06 tt x ll y <p(x, y) = n (x , V )<p(x, y) == n x , y <?(x, y). The second half of each of these serves merely to simplify notation. 1 1 07 If x r and y a be any values of x and y, respectively, in <p(x, y) , there is a value of (x, y) say, (.T, y) n such that <f>(x, y) n == <p(x r y s ). 11-05 and 11-06 could be derived from 11-07, but the process is tedious, and since our interest in such a derivation would be purely incidental, we prefer to set down all three as assumptions. If we wish to identify a given constituent of S*, y <p(x, y) with a con stituent of 2 x 2 y <p(x, y), some convention of the order of terms in S z , y <p(x, y) is required, because if the order of constituents in 2 x 2 v <p(x, y) be unaltered, this identification will be impossible unless the number of values of y is determined which, by our convention, need not be the case. Hence we make, concerning the order of terms in S Xf y <p(x, y), the following conven tion: <p(x m yn) precedes <p(x r y s ) if m + n < r + s, and where in + n = r + *, if n < s. Thus the order of terms in S*, y <p(x, y) will be <p(xiyj + <p(x 2 yi) + This arrangement determines an order independent of the number of values of x, or of y, so that the equivalent of <p(x, y) n in terms of <p(x r y e ) can always be specified. 12 An exactly similar convention is supposed to govern the arrangement of terms in n*, y <p(x, y) and their identification with the terms of U x ll y <p(x, y). These conventions of order are never required in the proof of theorems: we note them here only to obviate any theoretical 12 This arrangement turns the two-dimensional array into a one-dimensional by the familiar device for denumerating the rationals i. e., by proceeding along successive agonals, beginning with the upper left-hand corner. 250 A Survey of Symbolic Logic objection. The identification of 2 x 2 y <p(x, y) with S x , y <p(x, y), and of HJIy^Gr, y) with n x , y <p(x, y), is of little consequence for the theory of propositional functions itself, but it will be of some importance in the theory of relations which is to be derived from the theory of functions of two or more variables. Having now somewhat tediously cleared the ground, we may proceed to the proof of theorems. Since 2 X , y <p(x, y) and H x , y <p(x, y) may be re garded as involving only one variable, (x, y), many theorems here follow at once from those of the preceding section. 11-1 s x , y <p(x, y) = ^X^ V <P(X, y} = -H z , y -<p(x, y) = -[U x U v -<t>(x, y)}. [11-05-06, 10-05] 11-12 H Xf y <p(x, y) = U x ll y <p(x, y) = -S Xf v -<p(x, y) = -{S^-pfo y)}. [11-05-06, 10-04] 11-2 H x , y <p(x, y) c <p(x, y) n . [10-2] 11-21 <p(x, y) n c2 Xry <p(x, y). [10-21] 11-22 n x , y <p(x, y) c s* f y <p(x, y) . [10-22] 11-23 n x , y <f>(x, y) is equivalent to " Whatever value of (x, y), in <p(x, y), (x, y) n may be, <p(x, y) n ". [10-23] 11-24 U x Tl y <p(x, y) is equivalent to "Whatever values of x and y, in v(x, y), x, and y, may be, <p(x r y^". [10-23] HJI^O, y) is equivalent to "Whatever value of .r, in IL y <p(x,y), x r may be, H y <p(x r yY\ And H y <f>(x r y) is equivalent to "Whatever value of y, in (f>(x,y), y s may be, v(x r y^)". But [11-01] the values of x in H y <p(x r y) are the values of x in <p(x, y). Hence Q.E.D. 11-25 "Whatever value of (x,y), in <p(x,y), (x,y) n may be, <p(x, y) n " is equivalent to "Whatever values of .r and y, in (p(x, y), x r and y, may be, <p(x r y s ] " [11-06-23-24] 11-26 n x n, <p(x, y) c H tf <f>(x n y) . [11-01, 10-2] Systems Based on Material Implication 251 11-27 n x n^(.r, y) = U v TL x <p(x, ?/). Since x is associative and commutative, Q.E.D. 11-28 S x S^Gr, y) == S tf S x ^(a;, y). Since + is associative and commutative, Q.E.D. 1 1 29 IIJI, <p(x, y) c n x ^(jr, y n ) . [11-2(3-27] 11-291 lUI^C*, y) c<p(av#,). [2-2, 11-24] 11-3 IIJI^O, y) c SJI^Gc, y). [11-01, 10-21] 11-31 SJI^(a;, y) cU y 2 x <p(x, y). [11-03] n y s x <p(;e, y) = I vfayi) + vfayd + <p(x 3 yi) + I x { <K#i2/2) + ^22/2) + ^(^3^/2) + I x { <p(xiyz) + ^(.r 2 z/ 3 ) + ^(.TSZ/S) + ! x ... Etc., etc. Since x is distributive with reference to + , this expression is equal to the sum of the products of each column separately, plus the sum of all the cross-products, that is, to A + { p(.ri2/i) x <f>(xiy z ) x <p(.ri# 3 ) x . . } + { <f>(x z yi) x <p(x z y z ) x <f>(x z y 3 ) x . . } + . . . Etc., etc. where /I is the sum of all cross-products. But [11-02] this is SJI^O, y) + A. Hence SJI^Or, i/) +^4 == n^S^Gr, /). Hence [5-21] S x n y ^(.r, y) c I^Z^Gr, y). We have already called attention to the fact that the implication of 11-31 is not reversible that S x n^(.r, y) and I^S^Cr, y) are not equivalent. 11-32 n x 2y<t>(x, y) c S x S tf ^(.r, ?/). [11-03] n,S, [11-04] S x S^(a-, And [5-992] S c 2 We have also the propositions concerning formal implication where 252 A Survey of Symbolic Logic functions of two variables are concerned. The formal implication of $(x,y) by <f>(x,y) may be written either U Xt v [<p(x t y) c \//(x t y)] or U s U y [<f>(x f y) Ci//(x, y)]. By 11-06, these two are equivalent. We shall give the theorems only in the first of these forms. 11-4 IT X , y [<p(x, y) c t(x, y)] = H x> v [-<p(x, y) + j(x, y)] = U x , v -[<p(x, y) x-^(z, y)]. [10-6] 11-41 n x , y [<p(x, y) c t(x, y)] c[<p(x, y) n c f(x, y) n ]. [10-61] 11-411 ( ( n x , y [<p(x, y) c t( x , y)] x <p(x, y) n } c j(x, y). [10-611] 11-42 n x , y [<p(x, y) c$(x, y)] c S x , y [<p(x, y) cf(x, y)]. [10-62] 11-43 n*, y [<f>(x, y) c ^(.r, y)] c [n, y ^>(a;, ?/) c H Xf y $(x, y)]. [10-63] 11-431 {n x , ,[^(.r, y)cf(x, y)] xH x , y ^(x, ?/)} c n x , y }(x, y). [10-631] 11-44 n r , y [<p(x, y) c ^(.T, ?/)] c [2 Xt y<p (x, y) c S, f y ^(.r, ?/)]. [10-64] 11-441 {n x , tf [^(a;, y) c ^(ic, y)] x S x , ,^(.T, y)} c 2,, y $(x, y). [10-641] 11-45 {n x , y [<p(x, y) cj(x, y)] xH If v [^(a;, y) cf(a [10-65] 11-451 n Xftf [^(ic,2/)c^(a:,y)] c {n x , y [^fe 2/) cr(.T, y)] cn x> J^GT, y) c{(x, y)}}. [10-651] 11-452 n x , v [*(x,y)ct(x,y)] c {n^, y [<^(^ y) c^(.r, ?/)] cn x , tf [^(a;, y) c rfe y)]}. [10-652] 11-46 n,, y [<p(x, y) c^(;r, ?/)] = n x , ,[-^(.1% i/) c-^(.r, y)]. [10-66] Similarly, we have the theorems concerning the formal equivalence of functions of two variables. Systems Based on Material Implication 253 11-47 n*, v [v(x, ?/) = }(x, y)] =-- (n x , v [<p(x, y)cf(x, y)] xn,, [*(*, y)c<p(x, y)]}. [10-67] 11-48 {n*. y [*>(ar, y) = }(x, y)} xll x , v [t(x, y) = (x, y)}} cU t , y [<p(x,y) = (x, y)}. [10-68] 11-481 II X , [*>(*, ?/) = iKz, ?/)] c {II X , ,[^0, y) = f(z, y)] c n, f [*>(*, y) = f(x,y)]|. [10-681] 11-482 n, y [^(o;, y) - rfe 2/)] c fn x , tf [^(ar, y) = t(x, y)] cU,, v [<p(x,y) = rfe [10-682] 11-49 H x , J^GT, y) - t(x, y)} c [^(a;, y) n = t(x, y) n ] c[U x>l ,<p(x,y) = H t , v t(x,y)] c[2 x , v <p(x, y) = S Xf v *(x t y)]. [10-69] 11-491 n, tf [^(.r, i/) - ^fe ?/)] = n x , y [-^(ar, y) = -j(x, y)]. [10-691] Further propositions concerning functions of two variables are simple consequences of the above. The method by which such functions are treated readily extends to those of three or more variables. <p(x, y, z) may be treated as a function of three variables, or. as a function of one variable, the ordered triad (a:, y, z) ; just as \l/(x, y) can be treated as a function of x and y, or of the ordered pair (x, y). Strictly, new definitions are required with each extension of our theory to a larger number of variables, but the method of such extension will be entirely obvious. For three variables, we should have njiji^O, y, 2) = u x {u v u f tf>(x t y, z)} SJIyll ,>(&, y, z) = S x {lI 1/ n 2 ^(.T, y, z)\ Etc., etc. It is interesting to note that the most general form for the analogues of 11-05 and 11-06 will be n ( , , *)*>(.r, y, z) == njl^, g )<p(x t y, z) and S (I , , ,)<t>(x, y, z) == S x S (y , f) ^(ar, y, z) Since njl (v , ,)<p(x, y, z) = n (j/ , ,)<p(xiy, z) xn (y , g} <p(x z y, z) xn (l/ , ,)^(x 8 y, z) 254 A Survey of Symbolic Logic x . . ., and n (y , Z )<p(x n y, 2) = U y llz<p(x n y, 2), etc., we shall be able to deduce n ( x, y , Z)<P(X, y, 2) = nji (I ,, 2) ^(.r, ?/, 2) = n (X| ^iwo, #, 2) = n tf n (I> Z)<P(X, y, 2) = njiji^O, y, 2) And similarly for S (I , , 2) . This calls our attention to the fact that <p(x, y, 2) can be treated not only as a function of three variables or as a function of one, but also as a function of two, x and (y, 2) or (x, y) and 2 or (x, 2) and ?/. In general, the conventions of notation being extended to functions of any number of variables, in the obvious way, the analogues of preceding theorems for functions of two will follow. We failed to treat of such expressions as U<px xUfy, 2<px + U\f/y, etc., under the head of functions of one variable. The reason for this omission was that such expressions find their significant equivalents in propositions of the type H. x l\. y (<f>x x^z/), 2 x H y (<px + ty), etc., and these are special cases of functions of two variables. We may also remind the reader of the difference between two such expressions as II <px + U\l/x and n tpx + U\{/y. The ranges of the two functions, <p and \f/, need not be identical; there may be values of .r in <px which are not values of y in $y. But in any expression of the form <px n x fa n , x n as a value of x in #x must be identical with x n as a value of .r in ^.r. For this reason, we have adopted the con vention that where the same letter is used for the variable in two related functions, these functions have the same range. Hence the case where we have px and \[/y is the more general case, in which the functions are not restricted to the same range. Theorems involving functions of this type will not always be significant for every choice of v and \J/. There may even be cases in which an implication is not significant though its hypothesis is significant. But for whatever functions such theorems are significant, they will be true; they will never be false for any functions, however chosen. The meaning of an expression such as 2 x U y ( <px + \f/y) follows from the definition of 2 x Tly<f>(x, y). S x IIj,( <px + \j/y) = II, ( <px i + i/^) + Il y ( <px 2 + $y) + U v ( <px z + ^) + . . . = .r + z x <xi + \/ z x <xi + \/ 3 x . . . + {(VP.TS + ^I) x( ^3 + ^2/2) x( ^3 + ^2/3) x . . . ) + . . . Etc., etc. And for any such expression with two operators we have the same type of Systems Based on Material Implication 255 two-dimensional array as for a function of two variables in general. The only difference is that here the function itself has a special form, <^.r + \fry or <px x \{/y, etc. 12 i (1) [1-3] n^.r (2) II <>.r x II\l/y = ( <pX]_ x </?.r 2 x ^ 3 x . . . ) x = (<f>X! x n^i/) x (>.r 2 x n^z/) x (<p.r a x Ityy) x . . . [5-98] xn tf (^r 8 x^y)x... [10-371] [ii-oi] (3) By (2) and 1-3, x tpxi) x (n^y x <^.r 2 ) x (H^ x (p.r 3 ) x ... n y (^ x <^.r 2 ) xll tf (^x^.r 3 ) x ... [10- 37] . [11-01] (4) Similarly, ll^y xH^r = U y U x (\f^y x ^.r) = 11^(^.1- x^y). " <px is true for every .r and \f/y is true for every z/" is equivalent to "For every a; and every y, <px and ^z/ are both true", etc. 12-2 S^.r + S^z/ = 2^z/+2^.r = ^^^(^.r (1) [4-3] S^i- + S^ - S^+S^r. (2) 2<p.i- + S^ = (^ i + ^2 + ^3 +...) + ->/ [5-981] . [10-31] = SxZ^ + ifc/). [11-04] (3) By (2) and 4 -3, . [10-3] = S x S,(^+^r). [11-04] (4) Similarly, S^+2^.r = S tf 256 A Survey of Symbolic Logic "Either for some x, <px, or for some y, tyy" is equivalent to "For some x and some y, either <px or \f/y", etc. 12-3 S^r x = = * = S5 x (1) [1-3] S^c (2) S#e x S^y = X S^y) + O?2 X S^y) + (^T 3 X [5-94] ) + S tf ( ^ 2 x $y) + S y ( ^ 3 x ^y) + ... [10-361] = S^C^cx^). [11-04] (3) By (2) and 1-3, x Si = S x i + S^ x x ^cj + y x <^x 2 + S y (^x^ 8 )+ ..- [10-36] = SA(^x^). [H-04] (4) Similarly, S^y xS^o; = S y S,(^ x #r) - S tf S x (^c x^). "For some x, <^.r, and for some #, ^?/" is equivalent to "For some x and some y, <px and ^y", etc. 12-4 n v?.r + n^ = n^ + n^ = nji^z + ^) = n*n y (^ + <?x) = U y U x (<px + M == Il v U x (frj+ <px). (1) [4-3] IL<f>x + TIty = U^y + U^px. (2) H<px + n^?/ = (^aji x <^x 2 x <px 3 x . . . ) + n^z/ = (<pxi + ttty) x (^2 + n^i/) x (^T 3 + n^y) x ... [5-941] + M x... [10-371] = n s n tf (^ + ^). [ii-oi] (3) By (2) and 4 -3, + n^?/ = (n^y + ^o x (n^ + ^2) x n + .T 3 ) x... [10-37] (4) Similarly, Uty + H<f>x = U v U x (^y + <px) = U y tt x (<px + - "Either for every x, <px, or for every y, \f/y" is equivalent to "For every x Systems Based on Material Implication 257 and every y, either <px or \f/y", etc. At first glance this theorem may seem invalid. One may say: "Suppose <px be If a- is a number, it is odd , and $y be If y is a number, it is even . Then U<px + U^y will be Either every number is odd or every number is even , but U x ll v (<px + \f/y) will be Every number is either odd or even ". The mistake of this supposed illustration lies in misreading TL x U v (<px + \^y). It is legitimate to choose, as in this case, <px and \f/y such that their range is identical: but it is not legitimate to read U x U y (<px + $y) as if each given value of x were connected with a corresponding value of y. To put it another way: n z ll x (#c + #c), as a special case of U x lly(<px + ty), would not be "For every value of x, either <px or \l/x", but would be "For any two values of x, or for any value of x and itself, either <px or $x" . Thus HJIj/^T + 1/^) in the supposed illustration would not be as above, but is in fact "For any pair of numbers, or for any number and itself, either one is odd or the other is even" so that U<px + TLfy and Il x lly(<px + $y) would here both be false, and are equiva lent. A somewhat similar caution applies to the interpretation of the next two theorems. The analogues of these, in <p(x, y), do not hold. 12-5 2<f>x + Wy = n^y + 2 <px = 2 X II V ( <f>x + ty) == ^x (1) [4-3] (2) By proof similar to (2) in 12-2, 2<px + Ufy = S x n v (^r + ty) And by proof similar to (3) in 12 2, S <px + Ufy = S,n tf (^ + <px) (3) By proof similar to (2) in 12-4, H^y + S And by proof similar to (3) in 12-4, Uifry + S^r == U y ^ x "Either for some or, ^r, or for every y, ^" is equivalent to "For some x and every y, either <?x or ^?/", etc. 12-6 s<^.r (1) [1-3] S^r (2) By proof similar to (2) in 12-3, S^c xltyy == S*n tf (^c x And by proof similar to (3) in 12-3, 2<px xH^z/ == S,H y (^ x (3) By proof similar to (2) in 12-1, Ityy xS^c n tf 2 And by proof similar to (3) in 12-1, Ityy xS^r == H y 2 "For some x, <px, and for every y, fy" is equivalent to "For some x and every y, <px and ^?/", etc. 18 258 A Survey of Symbolic Logic We may generalize theorems 12-1-12-6 by saying that for functions of the type (<px + \f/y) and ( (px x \j/y) the order of operators and of members in the function is indifferent; and for propositions of the type n l 2J the operators may be combined, and the functions combined in the relation between the propositions. It will be unnecessary to give here the numerous theorems which follow from 10-5-12-6 by the principles pqcp, pcp + q, and Il^xc Spx, etc. For example, 10-51, IlipX gives at once (i) n x (<px (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Etc., etc. And 12-2, 2<px + 2\j/y = 2 x 2 v (<f>x + \fry), etc., gives (1) S, (2) (3) (4) (5) 2<px (6) 2^z Etc., etc. Another large group of theorems, only a little less obvious, follow from the combination of H<px cH.<px, or S#ccS#r, with Ii\f/y c S^y, giving by 5 -3, (3) 2 <px + Tl\{/y c 2 (px + ^^y (4) 2 <px x TL\f/y c 2 <px x 2^?/ Etc., etc. Each of these has a whole set of derivatives in which n (px + U\I/y is replaced Systems Based on Material Implication 259 by H. x lly(<px + 1/ ?/), etc., H<px xZi/ Z/ by n x S J/ (^x^), etc. We give, in summary form, the derivatives of (2), by way of illustration: Any one of c any one of xU\l/y x <px) x <px) S tf n x (^ x U y U x ( 9 x x ^) S v n z ( <px x x n ipx zty x n <?x , etc., etc. , etc., etc. ^), etc., etc. This table summarizes one hundred fifty-six theorems, and these are only a portion of those to be got by such procedures. Functions of the type of (<f>xx$y) and ((px + M g ive four different kinds of implication relation: (1) njl^rc^); (2) n x S v (^c^); (3) 2 x n y (<pxcty) , and (4) S x S tf (^c c $y). With the exception of the first, these relations are unfamiliar as "implications", though all of them could be illustrated from the field of mathematics. Xor are they par ticularly useful: the results to be obtained by their use can always be got by means of material implications or formal implications. Perhaps UJl y (<px c $y) is of sufficient interest for us to give its elementary properties. y^ x i c Ufy) x (^ 2 c 12-7 n x n tf (#cc [11-01] ... [10-42] And this last expression is equivalent to the set <pxi c Uifry, <pxz c H^y, <px 3 c nty, etc. 12-71 {IIJI J/ Ozci/ ?/) x^r B } [9-4, 12-7] 260 A Survey of Symbolic Logic If for every x and every y, <px implies \l/y, and for some given x, <px is true then $y is true for every y. 12-72 Il t Tl v ( <px c }y) = S ^.r c Ilty = II - #c (1) If IIJI^Oo; c^y), then [12-7] <p Hence [5-991] S^cltyi/. And if S^ccltyy, then [10-42] tt y (2 <px c ty) , and hence [10-41] (2) [9-3] S^c H x H y (<px c $y) is equivalent to "If there is some x for which px is true, then $y is true for every y". 12-73 {nji w (#rc^) xn y n,(^cf2)} cn x n,(^c^). [12-72] If IlJIyC^rc^) and n v n(^i/cfz), then and S^y c Hfz. But [10-21] Il^yc^y. Hence [5-1] S*ccII3, and [12 : 72] This implication relation is here demonstrated to be transitive. In fact, it is, so to speak, more than transitive, as the next theorem shows. 12-74 {(S^ccS^) xn tf n,(^cfz)} cIIJI.C^c cfz). [12-72] n v n a (^crz) = s^z/cn^. And [5-1] if S^c cZfy and S^y c Hfz, then S^.T c Hfz, and [12-72] 12-75 (n x [12-72] n s And [5-1] if 2<pxcttty and H^y c Hfz, then S^c cHfz, and [12-72] IV. DERIVATION OF THE LOGIC OF CLASSES FROM THE CALCULUS OF PROPOSITIONAL FUNCTIONS The logic of classes and the logic of relations can both be derived from the logic of propositional functions. In the present chapter, we have begun with a calculus of propositions, the Two-Valued Algebra, which includes all the theorems of the Boole-Schroder Algebra, giving these theorems the propositional interpretation. We have proved that, con sidered as belonging to the calculus of propositions, these theorems can validly be given the completely symbolic form: "If . . . , then . . ." Systems Based on Material Implication 261 being replaced by "... c ...","... is equivalent to ..." by ". . . = . . .", etc. The Two- Valued Algebra does not presuppose the Boole- Schroder Algebra; it simply includes it. Suppose, then, we make the calculus of propositions the Two-Valued Algebra our fundamental branch of symbolic logic. We derive from it the calculus of prepositional functions by the methods of the last two sections. We may then further derive the calculus of logical classes, and a calculus of relations, by methods which are to be outlined in this section- and the next. The present section will not develop the logic of classes, but will present the method of this development, and prove the possibility and adequacy of it. At the same time, certain differences will be pointed out between the calculus of classes as derived from that of propositional functions and the Boole-Schroder Algebra considered as a logic of classes. In order to distinguish class-symbols from the variables, x, y, z, in propositional func tions, we shall here represent classes by a, 0, y, etc. For the derivation of the logic of classes from that of propositional functions, a given class is conceived as the aggregate of individuals for which some propositional function is true. If <px n represent "a: is a man", then the aggregate of x s for which <px is true will constitute the class of men. If, then, z(<?z) represent the aggregate of individuals for which the propositional function <pz is true, z(<pz) will be "the class determined by the function <pz", or "the class determined by the possession of the char acter <>". 13 We can use a, 0, 7, as an abbreviation for z(<pz), 2(^2), z(&), etc. a = z(tpz) will mean "a is the class determined by the function <pz", (In this connection, we should remember that <px and <pz are the same function.) The relation of an individual member of a class to the class itself will be symbolized by e. x n e a represents " x n is a member of a "-or briefly "x n is an a". This relation can be defined. 13 We here borrow the notation of Principia. The corresponding notation of Peirce and Schroder involves the use of S, which is most confusing, because this S has a meaning entirely different from the S which is an operator of a propositional function. But in Principia, z(<pz) does not represent an aggregate of individuals; it represents " : such that <pz". And z(tpz) is not a primitive idea but a notation supported by an elaborate theory. Our procedure above is inelegant and theoretically objectionable: we adopt it because our purpose here is expository only, and the working out of an elaborate technique would impede the exposition and very likely confuse the reader. As a fact, a more satis factory theory on this point makes no important difference. 262 A Survey of Symbolic Logic 13-01 x n z(<pz) = <px n Def. "x n is a member of the class determined by <pz" is equivalent to " <px n is true". (For convenience of reference, we continue to give each definition and theorem a number.) The relation "a is contained in ft" is the relation of the class a to the class ft when every member of a is a member of (3 also. We shall symbolize "a is contained in ft" by a c ft. The sign c between a and ft, or between z(vz) and 2(^2), will be "is contained in"; c between propositions will be "implies ", as before. x n e a is, of course, a proposition; x e a, a prepo sitional function. 13-02 acft = U x (xeacxeft) Def. a c ft is equivalent to "For every x, c x is an a implies ( x is a ft ". n x (> e o: c x e (3) is a formal implication. It will appear, as we proceed that the logic of classes is the logic of the formal implications and formal equivalences which obtain between the propositional functions which deter mine the classes. 13-03 ( a = ft) = U x (x e a = x e (3) Def. a = ft is equivalent to "For every x, { x is a member of a is equivalent to x is a member of /3 ". a = ft thus represents the fact that a and ft have the same extension i. e., consist of identical members. x n e a, a c ft, and a = ft are assertable relations propositions. But the logical product of two classes, and the logical sum, are not assertable relations. They are, consequently, defined not by means of propositions but by means of functions. 13-04 axft = x[(xea) x(xe ft)} Def. The product of two classes, a and ft, is the class of x s determined by the propositional function "x is an a and x is a ft". The class of the x s for which this is true constitute a* ft, the class of those things which are both as and /3 s. The relation x between a and ft is, of course, a different relation from x between propositions or between propositional functions. A similar remark applies to the use of + , which will represent the logical sum of two classes, as well as of two propositions or propositional functions. This double use of symbols will cause no confusion if it be remembered that a and ft, (<pz) and 2(^2), etc., are classes, while x e a is a propositional function, and x n e a, a c ft, and a = ft are propositions. Systems Based on Material Implication 263 13-05 a + /3 = x{(xea) + (x6(3)} Def. The sum of two classes, a and /?, is the class of z s such that at least one of the two, x is an and f x is a , is true, or loosely, the class of z s such that either Z is an a or x is a /3. The negative of a class can be similarly defined: 13-06 -a = x-(xta) Def. The negative of a is the class of or s for which x is an a is false. The "universe of discourse", 1, may be defined by the device of selecting some prepositional function which is true for all values of the variable. Such a function is (f.r cfz), whatever prepositional function x may be. 13-07 1 = x({xcx) Def. 1 is the class of xs for which x implies x. u Since this is always true, 1 is the class of all x s. The "null-class", 0, will be the negative of 1. 13-08 = -1 Def. That is, by 13-06,, = x-(txcx), and since -(fac^) is false for all values of x, the class of such x s will be a class with no members. Suppose that a = 2(^2) and /3 = 2(^2). Then, by 13-01, x n * a == <px n . Hence a c ft will be U x (<f>x c$x), and a = will be tt x (<px == #r). This establishes at once the connection between the assertable relations of classes and formal implication and equivalence. To illustrate the way in which this connection enables us to derive the logic of classes from that of propositional functions, we shall prove a number of typical theorems. It will be convenient to assume for the whole set of theorems: a = 2O), ]8 = 2(*z), 7 = &(&) 13-1 = x-({xc{x). = -1. Hence [13-06] = x -(x * 1). [13 01 07] x e 1 = f.r c c. Hence = x -(s*.r c f .r) . 13-2 n x (xel). [13-01-06] x n el == (x n cxn). Hence U x (x e 1) = U x (xc{x). But [2 - 2] fr n c r-r n . Hence [10 23] n,(^ c x) . Every individual thing is a member of the "universe of discourse". 14 This defines, not the universe of discourse, but "universe of discourse", the range of significance of the chosen function, f . With 1 so defined, propositions which invol the classes (**), (*), etc., and 1, will be significant whenever <p, t, etc., a the same range, and true if significant. 264 A Survey of Symbolic Logic 13-3 II x -(.eO). [13 -01 -06 -07] a- n eO = -(f.r n cf.r n ). Hence [3-2] ~(x n e 0) = (r n c far) . But $x n c f.r. Hence [10-23] n x (fx c fr), and H x -(a; e 0). For every x, it is false that x e no individual is a member of the null- class. 13-4 cl. [13-01-06] X n tl = frr n Cf.r n ). Since a = %(<pz), [13-01] x n e a = ipx n - [9-33] On cf.r n ) c [*c n c (fz n c &)]. Hence since f.r n c f.r n , <p.T n c ($x n c r n ). Hence [10-23] tt x [<px c ({x c{x)], and [13-2] a cl. Any class, a, is contained in the universe of discourse. It will be noted (13-2 and 13-4) that individuals are members of 1, classes are contained in 1. In the proof of 13-4, we make use of 9-33, "A true proposition is implied by any proposition". $x n c $x n is true. Hence it is implied by <px n . And since this holds, whatever value of x, x n may be, therefore, But (px is the function which determines the class ; fa: cfa:, the function which determines 1. Hence <px n is x n e a, and x n cx n is x n e 1. Conse quently we have 11^ (a:caca:cl). And by the definition of the relation "is contained in", this is a c 1. 13-5 Oca. [9-1] -O n e 0) is equivalent to (x n e 0) = 0. Hence [13-3] (x n e 0) - 0, and [9-32] (x n e 0) c <px n . Hence [13-01] x n eOcx n e a, and [10-23] U x (xeQcxe a). Hence [13-02] c a. The null-class is contained in every class, a. In this proof, we use 9-32, "A false proposition implies any proposition". -(fa: n cfa: n ) is false, and hence implies <px n . But -(fxcfx) is the function which determines 0; and <px, the function which determines a. Hence c a. The proofs of the five theorems just given are fairly typical of those which involve and 1. But the great body of propositions make more direct use of the connection between the relations of classes and formal implications or equivalences. This connection may be illustrated by the following: Systems Based on Material Implication 265 13-6 z( (pz) c z(^z) = n x ( (px c \j/x) . [13-02] z((pz) cz(^z) = U x [xe z((pz) c.ce [13-01] x n e z((pz} = (px n , and x n e z(\f/z) = $ Hence [2-1] U t [x e z(<pz) ex e (^z)] = U x (<px c "The class determined by (pz is contained in the class determined by \f/z" is equivalent to "For every x, (px implies \frx". [13-03] [z(<pz) = z(^z)] = H x [xez(<pz) = a-ez(^z)]. [13-01] x n e z((pz) == <px n , and x n e z(^z) = \l/x n . Hence H x [x e z(<pz) = x e z(^z)] = H x (<px = fa)- "The class determined by <pz is equivalent to the class determined by ^z" is equivalent to "For every x, <px is equivalent to $x". [10-66] Il x [x e z(<pz) ex e z(tz)] == E x (-[.r e z(^z)] c-[.r e z(^z)]). Hence II x (a: e a ex e /3) = n x [-(.i- e /3) c-(x e a)]. [13-01-06] -(a; e a) = a; e -a, and -(x e 0) = .T e -/3. Hence [13-02] (c/3) - (-/3c-). 13-9 [(aC|8) x(/3c T )] c(aC7). [13-6] (a c j8) = U x (<px c ^ t r), (|8 c 7) = H x (tx c ^.i-), and (a c 7) And [10-65] [U x (<f>x c \f/x) x n x (^.r c .r)] c n x (^a; c ^). The relation "is contained in" is transitive. 13-9 is the first form of the syllogism in Barbara. The second form is: 13-91 [(aC]8) x(.Tnea)] c(ar B c j8). [13-6] (aC]8) = n x (^c^.r). [13-01] (x n e a) == <px n , and (x n e 0) = ^ n . And [10-611] [n x (^.r c ^r) x ^.r n ] c\j/x n . If the class a is contained in the class & and .r n is a member of a, then .r n is a member of /3. 13-92 [(a = ]8) x(/3 == 7)] c (a = : 7)- [lo-/J \<2 Py ~ -iix^cp.c ~ Y /> \f j And [10-68] [H x (^,r = ^.r) xH x (^.r = ^.r)] cH x (^ = ^r)- The last three theorems illustrate particularly well the direct connection 266 A Survey of Symbolic Logic between formal implications and the relations of classes. 13-6 and 13-7 are alternative definitions of a c /3 and a = 0. Similar alternative defini tions of the other relations would be : l5 -[z(<pz*)] = z(-<pz) z(<pz) We may give one theorem especially to exemplify the way in which every proposition of the Two-Valued Algebra, since it gives, by 10-23, a formal implication or equivalence, gives a corresponding proposition con cerning classes. We choose for this example the Law of Absorption. 13-92 [a+(aX]8)] = a. [13-04-05] [a+(aX|8)] = x{(xea) + [(xea) x(.re/3)]}. Hence [13-01] {x n e [a + (a x/3)]} = {(x n ea) + [(x n ea)x(x n e(3)}}. (1) But [13-03] {[+( x/3)] = a} = n,[{(.T e a) + [(x e a) X (x e 0)]} == (x e )J. (2) But [13-01] (x n e a) = <px n , (x n e 0) = $x n , and by (2), {[a+(a*{3)] = a} = U x {[<px + (<px xjx)] = <px} But [5-4] [<pX n +(<pX n X\l/X n )] = V%n> Hence [10-23] TL x {[<px + (<?x xifrx)] = <px}. All but the last two lines of this proof are concerned with establishing the connection between [a + (a x /3)] = a and the formal equivalence n a {[#c+(#ex#r)] = <px] Once this connection is made, we take that theorem of the Two- Valued Algebra which corresponds to [a + (a x /3)] = , namely 5-4, (p + .p q) = p, substitute in it <px n for p and if/x n for g, and then generalize, by 10-23, to the formal equivalence which gives the proof. An exactly similar pro cedure will give, for most theorems of the Two-Valued Algebra, a corre sponding theorem of the calculus of classes. The exceptions are such propositions as p = (p = 1), which unite an element p with an implication or an equivalence. In other words, every theorem concerning classes can be derived from its analogue in the Two- Valued Algebra. We may conclude our discussion of the derivation of the logic of classes 15 As a fact, these definitions would be much more convenient for us, but we have chosen to give them in a form exactly analogous to the corresponding definitions of Prin- cipia (see i, p. 217). Systems Based on Material Implication 267 from the logic of prepositional functions by deriving the set of postulates for the Boole-Schroder Algebra given in Chapter II. This will prove that, beginning with the Two- Valued Algebra, as a calculus of propositions, the calculus of classes may be derived. This procedure may have the appear ance of circularity, since in Section I of this chapter we presumed the propositions of the Boole-Schroder Algebra without repeating them. But the circularity is apparent only, since the Two- Valued Algebra is a distinct system. The postulates of Chapter II, in a form consonant with our present notation, can be proved so far as these postulates express symbolic laws. The postulates of the existence, in the system, of -a when a exists, of a x when a and exist, and of the class 0, must be supposed satisfied by the fact that w r e have exhibited, in their definitions, the logical functions which determine a x (3, -a, and O. 16 14-2 (a Xa) = a. [13-01] x n e a = <fX n . Hence [13-04] x n e(a*a) = [(x n e a) x (x n e a)] = (<px n x ^.r n ). Hence [13-03] [(aXa) = a] = H x {[.re (a x a)] = x e a] = H t [(<px x <px) == <&]. But [1-2] (<f>x n x <pxn) = <px n . Hence [10-23] U t [(<px x <px) == <px]. 14-3 (ax0) = (/3 x a). [13-03] [(ax0) = (0 x a)] = U x {[x e (a x 0)] = [x e (ft x a)]} = II x {[(.r6a)x(.r60)] = [(.r e /3) x(.r a)]}. [13-01-04] Hence [13-01] [(ax/3) = (0 x a)] = nj(#rx#r) = (*x x <px)}. But [1-3] (<px n xtx n ) = (#r x ^r n ). Hence [10-23] U x [(<f>x x^.r) = (^ x ^.r)]. 14-4 (aX0) X T == ax(0x 7 ). [13-03] [(X0)X 7 = X(0X T )] = = n x [{.T6[(aX/3)x 7 ]l == {a?e[ax(0x 7 )]}J = n x [{[(.T e a) x (x e (3)] x (.r e 7 ) J == { (.r e a) x [(.r 0) x (.r e 7 )] }J. [13-01-04] Hence [13-01] [(x0) x 7 - ax(0x 7 )] 16 A more satisfactory derivation of these existence postulates is possible when the theory of propositional functions is treated in greater detail. See Principia, I, pp. 217-18. 268 A Survey of Symbolic Logic But [1-04] (<px n xtx n ) xx n = <px n x(\f/x n x^x n ). Hence [10-23] H x {[(<px x^x) x &] = [<px x(+x x &)]}. 14-5 axO = 0. [13-1-01] .TncO = -(frcr B ). [13-03-04] [axO = 0] = U x l[(x n ea)x(x n eQ)] = (x n eO)} = n.u^x-o-zc^)] = -(fzcMOj. [13-01] But [2-2, 9-01] (r.rcfar B ) = 1, and [3-2] -({x n c{x n ) = 0. Hence [1-5] [<px n x-(x n c x n )] = = -(fr cc). Hence [10-23] n s {[^r x-frr c^)] = -(fa; cfr)}. 0, in the fourth and fifth lines of the above proof, is the of the Two-Valued Algebra, not the of the calculus of classes. Since the general method of these proofs will now be clear, the remaining demonstrations can be some what abbreviated. 14-61 [(x-|8) = 0] c[( a x/3) = a]. [13 -01 -02 -04 -06] The theorem is equivalent to But [13-3] Il x -(xeO), and hence [9-1] IL x [(x e 0) - 0]. Hence the theorem is equivalent to IT* { [Or x -i/a*) = (xeQ)]c[(<pxxifrx) = <px]} But [13-3] H x -(xeQ), and hence [9-1] TL x [(x e 0) = 0]. Hence the theorem is equivalent to U x {[(<px x-fr) = 0] c[(^ x^) = <px]} But [1-61] [(<f>X n X-\j/Xn) = 0] C[(<px n X$X n ) = <pX n }. Hence [10-23] Q.E.D. 14-62 {[(Xj8) = a] x[(x-/3) = a]} c (a = 0). The theorem is equivalent to n,[{[(#rxr) == ^]x[(^x-^) = <px]} c[<px = (x e 0)]] But [13-3, 9-1] n x [(.r 0) = 0]. Hence the theorem is equivalent to, n,[{[(#cx^.T) == ^i ]x[(^x-^.r) = ^r]} c(<px = 0)] But [1-62] {[(?.rxr n ) == <px n ] x[(^x n x-^x n } == <px n }} c(^.r n = 0). Hence [10-23] Q.E.D. The definition, 1 = -0, follows readily from the definition given of in this section. The other two definitions of Chapter II are derived as follows: 14-8 O+/3) - -(- ax -j8). The theorem is equivalent to Il x [(<px + \f/x) = -(-$x x-\f/x)]. Systems Based on Material Implication 269 But [1-8] (<px n +tXn) = -(-<?x n x-\l/x n ). Hence [10-23] Q.E.D. 14-9 (aCjS) = [(ax/3) = a]. The theorem is equivalent to IIjOz c V/.r) = U z [(<px x$x) == <px]. But [1-9] (<f>x n c^x n ) is equivalent to [(^cx^ic tt ) == v*c n ]. Hence [10-23-69] Q.E.D. Since the postulates and definitions of the calculus of classes can be deduced from the theorems of the calculus of prepositional functions, it follows that the whole system of the logic of classes can be so deduced. The important differences between the calculus of classes so derived and the Boole-Schroder Algebra, as a logic of classes, are two: (1) The Boole- Schroder Algebra lacks the e-relation, and is thus defective in application, since it cannot distinguish the relation of an individual to the class of which it is a member from the relation of two classes one of which is con tained in the other; (2) The theorems of the Boole-Schroder Algebra cannot validly be given the completely symbolic form, while those of the calculus of classes derived from the calculus of prepositional functions can be given this form. 17 V. THE LOGIC OF RELATIONS The logic of relations is derived from the theory of propositional func tions of two or more variables, just as the logic of classes may be based upon the theory of propositional functions of one variable. A relation, R, is determined in extension when we logically exhibit the class of all the couples (x, y) such that x has the relation R to y. If <p(x, y) represent "x is parent of y", then x $[<p(x, y)} is the relation "parent of " This defines the relation in extension: just as the extension of "red" is the class of all those things which have the property of being red, so the extension of the relation "parent of" is the class of all the parent-child couples in the universe. A relation is a property that is common to all the couples (or triads, etc.) of a certain class; the extension of the relation is, thus, the class of couples itself. The calculus of relations, like the calculus of propositions, and of classes, is a calculus of extensions. "Oftentimes, as in Schroder, Alg. Log., i, the relations of propositions in the algebra of classes have been represented in the symbols of the propositional calculus befo calculus has been treated otherwise than as an interpretation of the Book-Schroder Algebra. But in such a case, if these symbols are regarded as belonging to the system, tl is invalid. 270 A Survey of Symbolic Logic We assume, then, the idea of relation : the relation R meaning the class of couples (x, y) such that x has the relation R to y. R = x y(x Ry), S = w z(w S z), etc. This notation is simpler and more suggestive than R = x y[<p(x, y)], S = w z[\[/(iv, z)], but it means exactly the same thing. A triadic relation, T, will be such that T = x y z[T(x } y } z)} or T is the class of triads (x, y, z) for which the prepositional function T(x, y, z) is true. But all relations can be defined as dyadic relations. A triadic relation can be interpreted as a relation of a dyad to an individual that is to say, any function of three variables, T(x, y, z), can be treated as a function of two variables, the couple (x, y) and z, or x and the couple (y, z) . This follows from the considerations presented in concluding discussion of the theorems numbered 11-, in section III. 18 Similarly, a tetradic relation can be treated as a dyadic relation of dyads, and so on. Hence the theory of dyadic relations is a perfectly general theory. Definitions exactly analogous to those for classes can be given. 15 -01 (x, y) n e z w[R(z, ic)] = R(x, y) n . Def. It is exactly at this point that our theoretical considerations of the equiva lence of <p(x, y) n and <p(x r y a ) becomes important. For this allows us to treat R(x, y), or (x Ry), as a function of one or of two variables, at will; and by 11-07, we can give our definition the alternative form: 15-01 (x m y n )ezw(zRw) = x m R y n . Def. "The couple (x m y n ) belongs to the field, or extension, of the relation deter mined by (z R w) " means that x m R y n is true. 15-02 RcS = U x , v [(xRy) c(xSy)]. Def. This definition is strictly parallel to 13-02, (ac/3) = H x (xe acxe /3) because, by 15-01, (x R y) is (x, y) e R and (x S y) is (x, y) e S. A similar remark applies to the remaining definitions. 15-03 (R = S) = n x , y [(x Ry) = (xS y)]. Def. R and S are equivalent in extension when, for every x and every y, (x R y) and (x S y) are equivalent assertions. 18 See above, pp. 253 ff. Systems Based on Material Implication 271 15-04 R xS = x y [(x Ry)* (x S y)]. Def. The logical product of two relations, R and S, is the class of couples (x, y. such that x has the relation R to y and x has the relation S to y. If R is "friend of", and S is "colleague of", R x S will be "friend and colleague of") 15-05 R + S = xy[(xRy) + (xSy)]. Def. The logical sum of tw y o relations, R and S, is the class of couples (x, y) such that either x has the relation R to y or x has the relation S to y. R + S will be " Either fl of or S of". 15-06 -R = xy-(xRy). Def. -R is the relation of x to y when x does not have the relation R to y. It is important to note that R x S, R + S } and -# are relations: x(R x *$)#, z(# + S)y, and # -E y are significant assertions. The "universal-relation" and the "null-relation" are also definable after the analogy to classes. 15-07 1 = x y [?(x, y)c{(x, y)]. Def. x has the universal-relation to y in case there is a function, f, such that $(x, y) c(x, y), i. e., in case x and y have any relation. 15-08 = -1. Def. Of course, 0,1, + and x have different meanings for relations from their meanings for classes or for propositions. But these different meanings ot 0, + , etc., are strictly analogous. As was pointed out in Section III of this chapter, for every theorem involving functions of one variable, there is a similar theorem involving functions of two variables, due to the fact that a function <p(x t y) may be regarded as a function of the single variable (x, y). Consequently, for each theorem of the calculus of classes, there is an exactly corresponding theorem in the calculus of relations. We may, then, cite as illustrations of this calculus the analogues of the theorems demonstrated to hold for classes; and no proofs will here be necessary. These proofs follow from the theorems of Section III, numbered 11-, exactly as the proofs for classes are given by the corresponding theorems in Section II, numbered 10 . 15-1 = x$-[t(x,y)c(x, y)]. The null-relation is the relation of x to y when it is false that $(x, y) implies (x, y), i. e., when x has no relation to #. 19 Of course, there is no such (x, y) couple which can significantly be called a couple. 19 As in the case of the 1 and of the class calculus, the 1 and of relations, defined as 272 A Surrey of Symbolic Logic 15-2 n x , y [(x, y) e 1]. Every couple is a member of the universe of couples, or has the universal (dyadic) relation. 15-3 n x , y -[(x, 2/)eO]. No couple has the null-relation. 15-4 jRcl. 15-5 Ocfl. Every relation, R, is implied by the null-relation and implies the universal relation; or, whatever couple (.r, y) has the null-relation has also the relation 72, and whatever couple has any relation, R, has also the universal- relation. 15-6 (RcS) = tt x , y [(xRy)c(xSy)}. For relations, RcS is more naturally read " R implies S" than " R is con tained in S". By 15-6, " R implies S" means "For every x and every y, if x has the relation R to y, then x has the relation S to y". Or " R implies S" means "Every (x, y) couple related by R are also related by S". 15-7 (R = S) = U x , y [(x Ry) = (x S y)]. Two relations, R and S, are equivalent when the couples related by JR. are also related by S, and vice versa (remembering that = is always a reciprocal relation c). 15-8 (RcS) = (-Sc-R). If the relation R implies the relation S, then when S is absent R also will be absent. 15-9 [(RcS) *(ScT)]c(RcT). The implication of one relation by another is a transitive relation. 15-91 [(RcS)x(x m Ry n )]c(x m Sy n ). If R implies S and a given couple are related by R, then this couple are related also by S. 15-92 [(R = S) x(S == T)]c(R = T). The equivalence of relations is transitive. If it be supposed that the postulates concerning the existence of rela tions are satisfied by exhibiting the functions which determine them, then, we have defined them, are such that propositions involving them are true whenever sig nificant, and significant whenever the prepositional functions determining the functions in question have the same range. Systems Based on Material Implication 273 as in the case of classes, we can derive the postulates (or remaining postu lates) for a calculus of relations from the theorems of the calculus of prepo sitional functions. The demonstrations would be simply the analogues of those already given for classes, and may be omitted. 16-2 (RxR) = R. 16-3 (RxS) = (S xR). 16-4 (RxS) xT = Rx(SxT). 16-5 RxO = 0. 16-61 [(Rx-S) = 0}c[(RxS) = R]. 16-62 H(RxS) ---- R] x[(Rx-S) = R}} c(R = 0). 16-8 (R + S) = -(-Rx-S). 16-9 (RcS) = [(RxS) = R]. These theorems may also be taken as confirmation of the fact that the Boole-Schroder Algebra holds for relations. In fact, "calculus of relations" most frequently means just that the Boole-Schroder Algebra with the elements, a, b, c, etc., interpreted as relations taken in extension. So far, the logic of relations is a simple analogue of the logic of classes. But there are many properties of relations for which classes present no analogies, and these peculiar properties are mosl important, h. Fact, the logistic development of mathematics, worked out by Peirce, Schroder, Frege, Peano and his collaborators, and Whitehead and Russell, has de pended very largely upon a further study of the logic of relations. While we can do no more, within reasonable limits, than to suggest the manner of this development, it seems best that the most important of these proper ties of relations should be given in outline. But even this outline cannot be complete, because the theoretical basis provided by our previous dis cussion is not sufficient for completeness. Every relation, R, has a converse, *R, which can be defined as follows: 17-01 *R = y x (x Rij). Def. If x has the relation R to y, then y has the converse relation, R, to x. It follows at once from the definition of (x m y n ) e R that x m R y n = y n *R x m because (x m R y n ) = (x m y n ) * R = (y n x m ) e "R = Vn "R x m > The converse of the converse of R is R. w(wfl) = R 19 274 A Survey of Symbolic Logic since (*>R) = x y (y R x) = x y (x R y) = R. (This is not a proof: proof would require that we demonstrate n, ( [(*, y) e ~(~R) = (x, y) e R] But it is obvious that such a demonstration may be given. In general, we shall not pause for proofs here, but merely indicate the method of proof.) The properties of symmetrical relations follow from the theorems con cerning converses. For any symmetrical relation T, T = *->T. The uni versal relation, 1, and the null-relation, 0, are both symmetrical: (x 1 y) = [rO, y) cf(s, y)] == 1 == [f(y, x) c{(y, .r)] - (y I x) (The "1" in the middle of this proof is obviously that of the calculus of propositions. Similarly for in the next.) ( X y) = -[r(.r, y) c $(*, y)] = = -[f (y, x) c {(y, x)] = (y a-) It is obvious that if two relations are equivalent, their converses will be equivalent: (# = ) = (R = $) Not quite so obvious is the equivalent of (RcS), in terms of *R and ^S. We might expect that (R c S) would give (/S c^). Instead we have (RcS) = (*R c S) for (fl c ,S) = H Xf y [(.i- E y) c (x S y)] = U x , y [(y "R x) c (y ^S x)] = (vRc^S) " Parent of implies ancestor of" is equivalent to "Child of implies descendant of". The converses of compound relations is as follows: (/JxS) = vRx^S for x (R x S)y = y(R x S)x = (y R x) x(yS x) = (x R y ) x (x ^S y) = x(*Rx"S)y If x is employer and exploiter of y, the relation of y to .r is "employee of and exploited by". Similarly If x is either employer or benefactor of y, the relation of y to x is "either employee of or benefitted by". Other important properties of relations concern "relative sums" and Systems Based on Material Implication 275 "relative products". These must be distinguished from the non-relative sum and product of relations, symbolized by + and x . The non-relative product of "friend of" and "colleague of" is "friend and colleague of": their relative product is "friend of a colleague of". Their non-relative sum is "either friend of or colleague of": their relative sum is "friend of every non-colleague of". We shall denote the relative product of R and S by R \ S, their relative sum by R t S. 17-02 R S = xz{2 y [(xRy) x(ySz)]}. Def. R\S is the relation of the couple (x, z) when for some y, x has the relation R to y and y has the relation S to z. x is friend of a colleague of z when, for some y, x is friend of y and y is colleague of z. 17-03 R-tS = xz{n y [(xRy) + (ySz)}}. Def. R t S is the relation of x to z when, for every y, either x has the relation R to y or y has the relation S to z. x is friend of all non-colleagues of z when, for every y, either x is friend of y or y is colleague of z. It is noteworthy that neither relative products nor relative sums are commutative. "Friend of a colleague of" is not "colleague of a friend of". Nor is "friend of all non-colleagues of" the same as "colleague of all non- friends of". But both relations are associative. R\(S\T) = (R\S)\T for 2 t {(wR x) x [ X (S T)z] } --= 2 X { (w R x) x z v [( x Sy)x(yTz)]} = 2 y 2 x {(wRx)x[(xSy)x(yTz)]} = 2 v 2,{[(wRx)x(xSy)]x(yTz)} = 2 v (2 x [(wRx)x(xSz)]x(yTz)} = 2 v {[w(RS)y]x(yTz)} "Friend of a (colleague of a neighbor of)" is "(friend of a colleague) of a neighbor of". Similarly, R t (S t T) = (R t S) t T "Friend of all (non-colleagues of all non-neighbors of)" is "(friend of all non-colleagues) of all non-neighbors of". De Morgan s Theorem holds for the negation of relative sums and prod ucts. -(R\S) = -flt-S for -{ 2 t [(x Ry)*(yS z)] } --= n tf -[(* R y) x ( y S z)} 276 A Survey of Symbolic Logic The negative of "friend of a colleague of" is "non-friend of all colleagues (non-non-colleagues) of". Similarly, -(R t S) = -R -S The negative of "friend of all non-colleagues of" is "non-friend of a non- colleague of". Converses of relative sums and products are as follows: for x *(R | S)z = z(R \ S)x = ? y [(z Ry)*(yS x)] = 2 v ((y S x) x(zR y)] If x is employer of a benefactor of z, then the relation of z to x is " bene- fitted by an employee of". Similarly, ^(R t /S) = ^S t ^R If x is hater of all non-helpers of z, the relation of z to a; is "helped by all who are not hated by". The relation of relative product is distributive with reference to non- relative addition. R\(S+T) = (RS) + (R T) for x[R \ (S + T)]z = ? y {(x Ry)x [y(S + T)z] } X f (T 7? ii\ x F (11 Si ? ^ + T?y y 7 2^1 1 ^^2/ 1 v** tl/ c// L\c/ / \" / J ) = 2 y {[(x Ry)*(yS z)] + [(x Ry)x(y T z)}} Similarly, (R + S) \ T = (R \ T) + (S \ T) "Either friend or colleague of a teacher of" is the same as "either friend of a teacher of or colleague of a teacher of". A somewhat curious formula is the following: R\(S*T)c(R\S)x(R\T) It holds since x[R \ (S x T)]z = ? y {(x Ry)x [y(S x T)z] } = Z y {(xRy)x[(ySz)x(yTz)}} and since a x (b xc) = (a x6) x (a xc), = z y {[(x Ry)*(yS z)] x [(x Ry)x(yT z)] } c 2,[(.T Ry)*(yS z)] x ? y [(x Ry)*(yT z)] And this last expression is [x(R\S)z] x[x(R\ T)z]. Systems Based on Material Implication 277 If x is student of a friend and colleague of z, then x is student of a friend and student of a colleague of z. The converse implication does not hold, be cause "student of a friend and colleague" requires that the friend and the colleague be identical, while "student of a friend and student of a col league" does not. (Note the last step in the proof , where S y is repeated, and observe that this step carries exactly that significance.) Similarly, (flxS) T c (R\ T) x (S \ T) The corresponding formulae with t instead of are more complicated and seldom useful; they are omitted. The relative sum is of no particular importance, but the relative product is a very useful concept. In terms of this idea, "powers" of a relation are definable : # 2 = R | JR, # 3 = R 2 | R, etc. A transitive relation, S, is distinguished by the fact that S 2 c 8, and hence S n cS. The predecessors of predecessors of predecessors ... of x are predecessors of x. This conception of the powers of a relation plays a prominent part in the analysis of serial order, and of the fundamental proper ties of the number series. By use of this and certain other concepts, the method of "mathematical induction" can be demonstrated to be com pletely deductive. 20 In the work of De Morgan and Peirce, "relative terms" were not given separate treatment. The letters by which relations were symbolized were also interpreted as relative terms by a sort of systematic ambiguity. Any relation symbol also stood for the class of entities which have that relation to something. But in the logistic development of mathematics, since that time, notably in Principia Mathematical relative terms are given the separate treatment which they -really require. The "domain" of a given relation, R that is, the class of entities which have the relation R to some thing or other-may be symbolized by D fl, which can be defined as follows: 17-04 D R = &[2y(xRy)]. Def. The domain of R is the class of x s determined by the function "For some y, x has the relation R to y". If R be "employer of ", D R will be the class of employers. The "converse domain" of fl that is, the class of things 20 See Principia, i, Bk. n, Sect. E. 21 See i, *33. The notation we use for domains and converse domains i cipia. 278 A Survey of Symbolic Logic which something or other has the relation R may be symbolized by CL R and similarly defined: 17-05 (I R = y[2,(xRy)]. Def. The converse domain of R is the class of y s determined by the function "For some x, a- has the relation R to y". If R be "employer of", d R will be the class of employees. The domain and converse domain of a relation, R, together constitute the "field "of R, C R. 17-06 C R = xi2 y [(xRy) + (yRx)]}. The field of R will be the class of all terms which stand in either place in the relation. If R be "employer of", C R is the class of all those who are either employers or employees. The elementary properties of such "relative terms" are all obvious: x n eC R = 2 y [(x n Ry) + (yRx n )} C R = D R + a R However, for the logistic development of mathematics, these properties are of the highest importance. We quote from Prirwipia Mathematical 22 " Let us ... suppose that R is the sort of relation that generates a series, say the relation of less to greater among integers. Then D R = all integers that are less than some other integer = all integers, Q R = all integers that are greater than some other integer = all integers except 0. In this case, C R = all integers that are either greater or less than some other integer = all integers .... Thus when R generates a series, C R becomes important. ..." We have now surveyed the most fundamental and important characters of the logic of relations, and we could not well proceed further without elaboration of a kind which is here inadmissible. But the reader is warned that we have no more than scratched the surface of this important topic. About 1890, Schroder could write "What a pity! To have a highly developed instrument and nothing to do with it". And he proceeded to make a beginning in the bettering of this situation by applying the logic of relatives to the logistic development of certain portions of Dedekind s theory of number. Since that time, the significance of symbolic logic has been completely demonstrated in the development of Peano s Formulaire 22 1, p. 261. Systems Based on Material Implication 279 and of Principia Mathematica. And the very head and front of this develop ment is a theory of relations far more extended and complete than any previously given. We can here adapt the prophetic words which Leibniz puts into the mouth of Philalethes: "I begin to get a very different opinion of logic from that which I formerly had. I had regarded it as a scholar s diversion, but I now see that, in the way you understand it, it is a kind of universal mathematics." VI. THE LOGIC OF Principia Mathematica We have now presented the extensions of the Boole-Schroder Algebra the Two-Valued Algebra, prepositional functions and the propositions derived from them, and the application to these of the laws of the Two- Valued Algebra, giving the calculus of propositional functions. Beyond this, we have shown in outline how it is possible, beginning with the Two- Valued Algebra as a calculus of propositions, to derive the logic of classes in a form somewhat more satisfactory than the Boole-Schroder Algebra, and the logic of relations and relative terms. In so doing, we have presented as much of that development which begins with Boole and passes through the work of Peirce to Schroder as is likely to be permanently significant. But, our purpose here being expository rather than historical, we have not followed the exact forms which that development took Instead, we have considerably modified it in the light of what symbolic logicians have learned since the publication of the work of Peirce and Schroder. Those who are interested to note in detail our divergence from the historical development will be able to do so by reference to Sections VII and VIII of Chapter I. But it seems best here to point out briefly what these alterations are that we have made. In the first place, we have interpreted S^.r, II ^r, S^(.r, y), etc., explicitly as sums or products of propositions of the form ^r n , iK-r m y n ), etc. Peirce and Schroder avoided this, in consideration of the serious theoretical difficulties. But while they did not treat II <px as an actual product, S#c as an actual sum, still the laws which they give for propositions of this type are those which result from such a treatment. There is no slightest doubt that the method by which Peirce discovered and formulated these laws is substantially the one which we have exhibited. And this explicit use of n^.r as the symbol for a product, S#r as the symbol of a sum, makes demonstration possible where otherwise a large number of assumptions must be made and, for further principles, a much more difficult and less obvious style of proof resorted to. 280 A Survey of Symbolic Logic In this part of their work, Peirce and Schroder can hardly be said to have formulated the assumptions or given the proofs. In the second place, the Boole-Schroder Algebra the general outline of which is already present in Peirce s work probably seemed to Peirce and Schroder an adequate calculus of classes (though there are indications in the paper of 1880 that Peirce felt its defects). With this system before them, they neglected the possibility of a better procedure, by beginning with the calculus of propositions and deriving the logic of classes from the laws which govern propositional functions. And although the principles which they formulate for propositional functions are as applicable to func tions of one as of two variables, and are given for one as well as for two, their interest was almost entirely in functions of two and the calculus of relatives which may be derived from such functions. The logic of classes which we have outlined is, then, something which they laid the foundation for, but did not develop. The main purposes of our exposition thus far in the chapter have been two: first, to make clear the relation of this earlier treatment of symbolic logic with the later and better treatment to be discussed in this section; and second, to present the logic of propositional functions and their deriva tives in a form somewhat simpler and more easily intelligible than it might otherwise be. The theoretically sounder and more adequate logic of Prin- cipia Mathematica is given a form which so far as propositional functions and their derivatives is concerned seems to us to obscure, by its notation, the obvious and helpful mathematical analogies, and requires a style of proof which is much less obvious. With regard to this second purpose, we disclaim any idea that the development we have given is theoretically adequate ; its chief value should be that of an introductory study, prepara tory to the more complex and difficult treatment which obviates the the oretical shortcomings. Incidentally, the exposition which has been given will serve to indicate how much we are indebted, for the recent development of our subject, to the earlier work of Peirce and Schroder. The Peirce-Schroder symbolic logic is closely related to the logic of Peano s Formulaire de Mathematiques and of Principia Mathematica. This connection is easily overlooked by the student, with the result that the sub ject of his first studies the Boole-Schroder Algebra and its applications is likely to seem quite unrelated to the topic which later interests him the logistic development of mathematics. Both the connections of these two Systems Based on Material Implication 281 and their differences are important. We shall attempt to point out both. And because, for one reason, clearness requires that we stick to a single illustration, our comparison will be between the content of preceding sections of this chapter and the mathematical logic of Book I, Principia Mathematical The Two- Valued Algebra is a calculus produced by adding to and re interpreting an algebra intended primarily to deal with the relations of classes. And it has several defects which reflect this origin. In the first place, the same logical relation is expressed, in this system, in two different ways. We have, for example, the proposition "If peg and q c r, then per", where p, q, and r are propositions. But "if . . . , then ..." is supposed to be the same relation which is expressed by c in p c q, q c r, and per. Also, "and " in " p c q and q c r " is the relation which is other wise expressed by x and so on, for the other logical relations. The system involves the use of "if . . . , then . . . ", "... and . . .", "either . . . or . . .", "... is equivalent to . . .", and "... is not equivalent to . . . ", just as any mathematical system may; yet these are exactly the relations c , x , + , = , and =H whose properties are supposed to be investigated in the system. Thus the system takes the laics of the logical relations of propositions for granted in order to prove them. Xor is this paradox removed by the fact that we can demonstrate the interchange- ability of "if . . . , then ..." and c, of ". . . and ..." and x, etc. For the very demonstration of this interchangeability takes for granted the logic of propositions; and furthermore, in the system as developed, it is impossible in most cases to give a law the completely symbolic form until it has first been proved in the form which involves the non-symbolic expression of relations. So that there is no way in which the circularity in the demonstration of the laws of propositions can be removed in this system. Another defect of the Two- Valued Algebra is the redundance of forms. The proposition p or "p is true" is symbolized by p, by p = 1, by p 4= ^ 23 Logically, as well as historically, the method of Peano s Formulaire is a sort of intermediary between the Peirce-Schroder mode of procedure and Principia. The general method of analysis and much of the notation follows that of the Formulaire. But the Formulaire is somewhat less concerned with the extreme of logical rigor, and somewhat more concerned with the detail of the various branches of mathematics. Perhaps for this reason, it lacks that detailed examination and analysis of fundamentals which is the dis tinguishing characteristic of Principia. For example, the Formulaire retains the ambiguity of the relation D (in our notation, c ): p?q may be either the class p is contained in the class q", or "the proposition p implies the proposition q". In consequence, the Formu laire contains no specific theory of propositions. 282 A Survey of Symbolic Logic etc., the negation of p or "p is false" by -p, p = 0, -p = 1, p =}= 1, etc. These various forms may, it is true, be reduced in number; p and -p may be made to do service for all their various equivalents. But these equivalents cannot be banished, for in the proofs it is necessary to make use of the fact that p = (p = 1) = (p 4= 0), -p = (p = 0) = (-p = 1), etc., in order to demonstrate the theorems. Hence this redundance is not altogether avoidable. Both these defects are removed by the procedure adopted for the calculus of propositions in Principia Mathematical Here p = 1, p = 0, etc., are not used; instead we have simply p and its negative, symbolized by ~p. And, impossible as it may seem, the logic of propositions which every mathematical system has always taken for granted is not presumed. The primitive ideas are: (1) elementary propositions, (2) elementary propositional functions, (3) assertion, (4) assertion of a prepositional func tion, (5) negation, (6) disjunction, or the logical sum; and finally, the idea of "equivalent by definition", which does not belong in the system but is merely a notation to indicate that one symbol or complex of symbols may be replaced by another. An elementary proposition is one which does not involve any variables, and an elementary propositional function is such as "not-p" where p is an undetermined elementary proposition. The idea of assertion is just what would be supposed a proposition may be asserted or merely considered. The sign h prefaces all propositions which are asserted. An asserted propositional function is such as "A is A " where A is undetermined. The disjunction of p and q is symbolized by p v q, instead of p + q. pv q means " At least one of the two propositions, p and q, is true". The postulates and definitions are as follows: #1-01 poq. = m ~pvq. Df. "p (materially) implies q" is the defined equivalent of "At least one of the two, ( p is false and q is true , is a true proposition". (The explana tion of propositions here is ours.) p^q is the same relation which we have symbolized by p c q, not its converse. (The propositions quoted will be given the number which they have in Principia. The asterisk which precedes the number will distinguish them from our propositions in earlier chapters or earlier sections of this chapter.) The logical product of p and q is symbolized by p q, or p q> 24 See Bk. i, Sect. A. Systems Based on Material Implication 283 *3-01 p.q. = - ~(~p v~ry). I)f. "p is true and g is true" is the defined equivalent of "It is false that at least one of the two, p and </, is false". This is, of course, a form of De Morgan s Theorem in our notation, (p q) = -(-/> + -(/). The (material) equivalence of p and q is symbolized by p = q or p . = . r/. #4-01 p = q . = ,p?q . q^p. Df . "p is (materially) equivalent to q" is the defined equivalent of "p (ma terially) implies q and g (materially) implies p". In our notation, this would be (p = q) = (pcq)(qcp). Note that ... == ... and . . . Df are different relations in Principia. The dots in these definitions serve as punctuation in place of parentheses and brackets. Two dots, :, takes precedence over one, as a bracket over a parenthesis, three over two, etc. In #4-01 we have only one dot after =, because the dot between p D q and q D p indicates a product : a dot, or two dots, indicating a product is always inferior to a stop indicated by the same number of dots but not indicating a product. The postulates of the system in question are as follows: *!! Anything implied by a true elementary proposition is true. Pp. ("Pp." stands for "Primitive proposition".) *1-11 When <px can be asserted, where x is a real variable, and <pxo\f/x can be asserted, where x is a real variable, then #r can be asserted, where x is a real variable. Pp. A "real variable" is such as p in -p. #1-2 \-:pvp.?.p. Pp. In our notation, (p + p} c p. *l-3 \-lq*-D.pvq. Pp. In our notation, q c (p + q). *l-4 \-mpvqmOmqvp. Pp. In our notation, (p + q) c(q + p}. *l-5 \-:p v(q vr) .3. q v (p vr). Pp. In our notation, [p + (q + r)] c [q + (p + r)]. #1-6 h! <7 ^ r . ^ : p v q . D . p v r. Pp. In our notation, (</ c r) c [Q; + (/) c Q; + r)]. Note that the sign of assertion in each of the above is followed by a 284 A Survey of Symbolic Logic sufficient number of dots to indicate that the whole of what follows is asserted. $K-l-7 If p is an elementary proposition, ~p is an elementary proposition. PP. *1-71 If p and q are elementary propositions, pvq is an elementary proposition. Pp. #1-72 If <pp and \I/p are elementary prepositional functions which take elementary propositions as arguments, <pp v \f/p is an elementary proposi- tional function. Pp. This completes the list of assumptions. The last three have to do directly with the method by which the system is developed. By *l-7, any proposition which is assumed or proved for p may also be asserted to hold for ~p, that is to say, ~p may be substituted for p or q or r, etc., in any proposition of the system. By #1-71, p v q may be substituted for p or q or r, etc. And by *1 72, if any two complexes of the foregoing symbols which make sense as " statements" can be treated in a certain way in the system, their disjunction can be similarly treated. By the use of all three of these, any combination such as p v q, p q, p 3 q, p = q, p i> q . q D p, ~p . v . p v q, ~p v ~ry, etc., etc., may be substituted for p or q or r in any assumed proposition or any theorem. Such substitution, for which no postulates would ordinarily be stated, is one of the fundamental operations by which the system is developed. Another kind of substitution which is fundamental is the substitution for any complex of symbols of its defined equivalent, where such exists. This operation is covered by the meaning assigned to "... = ... Df ". Only one other operation is used in the development of this calculus of elementary propositions the operation for which *!! and ^1-11 are assumed. If by such substitutions as have just been explained there results a complex of symbols in which the main, or asserted, relation is o , and if that part of the expression which precedes this sign is identical with a postulate or previous theorem, then that part of the expression which follows this sign may be asserted as a lemma or new theorem. In other words, a main, or asserted, sign D has, by *!! and *1-11, the significant property of "If . . . , then . . .". This property is explicitly assumed in the postulates. The main thing to be noted about this operation of inference is that it is not so much a piece of reasoning as a mechanical, or strictly mathematical, operation for which a rule has been given. No Systems Based on Material Implication 285 "mental" operation is involved except that required to recognize a previous proposition followed by the main implication sign, and to set off what follows that sign as a new assertion. The use of this operation does not, then, mean that the processes and principles of ordinary logic are tacitly presupposed as warrant for the operations which give proof. What is the significance of this assumption of the obvious in # 1 1, # 1 - 1 1, *l-7, #1-71, and *l-72? Precisely this: these postulates explicitly assume so much of the logical operations as is necessary to develop the system, and beyond this the logic of propositions simply is not assumed. To illustrate this fact, it will be well to consider carefully an exemplary proof or two. #2-01 \-ipD~p.o.~p Dem. Taut - M-: ~p v ~p . D . ~p (1) 01)] Vip?~p.?.~p "Taut" is the abbreviation for the Principle of Tautology, #1-2 above. ~plp indicates that ~p is substituted in this postulate for p } giving (1). This operation is valid by #1-7. Then by the definition #1-01, above, p D ~/j is substituted for its defined equivalent, ~p v ~p, and the proof is complete. *2-05 \-mmqDrm3ipoqm3mp3r Dem. Sum - M-: q => r . D : ~p v q . D . ~p v r (1) [(1) . O1-01)] \-: . qor .D: pDq .? . p?r Here "Sum" refers to *l-6, above. And (1) is what *!(> becomes when ~p is substituted for p. Then, by #1-01, p^q and pir are substituted for their defined equivalents, ~pvq and ~pvr, in (1), and the resulting expression is the theorem to be proved. The next proof illustrates the use of *1 1 and #1-11. *2 06 \-l ."3 m"3l -zr ."3 Dr Dem. p, Dr.D:pDg.D.pDr:.3:p3g .3Sg DrD.p3r (1) [#2 -05] hs 3 r . D : p 3 # . s . p a r (2) [(1) . (2) . *1-11] h: - />3r/.D: q?r .0. por 286 A Survey of Symbolic Logic "Comm " is *2-04, previously proved, which is p . D . q D r : D : q D . p D r. When, in this theorem, q D r is substituted for p, p D q for q, and p D r for r, it becomes the long expression (1). Such substitutions are valid by *l-7, #1-71, and the definition ^1-01: if p is a proposition, ~p is a proposition; if ~p and q are propositions, ~p v q is a proposition; and p D ry is the defined equivalent of ~p v q. Thus p D q can be substituted for p. If we replace the dots by parentheses, etc., (1) becomes h { (q D r) 3 [(p D </) D (/> D r)] } 3 { (p D ry) D [(ry D r) D (p D r)] } But, as (2) states, what here precedes the main implication sign is identical with a previous theorem, *2-05. Hence, by #1-11, what follows this main implication sign the theorem to be proved can be asserted. Further proofs would, naturally, be more complicated, but they involve no principle not exemplified in the above. These three operations sub stitutions according to *l-7, *1-71, and *l-72; substitution of defined equivalents; and "inference" according to #1-1 and #1-11 are the only processes which ever enter into any demonstration in the logic of Principia. The result is that this development avoids the paradox of taking the logic of propositions for granted in order to prove it. Nothing of the sort is assumed except these explicitly stated postulates whose use we have ob served. And it results from this mode of development that the system is completely symbolic, except for a few postulates, #1 1, #1-7, etc., involving no further use of "if . . . , then . . .", "either ... or ...","... and " etc j \^ M . We have now seen that the calculus of propositions in Principia Mathe- matica avoids both the defects of the Two-Valued Algebra. The further comparison of the two systems can be made in a sentence : Except for the absence, in the logic of Principia, of the redundance of forms, p, p = 1, p =|= 0, etc., etc., and the absence of the entities and 1, the two systems are identical. Any theorem of this part of Principia can be translated into a valid theorem of the Two-Valued Algebra, and any theorem of the Two-Valued Algebra not involving and 1 otherwise than as {=0} or { = 1 J can be translated into a valid theorem of Principia. In fact, the qualification is not particularly significant, because any use of and 1 in the Two-Valued Algebra reduces to their use as { = } and { = 1 ) . For as a term of a sum, and 1 as a factor, immediately disappear, while the presence of as a factor and the presence of 1 in a sum can always be other wise expressed. But p = is -p, and p = 1 is p. Hence the two systems Systems Based on Material Implication 287 are simply identical so far as the logical significance of the propositions they contain is concerned. 25 The comparison of our treatment of propositional functions with the same topic in Principia is not quite so simple. 28 In the first place, there is, in Principia, the "theory of types," which concerns the range of significance of functions. But we shall omit con sideration of this. Then, there are the differences of notation. Where we write U<px, or H x (px, Principia has (or) . <px\ and where we write S#r, or 2 x <px, Principia has (Kx) . <px. A further and more important difference may be made clear by citing the assumptions of Principia. *9-01 -{(.?) .?&}. = . (3.r) . ~#r. Df. *9-02 ~{(3a:) .?&}. = . fa) . ~<px. Df. *9-03 (x) . <px .vp : = . (x) . <px vp. Df. 25 This may be proved by noting that, properly translated, the postulates of each system are contained amongst the propositions of the other. Of the postulates in Principia, rendered in our notation: ^1-01 is (peg) = (-p + q), which is contained in our theorem 9-3. ^1 -2 is (p + p) cp, which is a consequence of our theorems 2-2 and 5-33. sfcl -3 is, p c (p + q), which is our theorem 5-21. ^1 -4 is (p + q) c(q + p), which follows from our theorem 4-3, by 2-2. ^1-5 is, p + (</ + r) cq + (p + ?), which is a consequence of our theorems 4-3 and 4-4, by 2-2. ^el-6 is (q cr) c [(p + q) c(p + r)], which is a consequence of our theorem 5-31, by 2-2. The remaining (non-symbolic) postulates are tacitly assumed in our system. Of our postulates, 1-1-1-9 in Chap, n and 9-01 in Chap, iv: 1 is a consequence of ^1-7 and ^1-71 in Principia. 2 is -^4 -24 in Principia. 3 is ^-4-3 in Principia. 4 is ^2-3 in Principia. 5 is equivalent to "If x = 0, then a x = 0", hence to -x c -(a x), which is a consequence of *3-27 in Principia, by *2-16. 1-61, in the form -(x -a) c (x a = x), is a consequence of -#-4-71 and ^-4-61 in Principia, by ^4-01 and *3-26. 1-62, in the form [(y a = y)(y -a = y)]c-y, is a consequence of #4-71, *5-16, and ^2-21 in Principia. 1-7 is equivalent to [(a; = 1)Q/ = 0)] c (x = -?/), hence to (x -y) c (x = -y), which is an immediate consequence of ^-5-1 in Principia. 1-8 is ^K-4-57 in Principia. 1-9 is ^4-71 in Principia. 9-01 is equivalent to (q = 1) c [p = (p = q)}, hence to q c [p = (p = q)], which is an immediate consequence of -^5-501 in Principia. 26 See Principia, i, 15-21. 288 A Survey of Symbolic Logic In this last, note the difference in the scope of the "quantifier" (x) on the two sides. If the dots be replaced by parentheses, *9 03 will be {[(x) . ^r] vp] = {(x) . [tpxyp]} A similar difference in the scope of (x) or (3.r) on the two sides characterizes each of the further definitions. 27 *9-04 p . v . (x) . <px : = . (x) . p v <px. Df. *9 05 (3.r) . <px . v . p : = . (3.r) . <px v p. Df . #9 -OG p *** ("3.x) . <px : = . (3z) . p v <px. Df. *9-07 (.r) . <px mv m (3#) . ^ : = : (#) : (3#) . ^ v ^. Df. *9 OS (3y) . ^ . v . (.I-) . ^r : = : (.T) : (3y) . $y v ^.r . Df . Besides these definitions, there are four postulates (in addition to those which underlie the calculus of elementary propositions). *9 1 h: <?x . D . (3 z) . <pz. Pp. *9 1 1 hs <f>x v ^?/ . D . (3 2) . <p Z . Pp. *9- 12 What is implied by a true premiss is true. Pp. #9-13 In any assertion containing a real variable, this real variable may be turned into an apparent variable for which all possible values are asserted to satisfy the function in question. Pp. By our method, every one of these assumptions, except ^9-12, is a proved proposition. In our notation, #9-01 is -H<px = S -<px, which is our theorem 10-1, with -<px substituted for <px. *9-02 is -2^.i- = n-^.r, which is our theorem 10-12, with -<?x substi tuted for <px. *9-03 is tt<px + P = n x (^c + P), which is our theorem 10-32. *9-04 is P + n^r = II X (P+ <px), which is 10-33. *9-05 is S^ + P = 2 x (^-c + P), which is 10-3. *9-06 is P+ S^r - 2 X (P+ <px), which is 10-31. *9-07 is U<px + Z^y = U x 2 y (<px + $y), which is contained in 12-5, *9-08 is 2ty+tt<px = U x 2 y (ty + ^.r), which is also contained in 12-5. The postulates require explanation. The authors of Principia use <py, <pz, etc., to represent values of the function <px. In other words, where we have written <px n they simply change the letter. This is a valid con- "Ibid., i, 135-38. Systems Based on Material Implication 289 vention (though it often renders proofs confusing) because the range of <px is determined by <p, not by x, and x is conventions aside indifferent. z in <pz, where we should write <px n , is called a "real variable", x in (x) . <px and (3or) . <px, an "apparent variable". With this explanation, it is clear that: *9-l is <px n c2<px, which is 10-21. #9-11 is <px m + <px n c2<px, which is an immediate consequence of 10-21, by 5-33. *9-13 is "If whatever value of x, in <px, x n may be, <px n , then n^.r," and this implication is contained in the equivalence stated by 10-23. These principles which are assumed in Principia Mathematica are suf ficient to give all further propositions concerning functions of one variable, without assuming (x) . <*r to be the product of <px^ <px 2 , etc. (or <py, <pz, etc.), (3a-) . <px to be the sum of <px lf <f>x 2 , etc. These are simply assumed as new primitive ideas, (x) . <?x meaning " <px for all values of x", (3or) . <px meaning " <px for some values of a:". This procedure obviates all questions about the number of values of x in <px which troubled us and secures the universality of theorems involving prepositional functions without any discussion or convention covering the cases in which the values of the vari able are infinite in number. The proofs in Principia reflect this difference of method. They are, in general, what ours might have been if we had based all further proofs directly upon 10-23 and the propositions con necting 2<f>x + P with 2 x (<px + P), etc., not making any use, after 10-23, of the properties of TLtpx as a product, or of 2<^.r as a sum. The theory of functions of two variables, in Principia Mathematica, requires two further assumptions: *11 -01 (x, y) . <p(x, y) . = : (x) : (y) . <p( x , y). Df. *11 -03 (3z, y) . <p(x, y) . = : (3.x) : (30) . <p( x , y). Df. These are identically our assumptions: 11-06 n x , y <p(x, y) == H x ll v <f>(x, y), and 11-05 2 XlV <p(x,y) = S x S^fey). The difference between the treatment of propositional functions which we have given and the treatment in Principia is not necessarily correlated with the difference between our treatment of propositions and theirs. The method by which we have developed the theory of propositional functions 20 290 A Survey of Symbolic Logic might exactly as well have been based upon the calculus of elementary propositions in Principia as upon the Two-Valued Algebra. A few minor alterations would be sufficient for this change. The different procedure for propositional functions, in the tw r o cases, is a difference to be adjudged independently, without necessary reference to the defects of the Two- Valued Algebra which have been pointed out. Beyond the important differences w r hich have been mentioned, there are minor and trivial divergences between the two systems, due to the different use of notation. Neglecting these, we may say that the two methods give the same results, with the following exceptions: 1. There are certain complexities in Principia due to the theory of types. 2. In Principia the conditions of significance are explicitly investigated. 3. Principia contains a theory of "descriptions", account of which is here omitted. But none of these exceptions is a necessary difference. They are due to the more elementary character of our presentation of the subject. We may, then, say loosely that the two methods give identical results. The calculus of classes and of relations which we have outlined in the preceding sections bear a similar relation to the logic of classes and of relations in Principia; that is to say, there is much more detail and com plexity of theory in Principia, but so far as our exposition goes, the two are roughly the same. And here there is no important difference of method. It should now be clear how the logic of Principia is related to the logic we have presented, following in the main the methods of Peirce and Schroder. There is much difference of method, and, especially in the case of the cal culus of propositions, this difference is in favor of Principia. And in Principia there is much more of theoretical rigor and consequent complexity: also there are important extensions, especially in the theory of "descrip tions" and the logic of relatives. But so far as the logic which we have expounded goes, the two methods give roughly identical results- When we remember the date of the work of Peirce and Schroder, it becomes clear what is our debt to them for the better developments which have since been made. CHAPTER V THE SYSTEM OF STRICT IMPLICATION 1 The systems discussed in the last chapter were all based upon material implication, p cq meaning exactly "The statement, * p is true and q false/ is a false statement". We have already called attention to the fact that this is not the usual meaning of "implies". Its divergence from the "implies" of ordinary inference is exhibited in such theorems as "A false proposition implies any proposition", and "A true proposition is implied by any proposition". 2 The present chapter intends to present, in outline, a calculus of propo sitions which is based upon an entirely different meaning of " implies "- one more in accord with the customary uses of that relation in inference and proof. We shall call it the system of Strict Implication. And we shall refer to Material Implication, meaning either the Two-Valued Algebra or the calculus of propositions as it appears in Principia Mathematica, since the logical import of these two systems is identical. It will appear that Strict Implication is neither a calculus of extensions, like Material Impli cation and the Boole-Schroder Algebra, nor a calculus of intensions, like the unsuccessful systems of Lambert and Castillon. It includes relations of both types, but distinguishes them and shows their connections. Strict Implication contains Material Implication, as it appears in Principia Mathematica, as a partial-system, and it contains also a supplementary partial-system the relations of which are those of intension. The numerous questions concerning the exact significance of implication, and the ordinary or "proper" meaning of "implies", will be discussed in Section V. It will be indicated how Strict Implication, by an extension to proposi- tional functions, gives a calculus of classes and class-concepts which exhibits their relations both in extension and in intension. In this, it provides the 1 Various studies toward this system have appeared in Mind and the Journal of Phi losophy (see Bibliography). But the complete system has not previously been printed. We here correct, also, certain errors of these earlier papers, most notably with reference to triadic "strict" relations. 2 For further illustrations, see Chap, n, Sect, i, and Lewis, "Interesting Theorems in Symbolic Logic," Jour. Philos., Psych., etc. x (1913), p. 239. 291 292 A Survey of Symbolic Logic calculus of intensions, so often attempted before, so far as such a calculus is possible at all. I. PRIMITIVE IDEAS, PRIMITIVE PROPOSITIONS, AND IMMEDIATE CONSE QUENCES The fundamental ideas of the system are similar to those of MacColl s Symbolic Logic and its Applications. They are as follows: 1. Propositions: p, q, r, etc. 2. Negation: -p, meaning "p is false". 3. Impossibility: ~p, meaning "p is impossible", or "It is impossible that p be true". 3 4. The logical product: p xg or p q, meaning "p and q both", or "p is true and q is true". 5. Equivalence: p = q, the defining relation. Systems previously developed, except MacColl s, have only two truth- values, "true" and "false". The addition of the idea of impossibility gives us five truth- values, all of which are familiar logical ideas: (1) p, "pis true". (2) -p, "pis false". (3) ~p, "p is impossible". (4) p, "It is false that p is impossible" i. e., "p is possible". (5) p, "It is impossible that p be false" i. e., "p is necessarily true". Strictly, the last two should be written -(~p) and -(-p): the parentheses are regularly omitted for typographical reasons. The reader need be at no pains to grasp -~p and p as simple ideas: it is sufficient to understand -p and ~p, and to remember that each such prefix affects the letter as already modified by those nearer it. It should be noted that there are also more complex truth-values. p is equivalent to p, as will be shown, but - ~ -p, p, p, etc., are irreducible. We shall have occasion to make use of only one of these, p, " It is false that it is impossible that p be true" i. e., "p is possibly false". 4 , Each one of these complex truth-values is a distinct and recognizable idea, though they are seldom needed in logic or in mathematics. 3 We here use a symbol, ~, which appears in Prindpia Mathematica with a different meaning. The excuse for this is its typographical convenience. 4 MacColl uses a single symbol for -~p, "p is possibly true" and p, "p is possibly false". The System of Strict Implication 293 The dyadic relations of propositions can be defined in terms of these truth- values and the logical product, p q? 1-01 Consistency. poq = -~(pq}. Def. ~(pq), "It is impossible that p and q both be true" would be "p and q are inconsistent". Hence -~(pq), "It is possible that p and q both be true", represents "p and q are consistent". 1-02 Strict Implication. p-*q = ~(p-q)- Def. 1-03 Material Implication. pcq = -(p-q). Def. 1-04 Strict Logical Sum. p *q = ~(-p-r/). Def. 1-05 Material Logical Sum. p + q = -(-p -q)- Def. 1-06 Strict Equivalence, (p = q) = (p * q) (q -* p) . Def. We here define the defining relation itself, because by this procedure we establish the connection between strict equivalence and strict implication. Also, this definition makes it possible to deduce expressions of the type, p = q something which could not otherwise be done. 5 But p = q re mains a primitive idea as the idea that one set of symbols may be replaced by another. 1 07 Material Equivalence, (p = q) = (p c q) (q c p). Def. These eight relations the seven defined above and the primitive rela tion, p q divide into two sets, p q, p c q, p + q, and p = q are the relations which figure in any calculus of Material Implication. We shall refer to them as the "material relations", p o q, p -i q, p*q, and p = q involve the idea of impossibility, and do not belong to systems of Material Impli cation. These may be called the " strict relations ". We may anticipate a little and exhibit the analogy of these two sets, which results from the theorem ~(pq) = -(pti shortly to be proved. Strict relations : Material relations : piq =-(pO-q) pcq = -(p -q) pAq = _(_ p o-<7) P+<1 = -(-P-0) (p = q ) = -(po-q) x-(qo-p) (p = q) = ~(p -tf) *-( c l~P"> The "circularity" here belongs inevitably to logic. No mathematician hesitates to prove the equivalence of two propositions by showing that " If theorem A, then theorem B, and if theorem B, then theorem A". But to do this he must already know that a reciprc "if . . . then . . ." relation is equivalent to an equivalence. And the italicized to" represents a relation which must be assumed. 294 A Survey of Symbolic Logic The reader will, very likely, have some difficulty in distinguishing in meaning p -J q from p c q, p A q from p + q. The above comparison may be of assist ance in this connection, since it translates these relations in terms of p o q and p q. We shall be in no danger of confusing p o q, "p is consistent with g," with p q, "p and q are both true". Both p A q and p + q would be read "Either p or q". But p A q denotes a necessary connection; p + q a merely factual one. Let p represent " To day is Monday", and q, "2 + 2 = 4:". Then p+q is true but p A q is false. In point of fact, at least one of the two propositions, "Today is Monday" and "2 + 2 = 4", is true; but there is no necessary connection between them. "Either . . . or . . ." is ambiguous in this respect. Ask the members of any company whether the proposition "Either today is Monday or 2 + 2 = 4" is true, and they will disagree. Some will confine "Either ... or ..." to the p*q meaning, others will make it include the p + q meaning; few, or none, will make the necessary distinction. Similarly, the difference between p = q and p = q is that p = q denotes an equivalence of logical import or meaning, while p = q denotes simply an equivalence of truth-value. As was shown in Chapter II, p = q may be accurately rendered "p and q are both true or both false". Here again, the strict relation, p = q, symbolizes a necessary connection; the material relation, p = g, a merely factual one. The postulates of the system are as follows : 1-1 p q-i q p If p and q are both true, then q and p are both true. 1-2 q p -I p If q and p are both true, then p is true. 1- 3 p -*p p If p is true, then p is true and p is true. 1-4 p(qr)4q(pr) If p is true and q and r are both true, then q is true and p and r are both true. 1-5 p-i-(-p) If p is true, then it is false that p is false. 1-6 (p-tq)(q-lr)-l(p-lr) If p strictly implies q and q strictly implies r, then p strictly implies r. The System of Strict Implication 295 1 7 ~p-i-p If it is impossible that p be true, then p is false. 1-8 p -J q = ~q -J ~p "p strictly implies q" is equivalent to " q is impossible strictly im plies p is impossible ". The first six of these present no novelty except the relation -J . They do not, so far, distinguish this system from Material Implication. But, as we shall see shortly, the postulates 1 7 and 1-8 are principles of trans formation; they operate upon the other postulates, and on themselves, and thus introduce the distinguishing characteristics of the system. Postu late 1 -7 is obvious enough. Postulate 1 -8 is equivalent to the pair, (p-iq) -i (- ~p -J - ~q) If p implies q, then p is possible implies q is possible . (~p -J ~q) -J (-p -J -q) If p is impossible implies q is impossible , then ( p is false implies q is false . These two propositions are more "self-evident" than the postulate, but they express exactly the same relations. (To eliminate parentheses, as far as possible, we make the convention that the sign =, unless in parentheses, takes precedence over any other relation ; that -1 and c take precedence over A , + , o , and x ; that A and + take precedence over o and x ; and that -J takes precedence over c . Thus pq + -p -q -ipcq is [(p q) + (-p -</)] -* (p c q) and p c q r = (p c q)(p c r) is [pc.(q r)] = [(p c q)(p c r)] However, where there is a possibility of confusion, we shall put in the parentheses.) The operations by which theorems are to be derived from the postulates are three: 1. Substitution. Any proposition may be substituted for p or q or r, etc. If p is a proposition, -p and ~p are propositions. If p and q are propositions, p q is a proposition. Also, of any pair of expressions related by = , either may be substituted for the other. 2. Inference. If p is asserted and p -J q is asserted, then q may be asserted. (Note that this operation is not assumed for material impli cation, p c q.) 3. Production It p and q are separately asserted, p q may be asserted. These are the only operations made use of in proof. 296 A Survey of Symbolic Logic In order to make clearer the nature of the strict relations, and particu larly strict implication, we shall wish to derive from the postulates their correlates in terms of strict relations. This can be done by the use of postulate 1 8 and its consequences, for by 1-8 a relation of two material relations can be transformed into a relation of the corresponding strict relations. But as a preliminary to exhibiting this analogy, we must prove a number of simple but fundamental theorems. These working principles will constitute the remainder of this section. The first theorem will be proved in full and the proof explained. The conventions exemplified in this proof are used throughout. 2-1 pq-tp 1-6 [pq/p; qp/q; p/r}: 1-1 xl-2-i (p q*p) This proof may be read: "Proposition 1-6, when p q is substituted for p, qp for q, and p for r, states that propositions 1-1 and 1-2 together imply (P q * P) " The number of the proposition which states any line of proof is given at the beginning of the line. Next, in braces, is indication of any substitutions to be made, "p q/p" indicates that p q is to be substituted, in the proposition cited, for p; "p+ q/r" would indicate that p+ q was to be substituted for r, etc. Suppose we take proposition 1 6, which is and make the substitutions indicated by {p q/p; qp/p; p/r}. We then get (pq-lqp)(qp-lp) H (pqlp). This is the expression which follows the brace in the above proof. But since p q -l q p is 1-1, and q p -J p is 1-2, we write 1-1 x 1 2 instead of (p q-iqp)(qplp). This calls attention to the fact that what precedes the main implication sign is the product of two previous propositions. Since 1-1 and 1-2 are separately asserted, their product may be asserted; and since this product may be asserted, what it implies the theorem to be proved may be asserted. The advantage of this way of writing the proofs is its extreme brevity. Yet anyone who wishes to reconstruct the demon stration finds here everything essential. 2-11 (p = q)4(p4q) 2-1 {p-lq/p; q-ip/q}: (p * q) (q * p) 4 (p * q) 1-06: (p = q) = (p The System of Strict Implication 297 2-12 (p = (/HfeHp) Similar proof, 1-2 instead of 2-1. 2-2 (p-i q) -J (~g -J ~p) 1-06: 1-8 = [(p4q)4(~q4~p)}[(~q*~P}*(P*<l)} ( l ) 2-1: (1) H Q.E.D. In this last proof, we introduce further abbreviations of proof as follows: (1), or (2), etc., is placed after a lemma which has been established, and thereafter in the same proof we write (1), or (2), etc., instead of that lemma. Also, we shall frequently write "Q.E.D." in the last line of proof instead of repeating the theorem to be proved. In the first line of this proof, the substitutions which it is necessary to make in order to get 1 -8 = [(p * q) * (~q -* ~p)][(~<7 H ~p) -J (P < </)] are not indicated because they are obvious. And in the second line, state ment of the required substitutions is omitted for the same reason. Such abbreviations will be used frequently in later proofs. Theorem 2-2 is one of the implications contained in postulate 1-S. By the definition, 1-6, any strict equivalence may be replaced by a pair of strict implications. By postulate 1-2 and theorem 2-1, either of these implications may be taken separately. 2-21 (~q*~p)4(p4q) 1 2 : [(1) in proof of 2 2] -J Q.E.D. This is the other implication contained in postulate 1-8. 2-3 (-P * q) * (~q * P) 1-1 {-q/p , -p/q}: -q-p-*-p-q 2 .2 {-g -p/p; -p -q/q} : (1) -J [~(-/> -<?) -* ~H "rfl 1-02: (2) = Q.E.D. 2-4 pip 1-2 {p/q}: pp-lp 1-G: l-3x(l)-{ Q.E.D. 2-5 -(-p)*p 2--i {-p/p}: -p*-p 2-3 {-p/q}: (1) -I Q.E.D. 2-51 -(-p} =p 1-06: 2-5x1-5 = Q.E.D. 298 A Survey of Symbolic Logic 2-6 (-p -i -g) -J (g -J p) 2-3 {-q/q}: (-p -J -g) -i [-(-q) H p] (1) 2-51: (1) = Q.E.D. 2-61 (p -j -g) -i ( fy -j -p) 2-6 {-pip}: K-p) -* -gM (g < -P) (1) 2-51: (1) = Q.E.D. 2-62 (p q) -I (-g * -p) 2-61 {-q/q}: [p -i -(-g)] -J (-g H -p) (1) 2-51: (1) = Q.E.D. 2-6J (png) = H-t-p) 1-06: 2-62x2-6 = Q.E.D. 2-64 (p*-q) = (q*-p) 1-06: 2-61x2-3 = Q.E.D. Theorems 2-3, 2-6, 2-61, and 2-62 are the four forms of the familiar principle that an implication is converted by changing the sign of both terms. 2-7 (~p4~q}4(-p4-q) 2-21 [plq; q/p}: (~p -J ~g) -j (q * p ) (1) 2-62 {p/q; q/p}: (q -J p) H (-p -t -q) (2) 1-6: (1) x (2) H Q.E.D. 2-71 (-p -J -q) -i (~p -J ~ q ) 2.6: (-p -i -?) H (g p) (1) 2-2 {^/p; p/gj: (g S p) -i (~jM ~g) (2) 1-6: (l)x(2)^Q.E.D. (-p-t-q) = (~p*~q) 1-06: 2-71 x2-7 = Q.E.D. 2-7 {-p/p; -g/g} : (~ -p -J ~ -g) -J [-(-p) -J -(-g)] (1) 2-51: (1) = Q.E.D. 2-73 (p4q)-i(~-p-i~- q ) 2-71 {-p/p , -q/q} : [-(-p) -i -(-g)] 4 (- -p s - -g) (1) 2-51: (1) = Q.E.D. 2-7J1 (p-ig) = (~-p^~-g) 1-06: 2-73x2-72 = Q.E.D. 2-74 (p^g)H(-^p^-^) 2-62 {-g/p; ~p/g} : (~g ^ -p) H (- ^p -i - ^g) (1) 1-6: 2-2x(l)^ Q.E.D. The System of Strict Implication 299 2-75 (- ~p -i - ~g) -i (p H ry) 2-6 {~p/p; ~q/q] : (- ~p -J - ~q) -J (~g -I ~p) (1) 1-6: (1) x2-21-jQ.E.D. 2-76 (p-Jg) = (-T !--</) 1-06: 2-74x2-75 - Q.E.D. 2-77 (p -i g) = (- ~p -i - ~g) - (~ -p -i ~ -g) = (-g -{ -p) = (~g -I ~p) 2-76 x2-731 x2-G3 x2-712 = Q.E.D. "p implies g" is equivalent to " p is possible implies q is possible " is equivalent to " p is necessary implies q is necessary " is equivalent to "q is false implies p is false " is equivalent to " g is impossible implies p is impossible ". 2-6-2-77 are various principles for transforming a strict implication. These are all summed up in 2 77. The importance of this theorem will be illustrated shortly. 2-8 pq = qp 1-1 {g/p; pfq}: q p -I p q (1) 1-06: 1-1 x(l) - Q.E.D. 2-81 p = pp 1-2 {plq}: pplp (1) 1-06: 1-3 x(l) = Q.E.D. 2-9 p(qr) = q(p r) 1-4 {g/p; plq}: q(p r) -i p(q r) (1) 1-06: 1-4 x(l) = Q.E.D. 2-91 p(qr) = (p q)r 2-8: p(qr) = p(r q) 2-9: p(rq) = r(p q) 2-8: r(pq) = (p q)r The above theorems constitute a preliminary set, sufficient to give briefly most further proofs. II. STRICT RELATIONS AND MATERIAL RELATIONS We proceed now to exhibit a certain analogy between strict relations and material relations; between truths and falsities on the one hand and necessities, possibilities, and impossibilities on the other. This analogy runs all through the system: it is exemplified by 2-77. 300 A Survey of Symbolic Logic l-l pq-iqp 3-llpOq-iqOp If p and q are both true, then q If p and q are consistent, then q and p are both true. and p are consistent. 1-2 q pip 3-12 qop*-~p If q and p are both true, then p It q and p are consistent, then is true. it is possible that p be true. 1-3 p-tpp 3-13 -~p 4 pop If p is true, then p and p are If it is possible that p be true, both true. then p is consistent with itself. 1-4 p(qr)4q(pr) 3-14 p o (q r) 4 q o (p r) The correspondence exhibited in the last line seems incomplete. But we should note with care that while p(q r) = q(p r) = (p q)r and any one of these may be read " p, q, and r are all true", po(qor) is not "p, q, and r are all consistent", p o (q or) means "p is consistent with the proposition q is consistent with r ". Let p = "Today is Tues day"; q = "Today is Thursday"; r = "Tomorrow is Friday". Then qor is true. And it happens to be Tuesday, so p is true. Since p and q or are both true in this case, they must be consistent: p o (q or) is true. But "p, q, and r are all consistent" is false. "Today is Tuesday" is incon sistent with "Today is Thursday" and with "Tomorrow is Friday". Suppose we represent "p, q, and r are all consistent" by p o q o r. Then as a fact, p o q o r will not be equivalent to p o (q or). Instead, we shall have p o q or = p o (qr) = q o (p r) = (p q) or "p, q, and r are all consistent" is equivalent to " p is consistent with the proposition q and r are both true ", etc. We may, then, add two new definitions: 3-01 pqr = p(qr). Def. 3 - 02 poqor = po(qr). Def. 3-02 is typical of triadic, or polyadic, strict relations: when parentheses are introduced into them, the relation inside the parentheses degenerates into the corresponding material relation. In terms of the new notation of 3-01 and 3-02, the last line of the above table would be p q r -i q p r poqorlqopor which exhibits the analogy more clearly. The System of Strict Implication 301 We must now prove the theorems in the right-hand column of the table 3-11 poq-iqop 2-74 Iqp/p , qp/q}: I 1 -I [- ~(P q) -I - ~(q p}} (1) 1-01: (1) = Q.E.D. 3-12 qop-l-~p 2-74 (qp/p; p/q}: l-2*[- ~(qp) *- ~p] (1) 1-01: (1) = Q.E.D. 3-13 p H p op 2-74 {pp/p}: l-3-J[-~iM-~(Pp)] (1) 1.01: (1) = Q.E.D. 3-14 p o(qr) -lqo(pr) 2-74 [p(qr)/p-, q(pr)/q}: 1 -4 -I - ~[p(r/ r)] -J - ~[?(p r)] (1) 1.01: (1) = Q.E.D. (In the above proof, the whole of what 1 4 is stated to imply should be enclosed in a brace. But in such cases, since no confusion will be oc casioned thereby, we shall hereafter omit the brace.) 3-15 po (q r) = (pq) or = qo (p r) 2-76: 2-9H-~[p(<7r)] = - ~[q(P r)] (1) 2-76: 2-91-J-~[p(r/r)] - - ~[(p q)r] (2) 1-01: (2)x(l) = Q.E.D. An exactly similar analogy holds between the material logical sum, p + q, and the strict logical sum, p A q. 3-21 p + q-iq + p 3-31 p*(j-lqAp "At least one of the two, p and "Necessarily either p or </" im- q, is true" implies "At least one plies "Necessarily either q or p". of the two, q and p, is true". 3-22 p*p + q 3-32 - -p -J p A q If p is true, then at least one of If p is necessarily true, then the two, p and q, is true. necessarily either p or q is true. 3-23 p + p + p 3-33 p*p4~-p If at least one of the two, p and If necessarily either p is true or p, is true, then p is true. p is true, then p is necessarily true. 3-24 p+(q + r) 4q+(p + r) 3-34 p A (0 + r) -J ? A (p + r) As before, the analogy in the last line seems incomplete, and as before, it really is complete. And the explanation is similar, p + (7 + r) and 302 A Survey of Symbolic Logic q + (p + r) both mean "At least one of the three, p, q, and r, is true". But p A (q A r) would not mean " One of the three, p, q, and r, is of necessity true". Instead, it would mean "One of the two propositions, p and necessarily either q or r\ is necessarily true". To distinguish p*(q + r) from p A (q A r) is rather difficult, and an illustration just now, before we have discussed the case of implication, would probably confuse the reader. We shall be content to appeal to his intuition to confirm the fact that "Necessarily one of the three, p, q, and r, is true" is equivalent to "Neces sarily either p is true or one of the two, q and r, is true" and this last is p A (q + r). If we chose to make definitions here, similar to 3-01 and 3-02, they would be p + q + r = p + (q + r) and p^qAr = p A (q + r) Proof of the theorems in the above table is as follows : 3-21 p + q-iq + p 1-1 {-q/p; -p/q}: -q-pl-p-q (1) 2-62: (l)*-(-p- q )i-(- q -p) (2) 1-05: (2) = Q.E.D. 3 - 22 p-tp + q Similar proof, using 1 -2 in place of 1-1. 3 - 2 3 p + p-ip Similar proof, using 1 3. 3 - 24 p + (q + r) -i q + (p + r) 1-4 {-q/p; -p/q; -r/r}: -q(-p -r) -J -p(-q -r) (1) 2-62: (1) i-[-p(-q- r )] -j -[- g (- p - r) ] (2) 2-51: (2) = -{-p-[-(- q -r)]} * -{-q -[-(-p - r )]} (3) 1 - 05 : (3) = p + -(-q -r) -J q + -(-p -r) (4) 1-05: (4) = Q.E.D. 3 - 25 p + (q + r) = (p + q) + r = q + (p + r) Similar proof, using 2-9 and 2-91, and 1-06. 3-31 p A g -J q A p 1-1 {-q/p; -p/q}: -q-pi-p-q (1) 2-2: (l)4~(- p -q)4~(- q -p) (2) 1-04: (2) = Q.E.D. 3 - 32 ~ -p H p A q Similar proof, using 1-2 in place of 1-1. The System of Strict Implication 303 3 3 3 p A p -j p Similar proof, using 1-3. 3 - 34 p A (q + r) -J q A (p + ?) 1-4 {-q/p; -p/q; -r/r}: -q(-p -r) -J -p(-q -r) (1) 2 - 2 : (1) -I ~[-p(-q -r)} -J ~[-q(-p -r)} (2) 2-51: (2) - H-p-hH-r)]} H-H+(-p-r)ll (3) 1 - 04 : (3) = p A -(- fy - r ) ., q A -(-p _ r) (4) 1-05: (4) = Q.E.D. 3 - 35 p A (q + r) = (p + q) A r = ry A (p + /) Similar proof, using 2-9 and 2-91, and 1-06. Again, an exactly similar analogy holds between material implication, peg, and strict implication, p H q. 3-41 (pcq)-t(-qc-p) If p materially implies g, then q is false materially implies ( p is false . 3-42 -p-*(pcq) If p is false, then p materially 2-62 (p -I q) -J (-q -I -p) If 2? strictly implies g, then * q is false strictly implies p is false . implies any proposition, q. 3-43 (pc-p)-i-p If p materially implies its own negation, then p is false. 3-44 ccr]^[c(cr)] 3-52 ~p-l(p-l0) If p is impossible (not self-con sistent, absurd), then p strictly im plies any proposition, q. 3-53 (p-*-p)4~p If p strictly implies its own nega tion, then p is impossible (not self- consistent, absurd). 3-54 [-t(cr)]4[*(pcr)} The comparison of the last line presents peculiarities similar to those noted in previous tables. The significance of 3-54 is a matter which can be better discussed when we have derived other equivalents of p -J (q cr). The matter will be taken up in detail further on. The theorems of this last table, like those in previous tables, are got by transforming the postulates 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, and 1-4. In consideration of the importance of this comparison of the two kinds of implication, we may add certain further theorems which are consequences of the above. 3-45 p-i(qcp) 3-55 ~-p-l(</-p) If p is true, then every proposi- If p is necessarily true, then p is tion, q, materially implies p. strictly implied by any proposi tion, q. 304 A Survey of Symbolic Logic 3-46 (-pep) -ip 3-56 (-pipH~-p If p is materially implied by its If p is strictly implied by its own own denial, then p is true. denial, then p is necessarily true. 3-47 -(pcq)-ip 3-57 -(p-ig)-i-~p If p does not materially imply If p does not strictly imply any any proposition, q, then p is true. proposition, q, then p is possible (self-consistent) . 3-48 -(pcq)4-q 3-58 -(p * q) -* q If p does not materially imply q, If p does not strictly imply g, then q is false. then p is possibly false (not neces sarily true) . Note that the main or asserted implication, which we have translated " If . . . , then . . . ", is always a strict implication, in both columns. 3-42 and 3-45-3-48 are among the best known of the "peculiar" the orems in the system of Material Implication. For this reason, their ana logues in which the implication is strict deserve special attention. Let us first note that ~ -p -J (-p -J p) is a special case of 3 55. This and 3 56 give us at once ~ -P = (-P -J p) This defines the idea of "necessity". A necessarily true proposition e. g., "I am", as conceived by Descartes is one whose denial strictly implies it. Similarly, p-l(-pcp) is a special case of 3-45. And this, with 3-46, gives p = (-p c p) A true proposition is one which is materially implied by its own denial. This point of comparison throws some light upon the two relations. The negative of a necessary proposition is impossible or absurd. ~p -i (p -i -p) is a special case of 3-52. This, with 3-53, gives -P = (P -* -P) And p -i -p is equivalent to -(pop). Thus an impossible or absurd propo sition is one which strictly implies its own denial and is not consistent with itself. Correspondingly, we get from 3-42 and 3-43 -P = (P c -P) A false proposition is one which materially implies its own negation. It is obvious that material implication, as exhibited in these theorems, The System of Strict Implication 305 is not the relation usually intended by "implies", but it may be debated whether the corresponding properties of strict implication are altogether acceptable. We shall revert to this question later. At least, these propo sitions serve to define more sharply the nature of the two relations. Proof of the above theorems is as follows: 3-41 (pcq) -i (-r/c-p) 1-1 [p/q; -q/p}: -q p 4 p -q (1) 2- 62: (1) 4 -(p -q) -J -(-q p) (2) 2-51: (2) =-(p-q)*-(- q -(-p)} (3) 1-03: (3) = Q.E.D. 3 42 -p 4 (p c q) 1-2 {p/q; -q/p}: p -q 4 p (1) 2-62: (1) 4 -p 4 -(p -q) (2) 1-03: (2) - Q.E.D. 3 43 (p c. -p) 4 -p Similar proof, using 1 -3. 3 44 p c (q c r) 4 q c (p c r) 1-4 {q/p , p/q-, -r/r}: q(p -r) 4 p(q -r) (1) 2-62: (l)^-[p(g-r)]H-[g(p-r)] (2) 2-51: (2) = -{p-[-(g-r)]} 4 -{ g .[-(p-f)]} (3) 1 03 : (3) - 2J c -(ry -r) -I ry c -(/; -r) (4) 1-03: (4) - Q.E.D. 3 45 p4(qc.p) 3-42 {-p/p; -q/q] : -(-/>) -I (-/> c-f/) (1) 3.41: (_ 2;c _ ry ) H [-(- r/ )c -(-;;)] (2) 2-51: (2) - (-pc-r/)-i(7Cp) (3) 1-6: (l)x(3)H-(-y;)-i(r/c^ (4) 2-51: (4) = Q.ED. 3 46 (-p c p) -j p 3-43 {-p/ 2 ;}: [-pc-(-p)H-C-p) (1^ 2-51: (1) = Q.E.D. 3-47 ~(pcq)4p 2-62 {-p/p; pcq/q}: 3-42 4 -(p c q) 4 -(-p) 2-51: (1) = Q.E.D. 3-48 -(pcq)4-q 3-45 {^/p; p/^}: q4(pcq) (D 2-62: (1) -i Q.E.D. 21 306 A Survey of Symbolic Logic 3-52 ~p -J (p -J g) 2-1 i-q/q}: p-q*p (1) 1. 8: (1) =~p-i~(p-g) (2) 1-02: (2) = Q.E.D. 3-53 (p-J-p)-J~p Similar proof, using 1-3. 3-54 [p-*(gcr)H[g-J(pcr)] 1-4 [q/p; p/q; -r/r}: q(p -r) * p(q -r) (1) 1-8: (1) = ~[p(g-r)H~[g(p-r)] (2) 2-51: (2) - ~{p-[-(g- r )]H~{<H-(p-r)]) (3) 1 -02: (3) = [p S -(<? -r)] * [g H -(p -r)] (4) 1-03: (4) = Q.E.D. 3 55 ~ -p * (g -J p) 3-52 !-p/p; -g/g) : ~ -p -J (-p -^ -g) (1) 2-6: (-p -l -g) -l (g -l p) (2) 1-6: (1) x (2) -i Q.E.D. 3-56 (-p-lp)4~-p 3-53 {-p/p}: [-p-j-(-p)H~- :p (1) 2-51: (1) = Q.E.D. 3-57 -(p-ig)-*-~p 2-62: 3-52 -^ Q.E.D. J-58 -(p-J g) -J g 2-62: 3-55 -^ Q.E.D. The presence of this extended analogy between material relations and strict relations in the system enables us to present the total character of the system with reference to the principles of transformation, 1 7 and 1 8, in brief and systematic form. This will be the topic of the next section. III. THE TRANSFORMATION {-/~< We have not, so far, considered any consequences of postulate 1 7, -p -} -p, "If p is impossible, then p is false". They are rather obvious. 4-1 ~-p*p 1-7 {-pip} . --P-I-(-P) (1) 2-51: (1) = Q.E.D. If p is necessary, then p is true. 4-12 p-i-~p 2-61 {~p/p; p/q}: 1- 7 * Q.E.D. If p is true, then p is possible. The System of Strict Implication 307 4-13 ~-p-J-~p 1-6: 4-1 x4-12-iQ.E.D. If p is necessary, then p is possible. 4-14 pq-ipoq 4-12 lpq/p}: pq*-~(pq) (1) 1-01: (1) = Q.E.D. 4-15 (p*q)4(pcq) 1-7 (p-q/p}: ~(p-q)*~(p-q) 0) 1-02: (1) = (pi q )-i-(p- q ) (2) 1-03: (2) = Q.E.D. 4-16 p*q-ip + q 1-7 {-p-q/p}: -(-p-gH-Hp-tf) (1) 1.Q4: (1) = p A </ -I -(-p -g) (2) 1-05: (2) - Q.E.D. 4-17 -(poq)4-(pq) 2-62: 4-14 = Q.E.D. By virtue of theorem 4-15, any strict implication which is asserted i. e., is the main relation in the proposition may be replaced by a material implication. And by 4 -1C, any strict logical sum, A, which should be asserted, may be reduced to the corresponding material relation, + . The case of the strict relation " consistent with", o , is a little different. It follows from 4-17 that for every theorem in the main relation o is denied, that is, -(. . . o . . .), there is an exactly similar theorem in which the main relation is that of the logical product, that is, -(. . . x . . .). It is our immediate object to show that for every strict relation which is assertable in the system, the corresponding material relation is also assert- able. It is, then, important to know how these various relations are present in the system. The only relations so far asserted in any proposition are -J and = . Since == is expressible in terms of -i , we may take -J as the fundamental relation and compare the others with it. 4-21 p -J q = -p A q 1-02: p*q = ~(p-g) C 1 ) 2-51: (1) =p*q = ~[-(-p)~q] ( 2 ) 1-04: (2) = Q.E.D. 4-22 p A g = -p -J q 4-21 {-p/p}: -p-i? = -Hp) A? 2-51: (1) =* Q.E.D. 308 A Survey of Symbolic Logic For every postulate and theorem in which the asserted relation is -J , there is a corresponding theorem in which the asserted relation is A , and vice versa. Consider the analogous relations, c and + . 4 23 p c q = -p + q 1-03: pcq = -(p-q) 0) 2-51: (1) = pcq = -[-(-p)-q] (2) 1-01: (2) = Q.E.D. 4-24 p + q = -pcq 4-23 {-p/p} : -pcq = -(-p) + q (1) 2-51: (1) = Q.E.D. For every theorem in which the asserted relation is c , there is a corre sponding theorem in which the asserted relation is + , and vice versa. The exact parallelism between 4-21 and 4-23, 4-22 and 4-24, corrob orates what 4-16 tells us: that wherever the relation A is asserted, the corresponding material relation, + , may be asserted. 4-25 p-iq = -(po-q) 1-02: p*q = ~(p-q) (1) 2-51: (l)=p*q = -[--(?-?)] (2) 1-01: (2) - Q.E.D. 4 26 p o q = -(p -i -q) 4-25 {-q/q}: p*-q = -[po -(-?)] (1) 2-51:- (1) = p*-q = -(poq) (2) 2-11: (2)-l(2M-0H-(pog) (3) 2-12: (2)4-(poq)*(p*-q) (4) 2-3: (3)-ipo0-i-(2>-*-0) (5) 2-61: (4) -* -(p -l -ry) H p o r/ (6) 1-06: (5) x(6) = Q.E.D. For every postulate and theorem in which the relation -* is asserted, there is a corresponding theorem in which the main relation is o but this relation is denied: and for every possible theorem in which the relation o is asserted, there will be a corresponding theorem in which the main relation is -J but that relation is denied. o and -i are connected by negation. An exactly similar relation holds between p q and p c q. 1-03 pcq = -(p-q) 4-27 pq = -(pc-q) Proof similar to that of 4-26, using 1-03 in place of 1 -02. The System of Strict Implication 309 The parallelism here corroborates 4-17: for every possible theorem in which the relation o is denied, there is a theorem in which the corre sponding logical product is denied. But the implications of 4-1-4-17 are not reversible, and a theorem in which the relation o is asserted does not give a theorem in which any material relation is asserted. To put it another way: of p, p, and - ~p, the weakest is p and it cannot be further reduced. But the truth- value of any consistency is [ ] p o q = (p q). The reduction of = to the corresponding material relation, =, is obvious. 4-28 Hypothesis: p = q. To prove: p = q. 2.11: Hyp. H (p -J q) (1) 2-12: Hyp. < (<M p) (2) 4-15: (IHCpcg) (3) 4-15: (2)-i(?cp) (4) 1-07: (3)x(4) == (p = q) For every theorem in which the relation = is asserted, there is a cor responding theorem in which the relation = is asserted. We have now shown at length that, confining attention to the main relations in theorems, there are two sets of strict relations which appear in the system: (1) relations =, -i , and A which are asserted, and relations o which are denied; (2) relations o which are asserted, and relations = , -i , and A which are denied. Wherever a relation of the first described set appears, it may be replaced by the corresponding material relation. Any relation of the second set will be equivalent to some relation o which is asserted its truth- value will be [- ~]. Such relations cannot be further reduced; they do not give a corresponding material relation. But under what circumstances will relations of this second sort appear? Examination of the postulates will show that they can occur as the main relation in the orems only through some use of 1-7 and its consequences, for example, pq-ipoq, p-l-~p, and - -p -J - ~p. In other words, they can occur only where the corresponding material relation is already present in the system. Hence for every theorem in the system in which a relation of the type p o q is asserted, there is a theorem in which the corresponding material relation, p q, is asserted. Consequently, for every theorem in the system in which the main relation is strict there is an exactly similar theorem in which the main relation is the corresponding material relation. W T herever strict relations appear as subordinate, or unasserted, relations in theorems, the situation is quite similar. These are reducible to the 310 A Survey of Symbolic Logic corresponding material relations through some use of 1-8 and its conse quences. Note particularly theorem 2 77, (P * q) = (~ ~P -* - ~?) = (~ -P -* ~ -9) = (-? * -P) = (~? -* ~P) The truth-value of any strict relation will, by its definition, be [~] or [~ -] or [ ]. And where two such are connected by -J or any equivalent rela tion, they may be replaced by the corresponding relation whose truth-value is simply positive or is [-] and this is always a material relation. We may now illustrate this reduction of subordinate strict relations: 43 [(p * q) -J (r -J *)] -* [(p c g) -I (res)] 2-7 {p -q/p; r -s/q] : [~(p -q) H -(r -s)} -i [-(p -g) -I -(r -$)] (1) 1-02: (1) = [(p -J q) -I (r -I *)] * [-(p -q) * -(r -s)] (2) 1-03: (2) = Q.E.D. 4- 31 [(p A g)s (r A s)] * [(p + q) -J (r + *)] Similar proof, (-p -q) in place of (p -q), etc. 4-32 [(poq)-l(ros)]*[(pq)-i(rs)] 2-75 {pq/p; rs/q}: [- ~(p ?) -1 - ~(r s)H [(p ?) * (r *)] (1) 1-01: (1) = Q.E.D. 4- 33 [(p -i q) H (r -J *)] S [(p c g) c (r c 5)] 4-15: [(pcg)-l(rc5)H[(pcg)c(rc*)] (1) 1-6: 4-3 x(l)-i Q.E.D. 4-34 [(p A q) H (r A*)] -^ [(p + g) c (r + s)] Similar proof, using 4-31 in place of 4-3. 4-35 [(pog)H(ro*)H[(pg)c(r*)] Similar proof, using 4-32. Note that as a subordinate relation, p o q reduces directly. In theorems 4 3-4 32, postulate 1 8 only has been used, and the reduc tion of strict relations to material relations is incomplete. In theorems 4 33-4 35, postulates 1 8 and 1 7 have both been used, and the reduction is complete. In these theorems, dyads of dyads are dealt with. The reduction extends to dyads of dyads of dyads, and so on. We may illustrate this by a single example which is typical. Hypothesis: [(p 4 q) -J (-p A q)] 4 [(p o -q) -I -(p -J q)] To prove: [(p c q) c (-p + q)] c [(p -q) c -(p c q)} (The hypothesis is true, though it has not been proved.) 2-71 lp -q/p; p -q/q} : [-(p -q) H -(p -q)] -I [~(p -g) -I -(p -q)] (1) 1-02, 1-03, 1-04, 1-05, and 2-51: (1) = [(p c q) H (-p + q)] -I [(p -i g) 4 (-p A g)] (2) The System of Strict Implication 311 1-6: (2) xllyp. -I [(per/) -i (-p + r/)] -i [(p o-g) -t -(/; -J g)l (3) 2-72 {p -g/p; p -g/g} : [- -(? -g) -i - ~(p -r/)] -I [(p -g) < (p -r/)] (4) 1-01, 1-02, 1-03, and 2-51: (4) = ((p o -g) -i -(p -i g)] [(p -r/) -t -(p c g)] (5) 1-6: (3) x (5) -I [(p c g) S (-p + g)] -J [(p -r/) -* -(p c g)] (6) 4-33: (6HQ.E.D. In any theorem in which ~p is related to ~g, or p to - ~g, or ~ -p to ~ -g, ~ may be replaced by -. This follows immediately from 2-77. We illustrate briefly the reduction in those cases in which ~r, or r, or r, is related to p o g, or p A g, or p -J g. 4-36 (pog-J-~r) -1 (p g H r) 2-75 {p g/p; r/g} : [- -(p g) H -r] -J (p q H r) (1) 1-01: (1) = (poq*-~r)-l(pq4r) (2) 4-15: (pg-ir) -* (pgcr) (3) 1-6: (2) x (3) -i Q.E.D. 4-37 (pAg-i~r) ^(p + gc-r) 2-7 {-p -g/p; r/g} : [-(-p -q) H -r] -J [-(-p -g) -J -r] (1) 4 . 15 : [-(-p -q) -* -r] ^ [-(-p -g) c -r] (2) 1-6: (l)x(2HK-p-gH~rH[-(-p-g)c-r] (3) 1-04 and 1-05: (3) = Q.E.D. A dyad of triadic strict relations, e. g., p o (g r) -J g o (p r), reduces just like a dyad of dyads, because a triadic strict relation is a dyadic strict relation with a dyadic material relation for one member. But a triad of dyadic strict relations behaves quite differently. Such is postulate 1 6, This does not look like a strict triad, but it is, being equivalent to (p -l g) -l [(g -J r) c (p -{ r)] which obviously has the character of strict triads generally. The sub ordinate relations in such a triad cannot be reduced by any direct use of 1-8 and its consequences. However, all such relations can be reduced. The method will be illustrated shortly by deriving (pcg)(gcr) c(pcr) from the above. What strict relations, then, cannot be reduced to the corresponding material relations? The case of asserted relations has already been dis- 312 A Survey of Symbolic Logic cussed. For subordinate relations, the question admits of a surprisingly simple answer. All the relations of the system can be expressed in terms of some product and the various truth values the truth values of ~ -p, p, - ~p, -p, and ~p. Let us remind ourselves : p o q --= - ~(p q) pq = - -(p q) pi q = ~( p - g ) p c q = -(p -q) p A q = ~(-p -q) p+q = -(-p -q) The difference between the truth-value of p and that of -p, between ~p and p, between p and -p, does not affect reduction, because p can be regarded as - -(p) or as ~(-p); p as (p) or as - ~(-p); and p is also -(-p). Hence we may group the various types of expression which can appear in the system under three heads, according to truth-value : Hor[~-] [ ] or [-] [--] or [---] p-lq ptq p = q p = q p*q p+q pq poq -(poq) -(pq) -(p+q) ~(p*q) -(p = q) -(p = q) -(pcq) ~(p-lq) -p -p p ~-p p -~p In this table, the letters are quite indifferent: replacing either letter by any other letter, or by a negative, or by any relation, throughout the table, gives a valid result. The blank spaces in the table could also be filled; for example, the first line in the third column would be (p -q). But, as the example indicates, the missing expressions are more complex than any which are given, and possess little interest. The significance of the table is this: //, in any theorem, two expressions which belong in the same column of this table are connected, then these expressions may be reduced by postulate 1-8 and its consequences. For, by 2-77, a relation of any two in the same column gives the corresponding relation of the corresponding two in either of the other columns. But any theorem which relates expressions which belong in different columns of this table is not thus reducible, since any such difference of truth- value is ineradicable. This table also sum- The System of Strict Implication 313 marizes the consequences of postulate 1-7: any expression in the table gives the expression on the same line with it and in the next column to the right. It follows that expressions in the column to the left also give the expressions on the same line in the column to the right, since -J is transitive. Just as postulate 1 7 is the only source of asserted strict relations which are not replaceable by the corresponding material relations, so also the only theorems containing irreducible subordinate relations are con sequences of 1-7. For this postulate is the only one in which different truth-values are related, and is the only assumed principle by which an asserted (or denied) truth- value can be altered. But if we simply substi tute - for ~ in 1 7, it becomes the truism, -p -* -p. As a consequence, for every proposition in the system which contains strict relations or the truth- values, [~], [ ], [ ], or [- ], in any form, in such wise that these truth- values cannot be reduced to the simple negative, [-], or the simple positive (the truth- value of p), by the use 1-8, the theorem which results if we simply substitute - for ~ in that proposition is a valid theorem. Or, to put it more clearly, if less accurately; if any theorem involve [~], explicitly or implicitly, in such wise that it cannot be reduced to [-] by the use of 1-8, still the result of substituting ~ for - is valid. For example, 4 13, ~ -p ^ ;;, cannot be reduced by 1-8; ~ -p and - ~p are irreducibly different truth- values. But substituting - for ~, we have -(-p) --(-;;), and hence -(-p) c-(-p), or p^p- Propositions such as the pair ~-p4-~p and -(-p) c-(-p) may be called "pseudo-analogues". If we reduce completely, so far as possible, all the propositions which involve [~] or strict relations, by the use of 1-7 and 1-8 and their consequences, and then take the pseudo- analogues of the remaining propositions, we shall find such pseudo-analogues redundant. They will all of them already be present as true analogues of propositions which are completely reducible. This transformation by means of postulates 1-7 and 1-8, by which strict relations give the cor responding material relations, may be represented by the substitution scheme p c q, p = q, -(p q), p + q, -p, p, ~(p) P*q, p = </, -(p</) PM ~l>* ~-P* -(-~P) We put -(p o q) and -(p q), -(- ~p) and -(p), because p o q as a main rela tion in theorems is reducible only when it is denied, and - ~p is reducible only through its negative. As we have now shown (except for triads of dyads, the reduction of which is still to be illustrated), propositions involving 314 A Survey of Symbolic Logic expressions below the line are still valid when the corresponding expressions above the line are substituted. The transformation by {-/~} of all the assumptions and theorems of the system of Strict Implication which can be thus completely reduced, and the rejection of remaining propositions which involve expressions below the line (or the substitution for them of their pseudo-analogues), gives precisely the system of Material Implication. All the postulates and theorems of Material Implication can be derived from the postulates and definitions of Strict Implication: the system of Strict Implication contains the system of Material Implication. We may further illustrate this fact by deriving from previous propositions the postulates and definitions of the calculus of elementary propositions as it appears in Principia Mathematical (Principia, ^1-01) pcq = -p + q is theorem 4-23. 4-41 4 - 42 4 - 4 3 4-44 4-45 pq = --p + -q 1-05 {-p/p , -q/q}: -p + -q = -[-(-p)-(- 2-51: (1) =-p + -q = -(p q) 2-63: (2) = -(-p + -q) = -[-(p q)] 2-51: (3) = Q.E.D. (p = q) = (pcq)(qcp) is the definition, 1-07. p + p c p 3-23: p + p-lp 4-15: (1) -i Q.E.D. q c p + q 1-2 {-q/p; -p/q}: -p-q-i-q 2-61: (1) -J q ^ -(-p -q) 1-05: (2) = q-lp + q 4-15: (3) -i Q.E.D. p + q cq + p 3-21: p + q-iq + p 4-15: (!)H Q.E.D. p+ (q + r) cq + (p + r) 3-24: p + (q + r) -J q + (p + r) 4-15: (1)-^ Q.E.D. 6 Pp. 98-101, 114, 120. (Principia, ^3-01) (i) (2) (3) (Principia, *4-01) (Principia, (Principia, (Principia, (Principia, (1) CD (2) (3) CD CD The System of Strict Implication 315 For the proof of the last postulate in the set in Principia Mathematica certain lemmas are needed which are of interest on their own account. 4-51 p q c r = p c (q c r) = qc(pcr) 1-03 {pq/p-, r/q}: pqcr = -[(p q) -r] (1) 2-91 and 2-9: (1) = pry cr = -[p(q -r)] = -[q(p -r)] (2) 2-51: (2) = p0cr = -{p-[-( 9 -r)]} = -|<H-(p-r)]} (3) 1-03: (3) = Q.E.D. 4-52 p q-lr = p-l (qcr) = ql (per) 1-02 {p q/pi r/q} : pq -J r = ~[(p q) -r] Remainder of proof, similar to the above. 4-53 [(pcq)p]-lq 2-4 {pcq/p}: (p c 0) -1 (p c g) (1) 4-52 {pcq/p; p/q-, q/r}: (I) = Q.E.D. It is an immediate consequence of 4-53 that " If p is asserted and p c q is asserted, then q may be asserted", for, by our assumptions, if p is asserted and p c q is asserted, then [(p c q)p] may be asserted. And if this is asserted, then by 4-53 and our operation of " inference", q can be asserted. But note that the relation which validates the assertion of q is the relation s in the theorem. This principle, deduced from 4-53, is required in the system of Material Implication (see Principia, #1-1 and #1-11). 4-54 (~pc~q) *(qcp) 4-3: 2-21-^Q.E.D. 4-55 (p-*q)l(prcqr) 1-6 {-r/r}: (p-lg)(^ -r) -i (p l -r) 4-52: (1) = (p-Jg)HKg-l-r)c(p-l-r)] (2) 1-02 and 2-51: (2) = (p -I g) -* Kg r) c ~(p r)] (3) 4-54: -(gr)c-(pr)-l(2;rcgr) (4) 1-6: (3) x (4) < Q.E.D. 4-56 (pcq) c(prcgr) 4-55 {(pcq)p/p}: 4-53 H [(p c?)p]r eg r 2-91: (1) = [(pc 9 )(pr)]c 9 r (2) 4-51: (2) = Q.E.D. 4-57 p cq = -qc-p 4-3: 2-62H(pCtfH(-?c-p) (1) 4-3: 2-6-l(-gc-p)-j(pC(/) (2) 1-06: (l)x(2) = Q.E.D. 316 A Survey of Symbolic Logic 4-58 (pcq)(qcr)c(pcr) 4-56 {-r/r}: (p c q) c (p -r c q -r) (1) 4-57: (1) - (pc</)c[-(g-r)c-(p-r)] (2) 1-03: (2) = (pcq)c[(qcr)c(pcr)] (3) 4-51: (3) = Q.E.D. 4 58 is the analogue, in terms of material relations, of 1-6. The method by which we pass from 1-6 to 4-58 illustrates the reduction of triads of strict dyads in general. This reduction begins in the first line of the proof of 4-55. Here 1 -6 is put in the form (p *?)*[(?* r) c (p * r)] 12 345 The relation numbered 4 is already a material relation. This is character istic of strict triads. Relations 3 and 5 are reduced together by some consequence of 1-8, in a form in which the asserted relation is material. Then, as in 4 56, relations 1 and 2 are reduced together by the use of 4 53 as a premise. This use of 4-53 is quite puzzling at first, but will become clearer if we remember its consequence, " If p is asserted and p c q is asserted, then q may be asserted". This method, or some obvious modification of it, applies to the reduction of any triad of strict dyads which the system gives. We can now prove the last postulate for Material Implication. 4 - 59 (q c r) c[(p + q) c(p + r)] (Principia, #1-6) 4-58 {-pip} : (-pcq)(qcr) c (-per) (1) 4-51: (1) = (gcr)c[(-pcg)c(-pcr)] (2) 4-24: (2) - Q.E.D. These are a sufficient set of symbolic postulates for Material Impli cation, as the development of that system from them, in Principia Mathc- matica, demonstrates. However, in the system of Strict Implication, those theorems which belong also to Material Implication are not necessarily derived from the above set of postulates. They can be so derived, but the transformation {-/~} produces them, more simply and directly, from their analogues in terms of strict relations. IV. EXTENSIONS OF STRICT IMPLICATION. THE CALCULUS OF CONSIST ENCIES AND THE CALCULUS OF ORDINARY INFERENCE From the symmetrical character of postulate 1-8, and from the fact that postulate 1-7 is converted by negating both members, i. e., p -i- ~p, The System of Strict Implication 317 it follows that, since the transformation j-/~) is possible, an opposite transformation, {~/-}, is possible. And since implications are reversed by negating both members, those expressions which are transformed directly by j-/~) will be transformed through their negatives by |~/-), while those expressions which are transformed through their negatives by {-/~j will be transformed directly by }~/-J. Hence we have -(peg), -(/; = g), pq, -(p + ( This substitution scheme may be verified by reference to the table on page 312. The transformation }-/~} represents the fact that expressions in the column to the left, in this table, give expressions in the middle column: {~/-J represents the fact that expressions in the middle column give ex pressions in the column to the right. {-/-} eliminated strict relations: j~/-j eliminates material relations. As in the previous case, so here, a dyad of dyadic relations, or a relation connected with p, -p, ~p, etc., can be transformed by 1-8 and its consequences when and only when the connected expressions appear in the same column of that table. Thus the transformation J~/-j is subject to the same sort of limitation as is (-/-}. The transformation {~/-J, eliminating material relations, has already been illustrated in those tables in Section II, in which theorems in terms of strict relations were compared with analogous propositions in terms of material relations. Theorems in the right-hand column of those tables result from those in the left-hand column by the transformation {-/-). The proofs of 3-11, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14, 3-31, 3-32, 3-33, 3-34, 3-52, 3 and 3-55 indicate the method of this transformation. Theorem 3-54 indi cates a limitation of it. As we have noted, triadic strict relations are not expressible in terms of strict dyads alone. Consequently, in the case of triadic relations, the transformation {-/-} cannot be completely carried out. This is an important limitation, since postulate 1 (>, which is necessary for any generality of proof, is a triadic strict relation. It means that any system of logic in which there are no material relations cannot symbolize its own operations. Since strict relations are the relations of intension, this is an important observation about calculuses of intension in general. The vertical line in the substitution scheme is to indicate that the transformation {-/-} is arbitrarily considered to be complete when no material relations remain in the expression, p and -p will be transformed when connected with a material relation which is transformed; when not 318 A Survey of Symbolic Logic so connected, p and -p remain. They could be transformed in all cases, but the result is needlessly complex and not instructive. The system, or partial-system, which results from the transformation {~/-} may be called the Calculus of Consistencies. It can be generated independently by the following assumptions : Let the primitive ideas be: (1) propositions, p, q, r, etc., (2) -p, (3) ~p, (4) p o q, (5) p = q. Let the other strict relations be defined : II. p -J q = -(p O -q) For postulates assume : III. poq-iqop IV. q o p -J p V. - ~p -J p o p VI. = - Assume the operations of " Substitution " and "Inference" as before, but in place of "Production" put the following: If p -J q is asserted and q -J r is asserted, then p -J r may be asserted. By this principle, proof is possible without the introduction into the postulates of triadic relations. The system generated by these assumptions is purely a calculus of intensions. It is the same which would result from performing the trans formation {~/-j upon all the propositions of Strict Implication which admit of it, and rejecting any which still contain expressions, other than p and -p, below the line. It contains, amongst others, all those theorems concerning strict relations (except the triadic ones) which were exhibited in Section II in comparison with analogous propositions concerning material relations. More interest attaches to another partial-system contained in Strict Implication. If our aim be to create a workable calculus of deductive inference, we shall need to retain the relation of the logical product, p q, but material implication, p eg, and probably also the material sum, p + q, may be rejected as not sufficiently useful to be worth complicating the system with. The ideas of possibility and impossibility also are unnecessary complications. Such a system may be called the Calculus of Ordinary Inference. The following assumptions are sufficient for it. The System of Strict Implication 319 Primitive Ideas: (1) Propositions, p, q, r, etc., (2) -p, (3) p H q, (4) p g, (5) p - ? . Definitions: A. p A g = -p -J g B. pOq = -(p*-q) C. (p = q) = (p-ig)(g-ip) [D. p + g = -(-p-g)] Optional. Postulates: E. (-p -J g) < (-g -l p) F. p g -J p G. p-pp H. p(g r) -J g(p r) I. p H -(-p) J. (p-!g)(g-ir)-l(p-Jr) K. p q -J p o g L. (p g * r s) = (p o g H r o 5) All of these assumptions are propositions of the system of Strict Impli cation. A. is 4-22, B. is 4-26, C. is 1-06, and D. is 1-05; E. is 2-3, F. is 2-1, G. is 1-3, H. is 1-4, I. is 1-5, J. is 1-06, K. is 4-26, and L. is an im mediate consequence of 4 32 and 4 35. The Calculus of Ordinary Inference is, then, contained in the system of Strict Implication. It consists of all those propositions of Strict Implication, which do not involve the relation of material implication, peg [or the material logical sum, p + g]. But where, in Strict Implication, we have -p, we shall have, in the Calculus of Ordinary Inference, -(pop) or p -J -p. Similarly ~ -p will be replaced by -(-p o -p) or -p -J p, and - ~p by p o p or -(p -J -p). In other words, for p is impossible we shall have { p is not self-consistent or p implies its own negation ; for p is necessary we shall have the negation of p is not self-consistent or the negation of p implies p ; and for p is possible we shall have p is self -consistent or ( p does not imply its own negation . The Calculus of Ordinary Inference contains the analogues, in terms of p g, p A q, and p -J r/, of all those theorems of Material Implication which are applicable to deductive inference. It does not contain the useless and doubtful theorems such as "A false proposition implies any proposition", and "A true proposition is implied by any proposition". As a working 320 A Survey of Symbolic Logic system of symbolic logic, it is superior to Material Implication in this respect, and also in that it contains the useful relation of consistency, p o q. On the other hand, it avoids that complexity which may be considered an objectionable feature of Strict Implication. The system of Strict Implication admits of extension to prepositional functions by methods such as those exhibited in the last chapter. For the working out of this extension, several modifications of this method are desirable, but, for the sake of brevity, we shall adhere to the procedure which is already familiar so far as possible. In view of this, the outline to be given here should be taken as indicative of the general method and results and not as a theoretically adequate account. Since, as we have demonstrated, the system of Material Implication is contained in Strict Implication, It follows that, with suitable definitions of U<px and S#E, the whole theory of prepositional functions, as previously developed, may be derived from Strict Implication. H<px will here be interpreted more explicitly than before, " px is true in all (actual) cases/ or " <px is true of every x which .exists ". And Znpx will mean " tpx is true in some (actual) case", or "There exists at least one x for which <px is true". The novelty of the calculus of prepositional functions, as derived from Strict Implica tion, will come from the presence, in that system, of ~p, p, ~ -p, and the strict relations. We might expect that if <px is a prepositional function, ~$x would be a prepositional function. But such is not the case: ~(px is a proposition. For example, "It is impossible that x is a man but not mortal " is a proposition although it contains a variable. So is "Nothing can be both A and not-.4", which predicates the impossibility of ".i 1 is A and x is not- A ". It would be an error to suppose that all the propositions which contain variables are such because they involve the idea of impossi bility, or necessity, but the most notable examples, the laws of mathe matics, are propositions, and not prepositional functions, for precisely this reason. When stated in the accurate hypothetical form i. e., as the implications of certain assumptions they are necessary truths. Since ~ <px is a proposition, <px, <px, and all the strict relations of propositional functions will be propositions. If ipx and \f/x are prepositional functions, then <px o \f/x is the proposition - ~( <px x \f/x) ; <px A \[/x is the proposition ~(-<px x-^r); <px * \f/x is the proposition ~($x x-\I/x) The System of Strict Implication 321 We shall have the law, ~<px4U-<px, "If <px is impossible, then it is false in all cases". Hence also, 2 <px -J - - #c, "If <px is sometimes true, then <px is possible". The first of these gives us one most important con sequence, ( <px -i fa) -1 II X ( <px c fa) "If it is impossible that <px be true and fa false, then in no (actual) case is <px true but fa false", or "If <px strictly implies \l/x, then <px formally implies fa". This connects the novel theorems of this theory of prepo sitional functions with the better known propositions which result from the extension of Material Implication. Similarly we shall have ( <px A fa) -j n x ( <px + fa) and S, ( <px x fa) -j ( <px o fa) If we use z(<pz) to denote the class determined by <pz, that is, the class of all x s such that <px is true, then we derive the logic of classes from this calculus of propositional functions, by the same general type of procedure as that exhibited in Section III of Chapter IV. If we let a = (3 = &(fa), the definitions of this calculus will be as follows: On e a) = (px n "x is a member of the class a, determined by the function <pz means " <px n is true". (ttC/3) = U*(<pxcfa) (a = /3) = (<px = fa) (a = j8) = II X (#C s ^.T) -a = x(-<f>x), or -a = ^ -0 e a) (a x |3) = x(<px x ^.r), or (a x ]8) = x[(x e a) x (x e /3)] (a + j8) - .T(^T + ^), or (a + j3) = ^[(a; e a) + (a; 6 /3)] 1 == (Sx -J fa:) = -1 a c /3 is the relation "All members of a are also members of 0" a relation of extension. It is defined by "In every (actual) case, either <px is false or fa is true"; or "There is no (actual) case in which ?x is true and fa false "-n x (^c^r) == U,(-<px + fa) - II, -(<p* x-**). a -I is the cor responding relation of intension: it is defined by "Necessarily either <px is false or fa is true", or "It is impossible that <f>x be true and fa false", 22 322 A Survey of Symbolic Logic that is, (vx-*$x) = (-<pxA\f/x) = ~(<px x-\f/x). a -J ft may be correctly interpreted " The class-concept of a, that is, <p, contains or implies the class-concept of ft, that is, ^". That this should be true may not be at once clear to the reader, but it will become so if he study the properties of a -J ft, and of <?x 4 \f/x t in this system. Since we have (<px -* \f/x) -J U x ( #x c \[/x) we shall have also (a -i ft) -J ( c 0) If the class-concept of a implies the class-concept of ft, then every member of a will be also a member of (3. The intensional relation, -i , implies the extensional relation, c. But the reverse does not hold. The old "law" of formal logic, that if a is contained in ft in extension, then ft is contained in a in intension, and vice versa, is false. The connection between extension and intension is by no means so simple as that. This discrepancy between relations in extension and relations in inten sion is particularly evident in cases where one of the classes in question is the null-class, 0, or the universe of discourse, 1. As was pointed out in Chapter IV, we shall have for every "individual", x, x e 1, and -(x e 0) Also, for any class, a, we shall have a c 1, and c a These last two will hold because, since fa: * fa: is always true when significant, -(fa: H fa:) always false, we shall have, for any function, <px, and ILKfa: -J fa:) c <px] We shall have these because "A false proposition materially implies any proposition", and U A true proposition is materially implied by any propo sition." But since it does not hold that "A false proposition strictly implies any proposition", or that "A true proposition is strictly implied by any proposition", we shall not have <px -J (fa: -{ far) or -(fa: -J fa:) -i <px And consequently we shall not have a -* 1, or -J a If 7 is a null class, we shall have " All members of 7 are also members of ft, The System of Strict Implication 323 whatever class may be". But we shall not have "The class-concept of y implies the class concept of 0, whatever class may be". The implications of a class-concept are not affected by the fact that the class has no members. The relation, a = 0, is material or extensional equivalence, "The classes a and consist of identical members"; a = ft is strict or intensional equivalence, "The class-concept of a is equivalent to the class-concept of 0". It is obvious that (a = 0) -I (a - 0) but that 2/z0 reverse does not hold. The relation between intensions and extensions is unsymmetrical, not symmetrical as the medieval logicians would have it. And, from the point of view of deduction, relations of intension are more powerful than relations of extension. a+0 and a x (3 are relations of extension the familiar "logical sum" and "logical product" of two classes. What about the corresponding relations of intension? This most important thing about them there are none. Consider the equivalences, (a A 0) = x(<px A #r) = x[(x e a) A (x e 0)] and (a o 0) = x(<px o #r) - x[(x e a) o (x (3)} (px o i/a* is a proposition the proposition (<px x^.r), "It is possible that <px and \l/x both be true". And being a proposition, either it is true of every x or it is true of none. So that a o 0, so defined, would be either 1 or 0. Similarly <^.r A \f/x is a proposition, either true of every .r or false of every or; and a A (3 would be either 1 or 0. Consequently, a A and a o (3 are not relations of a and at all. The product and sum of classes are relations of extension, for which no analogous relations of intension exist. This is the clue to the failure of the continental successors of Leibniz. They sought a calculus of classes in intension: there is no such calculus, unless it be confined to the relations a -J and a = (3. Holland really came in sight of this fact when he pointed out to Lambert the difficulties of logical "multiplication" and logical "division". 7 The presentation of the calculus of propositional functions and calculus of classes here outlined, and of the similar calculus of relations, would involve many subtle and vexatious problems. But we have thought it worth while to indicate the general results which are possible, without dis cussing the problems. But there is one important problem which involves the whole question of strict implication, material implication, and formal 7 See above, p. 35. 324 A Survey of Symbolic Logic implication, which must be discussed the meaning of "implies". This is the topic of the next section. V. THE MEANING OF "IMPLIES" It is impossible to escape the assumption that there is some definite and "proper" meaning of "implies". The word denotes that relation which is present when we "validly" pass from one assertion, or set of assertions, to another assertion, without any reference to additional "evi dence". If a system of symbolic logic is to be applied to such valid infer ence, the meaning of "implies" which figures in it must be such a "proper" meaning. We should not hastily assume that there is only one such meaning, but we necessarily assert that there is at least one. This is no more than to say: there are certain ways of reasoning that are correct or valid, as opposed to certain other ways which are incorrect or invalid. Current pragmaticism in science, and the passing of "self-evident axioms" in mathematics tend to confuse us about this necessity. Pure mathematics is no longer concerned about the truth either of postulates or of theorems, and definitions are always arbitrary. Why, then, may not symbolic logic have this same abstractness? What does it matter whether the meaning of "implies" which figures in such a system be "proper" or not, so long as it is entirely clear? The answer is that a system of symbolic logic may have this kind of abstractness, as will be demonstrated in the next chapter. But it cannot be a criterion of valid inference unless the meaning, or meanings, of "implies" which it involves are "proper". There are two methods by which a system of symbolic logic may be developed: the non-logistic method exemplified by the Boole-Schroder Algebra in Chapter II, or the logistic method exhibited in Principia Mathematica and in the development of Strict Implication in this chapter. The non-logistic method takes ordinary logic for granted in order to state its proofs. This logic which is taken for granted is either "proper" or the proofs are invalid. And if the logic it takes for granted is not the logic it develops, then we have a most curious situation. A symbolic logic, logistically developed i. e., without assuming ordinary logic to validate its proofs is peculiar among mathematical systems in that its postulates and theorems have a double use. They are used not only as premises from which further theorems are deduced, but also as rules of inference by which the deductions are made. A system of geometry, for example, uses its postulates as premises only; it gets its rules of inference from logic. Suppose a postulate of geometry The System of Strict Implication 325 to be perfectly acceptable as an abstract mathematical assumption, but false of "our space". Then the theorems which spring from this assump tion may be likewise false of u our space". But still the postulate will truly imply these theorems. However, if a postulate of symbolic logic, used as a rule of inference, be false, then not only will some of the theorems be false, but some of the theorems will be invalidly inferred. The use of the false postulate as a premise will introduce false theorems; its use as a rule of inference will produce invalid proofs. " Abstractness " in mathe matics has always meant neglecting any question of truth or falsity in postulates or theorems; the peculiar case of symbolic logic has thus far been overlooked. But we are hardly ready to speak of a "good" abstract mathematical system whose proofs are arbitrarily invalid. Until we are, it is requisite that the meaning of "implies" in any system of symbolic logic shall be a "proper" one, and that the theorems used as rules of inference shall be true of this meaning. Unless "implies" has some "proper" meaning, there is no criterion of validity, no possibility even of arguing the question whether there is one or not. And yet the question What is the "proper" meaning of "implies"? remains peculiarly difficult. It is difficult, first, because there is no common agreement which is sufficiently self-conscious to decide, for example, about "material implication" or "strict implication". Even those who feel quite decided in the matter are easily confused by the subtleties of the problem. And, second, it is difficult because argument on the topic is necessarily petitio principii. One must make the Socratic presumption that one s interlocutor already knows the meaning of "implies", and agrees with one s self, and needs only to be made aware of that fact. One must sup pose that the meaning in denotation is clear to all, as the meaning of "cat" or "life" is clear, though the definition remains to be determined. If two persons should really disagree about "implies" should have different "logical sense" there would be nothing to hope for from their argument. In consideration of this peculiar involution of logical questions, the best procedure is to exhibit the alternatives in some detail. When the nature of each meaning of "implies", and the consequences of taking it to be the "proper" one have been exhibited, the case rests. We have already drawn attention, both in this chapter and in Chapter II, to the peculiar theorems which belong to all systems based on material implication. W r e may repeat here a few of them: (1) A false proposition implies any proposition; -p c (p c q) 326 A Survey of Symbolic Logic (2) A true proposition is implied by any proposition; q c (p c q) (3) If p does not imply q, then p is true; -(p c q) cp (4) If p does not imply q, then (7 is false; -(p cq) c-g (5) If p does not imply q, then p implies that q is false; -(per/) c(pc-q) (6) If p does not imply g, then p is false implies g; -(p c q) c (-29 c g) (7) If p and q are both true, then p implies q and g implies p; pqc(pcq)(qcp) (8) If p and g are both false, then p implies q and q implies p\ -p-qc(pcq)(qcp) These sufficiently characterize the relation of material implication. It is obviously a relation between the truth-values of propositions, not between any supposed content or logical import of propositions, "p materially implies q" means "It is false that p is true and q false". All these the orems, and an infinite number of others just as "peculiar" follow necessarily from this definition. The one thing which this relation has in common with other meanings of " implies "a most important thing of course is that if p is true and q is false, then p does not materially imply q. As has been said, there are any number of such "peculiar" theorems in any calculus of propositions based on material implication. 8 These the orems do not admit of any application to valid inference. In a system of material implication, logistically developed, there is nothing to prohibit their being used as rules of inference, but when so used they give theorems which are even more peculiar and quite as useless. If we apply these theorems to non-symbolic propositions, we get startling results. "The moon is made of green cheese" implies "2 + 2 == 4", because q c (p c q). Let q be "2 + 2 == 4" and p be "The moon is made of green cheese". Then, since "2 + 2 == 4" is true, its consequence above is demonstrated. "If the puppy s teeth are filled with zinc, tomorrow will be Sunday". Because the puppy s teeth are not filled with zinc, and, anyway, it happens to be Saturday as I write. A false proposition implies any, and a true proposition is implied by any. 9 There are, then, in the system of Material Implication, a class of propo sitions, which do not admit of any application to valid inference. And 8 Every theorem gives others by substitution, as well as by being used as a rule of inference. And there are ways whereby, for any such theorem, one other which is sure to be "peculiar" also can be derived from it. And also, it can be devised so that no result of one shall be the chosen result of any other. Hence the number is infinite. 9 Lewis Carroll wrote a Symbolic Logic. I shall never cease to regret that he had not heard of material implication. The System of Strict Implication 327 all the other, non-" peculiar ", theorems of Material Implication find their analogues in other systems. Hence the presence of these peculiar and use less theorems is a distinguishing mark of systems based upon material implication. There can be no doubt that the reason why the relation of material implication is the basis of every calculus of propositions except MacColl s and Strict Implication is a historical one. Boole developed his algebra for classes; he then discovered that it could also be interpreted so as to cover certain relations of propositions. Peirce modified Boole s algebra by intro ducing the relation of inclusion, which we have symbolized by c . a cb has all the properties of the relation between a and b when every member of a is also a member of b. It has one notable peculiarity: if a is a class which has no members a "zero" class then for any class x, a ex. Now the idea of "zero" in any branch of mathematics seems a little more of an arbitrary convention than the other numbers. The arithmetical fact that <-8 seems "queer" to children, and it would, most likely, have seemed "queer" to an ancient Roman. Once is defined, its "queer" properties, as well as the obvious one, 8 + = 8, are inevitable. It is similar with the "null class", a = 0, "That which is both a and nothing is nothing", is necessary. And (a b = a) = (a c6), " That which is both a and 6, is a is equivalent to All a is & ", leads to the necessary consequence c a. If there are no sea serpents, then " All sea serpents are arthropods " necessarily follows. This consequence seems more "queer" and arbitrary because it is a relation of extension with no analogue in intension. The concept "sea serpent" does not imply the concept "arthropod" as has been pointed out, -i a does not hold. And in our ordinary logical thinking we pass from intension to extension and vice versa without noting the difference, because the relations of the two are so generally analogous. But once we make the necessary distinction of relations in extension from relations in intension, it is clear that Oca in extension is a necessary conse quence of the concept of the null-class. Entirely similar remarks apply to the proposition a c 1, except that "a is contained in everything" does not seem so "queer". Boole suggested that the algebra of classes be reinterpreted as a calculus of propositions by letting a, 6, c, etc., represent the times when the proposi tions A, B, C, etc., are true. Then Peirce added the postulate which holds for propositions but not for classes (or for propositional functions), a = ( a = i). \ proposition is either true in all cases, or true in none. 328 A Survey of Symbolic Logic The class of cases in which any proposition is true is either or 1. This gives the characteristic property of the Two-Valued Algebra. If we add to this the interpretation of a cb, "All cases in which A is true are cases in which B is true", or loosely "If A, then B", we have the source of the peculiar propositions of Material Implication. For Ocfr. acl, OcO, c 1, and 1 c 1 follow from the laws which are thus extended from classes to propositions. A false proposition [= 0] implies 6. And a implies any true proposition [= 1]. Of any two true propositions [= 1] each implies the other. Of any two false propositions [= 0] each implies the other. And any false proposition implies any true one. "A false proposition materially implies any proposition" means precisely "If there are no cases in which A is true (if a = 0) then all cases in which A is true are also cases in which B is true". It does not mean " B can be inferred from any false proposition". "A true proposition is materially implied by any proposition" means only, "If B is true [= 1], then the cases in which A is true are contained among the cases (i. e., all cases) in which B is true". It does not mean "Any true proposition can be inferred from A". Inference depends upon meaning, logical import, intension, a c b is a relation purely of extension. Is this material implication, a c b, a relation which can validly represent the logical nexus of proof and demonstration? Formal implication IL x (<pxc \f/x) is defined in terms of material implication. It means "For every value of x, <px materially implies \f/x". Choose any value of x, say for convenience z, and unless (pz is false, fa is true. Cer tainly this relation approximates more closely to the usual meaning of "implies". But the precisely accurate interpretation of H x (<pxc\f/x) depends upon what is meant by the "values of x". We have spoken of them as "cases" or "individuals". It makes a distinct difference whether the "cases" comprehended by H. x (<px c\f/x) are all the possible cases, all conceivable individuals, or only all actual cases, all individuals which exist (in the universe of discourse). Either interpretation may consistently be chosen, but the consequences of the choice are important. Let us survey briefly the more significant considerations on this point. In the first place, supposing that the second choice is made and n x be taken to signify "for all x s which exist", what shall we mean by "exist"? This is entirely a matter of convenience, and logicians are by no means at one in their use of the term. But any meaning of "exist" which confines it to temporal and physical reality or to what is sometimes called "the factual" is inconvenient because, for example, we may wish to distinguish The System of Strict Implication 329 the status of curves without tangents in mathematics from the status of the square of the circle. This distinction is usually made by saying that the former "exist", since the general mathematical idea of a "curve" admits such cases, and their equations may be given; while the square of the circle is demonstrably impossible. Again, it is inconvenient to say that Apollo exists in Greek mythology, whereas the god Agni does not. Now the god Agni is not inconceivable in Greek mythology; we find no record of him, that is all. Similarly, while the usual illustrations of mathematical "non-existence" are impossibilities, there is still a difference between what "does not exist" in a mathematical system and what is impossible. Sup pose we have an "existence postulate" in a set which are consistent and independent each of the others the 0-postulate in the Boole-Schroder Algebra, for example. Without this postulate, the remainder of the set generate a system in which does not exist. But it is possible, as the con sistency of this postulate with the others demonstrates. The frequent statement that "mathematical existence" is the same as "possibility" is a very thoughtless one. The most convenient use of "exist" in logic is, then, one which makes the meaning depend upon the universe of discourse, but one which does not, as is sometimes supposed, thereby identify the "existent" and the possible. ("Possible" similarly varies its meaning with the universe of discourse.) On the other hand, it is inconvenient to use "exist" so widely that "existence" is a synonym for "conceivability ". This is so obvious in the most frequent universe of discourse, "phenomena", that it hardly needs to be pointed out. Using "exists" in this sense, in which "existence" is narrower than "possibility" but may, in some universes of discourse, be wider than "the factual", it makes a difference whether 11* in U t (^xcfa) denotes only existent x s or all possible z s. All American silver coins dated 1915 have milled edges. Let <px be "x is an American silver coin dated 1915", and let fa be " x has a milled edge". There is no necessity about milled edges for silver coins, unless one speak in the "legal" universe of discourse, this illustration, U x (<pxcfa) will be true if II X denote only actual .r s; false if it denote all possible x s. One illustration is as good as a hundred; if Il x (<px c fa) refer to all possible x s, U x (<px c fa) means "It is impossible that <px be true and fa false". If U^xcfa) be confined to actual x s, then it signifies a relation of extension, "The class of things of which <px is true is contained in the class of things of which fa is true". 330 A Survey of Symbolic Logic It might be thought that the meaning of H x ((px c\f/x) is sufficiently determined by saying that the "values of a;" in a function, px, are all the entities for which <px is either true or false. But this is not the case, for there is question whether, of an x which does not exist, <px is always true, or always false, or sometimes true and sometimes false, or never either true or false. Here again, the question is, in part, one of convention. From the point of view of extension, it is obvious that if <px can be predi cated at all of an x which does not exist, it will always be false. (Predicating something, <p, of an "individual", x, which does not exist, should be dis tinguished from asserting that an empty class, a, which exists though it has no members, is included in some other, a c 6. "The King of France is bald" is an example of the former; "All sea serpents have green wings", of the latter.) And the point of view of extension is frequently that of common sense. In this sense, "x is a man" is false of my non-existent twin brother, and even identical propositions such as "My twin brother is my twin brother" are false of the non-existent. But from the point of view of intension, an identical proposition is always true, and <px may be true or it may be false of a non-existent x. If the point of view of extension be taken with reference to prepositional functions, then <px is either not- significant or false of the non-existent, and \j/x is similarly not-significant or false. If <px and \f/x are not significant of the non-existent, then U x (<px c\f/x) means "For every existent x, <px materially implies $x". If <px and \l/x are significant and false of the non-existent, then <px c \f/x is true of every non-existent x, since of two false propositions, each materially implies the other. Hence on this interpretation, U x (<px c\l/x) is significant for all possible x s and true in case every existent x is such that <px c \j/x. Hence its meaning will still be accurately rendered by "For every existent x, <px materially implies $x". If the point of view of intension be taken with reference to propositional functions, or if it be left open, then H x (<px cfa) may mean "For every possible x, <px materially implies $x", or we may, by convention, still confine it to the meaning " For every existent x, (px materially implies ^e". 10 10 We would gladly have spared the reader these details, but we dared not. If logicians do not consider one another s views, who will? In this connection we are reminded of a passage in Lewis Carroll s Symbolic Logic (pp. 163-64) anent the controversy concerning the existential import of propositions: "The writers, and editors, of the Logical text-books which run in the ordinary grooves to whom I shall hereafter refer by the (I hope inoffensive) title The Logi cians take, on this subject, what seems to me to be a more humble position than is at all necessary. They speak of the Copula of a Proposition with bated breath" The System of Strict Implication 331 The ground being now somewhat cleared, we return to the simpler considerations which are really more important. What are the conse quences of taking H x ((px c\f/x) in one or the other meaning? The first and most important is this. It is a desideratum that we should be able to derive the calculus of classes from the calculus of prepositional functions. And in this calculus of classes, the inclusion relation of classes a c or (<pz) c z(\j/z) can be defined by z(<pz) c z(tz) = U x (<px c I/M-) or by some equivalent definition. If ll z ((px c\J/x) mean "For all x s which exist, <pxc\}/x", then a c 0, or &(<pz) cz(\f/z), so defined, is the use ful relation of extension, "All the existing things which are members of a are also members of /3". Such a relation can represent such propositions as "All American silver coins dated 1915 have milled edges". If, on the other hand, we interpret U x (<px c $x) to mean "For all possible z s, <pxc\l/x, then two courses are open: (1) we can maintain that whatever is true of all existent things is true of all possible thus abrogating a useful and probably indispensable logical distinction; or (2) we can allow that what is true or false of the possible depends upon its nature as conceived or defined. If we make the second choice here, the consequence is that a c |S, or z(<pz) c z(\j/z), defined by z(<pz) c z(tz) = n x (<t>x c t/a-) or in any equivalent fashion, such as o:C/3 = Hi(xe acxe )8) is the relation of intension "The class-concept of a implies the class- concept of |S". This relation does not symbolize such propositions as almost as if it were a living, conscious Entity, capable of declaring for itself what it chose to mean and that we, poor human creatures, had nothing to do but to ascertain what was its sovereign will and pleasure, and submit to it. " In opposition to this view, I maintain that any writer of a book is fully authorised in attaching any meaning he likes to any word or phrase he intends to use. If I find an author saying, at the beginning of his book, Let it be understood that by the word "black" I shall always mean "white", and that by the word "white" always mean "black", 1 I meekly accept his ruling, however injudicious I may think ] "And so, with regard to the question whether a Proposition is or is not to be understood as asserting the existence of its Subject, I maintain that every writer may adopt his own rule, provided of course that it is consistent with itself and with tl accepted facts of Logic. "Let us consider, one by one, the various views that may logically b thus settle which of them may conveniently be held; after which I shall hold myse free to declare which of them / intend to hold." 332 A Survey of Symbolic Logic "All American silver coins dated 1915 have milled edges" or "It rained every week in March", or in general, the frequent universal propositions which predicate this relation of extension. And whichever interpretation of Hi(<f>x c\f/x) be chosen, we can now point out one interesting peculiarity of it. We quote from Principia Mathematica: n "In the usual instances of implication, such as " Socrates is a man implies Socrates is a mortal ", we have a proposition of the form " <px c \j/x" in a case in which "IL x (<px c \f/x) " is true. In such a case, we feel the implication as a particular case of a formal implication ". It might be added that " Socrates is a man implies Socrates is a mortal is not a formal implication: it is a material implication and a strict impli cation, but not formal. One may object: "But as a fact, in such cases there is a tacit premise of the type All men are mortal , and this is precisely the formal implication,^^ c \j/x) ". Granted, of course. But add this premise, and still the implication is strict and material, but not formal. "All men are mortal and Socrates is a man" does not formally imply "Soc rates is mortal". 12 If the "proper" meaning of "implies" is one in which "Socrates is a man" really and truly implies "Socrates is mortal", or one in which "All men are mortal and Socrates is a man" really and truly implies "Socrates is mortal", then formal implication is not that proper meaning. However much any formal implication may lie behind and support such an inference, it cannot state it. One further consideration is worthy of note: If IL x (<px c \f/x) be restricted to oj s which exist, then it will denote such propositions as " x is an Ameri can silver coin of 1915 implies x has a milled edge "; " x is a Monday of last March implies # is a rainy day "; "x has horns and divided hoofs implies x chews a cud ". In other words it will denote relations which are "contingent", and due to "coincidence". It may be doubted whether such relations are "properly" implications. But upon this question the reader will very likely find himself in doubt. What we regard as the reason for this doubt will be pointed out later. The strict implication, p -i q, means " It is impossible that p be true 11 1, p. 21. We render the symbolism of this passage in our own notation. 12 It may be objected that the calculus gives the formal implication which is the formal implication of \J/z by H x (<px c \f/x) x <pz, which is required. But this is not what is required. The variables for all values of which this proposition is asserted are <? and <A> not x and z. The reader will grasp the point if he specify <p and ^ here, and then allow them to vary in his illustration. The System of Strict Implication 333 and q false", or "p is inconsistent with the denial of q". Similarly $x -t fa means "It is impossible that <?x be true and fa false", or "the assertion of <px is inconsistent with the denial of fa". Some explanation of "im possible" or "inconsistent" may seem called for here. These terms can either of them be explained by the other, but one or the other must be taken for granted. Yet the following observations may be of assistance: An assemblage or set of propositions may be such that all of them can be true at once. They are mutually compatible, compossible, consistent. There may be more than one such set. Whoever denies this on metaphysical grounds must assume the burden of proof. And whether, in fact, the possible and the actual, the consistent and the concurrently true-in-fact are identical, at least one must admit that our concept of the possible differs from our concept of the actual: that we mean by "consistent" some thing different from "concurrently true-in-fact". Any set of mutually consistent propositions may be said to define a "possible situation" or "case" or "state of affairs". And a proposition may be "true" of more than one such possible situation may belong to more than one such set. Whoever understands "possible situation" thereby understands "con sistent propositions", and vice versa. And whoever understands "im possible situation" understands also "inconsistent propositions". In these terms, we can translate p -J q by "Any situation in which p should be true and q false is impossible". But "situation" as here used should not be confused with Boole s "times when A is true". A proposition, once true, is always true. A proposition may be true of some possible "situations" and false of others, but it must be in point of fact either simply true or simply false. This is what constitutes the distinction between a proposition and a prepositional function such as "x is a man". This last is, in point of fact, neither true nor false. 13 Of special interest are the cases of strict implication in which more than two propositions are involved. We have already seen that strict triadic relations take the form of strict dyads, one member of which is itself a non-strict or material dyad. Where we might expect, p -i (q-*r), we have instead p 4 (q c r) or p q 4 r. Instead of p o (q o r) we have p o (q r) or (p q) o r. We may now discover the reason for this the reason 13 On the other hand, it is impossible to deny that a proposition may be true of some "situations , and false of others unless one is prepared to maintain that whatever assertion can be referred to different possible "circumstances", is not a proposition. And whoever asserts this must, to be consistent, recognize that there is only one true proposition, the whole of the truth, the assertion of all-fact, the Hegelian Idee. 334 A Survey of Symbolic Logic not in mathematical-wise but in terms of common sense about inference. Suppose that p, q, and the negation of r, form an inconsistent set. They cannot all be true of any possible situation. We have symbolized this by -(poqo-r). - (p oqo -r) = -lp o (q -r)] = p -J -(q -r) = p-i(qcr) = p q -* r If p, q, and -r form an inconsistent set and, in point of fact p and q are both true, then r must be true also. So much is quite clear. The inference from (p q) to r is strict. But suppose p, q, and -r cannot all be true in any possible situation and suppose (in the actual situation) p only is known to be true. We can then conclude that "If q is true, r is true". -(poqo-r) = p-l(qcr) This inference is also strict, but our symbolic equivalents tell us that this "If . . . , then . . ."is not itself a strict implication; it is qcr, a material implication. That is the puzzle; why is it not strict like the other? The answer is simple. If p, q, and -r cannot all be true in any possible situation and if p is true of the actual situation, it follows that q and -r are not both true of the actual situation, that is, -(q-r), but it does not follow that q and -r cannot both be true in some other possible situation (in which p should be false) it does not follow that q and -r are inconsistent, that -(qo-r). Consequently it does not follow that qlr, that q strictly implies r. If, then, we begin with an a priori truth (holding for all possible situations), that p, q, and -r form an inconsistent set, and to this add the (empirical) premise "p is true", we get, as a strict con sequence, the proposition "If q is true, r is true". But the truth of this consequence is confined to the actual situation, like the premise p. If, in this case, we go on and infer r from q, our inference may be said to be valid because the additional premise, p, required to make it strict, is taken for granted. The inference depends on pq-ir. Or we may, if we prefer, describe it as an inference based on material implication, which is valid because it is confined to the actual situation. Much of our reasoning is of this type. We state, or have explicitly in mind, only some of the premises which are required to give the conclusion strictly. We have omitted or forgotten the others, because they are true and are taken for granted. In this sense, much of our reasoning may be said to make use of material or formal implications. This is probably the source of our doubts whether such propositions as f "x is an American silver coin dated 1915 implies l x has a milled edge ", and "x has horns and divided hoofs implies x The System of Strict Implication 335 chews a cud " represent what are "properly" called implications. In such cases, the reasoning is valid only if the missing premises, which would render the implication strict, are capable of being supplied. The case w r here two premises are strictly required for inference is typi cal of all those which require more than one. Where three, p, q, and r, are required for a conclusion, s, we have p(qr)*s = p*(qrc s) = p * [q c (r c *)] And similar equations hold where four, five, etc., premises are required for a conclusion. Only the main implication is strict. In other words, a strict implication may be complex but is always dyadic. Another significant property of strict implication, as opposed to material implication or formal implication, is that if we have "x is a man strictly implies x is a mortal ", we have likewise " Socrates is a man strictly implies Socrates is a mortal ", and vice versa. Propositions strictly imply each other when and only when any corresponding prepositional functions similarly imply one another. According to this view of implication, " Socrates is a man implies Socrates is a mortal " is not simply felt to be the kind of relation upon which most inference depends: it is the rela tion upon which all inference does depend. Strict implication is the symbolic representative of an inference which holds equally well whether its terms are propositions or prepositional functions. One further item concerning the properties of strict implication has to do with the analogues of the "peculiar" propositions of Material Impli cation. These analogues are themselves somewhat peculiar: 3-52 ~p -* (p 4 q) If p is impossible, then p implies any proposition, q. 3 . 55 ~-pi (q -j p) If p is necessarily true, then p is implied by any proposition, q . These two are the critical members in this class of propositions: the re mainder follow from them and are of similar import. In the "proper" sense of "implies", does an absurd, not-self-consistent proposition imply anything and everything? A part of the answer is contained in the observation that "necessary" and "impossible" in every-day use are commonly hyperbolical and no index. Xo proposition is "impossible" in the sense of ~p except such as imply their own contradiction; and no proposition is "necessary" in the sense of - -p unless its negation is self- contradictory. Again, the implications of an absurd proposition are no indication of what would be true if that absurd proposition were true. 336 A Survey of Symbolic Logic It is the nature of an absurd proposition that it is not logically conceivable that it should be true under any possible circumstances. And, finally, we can demonstrate that, in the ordinary sense of "implies", an impossible proposition implies anything and everything. It will be granted that in the "proper" sense of ."implies", (1) "p and q are both true" implies "q is true". And it will be granted that (2) if two premises p and q imply a conclusion, r, and that conclusion, r, is false, while one of the premises, say p, is true, then the other premise, g, must be false. That is, if "All men are liars" and "John Blank is a man" together imply "John Blank is a liar", but "John Blank is a liar" is false, while "John Blank is a man" is true, then the other premise, "All men are liars", must be false. And it will be granted that (3) If the two propositions, p and q, together imply r, and r implies s, then p and q together imply s. These three principles being granted, it follows that if q implies r, the impossible proposition " q is true but r false" implies anything and everything. For by (1) and (3), if q implies r, then "p and q are both true" implies r. But by (2), if "p and q are both true" implies r, "q is true but r is false" implies "p is false". Hence if q implies r, then " q is true but r is false" implies the negation of any proposition, p. And since p itself may be negative, this impossible proposition implies anything. "Today is Monday" implies "Tomorrow is Tuesday". Hence "Today is Monday and the moon is not made of green cheese " implies " Tomorrow is Tuesday ". Hence " Today is Monday but tomorrow is not Tuesday" implies "It is false that the moon is not made of green cheese", or "The moon is made of green cheese". This may be taken as an example of the fact that an absurd proposition implies any proposition. It should be noted that the principles of the demonstration are quite independent of anything we have assumed about strict implication, though they accord with our assumptions. We shall now demonstrate: first, that there are a considerable class of propositions which imply their own contradiction and are thus impossible, and a class of propositions which are implied by their own denial and are thus necessary; and second, that an impossible proposition implies any proposition, and a necessary proposition is implied by any. These proofs will be similarly free from any necessary appeal to symbolism, making use only of indubitable principles of ordinary logic. Any proposition which should witness to the falsity of a law of logic, or of any branch of mathematics, implies its own contradiction and is absurd. " p implies p" is a law of logic; and may be used as an example. The System of Strict Implication 337 In general, any implication, "p implies </," is shown false by the fact that "p is true and q is false". Thus the law "p implies p" would be disproved by the discovery of any proposition p such that "p is true and p is false". This is, then, an impossible proposition, "p is true and p is false" implies its own negation, which is "At least one of the two, not-p and p, is true". For "p is true and p is false" implies "p is true". And "p is true" implies "At least one of the two, p and q, is true". And not-?;, "p is false," may be this q. Hence " p is true " implies " At least one of the two, p and not-p, is true ". Hence " p is true and p is false " implies " At least one of the two, p and not-p, is true". The negation of "r/ is true and r is false" is "At least one of the two, r and not-ry, is true". If p here replace both q and r, we have as the negation of "p is true and p is false", "At least one of the two, p and not-p, is true". And it is this which "p is true and p is false" has been shown to imply. Merely for purposes of comparison, we resume this proof in the symbols of Strict Implication: p H p, and p * p = ~(p -p). Hence (p -p) is an impossible proposition. By the principle p q -J p, we have p -p -J p. And by the principle q4p + q, we have p -1 (-p + p). By the principle (p -J </)(</ -J r) H (p -J r), this gives (1) x (2) p -P -* ("P + P) But (-p + p) = -(p -p). Hence p -p -I -(p -p). This is only one illustration of a process which might be carried out in any number of cases. Take any one of the laws of Strict Implication and transform it into a form which has the prefix, ~. For example, The impossible proposition thus discovered, in the example [(p q) -(</ p)], can always be shown to imply its own negation. The reader will easily see how this may be done. Such illustrations are quite generally too complex to be followed through without the aid of symbolic abbreviation, but only the principles of ordinary logic are necessary for the proofs. Wherever we find an impossible proposition, we find a necessary propo sition, its negation. For example, "At least one of the two, p and not-p, is true" is a necessary proposition. We have just demonstrated that implied by its own denial. (Some logicians have been inclined of late to deny the ex 23 338 A Survey of Symbolic Logic necessary propositions and of impossible, or self-contradictory, propositions. We beg their attention to the above, and request their criticisms.) We shall now prove that every impossible proposition i. e., every proposition which implies its own negation implies anything and every thing. If p implies not-p, then p implies any proposition, q. W T e have already shown that if q implies r, then "q is true and r is false" implies any proposition. Hence if p implies not-p, "p is true but not-p is false", that is, "p is true and p is true", implies any proposition, q. But p is equivalent to "p is true and p is true". Hence if p implies not-p, p implies any proposition, q. Any necessary proposition, i. e., any proposition, q, whose denial, not-g, implies its own negation, is implied by any proposition, r. This follows from the above by the principle that if p implies q, then "q is false " implies "p is false". In the theorem just proved, "If p implies not-p, then p implies any proposition, g", let p be "not-g", and q be "not-r". We then have "If not-g implies g, then not-g implies any proposition, not-r". And if not-g implies not-r, then "not-r is false" implies "not-g is false", i. e., r implies g. Hence if not-g implies g, then any proposition, r, implies g. But "a man convinced against his will is of the same opinion still". In what honest-to-goodness sense are the "necessary" principles of logic and mathematics implied by any proposition? The answer is: In the sense of presuppositions. And what, precisely, is that? Any principle, A, may be said to be presupposed by a proposition, B, if in case A were false, B must be false. If a necessary principle were false, anything to which it is at all relevant would be false, because the denial of such a principle, being an impossible proposition, implies the principle itself. And where a principle and its negative are both operative in a system, anything which is proved is liable to disproof. Imagine a system in which there are con tradictory principles of proof. That the chaotic results which would ensue are not, in fact, valid, requires as presuppositions the truth of the necessary laws of the system. These laws those strictly "necessary" are always logical in their significance. The logic of "presupposition" is, in fact, a very pretty affair we have no more than suggested its character here. The time-honored principles of rationalism are thoroughly sound and capable of the most rigid demonstration, however much the historic rational ists have stretched them to cover what they did not cover, and otherwise misused them. In this respect, then, in which the laws of Strict Implication seemed The System of Strict Implication 339 possibly not in accord with the " proper " sense of " implies ", we have demon strated that they are, in fact, required by obviously sound logical principles, though in ways which it is easy to overlook. It may be urged that every demonstration we have given shows not only that impossible propositions imply anything and necessary proposi tions are implied by anything, but also that a false proposition implies anything, and a true proposition is implied by anything. The answer is that an impossible proposition is false, of course, and a necessary proposition is true. But if anyone think that this validates the doubtful theorems of Material Implication, it is incumbent upon him to show that some proposi tion that is false but not impossible implies anything and everything, and that some proposition which is true but not necessary is implied by all propo sitions. And this cannot be done. We shall not further prolong a tedious discussion by any special plea for the " propriety" of strict implication as against material implication and formal implication. Anyone who has read through so much technical and uninteresting matter has demonstrated his right and his ability to draw his own conclusions. CHAPTER VI SYMBOLIC LOGIC, LOGISTIC, AND MATHEMATICAL METHOD I. GENERAL CHARACTER OF THE LOGISTIC METHOD. THE " ORTHODOX" VIEW The method of any science depends primarily upon two factors, the medium in which it is expressed and the type of operations by which it is developed. "Logistic" may be taken to denote any development of scientific matter which is expressed exclusively in ideographic language and uses predominantly (in the ideal case, exclusively) the operations of sym bolic logic. Though this definition would not explicitly include certain cases of what would undoubtedly be called " logistic", and we shall wish later to present an alternative view, it seems best to take this as our point of departure. "Modern geometry" differs from Euclid most fundamentally by the fact that in modern geometry no step of proof requires any principle except the principles of logic. 1 It was the extra-logical principles of proof in Euclidean geometry and other branches of mathematics which Kant noted and attributed to the "pure intuition" of space (and time) as the source of "synthetic judgments a priori" in science. The character of space (or of time), as apprehended a priori, carries the proof over places where the more general principles of logic "analysis" cannot take it. Certain operations of thought are, thus, accepted as valid in geometry because geometry is thought about space, and these transformations are valid for spatial entities, though they might not be valid for other things. The principal impetus to the modern method in geometry came from the discovery of non-Euclidean systems which must necessarily proceed, to some extent, without the aid of such space intuitions, a priori or otherwise. And the perfection of the modern method is attained when geometry is entirely freed from dependence upon figures or constructions or any appeal 1 In the opinion of most students, Euclid himself sought to give his proofs the rigorous character which those of modern geometry have, and the difference of the two systems is in degree of attainment of this ideal. But Euclid s successors introduced methods which still further depended upon intuition. 340 Symbolic Logic, Logistic, and Mathematical Method 341 to the perceptual character of space. When geometry is thus freed from this appeal to intuition or perception, the methods of proof are simply those which are independent of the nature of the subject matter of the science that is, the methods of logic, which are valid for any subject matter. 2 Coincidently with this alteration of method comes another change- geometry is now abstract. If nothing in the proofs depends upon the fact that the terms denote certain spatial entities, then, whatever may be meant by "point", "plane", "triangle", "parallel", etc., if the assumptions be true, then the theorems will be. Or in any sense in which the assumptions can be asserted, in that same sense all the consequences of them can be asserted. The student may carry in his mind any image of "triangle" or "parallels" which is consistent with the propositions about them. More than this, even the geometrical relations asserted to hold between "points", "lines", etc., may be given any denotation which is consistent with the properties assigned to them. In general, this means for relations, that any meaning may be assigned which is consistent with the type of the relation e. g., transitive or intransitive, symmetrical or unsymmetrical, one-one or one-many, etc. and with the distributions of such relations in the system. Essentially the same evolution has taken place in arithmetic, or "alge bra". Any reference to the empirical character of tally marks or collections of pebbles has become unnecessary and naive. The "indefinables" -of arithmetic are specified, very likely, as "A class, K, of elements, a, 6, c, etc., and a relation (or operation ) +". Definitions have come to have the character of what Kant called "transcendental definitions "that is to say, they comprehend those properties which differentiate the entity to be defined by its logical relations, not those which distinguish it for sense perception. The real numbers, for instance, no longer denote the possible lengths of a line, but are the class of all the "cuts" that can be made (logi- 2 1 cannot pass over this topic without a word of protest against the widespread notion that the development of modern geometry demonstrates the falsity of Kant s Transcendental Aesthdik. It does indeed demonstrate the falsity of Kant s notion that such "synthetic" principles are indispensable to mathematics. But, in general, it is accurate to say that Kant s account is concerned with the source of our certainty about the world of nature, not with the methods of abstract science which did not exist in his day. Nothing is mo obvious than that the abstractness of modern geometry comes about through definitely renouncing the thing which Kant valued in geometry the certainty of its applicability to our space. When geometry becomes abstract, the content of the science of space spin into two distinct subjects: (1) geometry, and (2) the metaphysics of space, which is con cerned with the application of geometry. This second subject has been much discui since the development of modern geometry, usually in the skeptical or "pragmatic (vide Poincare). But it is possible and to me it seems a fact that Kant s basic argu ments are, with qualifications, capable of being rehabilitated as arguments concerning t) certainty of our knowledge of the phenomenal world, i. e. as a metaphysics of space. 342 A Survey of Symbolic Logic cally specified) in a dense, denumerable series, of the type of the series of rationals. Thus abstractness and the rigorously deductive method of development have more and more prevailed in the most careful presentations of mathe matics. When these are completely achieved, a mathematical system becomes nothing more nor less than a complex logical structure. 3 Consider any two mathematical systems which have been given this ideal mathematical form. They will not be distinguished by the entities which form their "subject matter", for the terms of neither system have any fixed denotation. And they will not be distinguished by the operations by means of which they are developed, for the operations will, in both cases, be simply those of logical demonstration. A word of caution upon the meaning of "operation" is here necessary. It is exactly by the elimination of all peculiarly mathematical operations that a system comes to have the rigorously deductive form. For the grocer who represents his putting of one sack of sugar with another sack by 25 + 25 = 50, [+] is a symbol of operation. For the child who learns the multiplication table as a means to the manipulation of figures, [X] represents an operation, but in any rigorously deductive development of arithmetic, in Dedekind s Was sind und was sollen die Zahlen, or Hunting- ton s "Fundamental Laws of Addition and Multiplication in Elementary Algebra", [+] and [X] are simply relations. An operation is something done, performed. The only things performed in an abstract deductive system are the logical operations variables are not added or multiplied. But, unfortunately, such relations as [+] and [X] are likely to be still spoken of as "operations". Hence the caution. Since abstract mathematical systems do not differ by any fixed meaning of their terms, and since they are not distinguished through their operations, they will be different from one another only with respect to the relations of their terms, and probably also in certain relations of a higher order- relations of relations. And the relations, being likewise abstract, will differ, from system to system, only in type and in distribution in the systems; that is, any two systems will differ only as types of logical order. 3 M. Fieri, writing of "La Geometrie envisagee comme systeme purement logique", says: "Je tiens pour assure que cette science, dans ces parties les plus elevees comme dans les plus modestes, va en s affirment et en consolidant de plus en plus comme I etude d un certain ordre de relations logiques; en s affranchissant peu a peu des liens qui 1 attachent a 1 intuition, et en revetant par suite la forme et les qualites d un science ideale purement deductive et abstraite, comme V Arithmetique" . (Bibliotheque du congres Internationale de Philosophic, in, 368.) Symbolic Logic, Logistic, and Mathematical Method 343 The connection between abstract or "pure" mathematics and logistic is, thus, a close one. But the two cannot be simply identified. For the logical operations by which the mathematical system is generated from its assumptions may not themselves be expressed in ideographic symbols. Ordinarily they are not: there are symbols for "four" and "congruent", "triangle" and "plus", but the operations of proof are expressed by "If . . . then . . .", "Either . . . or . . .," etc. Only when the logical operations also are expressed in ideographic symbols do we have logistic. In other words, all rigorously deductive mathematics gets its principles of operation from logic; logistic gets its principles of operation from symbolic logic. Thus logistic, or the logistic development of mathematics, is a name for abstract mathematics the logical operations of whose development are represented in the ideographic symbols of symbolic logic. Certain extensions of symbolic logic, as we have reviewed it, are needed for the satisfactory expression of these mathematical operations particu larly certain further developments of the logic of relations, and the theory of what are called "descriptions" in Principia Mathematica. But these necessary additions in no wise affect what has been said of the relation between symbolic logic and the logistic development of mathematics. II. Two VARIETIES OF LOGISTIC METHOD: PEANO S Fornmlaire AND Principia Mathematica. THE NATURE OF LOGISTIC PROOF The logistic method is, then, a universal method, applicable to any sufficiently coordinated body of exact knowledge. And it gives, in mathe matics, a most precise and compact development, displaying clearly the type of logical order which characterizes the system. However, there are certain variations of the logistic method, and systems so developed may differ widely from one another in ways which have nothing directly to do with the type and distribution of relations. One most important difference has to do with the degree to which the analysis of terms is carried out. "Number," for example, may be taken simply as a primitive idea, or it may be defined in terms of more fundamental notions. And these notions may, in turn, be defined. The length to which such analysis is carried, is an important item in determining the character of the system. Correl- atively, relations such as [+] and [X] may be taken as primitive, or they may be defined. And, finally, the fundamental propositions which generate the system may be simply assumed as postulates, or they may, by the analy sis just mentioned, be derived from those of a more elementary discipline. 344 A Survey of Symbolic Logic In general, the analysis of "terms" and of relations and the derivation of fundamental propositions go together. And the use of this analytic method requires, to some extent at least, a hierarchy of subjects, with symbolic logic as the foundation of the whole. To illustrate these possible differences between logistic systems, it will be well to compare two notable developments of mathematics: Formulaire de Mathematiques 4 of Peano and his collaborators, and Principia Mathe- matica of Whitehead and Russell. These two are by no means opposites in the respects just mentioned. Principia Mathematica represents the farthest reach of the analytic method, having no postulates and no primitive ideas save those of the logic, while the Formulaire exhibits a partially hier archic, partially independent, relation of various mathematical branches. 5 For example, in the Formulaire, the following primitive ideas are assumed for arithmetic, which immediately succeeds "mathematical logic". X signifies number , and is the common name of 0, 1, 2, etc. signifies zero . + signifies plus . If a is a number, a + indicates the number suc ceeding a . 6 The primitive propositions, or postulates, are as follows: 7 1-0 No e Cls 1-1 OeN 1-2 acNo.D.a + eNo 1 3 s e Cls Oes:aes.D,,.a + $SD.NoS 1-4 a, 6 e NO a -f- =6 + .D.a = 6 l-5aeN .3.a + -=0 The symbol D here represents ambiguously "implies" or "is contained in" the relation c of the Boole-Schroder Algebra. This and the idea of a class, "Cls", and the e-relation, are defined and their properties demon strated in the "mathematical logic". In terms of these, the above propo sitions may be read: 4 All our references will be to the fifth edition, which is written in the proposed inter national language, Interlingua, and entitled Formulario Mathemalico, Editio v (Tomo v de Formulario complete). 5 The independence of various branches in the Formulaire is somewhat greater than a superficial examination reveals. Not only are there primitive propositions for arithmetic and geometry, but many propositions are assumed as "definitions" which define in that discursive fashion in which postulates define, and which might as well be called postulates. Observe, for example, the definitions of + and X, to be quoted shortly. 6 Section n, 1, p. 27. 7 Ibid. Symbolic Logic, Logistic, and Mathematical Method 345 1-0 No is a class, or number is a common name. 1-1 is a number. 1-2 If a is a number, then the successor of a is a number. 1-3 If s is a class, and if is contained in s, and if, for every a, . a is contained in s implies the successor of a is contained in s , then No is contained in s (every number is a member of the class s). (1-3 is the principle of mathematical induction".) 1-4 If a and b are numbers, and if the successor of a =* the successor of b, then a = b. 1-5 If a is a number, then the successor of a 4= 0. The numbers are then defined in the obvious way: 1 = -f, 2 = 1 +, 3 = 2+, etc. 8 The relation +, which differs from the primitive idea, a + , is then defined by the assumptions: 9 3 1 a e No . 3 . a + = a (If a is a number, then a -f = a.) 3-2 a, fceNo.D.o + (6 +) = (a + b) + (If a and b are numbers, then a + the successor of 6 the successor of a + 6 .) The relation X is defined by: 10 1-0 a, 6, ceN .3.a X = 1 -01 a, b, c e No - s - a X (b + 1) = (a X 6) + a It will be clear that, except for the expression of logical relations, such as e and D , in ideographic symbols, these postulates and definitions are of the same general type as any set of postulates for abstract arithmetic. A class, X , of members a, b, c, etc., is assumed, and the idea of a +, "suc cessor of a". The substantive notions, "number" and "zero", the de scriptive function, "successor of," the relations + and X, are not analysed but are taken as simple notions. 11 However, the properties which numbers have by virtue of being members of a class, X , are not taken for granted, as would necessarily be done in a non-logistic treatise they are specifically set forth in propositions of the "mathematical logic" which precedes. And the other principles by which proof is accomplished are similarly demonstrated. Of the specific differences of method to which this explicit- ness of the logic leads, we shall speak shortly. 8 See ibid., p. 29. 9 Ibid. 10 See ibid., 2, p. 32. " Peano does not suppose them to be unanalyzdble. He says (p. 27): si nos pote defini N , significa si nos pote scribe aequalitate de forma, N = expressione composite per signos noto ~ ~ 1 . . . -, quod non est facile". (This was written after the publication of Russell s Principles of Mathematics, but before Principia Mathem 346 A Survey of Symbolic Logic In Principia Mathematica, there are no separate assumptions of arith metic, except definitions which express equivalences of notation and make possible the substitution of a single symbol for a complex of symbols. There are no postulates, except those of the logic, in the whole work. In other words, all the properties of numbers, of sums, products, powers, etc., are here proved to be what they are, solely on account of what number is, what the relations + and X are, etc. Postulates of arithmetic can be dispensed with because the ideas of arithmetic are thoroughly analysed. The lengths to which such analysis must go in order to derive all the proper ties of number solely from definitions is naturally considerable. We should be quite unable, within reasonable space, to give a satisfactory account of the entities of arithmetic in this manner. In fact, the latter half of Volume I and the first half of Volume II of Principia Mathematica may be said to do nothing but just this. However, we may, as an illustration, follow out the analysis of the idea of "cardinal number". This will be tedious but, with patience, it is highly instructive. We shall first collect the definitions which are involved, beginning with the definition of cardinal number and proceeding backward to the definition of the entities in terms of which cardinal number is defined, and then to the entities in terms of which these are defined, and so on. 12 *100-02 NC - D Xc. Df "Cardinal number" is the defined equivalent of "the domain of (the rela tion) Xc". *33-01 D = aR[a = .r{(32/l . x R y]. Df "D" is the relation of (a class) a to (a relation) R, when a and R are such that a is (the class) x which has the relation R to (something or other) y. That is, "D" is the relation of a class of .T S, each of which has the relation R to something or other, to that relation R itself. *30-01 R y = (ix)(xRy). Df " R y" means "the x which has the relation R to ?/". Putting together this definition of the use of the symbol and the definition of "D", we see that "D Xc" is "the x which has the relation D to Nc", and this x is a class a such that every member of a has the rela- 12 The place of any definition quoted, in Principia, is indicated by the reference number. The " translations" of these definitions are necessarily ambiguous and sometimes inaccurate, and, of course, any "translation" must anticipate what here follows but in Principia precedes. Symbolic Logic, Logistic, and Mathematical Method 347 tion Nc to something or other. "D /J" is "the domain of the relation R". If "R" be "precedes", then "D7T will be "the class of all those things which precede anything". "Cardinal number", "NC," is defined as "D Nc", "the domain of the relation Xc". We now turn to the meaning of "Nc". *100-01 Nc = sm. Df " Nc " is the relation of the class of referents of " sm " to " sm " itself. First, let us see the meaning of the arrow over "sm". *32-01 R = ay[a = $(xRy)}. Df " R" is "the relation of a to y, where a and y are such that a is the class of x s, each of which has the relation R to y" . If " R" be "precedes", " R" will be the relation of the class "predecessors of y 7 to y itself. Now for "sm". We shall best not study its definition but a somewhat simpler proposition. *73-l asm/3. = . (3/0 .flcl ->1 . = I) /? . = G7? "a sm 0" is equivalent to "For some relation R, R is a one-to-one relation, while a is the domain of R and is the converse-domain of /?". We have here anticipated the meaning of "G /f" and of " 1 > 1". *33-02 Q = M[0 = y{(Xx).xRy}]. Df "G" is "the relation of (a class) to (a relation) R, when and R are such that is the class of # s, for each of which (something or other) x has the relation R to y". Comparing this with the definition of "D" and of "D R" above, we see that "Q /?", the converse-domain of /?, is the class of those things to which something or other has the relation R. If " R" be "precedes", "G*/?" will be the class of those things which are preceded by something or other. *71 -03 !->!== R(R"d R c 1 . R"D R c 1). Df This involves the meaning of "#", of ", and of " 1 " *32-02 R = 0.r|0 = $(xRy)}. Df "5" signifies "the relation of to x, when and .r are such that is the class of i/ s to which x has the relation R. ^37-01 fl"0 = if-((3y) .yep.xRy}. Df "#"0" is "the class of .r s such that, for some ?/, ?/ is a member of 0, and z has the relation R to ?/. In other words, "#"0" (the R s of the s) is the 348 A Survey of Symbolic Logic class of things which have the relation R to some member or other of the class 0. If "R" be "precedes", "fl"0" will be the class of predecessors of all (any) members of /?. With the help of this last and of preceding definitions, we can now read #71-03. "1 - 1" is "the class (of relations) R, such that whatever has the relation R to any member of the class of things-to-which-anything-has- the-relation-72, is contained in 1; and whatever is such that any member of the class of those-things-which-have-the-relation-#-to-anything has the relation R to it, is contained in 1 . " Or more freely and intelligibly : " 1 - 1 " is the class of relations, R, such that if a R 13 is true, then a is a class of one member and (3 is a class of one member: " 1 > 1 " is the class of all one-to-one correspondences. Hence "asmjS" means "There is a one-to- one correspondence of the members of a. with the members of (3. "sm" is the relation of classes which are (cardinally) similar. The analysis of the idea of cardinal number has now been carried out until the undefined symbols, except "1", are all of them logical symbols; of relations, R; of classes, a, /3, etc.; of individuals, x, y, etc.; of propo- sitional functions such as x R y [which is a special case of <p(x, y)]\ of " (px for some x", (3.x) . <px; the relations e, c, and =; and the idea (1 x)(<px), "the x for which px is true". This last notion occurs in various special cases, such as D^R, R"0, etc. " 1 " is also defined in terms which reduce to these, but the definitions involved are incapable of precise translation more accurately, ordinary language is incapable of translating them. *52-01 I == a{&x) .a = i x}. Df *ol-01 1 = 7. Df *50-01 7 = xy (x = y). Df 13 "7" is the relation of identity; "i" is the class of those things which have the relation of identity to something or other; and " 1 " is the class of such classes, i. e., the class of all classes having only a single member. Thus the definition of " 1 " is given in terms of the idea of individuals, x and y t of the relation = , of classes, and the idea involved in the use of the arrow over 7, which has already been analyzed. This definition of 1 is in no wise circular, however much its translation may suggest that it is; nor is there any circularity involved in the fact that the definition of cardinal number requires the previous definition of " 1 ". 13 Strictly, analysis of =, which differs from the defining relation, [. . . = ... Df], is required. But the lack of this does not obscure the analysis, so we omit it here. Symbolic Logic, Logistic, and Mathematical Method 349 We have now completely accomplished the analysis of the idea of cardinal number into constituents all of which belong to mathematical logic. The important significance of this analysis for the method involved we must postpone for a moment to discuss the definition itself. If we go back over these definitions, we find that the notion of cardinal number can now be defined as follows: "Cardinal number" is the class of all those classes the members of which have a one-to-one correspondence (with members of some other class). "Cardinal number" is the class of all the cardinal numbers; and a cardinal number is the class of all those classes whose members have a one-to-one correlation with the members of a given class. This is definition "in extension". We most frequently think of the cardinal number of a class, a, as a property of the class. Definition in extension determines any such property by logically exhibiting the class of all those things which have that property. Thus if a be the class com posed of Henry, Mary and John, the cardinal number of a will be deter mined by logically exhibiting all those classes which have a one-to-one correlation with the members of a i. e., all the classes with three members. "3" will, then, be the class of all classes having three members; "4", the class of all classes of four, etc. And "cardinal number" in general will be the class of all such classes of classes. It may be well to observe here also that, by means of ideographic sym bols, we can represent exactly, and in brief space, ideas which could not possibly be grasped or expressed or carried in mind in any other terms. Perhaps the reader has not grasped those presented: we can assure him it is not difficult once the symbolism is clear. And if the symbolism appals by its unfamiliarity, we would call attention to the fact that the number of different symbols is not greater, nor is their meaning more obscure than those of the ordinary algebraic signs. It is the persistent accuracy of the analysis that has troubled him; far be it from us to suggest that we do not like to think accurately. So much analysis may appeal to us as unnecessary and burdensome. But observe the consequences of it for the method. When "cardinal number" is defined as "D Xc," all the properties of cardinal number follow from the properties of "D" and "Xc" and the relation between these represented by . And when these in turn are defined in terms of "sm" and the idea expressed by the arrow, and so on, their properties follow from the properties of the entities which define them. And finally, when all the constituents of "cardinal number", and the other ideas of arithmetic 350 A Survey of Symbolic Logic have been analyzed into ideas which belong to symbolic logic, all the propo sitions about cardinal number follow from these definitions. When analysis of the ideas of arithmetic is complete, all the propositions of arithmetic follow from the definitions of arithmetic together with the propositions of logic. Now in Principia Mathematica it is found possible to so analyze all the ideas of mathematics. Hence the whole of mathematics is proved from its definitions together with the propositions of logic. And, except the logic, no branch of mathematics needs any primitive ideas or postulates of its own. It is thus demonstrated by this analysis that the only postulates and primitive ideas necessary for the whole of mathematics are the postu lates and primitive ideas of logic. In the light of this, we can understand Mr. Russell s definition of mathematics: 14 "Pure Mathematics is the class of all propositions of the form p im plies q where p and q are propositions containing one or more variables, the same in the two propositions, and neither p nor q contains any constants except logical constants. And logical constants are all notions definable in terms of the following: Implication, the relation of a term to the class of which it is a member, the notion of such that, the notion of relation, and such further notions as may be involved in the general notion of propositions of the above form." The content of mathematics, on this view, is the assertion that certain propositions imply certain others, and these propositions are all expressible in terms of "logical constants", that is, the primitive ideas of symbolic logic. These undefined notions, as the reader is already aware, need not be numerous: ten or a dozen are sufficient. And from definitions in terms, finally, of these and from the postulates of symbolic logic, the whole of mathematics is deducible. The logistic development of a mathematical system may, like the arith metic of the Formulaire, assume certain undefined mathematical ideas and mathematical postulates in terms of these ideas, and thus differ from an ordinary deductive system of abstract mathematics only by expressing the logical ideas which occur in its postulates by ideographic symbols and by using principles of proof supplied by symbolic logic. Or it may, like arithmetic in Principia Mathematica, assume no undefined ideas beyond those of logic, define all its mathematical ideas in terms of these, and thus require no postulates except, again, those of logic. Or it may pursue an 14 Principles of Mathematics, p. 3. Symbolic Logic, Logistic, and Mathematical Method 351 intermediate course, assuming some of its ideas as primitive but defining others in terms of a previously developed logic, and thus require some postulates of its own but still dispense with others which would have been necessary in a non-logistic treatment. But whichever of these modes of procedure is adopted, the general method of proof in logistic will be the same, and will differ from any non- logistic treatment. A non-logistic development will proceed from postulates to theorems by immediate inference or the use of syllogism, or enthymeme, or the reductio ad absurdum, and such general logical methods. Or it may, upon occasion, make use of methods of reasoning the validity of which depends upon the subject matter. It may make use of "mathematical induction", which requires the order of a discrete series with a first term. Or if proofs of consistency and independence of the postulates are offered, these will make use of logical principles which are most complex and difficult of comprehension principles of which no thoroughly satisfactory account has ever been given. The principles of all this reasoning will not be men tioned; it will be supposed that they are understood, though sometimes they are clear neither to the reader nor to the mathematician who uses them, and they may even be such that nobody really understands them. (This is not to say that such proofs are unsound. Proofs by " mathematical induction" were valid before Frege and Peano showed that they are strictly deductive in all respects. But in mathematics as in other matters, the assurance or recognition of validity rests upon familiarity and upon prag matic sanctions more often than upon consciously formulated principles.) As contrasted with this, the logistic method requires that every principle of proof be explicitly given, because these principles are required to state each step of proof. The method of proof in logistic is sufficiently illustrated by any extended proof of Chapter V. Proofs in arithmetic or geometry do not differ in method from proofs in the logic, and the procedures there illustrated are universal in logistic. An examination of these proofs will show that postu lates and previously established theorems are used as principles of proof by substituting for the variables p, q, r, etc., in these propositions, other expressions which can be regarded as values of their variables. The general principle (p -i </) -* (-? -* -P) can thus be made to state 352 A Survey of Symbolic Logic by substituting p q for p and p for q. Or if /* e XC be substituted for p and n e D Xc for q, it states [(/z e NC) -i (M e D Nc)] < [-(M e D Xc) -* -(M e XC)] Thus any special case which comes under a general logical principle is stated by that principle, when the proper substitutions are made. This is exactly the manner in which the principles of proof which belong to sym bolic logic state the various steps of any particular proof in the logistic development of arithmetic or geometry. Returning to our first example, we discover that in the first half, p q * p, is itself a true proposition. Suppose this already proved as, in fact, it is in the last chapter. We can then assert what p q -i p is stated by the above to imply, that is, -P -* "(p q) We thus prove this new theorem by using p q H p as a premise. To use a previous proposition as a premise means, in the logistic method, exactly this: to make such substitutions in a general principle of inference, like (p -J q) -I (-q -* -p) that the theorem to be used as a premise appears in the first half of the expression the part which precedes the main implication sign. That part of the expression which follows the main implication sign may then be asserted as a consequence of this premise. There are two other operations which may be used in the proofs of logistic the operation of substituting one of a pair of equivalent expressions for the other, and the operation of combining two previously asserted propositions into a single assertion. 15 The first of these is exemplified whenever we make use of a definition. For example, we have, in the system from which our illustration is borrowed, the definition p+q = -(-p-q) and the theorem 15 The operation of combining two propositions, p and q, into the single assertion, p q, is not required in systems based on material implication, because we have pqcr = pc(qcr) Symbolic Logic, Logistic, and Mathematical Method 353 If in the definition, we substitute -p for p and -q for q, it states -p + -q = -[-(-p)._(- r/ )] And then, making the substitutions which the theorem p = -(-p) allows, we have -p + -<i = -(P </) which may be asserted as a theorem. Again, if we return to the theorem proved above, "P -* -(p </) we are allowed, by this last equivalence, to make the substitution in it of -p + -q for -(p q). Thus we prove -p -* -p + -q This sufficiently illustrates the part played in proof by the substitution of equivalent expressions. We may now see exactly what the mechanics of the logistic method is. The only operations required, or allowable, in proof are the following: (1) In some postulate or theorem of symbolic logic, other, and usually more complex, propositions are substituted for the variables p, q, r, etc., which represent propositions. The postulate or theorem in which these substitutions are made is thereby used as a principle of proof which states, in this particular case, the proposition which results when these substi tutions are made. (2) The postulate or theorem of logic to be used as a principle of proof may, and in most cases does, state that something implies something else. In that event, we may make such substitutions as will produce an expression in which that part which precedes the main implication sign becomes identical with some postulate or previously proved theorem of logic, of arithmetic, of geometry, or whatever. That part of the expression which follows the main implication sign may then be separately asserted as a new theorem, or lemma, which is thus established. The postulate or previously proved theorem which is identical with what precedes the main implication sign, in such a case, is thus used as a premise. It should here be noted that propositions of logic, of geometry, of any logistic system, may be used as premises; but only propositions of symbolic logic, which state implications, are used as general principles of inference. (3) At any stage of a demonstration, one of a pair of equivalent expres sions may be substituted for the other. 24 354 A Survey of Symbolic Logic (4) If, for example, two premises are required for a certain desired consequence, and each of these premises has been separately proved, then the two may be combined in a single assertion. These are all the operations which are strictly allowable in demonstra tions by the logistic method. To their simplicity and definiteness is attributable a large part of the precision and rigor of the method. Proof is here not a process in which certain premises retire into somebody s reason ing faculty, there to be transformed by the alchemy of thought and emerge in the form of the conclusion. The whole operation takes place visibly in the successive lines of work, according to definite rules of the simplest possible description. The process is as infallible and as mechanical as the adding machine except in the choice of substitutions to be made, for which, as the reader may discover by experiment, a certain amount of intelligence is required, if the results are to be of interest. III. A "HETERODOX" VIEW OF THE NATURE OF MATHEMATICS AND OF LOGISTIC We have now surveyed the general character of logistic and have set forth what may be called the " orthodox" view of it. As was stated earlier in the chapter, the account which has now been given is such as would exclude certain systems which would almost certainly be classified as logistic in their character. And these excluded systems are most naturally allied with another view of logistic, which we must now attempt to set forth. The differences between the "orthodox" and this "heterodox" view have to do principally with two questions: (1) What is the nature of the fundamental operations in mathematics; are they essentially of the nature of logical inference and the like, or are they fundamentally arbitrary and extra-logical? (2) Is logistic ideally to be stated so that all its assertions are metaphysically true, or is its principal business the exhibition of logical types of order without reference to any interpretation or application? The two questions are related. It will appear that the systems which the previous account of logistic did not cover are such as have been devised from a somewhat different point of departure. One might characterize the logistic of Principia Mathematica roughly by saying that the order of logic is assumed, and the order of the other branches then follows from the meaning of their terms. On the other hand, the systems which remain to be discussed might, equally roughly, be characterized by saying that they attempt to set up a type of logical order, which shall be general and as Symbolic Logic, Logistic, and Mathematical Method 355 inclusive as possible, and to let the meaning of terms depend upon their properties of order and relation. Thus this "heterodox" view of logistic is one which takes it to cover all investigations and developments of types of logical order which involve none but ideographic symbols and proceed by operations which may be stated with precision and generality. In any case, it must be granted that the operations of the logistic method are themselves pre-logical, in the sense that they underlie the proofs of logic as well as of other branches. The assumption of these operations substitution, etc. is the most fundamental of all the assumptions of logistic. It is possible to view the subject in a way which makes such pre-logical principles the fundamentally important thing, and does not regard as essential the use of symbolic logic as a foundation. The pro priety of the term logistic for such studies may be questioned. But if such a different view is consistent and useful, it is of little consequence what the method ought to be called. We see at once that, if such a view can be maintained, Mr. Russell s definition of mathematics, quoted above, is arbitrary, for by that definition any "logistic" development which is not based upon logic as # foundation will not be mathematics at all. As a fact, it will be simplest to present this "heterodox" view of logistic by first presenting and explaining the cor relative view of mathematics. If to the reader we seem here to wander from the subject, we promise to return later and draw the moral. A mathematical system is any set of strings of recognizable marks in which some of the strings are taken initially and the remainder derived from these by operations performed according to rules which are independent of any mean ing assigned to the marks. That a system should consist of marks instead of sounds or odors is immaterial, but it is convenient to discuss mathe matics as written. The string-like arrangement is due simply to our habits of notation. And there is no theoretical reason why a single mark may not, in some cases, be recognized as a "string". The distinctive feature of this definition lies in the fact that it regards mathematics as dealing, not with certain denoted things numbers, tri angles, etc. nor with certain symbolized "concepts" or "meanings", but solely with recognizable marks, and dealing with them in such wise that it is wholly independent of any question as to what the marks repre sent. This might be called the " external view of mathematics " or " mathe matics without meaning". It distinguishes mathematics from other sets of marks by precisely those criteria which the external observer can always 356 A Survey of Symbolic Logic apply. Whatever the mathematician has in his mind when he develops a system, what he does is to set down certain marks and proceed to manipulate them in ways which are capable of the above description. This view is, in many ways, suggested by growing tendencies in mathe matics. Systems become "abstract", entities with which they deal "have no properties save those predicated by postulates and definitions", and propositions lose their phenomenal reference. It becomes recognized that any procedure the only ground for which lies in the properties of the things denoted as "constructions" in geometry is defective and un- mathematical. Demonstrations must take no advantage of the names by which the entities are called. But if Mr. Russell is right, the mathe matician has given over the metaphysics of space and of the infinite only to be plunged into the metaphysics of classes and of functions. Questions of empirical possibility and factual existence are replaced by questions of "logical" possibility questions about the "existence" of classes, about the empty or null-class, about the class of all classes, about "individuals", about " descriptions ", about the relation of a class of one to its only member, about the "values" of variables and the "range of significance" of func tions, about material and formal implication, about "types" and "system atic ambiguities" and "hierarchies of propositions". And we may be pardoned for wondering if the last state of that mathematician is not worse than the first. It is possible to think that these logico-metaphysical questions are essentially as non-mathematical as the earlier ones about empirical possibility and phenomenal existence. One may maintain that nothing is essential in a mathematical system except the type of order. And the type of order may be viewed as a question solely of the distri bution of certain marks and certain complexes of marks in the system. The question of logical meaning, like the question of empirical denotation, may be regarded as one of possible applications and not of anything internal to the system itself. Before discussing the matter further, it may prove best to give an illus tration. Let us choose a single mathematical system and see what we shall make of it by regarding it simply as a set of strings of marks. We take initially the following eight strings: (P D tf) = (~JP v 0) (pxq) = ~(~pv~q) (P = q) = ((P*q) *(<7=>p)) Symbolic Logic, Logistic, and Mathematical Method 357 ((p v(ry vr))D(r/v(p vr))) ((r/Dr)D((^ vry)D(p vr))) We must now state rules according to which other strings can be derived from the above. In stating these rules, we shall refer to quids and quods: these words are to have no connotation; they serve merely for abbreviation in referring to certain marks. (1) The marks +, x, D, ==, and =, are quods. (2) The marks p, q, r, are quids; and any recognizable mark not appear ing in the above may be taken arbitrarily as a quid. (3) Any expression consisting of two quids, one quod, and the marks ) and (, in the order (quid quod quid), may be treated as a quid. (4) The combination of any quid preceded immediately by the mark ~ may be treated as a quid. (5) Any string in the set may be repeated. (0) Any quid which is separated only by the mark == from some other quid, in any string in the set, may be substituted for that other quid any where. (7) In any string in the initial set, or in any string added to the list according to rule, any quid whatever may be substituted for p or q or r, or for any quid consisting of only one mark. When a quid is substituted for any mark in a string, the same quid must also be substituted for that same mark wherever it appears in the string. (8) The string resulting from the substitution of a quid consisting of more than one mark for a quid of one mark, according to (7), may be added to the list of strings. (9) In any string added to the list, according to (8), if that portion of the string which precedes any mark D is identical with some other string in the set, preceded by (, then the portion of that string which follows the mark D referred to may be separately repeated, with the omission of the final mark ), and added to the set. These rules are unnecessarily awkward. In the illustration, it was important not to refer to "propositions", "relations", "variables", "paren theses," etc., lest it should not be clear that the rules are independent of the meanings of the marks. But though cumbersome, they are still precise. The original eight strings of marks are, with minor changes of notation, 358 A Survey of Symbolic Logic definitions and postulates of divisions #1 to * 5 in Principia Mathematica. By following the rules given, anyone may derive all the theorems of these divisions and all other consequences of these assumptions, without knowing anything about symbolic logic either before or after. In fact, these rules formulate exactly what the authors have done in proving the theorems from the postulates. 16 For this reason, it is unnecessary to carry our illus tration further and actually derive other strings of marks from the initial set. The process may be observed in detail in Principia Mathematica: it is, in all important respects, the same with the process of proof exhibited in our Chapter V. The method of development in Principia Mathematica differs from the one w r e have suggested, not in the actual manipulation of the strings of marks, but most fundamentally in that the reasons why the principles of their operations are to be found, not in explicitly stated rules, but in discussions and assumptions concerning the conceptual content of the system. In fact, the rules of operation are contained in explanations of the meaning of the notation in discussions of the nature and properties of "elementary propositions", "elementary propositional functions", and so forth. For example, instead of stating that certain substitutions may be made for p, q, r, etc., they assume as primitive ideas the notions of "elementary propositions" p, q, r, etc. the notion of "elementary propositional functions" px, \J/z, etc. and the idea of "negation", indi cated by writing ~ immediately before the proposition. And in part, the rules of operation are contained in certain postulates, distinguished by their non-symbolic form: "If p is an elementary proposition, ~p is an elementary proposition", "If p and q are elementary propositions, pvq is an elementary proposition", and "If (pp and ij/p are elementary propo sitional functions which take elementary propositions as arguments, <pp v $p is an elementary propositional function. The warrant for the substitution of various complexes for p, q } r, etc., is contained in these. The operation which requires our complicated rule (9), whiich states precisely what may be done, is covered by their assumptions: "Anything implied by a true elementary proposition is true", and "When <px can be asserted, where x is a real variable, and <px D \f/x can be asserted, where x is a real variable, then ipx can be asserted, where x is a real variable". To make the con nection between these and our rule, we must remember that 3 is the 16 With the single and unimportant except ion that they do not add every new string which they arrive at, to the list of strings. Many such are simply asserted as lemmas, used immediately for one further proof and not listed as theorems. Symbolic Logic, Logistic, and Mathematical Method symbol for " implies", that if what precedes this sign is identical with some other string in the set, that means that what precedes is true or is asserted, and that the number of open and close parenthetic marks will indicate whether the implication in question is the main, or asserted, impli cation. We have chosen this particular system to illustrate the requirements of " mathematics without meaning" for a special reason, which will appear shortly. But the same sort of modifications would be sufficient to bring any good mathematical system into this form; and in most cases such modifications would be necessary. If, for example, the system in question were one of the better-known algebras, w r e should probably have "a class, K, of elements, a, b, c, etc.", and such assumptions as "If a and b are elements in K, a + b is an element in K". These would do duty as the principles according to which, for example, x + y would be substituted for a in any symbolic postulate or theorem. The changes in such a system would be less radical, hardly more than alterations in phraseology, but still necessary. Ileliance upon meanings for the validity of the method has obvious advantages. It is simple and natural and clear. (So is measuring two line-segments with a foot rule to prove equality.) It also has disadvantages. Besides the logico-metaphysical questions into which this reliance upon meanings plunges us, there is the disadvantage that it works a certain confusion of the form of the system with its content. The clear separation of these is the ideal set by "mathematics without meaning". Not only must mathematical procedure be free from all appeal to intuition or to empirical data; it should also be independent of the meaning of any special concepts which constitute the subject matter of the system. No alteration or abridgment of mathematical procedure anywhere should be covered by the names which are given to the terms. Only those relations or other properties which determine a system as a particular type of order should be allowed to make a difference in its manner of development. To secure complete separation of form from special content, and to present the system as purely formal and abstract, means precisely to use principles of operation which are capable of statement as rules for the manipulation of marks though, in general, the meticulous avoidance of any reference to " meanings " would be a piece of pedantry. The important consideration is the fact that the operations of any abstract and, really rigorous mathematical system are capable of formulation without any reference to truth 360 A Survey of Symbolic Logic or meanings. 11 We are less interested in any superiority of this "external view of mathematics", or in the conjectured advantages of such procedure as has been suggested, than in its bare possibility. If the considerations here presented are not wholly mistaken, then the ideal of form which requires 17 It is possible to regard such manipulation of marks, the discovery of sufficiently precise rules and of initial strings which will, together, determine certain results, and the exhibition of the results which such systems give, as the sole business of the mathematician. Mathematics, so developed, achieves the utmost economy of assertion. Nothing is asserted. There are no primitive ideas. Since no meanings are given to the characters, the strings are neither true nor false. Nothing is assumed to be true, and nothing is asserted as "proved". It is not even necessary to assert that certain operations upon certain marks give certain other marks. The initial strings are set down: the requirements of pure mathematics are satisfied if the others are got and recorded. Yet these initial strings and the rules of operation determine a definite set of strings of marks determine unambiguously and absolutely a certain mathematical system. To many, such a view will seem to exclude from mathematics everything worthy of the name. These will urge that the modern developments of mathematics have aimed at exact analysis into fundamental concepts; that this analysis does, as a fact, bring about such simplification of the essential operations as to make possible mechanical manipulation of the system without reference to meanings; but that it is absurd to take this shell of refined symbolism for the meat of mathematics. To any such, it might be replied that the development of kinematics as an abstract mathematical system does not remove the physics of matter in motion from the field of experimental investigation; that abstract geometry still leaves room for all sorts of interesting inquiry about the nature of our space : that for every system which is freed from empirical denotations there is created the separate investigation of the possible applications of this system. Correspondingly, for every system which is made independent of classes, individuals, relations, and so on, there is created the separate investigation of the metaphysical status of the classes, individuals, and relations in question of the application of the system of marks to systems of more special "concepts", i. e. to systems of logical and metaphysical entities. That we are more interested in the applications of a system than in its rigorous development, more interested .in its "meaning" than in its structure, should not lead to a confusion of meaning with structure, of applications with method of development. It may be further objected that this view seems to remove mathematics from the field of science altogether and make it simply an art; that the computer would, by this definition, be the ideal mathematician. But there is one feature of mathematics, even as a system of marks, which is not, and cannot be made, mechanical. Valid results may be obtained by mechanical operations, and each single step may be essentially mechanical, yet the derivation of "required" or "interesting" or "valuable" results will need an in telligent and ingenious manipulator. Gulliver found the people of Brobdingnag (?) feed ing letters into a machine and waiting for it to turn out a masterpiece. Well, master pieces are combinations achieved by placing letters in a certain order! However mechanical the single operation, it will take a mathematician to produce masterpieces of mathematics. A machine, or machine-like process, will start from something given, take steps of a deter mined nature, and render the result, whatever it is; but it will not choose its point of departure and select, out of various possibilities, the steps to be taken in order to achieve a desired result. Is not just this ingenuity in controlling the destination of simple operations the peculiar skill which mathematics requires? The mathematician, like any other sci entific investigator, is largely engaged upon what are, from the point of view of the finished science, inverse processes: he gets, by trial and error, or intuition, or analogy, what he presents finally as rigidly necessary. To produce or reveal necessities previously un noticed this is the peculiar artistry of his work. Symbolic Logic, Logistic, and Mathematical Method 361 that mathematics abstract not only from possible empirical meanings but also from logical or metaphysical meanings is a wholly attainable ideal. And if this is possible, then Mr. Russell s view that "Pure Mathematics is the class of all propositions of the form p implies q , etc.", is an arbitrary definition, and the ideal of form which it imposes is not a necessary one, but must take its chances with other such ideals. The decision among these will, then, be a matter of choice, dependent upon the advantages to be gained by one or the other form. There is no a priori reason why systems which are generated by " mathematical" operations, some of which may be peculiar to the system and meaningless in logic, are not just as "sound" and "good" and even "ideal" as systems developed by the com pletely analytical method of Principia Mathematica which reduces all operations to those of logic. And "extra-logical" modes of development may be just as universal as the "logical ", since symbolic logic itself may be developed by the "extra-logical" method. It was to make this clear that we chose the particular system which we did for our illustration. In fact, symbolic logic, or that branch of it which is developed first as a basis for others, must be developed by operations the validity of which is presumed apart from the logic so developed. It may, indeed, be the case that logic is developed by methods which it validates by its own theorems, when these are proved; it may thus be "self-critical", or "circular" in a sense which means consistency rather than fallacy. But this is not really to the point: if the validity of certain operations is presupposed, then that validity is presupposed, whether it is afterward proved valid or not. There is, then, a certain advantage in the explicit recognition that a system of symbolic logic is merely a set of strings of marks, manipulated by certain arbitrary and "extra-logical" principles. It is, in fact, only on this view that symbolic logic can be abstract. For symbolic logic, as has already been pointed out, is peculiar among mathematical systems in that its postu lates and theorems are used to state proofs. If, then, the proofs are to be logically valid, these postulates and theorems must be true, and the system cannot be abstract. But if the "proofs" are required to be "valid" only in the sense that certain arbitrary and extra-logical rules for manipulation have been observed, then it matters no more in logic than in any other branch whether the propositions be true, or even what they mean. There is the same possibility of choice here that there is in the case of other mathe matical systems the choice which is phrased most sharply as the alterna tive between the Russellian view and the "external view of mathematics ^ It may be noted that if mathematics consists of "propositions of the form ( p im- 362 A Survey of Symbolic Logic If we take this view of mathematics, or any view which regards arbitrary mathematical operations as equally fundamental with the operations of logic, we shall then give a different account of logistic and of its relation to logic. We shall, in that case, regard symbolic logic as one mathematical system, or type of order, among others. We shall recognize the possibility of generating all other types of order from the order of logic, but we shall find no necessity in this proceeding. We may, possibly, find some other very general type of order from which the order of logic may be derived. And the question of any hierarchic arrangement of systems will then depend upon convenience or simplicity or some other pragmatic consideration. Logistic will, then, be defined not by any relation to symbolic logic but as the study of types of order as such, or as any development of mathematics which seeks a high degree of generality and complete independence of any particular subject matter. IV. THE LOGISTIC METHOD OF KEMPE AND ROYCE We should not care to insist upon the "external view of mathematics" and the consequent view of logistic which has been outlined. Other con siderations aside, it seems especially dubious to dogmatize about the ideal of mathematical form when there is no common agreement on the topic among mathematicians. But we can now answer the questions which prefaced this discussion: Are the fundamental operations of mathematics those of logic or are they extra-logical? And is logistic ideally to be so stated that all its assertions are metaphysically true or is it concerned simply to exhibit certain general types of order? The answer is that it is entirely a matter of choice, since either view can consistently be maintained and mathematics be developed in the light of it. 19 This is especially important for us, since, as has been mentioned, there are certain studies which would most naturally be called logistic which would not be covered by the "ortho- plies <? , where p and q are propositions containing one or more variables, etc.", and the theorems about "implies" are required to be true if proofs are to be valid, all mathematics must be true in order to be valid. On this view, " abstractness " can reside only in the range of the variables contained in p and q. 19 One case in which the "external view of mathematics" is highly convenient, is of especial interest to us. There are various symbolic "logics" which differ from one another both in method and in content. Discussion of the correctness and relative values of these is almost impossible unless we recognize that the order of logic can be viewed quite apart from its content that a symbolic logic may be abstract, just like any other branch of mathematics and thus separate the question of mathematical consistency (of mere ob servance of arbitrary and precise principles of operation) from questions of applicability of a system to valid reasoning. The difficulty of making this separation hampered our discussion of "implies" in the last chapter. Symbolic Logic, Logistic, and Mathematical Method 363 dox" view, since they are based, not upon logic, but upon an order prior to or inclusive of logic. These studies exemplify a method which differs in notable respects both from that of Peano and that of Principia Mathe- matica. And it seems highly desirable that we should discuss this alterna tive method without initial prejudice. It is characteristic of this alternative method that it seeks to define initially a field, or class of entities, and an order in this field, which shall be mathematically as inclusive as possible, so that more special orders may be specified by principles of selection amongst the entities. It is distinguished from the method followed by Peano in the Formidaire by the fact that it seeks to get special orders, such as that of geometry, without further "existence postulates", and from the method of Principia Mathematica by the attempt to substitute selection ivithin an initial order for analysis (defini tion by previous ideas) of newly introduced terms. The result is that this method is particularly adapted to exhibit the analogies of different special fields the partial identities of various types of order. The application of this method has not been carried out extensively enough so that we may feel certain either of its advantages or of its limita tions. The method is, in a certain sense, exemplified wherever we have various mathematical systems all of which satisfy a given set of postulates, but each or, say, all but one satisfying some one or more of the postulates "vacuously". For here we have an ordered field within which other and more limited systems are specified by a sort of selection. ("Selection" is not the proper word, but no better one has occurred to us.) It is particu larly in two studies of the relation of geometry to logic that the method has been consciously followed: 20 in a paper by A. B. Kempe, "On the Relation between the Logical Theory of Classes and the Geometrical Theory of Points," 21 and in Josiah lloyce s study, "The Relation of the Princi ples of Logic to the Foundations of Geometry". 22 We shall hardly wish to go into these studies in detail, but something of the mode of procedure and general character of the results achieved may be indicated briefly. Kempe enunciates the principle that "... so far as processes of exact thought are concerned, the properties of any subject matter depend solelj on the fact that it possesses form i. e., that it consists of a number of 2 Peirce s system of "logical quaternions" (see above, pp. 102-04) also exhibits something of this method. 21 Proc. London Math. Soc., xxi (1890), 147-82. 22 Trans. Amer. Math. Soc., vi (1905), 353-415. Some portions of the discussion of this paper and Kempe s are here reprinted article, "Types of Order and the System S," in Phil. Rev. for May, 1916. 364 A Survey of Symbolic Logic entities, certain individuals, pairs, triads, &c., certain of which are exactly like each other in all their relations, and certain not; these like and unlike indi viduals, pairs, triads, &c., being distributed through the whole system of entities in a definite way". 23 In illustration of this theory, he seeks to derive the order both of logical classes and of geometrical sets of points from assumptions in terms of a triadic relation, a c b, which may be read "b is between a and c". The type of this relation may be illustrated as follows: Let a, b, c represent areas; then ac-b symbolizes the fact that b includes whatever area is common to a and c, and is itself included in the area which comprises what is either a or c or common to both. Or it may be expressed in the Boole-Schroder Algebra as (ac) cb c (a + c), or a-bc + -ab-c = The essential properties of serial order may be formulated in terms of this relation. If ac-b and ad-c, then also ad-b and bd-c. If b is between a and c and c is between a and d, then also b is between a and d, and c is between b and rf. 24 abed Thus the relation gives the most fundamental property of linear sets. If a be regarded as the origin with reference to which precedence is deter- 23 "On the Relation between, etc.", loc. cit., p. 147. 24 Assuming ac b to be expressed in the Boole-Schroder Algebra (as above) by (ac) c b c (a + c) this deduction is as follows: ac-b is equivalent to (a c) c 6 c (a + c). ad-c is equivalent to (ad) cc c (a + d). By the laws of the algebra, (a c) c b is equivalent to a -b c = 0. b c (a + c) is equivalnt to -(a + c) b = -a b -c = 0. (ad) c cis equivalent to a -c d = 0. c c (a + d) is equivalent to -(a + d) c = -a c -d = 0. Combining these premises, i. e. adding the equations, we have a -b c + -a b -c + a -c d + -a c -d = 0. Expanding each term of the left-hand member with reference to that one of the elements, a, b, c, d, not already involved in it, a -b c d + a -b c -d + -a b -c d + -a b -c -d + a b -c d + a -b -c d + -a b c -d + -a -b c -d = By the law "If a + b = 0, a = 0", we get from this, (1) a -b d (c + -c) + -a b -d (c + -c) = Q = a-bd + -ab -d, and (2) b -c d (a + -a) + -b c -d (a + -a) = 0=b-cd + -bc -d. (1) is equivalent to (ad) cb c(a+d), or ad-b, and (2) is equivalent to (b d) c c c (b + d), or bd-c. Symbolic Logic, Logistic, and Mathematical Method 365 mined, ac-b will represent "6 precedes c", and a d-c that "c precedes d". Since ac-b and a d-c together give a d-b, we have: if "b precedes c" and "c precedes d", then "6 precedes rf". Hence this relation has the essential transitivity of serial order, with the added precision that it retains reference to the origin from which " precedes" is determined. The last-mentioned property of this relation makes possible an inter pretation of it for logical classes in which it becomes more general than the inclusion relation of ordinary syllogistic reasoning. If there should be inhabitants of Mars whose logical sense coincided with our own so that any conclusion which we regarded as valid would seem valid to them, and vice versa but whose psychology was somewhat different from ours, these Martians might prefer to remark that "b is between a and c", rather than to note that "All a is b and all b is c". These Martians might then carry on successfully all their reasoning in terms of this triadic between relation. For ac-b, meaning -a b -c + a -b c = is a general relation which, in the special case where a is the "null" class contained in every class, becomes the familiar "b is contained in c" or " All b is c ". By virtue of the transitivity pointed out above, c b and d-c together give d-b, which is the syllogism in Barbara, "If all b is c and all c is d, then all b is d". Hence these Martians would possess a mode of reasoning more comprehensive than our own and including our own as a special case. The triadic relation of Kempe is, then, a very powerful one, and capable of representing the most fundamental relations not only in logic but in all those departments of our systematic thinking where unsymmetrical transitive (serial) relations are important. 25 In terms of these triads, Kempe states the properties of his "base system", from whose order the relations of logic and geometry both are derived. The "base system" consists of an infinite number of homogeneous elements, each having an infinite number of equivalents. It is assumed that triads are disposed in this system according to the following laws: 26 2 * It should be pointed out that while capable of expressing such relations, this triadic relation is itself not necessarily unsymmetrical: ac-b and ab-c may both be true that case, b = c, as may be verified by adding the equations for these two triads for any a and b, ab-a and ab-b always hold-& is always contained in itself, triadic relation represents serial order with the qualification that any term itself or is "between" itself and any other-an entirely intelligible and . vention. 26 See Kempe s paper, loc. cit., pp. 148-49. 366 A Survey of Symbolic Logic 1. If we have a b p and c b-q, r exists such that we have a q r and c p r. 2. If we have a b p and c p r, q exists such that we have a q - r and c b r. 27 3. If we have a b-c and a = b, then c = a = b. 4. If a = b, then we have a c-b and b c-a, whatever entity of the system c may be. To these, Kempe adds a fifth postulate which he calls the Law of Con tinuity: "No entity is absent from the system which can consistently be present". From these assumptions and various definitions in terms of the triadic relation, he is able to derive the laws of the symbolic logic of classes and fundamental properties of geometrical sets of points. But further and most important properties of geometrical sets depend upon the selection of such sets within the "base system" by the law: 28 If we have a-p-q, b-p-q, and a-b-p does not hold; then p = q. a-p-q here represents a relation of a, p, and q, such that some one at least of ap-q, aq-p, pq-a will hold. If we call ab-c a "linear triad", then the set or locus selected by the above law will be such that no two linear triads of the points comprised in it can have two non-equivalent points in common. Of such a geometric set, Kempe says: 29 "It is precisely the set of entities which is under consideration by the geometrician when he is considering the system of points which make up flat space of unlimited dimensions". But there are certain dubious features of Kempe s procedure. As Pro fessor Royce notes, the Law of Continuity makes postulates 1 and 2 super fluous. And there are other objections to it also. Moreover, in spite of the fact that Kempe has assumed an infinity of elements in the "base set", there are certain ambiguities and difficulties about the application of his principles to infinite collections. In Professor Royce s paper, we have no such blanket assumption as the Law of Continuity, and the relations defined may be extended without difficulty to infinite sets. We have here, in place of the "base system" and triadic relations, the "system 2", the " ^-relation " and the "0-rela- 27 If the reader will draw the triangle, a be, and put in the " betweens" as indicated, the geometrical significance of these postulates will be evident. I have changed a little the order of Kempe s terms so that both 1 and 2 will be illustrated by the same triangle. 28 See Kempe s paper, loc. dt., pp. 176-77. 29 Ibid., p. 177. Symbolic Logic, Logistic, and Mathematical Method 367 tion". The ^-relation is a polyadic relation such that F(ab. . ./.rz/. . .) is expressible in the Boole-Schroder Algebra as a b ... -x -y . . . + -a -6 ... x y . . . =0 This is the generalization of Kempe s a c-b, which is F(ac/b). The 0-rela- tion is a polyadic symmetrical relation which expresses simultaneously a whole set of equivalent F-relations. 0(abc. . .) is expressible as a b c . . . + -a -b -c . . . = We have used the algebra of classes to express these relations, but in Professor Royce s paper, this order is, of course, reversed. In terms of 0- relations, the ideas of the logic of classes are defined, and from the postula- tion of certain -relations, the laws of the symbolic logic of classes are de rived. And, in most interesting ways which we cannot here discuss, the order of the system 2 is also shown to possess all the fundamental proper ties of geometric sets of points. The system 2 has a structure such that it might be called "the logical continuum", and there are good grounds for presuming that types of order in the greatest variety may be specified within the system simply by selection. In the words of Professor Royce: 30 " Wherever a linear series is in question, wherever an origin of coordi nates is employed, wherever cause and effect , ground and consequence, orientation in space or direction of tendency in time are in question, the diadic asymmetrical relations involved are essentially the same as the rela tion here symbolized by p -< ,, q, [ q is "between" y and p ; or, with y as origin, p precedes </ ; or, where y is the null-class, p is contained in q ; or, in terms of propositions, p implies q 1 ]. This expression, then, is due to certain of our best established practical instincts and to some of our best fixed intellectual habits. Yet it is not the only expression for the relations involved. It is in several respects inferior to the more direct expression in terms of 0-relations. . . . When, in fact, we attempt to de scribe the relations of the system S merely in terms of the antecedent- consequent relation, we not only limit ourselves to an arbitrary choice of origin [y in p < q], but miss the power to survey at a glance relations of more than a diadic, or triadic character." V. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION There are, then, in general, three types of logistic procedure. There is, first, the "simple logistic method", as we may call it the most obvious 30 "The Relations of the Principles of Logic, etc.," loc. tit., pp. 381-82. 368 A Survey of Symbolic Logic one, in which the various branches of pure mathematics, taken in the non- logistic but abstract form, are simply translated into the logistic terms which symbolize ideographically the relations involved in proof. When this translation is made, the proofs in arithmetic, or geometry, etc., will be simply special cases of the propositions of symbolic logic. But other branches than logic will have their own primitive or undefined ideas and their own postulates in terms of these. We have used Peano s Formulaire as an illustration of this method, although the Formulaire has, to an extent, the characters of the procedure to be mentioned next. Second, there is the hierarchic method, or the method of complete analysis, exemplified by Principia Mathematica. Here the calculus of propositions (or implications) is first developed, because by its postulates and theorems all the proofs of other branches are to be stated. And, further, all the terms and relations of other branches are to be so analyzed, i. e., defined, that from their defini tion and the propositions of the logic alone, without additional primitive ideas or postulates, all the properties of these terms will follow. And, third, there is the method of Kempe and Royce. This method aims to generate initially an order which is not only general, as is the order of logic, but inclusive, so that the type of order of various special fields (in as large number and variety as possible) may be derived simply by selection i. e., by postulates which determine the class which exhibits this special order as a selection of members of the initially ordered field. 31 For this third method, other types of order will not necessarily be based upon the order of logic: in the only good examples which we have of the method, logic is itself derived from a more inclusive order. The sense in which such a procedure may still be regarded as logistic has been made clear in what precedes. Which of these methods will, in the end, prove most powerful, no one can say at present. The w T hole subject of logistic is too new and un developed. But certain characters of each, indicating their adaptability, or the lack of it, to certain ends, can be pointed out. The hierarchic or completely analytic method has a certain imposing quality which right fully commands attention. One feels that here, for once, we have got to the bottom of things. Any work in which this method is extensively carried out, as it is in Principia Mathematica, is certainly monumental. Further, the method has the advantage of setting forth various branches of the subject investigated in the order of their logical simplicity. And the step 31 Professor Royce used to say facetiously that the system S had some of the properties of a junk heap or a New England attic. Almost everything might, be found in it: the ques tion was, how to get these things out. Symbolic Logic, Logistic, and Mathematical Method 3G9 from one such division to another based upon it is always such as to make clear the connection between the two. The initial analyses definitions which make such steps possible are, indeed, likely to tax our powers, but once the initial analysis is correctly performed, the theorems concerning the derived order will be demonstrable by processes which have already become familiar and even stereotyped. The great disadvantage of this completely analytic method is its great complexity and the consequent tediousness of its application. It is fairly discouraging to realize that the properties of cardinal number require some four hundred pages of prolegomena in a symbolism of great compactness for their demonstration. To those whose interests are simply "mathematical" or "scientific" in the ordinary sense, it is forbidding. The simple logistic method offers an obvious short-cut. It preserves the notable advantages of logistic in general the brevity and precision of ideographic symbols, and the consequent assurance of correctness. And since it differs from the non-logistic treatment in little save the introduction of the logical symbols, it makes possible the presentation of the subject in hand in the briefest possible form. When successful, it achieves the acme of succinctness and clearness. Its shortcoming lies in the fact that, having attempted little which cannot be accomplished without logistic, it achieves little more than is attained by the ordinary abstract and deductive presenta tion. For what it is, it cannot be improved upon; but those who are inter ested in the comparison of types of order, or the precise analysis of mathe matical concepts, will ask for something further. No one knows how far the third method that of Kempe and Royce can be carried, or whether the system 2, or some other very inclusive type of order, will be found to contain any large number, or all, of the various special orders in which we are interested. But we can see that, so far as it works, this method gives a maximum of useful result with a minimum of complication. It avoids the complexities of the completely analytic method, yet it is certain to disclose whatever analogies exist between various systems, by the fact that its terms are allowed to denote ambiguously anything which has the relations in question, or relations of precisely that type. In another important respect, also, advantage seems to lie with this method. One would hardly care to invent a new geometry by the analytical procedure ; it is difficult enough to present one whose properties are already familiar. Nor would one be likely to discover the possibility of a new system by the simple logistic procedure. With either of these two methods, we need 25 370 A Survey of Symbolic Logic to know where we are going, or we shall go nowhere. By contrast, the third method is that of the pathfinder. The prospect of the novel is here much greater. The system S may, probably does, contain new continents of order whose existence we do not even suspect. And some chance trans formation may put us, suddenly and unexpectedly, in possession of such previously unexplored fields. The outstanding difficulty of the method, apart from our real ignorance of its possibilities, seems to be that it must rely upon devices which are not at all obvious. It may not tax severely the analytical powers, but it is certain to tax the ingenuity. Having set up, for example, the general order of geometrical points, one may be at a loss how to specify "lines" having the properties of Euclidean parallels. In this respect, the analytic method is superior. But the prospect of generality without complexity, which the third method seems to offer, is most enticing. We have spoken of symbolic logic, logistic and mathematics. It may well be questioned whether the method of logistic does not admit of useful application beyond the field of mathematics. Symbolic logic is an instru ment as much more flexible and more powerful than Aristotelian logic as modern science is more complex than its medieval counterpart. Some of the advantages which might have accrued to alchemy, had the alchemists reduced their speculations to syllogisms, might well accrue to modern sci ence through the use of symbolic logic. The use of ideographic symbolism is capable of making quite the same difference in the case of propositions and reasoning that it has already made in the case of numbers and reckoning. It is reported that the early Australian settlers could buy sheep from the Bushmen only by holding up against one sheep the coins or trinkets repre senting the price, then driving off that sheep and repeating the process. It might be reported of the generality of our thinking that it is possible to get desired conclusions only by holding up one or two propositions, driving off the immediate consequences, and then repeating the process. Symbolic logic is capable of working the same transformation in the latter case that arithmetic does in the former. Those unfamiliar with logistic may not credit this but upon this point we hesitate to press the analogy. Certain it is, that for the full benefit that symbolic logic is capable of giving, we should need to be brought up in it, as we are in the simpler processes of arithmetic. What the future may bring in the widespread use of this new instrument, one hardly ventures to prophesy. Some of the advantages which would be derived from the wider use of Symbolic Logic, Logistic, and Mathematical Method 371 logistic in science, one can make out. The logistic method is applicable wherever a body of fact or of theory approaches that completeness and systematic character which belongs to mathematical systems. And by the use of it, the same assurance of correctness which belongs to the mathe matical portions of scientific subjects may be secured for those portions which are not stateable in terms of ordinary mathematics. Dare we make one further suggestion of the possible use of logistic in science? Since it seems to us important, we shall venture it, with all due apologies for our ignorance and our presumption. A considerable part seems to be played in scientific investigation by imagery which is more or less certainly extraneous to the real body of scientific law. The scientist is satisfied to accept a certain body of facts directly or indirectly observed phenomena, "laws," and hypotheses which, for the time being at least, need not be questioned. But beyond this, he finds a use for what is neither directly nor indirectly observed, but serves somehow to represent the situ ation. A physicist, for example, will indulge in mechanical models of the ether, or mechanical models of the atom which, however much he may hope to verify them, he knows to run beyond established fact. The value of such imagery is, in part at least, its concreteness. The established relations, simply in terms of mathematics and logic, do not come to possess their full significance unless they are vested in something more palpable. A great deal of what passes for "hypothesis" and "theory" seems to have, in part at least, this character and this value; if it were not for the greater "sug- gestiveness" of the concrete, much of this would have no reason for being. Now whoever has worked with the precise and terse formulations of logistic realizes that it is capable of performing some of the offices of concrete imagery. Its brevity enables more facts to be "seen" at once, thought of together, treated as a single thing. And a logistic formulation can be free from the unwarranted suggestions to which other imagery is liable. Perhaps a wider use of logistic would help to free science from a considerable body of "hypotheses" whose value lies not in their logical implications but in their psychological "suggestiveness". But the reader will take this conjecture only for what it is worth. What seems certain is that for the presentation of a systematic body of theory, for the comparison of alternative hypotheses and theories, and for testing the applicability of theory to observed facts, logistic is an instrument of such power as to make its eventual use almost certain. Merely from the point of view of method, the application of logistic to 372 A Survey of Symbolic Logic subjects outside the field of mathematics needs no separate discussion. For when mathematics is no longer viewed as the science of number and quantity, but as it is viewed by Mr. Russell or by anyone who accepts the alternative definition offered in this chapter, then the logistic treatment of any subject becomes mathematics. Mathematics itself ceases to have any peculiar subject matter, and becomes simply a method. Logistic is the universal method for presenting exact science in ideographic symbols. It is the "universal mathematics" of Leibniz. Finis BIBLIOGRAPHY The following bibliography contains titles of all the positive contributions to symbolic logic and logistic in the strict sense with which I am acquainted, as well as some, taken from the bibliographies of Venn and Peano, of works which I have not been able to get. But it is not complete. A few of the numerous general discussions of symbolic logic and logistic have also been listed, and certain mathematical books and papers which, though not strictly logistic, are of special interest to the student of that subject. What are considered the most important contributions to symbolic logic, are indicated by an asterisk (*) preceding the title, while certain studies which should be especially helpful to students of this book are indicated by a "dagger" (f). Volume numbers of periodicals are given in bold-faced type. ADAMSON, E. The logical copula and quantification of the predicate. London, Nutt, 1897. ALSTED, J. H. Logicae systema harmonicum. Herbornae Xassoviorum, 1614. AMATO, V. La teoria dei numeri reali fondata sui concetti del Russell. BoU. Matem. (Rome), 9 (1910), pp. 198-205. ANDREOLI, C. Su un nuovo simbolo nell algebra della logica. Atti Soc. progr. Sci. (Rome), 4. Riunione Napoli, dicembre 1910, pp. 741 ff. BAIN, A. Logic: Part I, Deduction. London, Longmans, 1870. BARDILI, C. G. Grundriss der ersten Logik. Stuttgart, Loffland, 1800. BAYNES, T. S. An essay on the new analytic of logical forms. (Hamilton Prize Essay, 1846.) Edinburgh, Sutherland, 1850. Who discovered the principle of the quantification of the predicate? Contemp. Rev., 22 (1873), pp. 318-23. BENEKE, E. C. On the logical meaning of proper names. Proc. Aristot. Soc., 3 (1905), pp. 12-29. BENTHAM, G. Outline of a new system of logic. London, Hunt, 1827. BERNOUILLI, J. Parallelismus ratlocinii logici et algebraici (1685): Opera (Geneve, Cramer, 1744), 1, p. 214. BERNSTEIN, B. A complete set of postulates for the logic of classes expressed in terms of the operation "exception", and a proof of the independence of a set of postulates due to del Re. Univ. Calif. Publ. Math., 1 (1914), pp. 87-96. * A set of four independent postulates for Boolian algebras. Trans., Amcr. Math. Soc., 17 (1916), pp. 50-52. A simplification of the Whitehead-Huntington set of postulates for Boolian algebras. Amer. Math. Soc. Bull, 22 (1916), pp. 458-59. BOCHER, M. The fundamental conceptions and methods of mathematics. Amcr. Math. Soc. Bull, 11 (1904), pp. 115-35. BOLZANO, B. Wissenschaftslehre: Versuch einer ausfiihrlichen Darstellung der Logik. 4 vols. Sulzbach, Seidelschen Buchh., 1837. Neu herausgegeben von Alois Hafler, Leipzig, Felix Meiner, 1914. *BOOLE, G. The mathematical analysis of logic. Cambridge, Macmillan, 1847. *_ The calculus of logic. Camb. and Dublin Math. Jour., 3 (1848), pp. 183-98. On the theory of probabilities, and in particular on Mitchell s problem of the distribution of the fixed stars. Phil. Mag., ser. 4, 1 (1851), pp. 521-30. Further observations on the theory of probabilities. Ibid., ser. 4, 2 (1851), pp. 96-101. 389 390 A Survey of Symbolic Logic * An investigation of the laws of thought. London, Walton, 1854. Also re printed as vol. 2 of Boole s Collected logical works; ed. by Jourdain, Chicago, Open Court Publ. Co., 1916. Solution of a question in the theory of probabilities. Phil. Mag., ser. 4, 7 (1854), pp. 29-32. Reply to some observations published by Mr. Wilbraham . . . Ibid., ser. 4, 8 (1854), pp. 87-91. On the conditions by which the solutions of questions in the theory of prob abilities are limited. Ibid., pp. 91-98. Further observations relating to the theories of probabilities . . . Ibid., pp. 175-76. On a general method in the theory of probabilities. Ibid., pp. 431-44. On certain propositions in algebra connected with the theory of probabilities. Ibid,, ser. 4, 9 (1855), pp. 165-79. On the application of the theory of probabilities to the question of the combina tion of testimonies or judgments. (Keith Prize Essay.) Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin burgh, 21 (1857), pp. 597-653. * On the theory of probabilities. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. (London), 152 (1862), pp. 225-52. On the theory of probabilities. Phil. Mag., ser. 4, 25 (1863), pp. 313-17. Of propositions numerically definite. Trans. Camb. Phil. Soc., 11 (1868), pp. 396-411. BOOLE, MARY. Symbolical methods of study. London, Kegan, 1884. BOURDILLAT, F. La reforme logique de Hamilton. Paris, Hachette, 1891. BROWN, H. C. The logic of Mr. Russell. Jour, of Phil, Psych, and Sci. Methods, 8 (1911), pp. 85-91. BRUNSCHWIEG, L. Les etapes de la philosophic mathematique. Paris, Alcan, 1912. BRYANT, MRS. S. On the nature and functions of a complete symbolic language. Mind, 13 (1888), pp. 188-207. The relation of mathematics to general formal logic. Proc. Aristot. Soc., 2 (1901), pp. 105-34. BUFFA, P. Alcune formule di logica. Rev. de Mathem. (Turin), 7 (1900), pp. 56-58. Principi di logica. Period, Matem. (Livorno), 16 (1909), pp. 295-303, and 17 (1901), pp. 292-300. BURALI-FORTI, C. Teoria delle grandezze: Parte IV del Formulario. Riv. di Matem. (Turin), 3 (1893). Sulle classi derivate a destra e a sinistra. Atli Accad. Torino, 29 (1894). I numeri negativi. Riv. di Matem., 3 (1893), pp. 138 ff. Logica matematica. Milano, Hoepli, 1894. Exercise de traduction en symboles de logique mathematique. Bull, de Mathem. elementaire (Turin), 1897. Sur les differentes methodes logique pour la definition du nombre reel. Bibl. du Cong. Int. de Phil. (Paris), 1900, 3, pp. 289-307. Sui simboli di logica matematica. II Pitagora, 1900, pp. 65 ff., 129 ff. Sur 1 egalite et sur 1 introduction des elements derives dans la science. Enseign. mathem., 1901, pp. 246-61. Gli enti astratti definiti come enti relativi ad un campo di nozioni. Rend. Accad. Lincei (Rome), ser. 5, 21: 2 (1912), pp. 677-82. - Sulla teoria generale delle grandezze e dei numeri. Atti Accad. Torino, 39 (1903), pp. 256-82. BUSCH, M. Anfangsgriinde der logikalischen Algebra. Tubingen, Cotta, 1768. CANTOR, G. Beitrage zur Begrundung der transfiniten Mengenlehre. Math. Annalen, 46 (1895), pp. 481-512, and 49 (1897), pp. 207-46. Bibliography 391 Theory of transfinite numbers: translation by P. E. B. Jourdain. Chicago, Open Court Publ. Co., 1915. CARROLL, LEWIS [pseud.] see S. H. HODGSON. CASTELLANO, F. Alcune identita. Rev. de Mathem. (Turin), 7 (1900), pp. 58 ff. CASTILLON, G. F. Reflexions sur la logique. Berlin Accul. Mem., 1802. Sur un nouvel algorithme logique. Ibid., 1803. CAYLEY, A. On a question in the theory of probabilities (with discussion by Boole). Phil. Mag., ser. 4, 23 (1862), pp. 352-65. Note on the calculus of logic. Quar. J. of Pure and Appl. Math., 11 (1871), pp. 282-83. On compound combinations. Mem. Manchester Lit. and Phil. Soc., 26 (1877), pp. 99-100. CIPOLLA, M. Theoria de congruentias intra numeros integros. Rev. de Mathem. (Turin), 8 (1905). Specimen de calculo arithmctico integrale. Ibid. *CLIFFORD, W. K. Types of compound statement involving four classes. Mem. Man chester Lit. and Phil. Soc., 26 (1879), pp. 81-96. COHEN, M. R. The present situation in the philosophy of mathematics. J. of Phil., Psych. &c., 8 (1911), pp. 533-46. COUTURAT, L. La logique mathdmatique de M. Peano. Rev. de Metaphysique et de Morale, 7 (1899), pp. 616-46. Sur une definition logique du nombre. Ibid., 8 (1900), pp. 23-36. Sur la definition du continuum. Ibid., pp. 157-68. L algebre universelle de M. Whitchead. Ibid., pp. 323-62. f La logique de Leibniz, d apres des documents ine"dits, Paris, Alcan, 1901. Histoire de la langue universelle (en collaboration avec M. Leau.) Paris, Hachette, 1903. Sur I utilit6 de la logique algorithmique. C.-R., II Cong. int. de Phil., Geneve 1904. Les principes des math<5matiques. Rev. de Met. et de Mor., 12 (1904), pp. 19-50, 211-40, 664-98, 810-44, 13 (1905), pp. 224-56. Definitions et demonstrations mathe"matiques. Enseign. Mathem., 1905. Les definitions mathematiques. Ibid., pp. 27 ff. * Les principes des mathematiques, avec un appendice sur la philosophic des mathematiques de Kant. Paris, Alcan, 1905. f L algebre de la logique. Paris, Gauthier-Villars, 1905. f The algebra of logic; translated by L. G. Robinson. Chicago, Open Court Publ. Co., 1914. Pour la logistique: r6ponse a M. Poincare". Rtv. de Met. et de Mor., 14 (1906), pp. 208-50. La logique et la philosophic contemporaine. Ibid., pp. 318-41. f Die Prinzipien der Logik. Encyc. d. phil. Wiss., hrsg. v. A. Ruge, 1, Logik, pp. 137-201. The principles of logic; translated by B. E. Meyer. Encyc. of Phil. Sci., 1, Logic, pp. 136-239. For logistics. Mind, 22 (1912), pp. 481-523. Des propositions partlculieres et de la porte*e existentielle. Rev. de Met. et de Mor., 21 (1913), pp. 256-59. Sur les rapports logique des concepts et des propositions. Ibid., 24 (1917), pp. 15-58. La logique algorithmique et le calcul de probability. Ibid., pp. 291-313. DALGARNO, G. Ars signorum, vulgo character universalis et lingua philosophica. Ed. 4. Glasgow, Maitland Club, 1834. 392 A Survey of Symbolic Logic DARJES, J. G. Introductio in artem inveniendi seu logicam theoretico-practicam. Ed. 2. Jenae, 1747. Weg zur Wahrheit. 1776. DAVIS, E. W. Some groups in logic. Amer. Math. Soc. Bull, 9 (1903), pp. 346-48. DEDEKIND, R. Was sind und was sollen die Zahlen. Braunschweig, Vierwig. 1888. Stetigkeit und irrationalen Zahlen. Ed. 3. Braunschweig, Vierwig, 1905. Essays on the theory of numbers. (The two preceding translated by W. W. Beman.) Chicago, Open Court Publ. Co., 1909. DE LAGUNA, T. On certain logical paradoxes. Phil. Rev., 25 (1916), pp. 16-27. Opposition and the syllogism. J. of Phil, Psych., &c., 9 (1912), pp. 393-400. DELBOEUF, J. Essai de logique scientifique. Liege, Desoer, 1865. Logique algorithmique. Rev. Phil, 2 (1876), pp. 225-52, 335-55, 545-95. Also published separately, Liege et Bruxelles ; 1877. t*DEL RE, A. Lezioni di algebra della logica. Naples, 1907. Sulla indipendenza dei postulati della logica. Rend. Accad. Sci. (Naples), ser. 3, 17 (1911), pp. 450-58. *DE MORGAN, A. Formal logic; or, The calculus of inference, necessary and probable. London, Taylor, 1847. Series of five papers, "On the syllogism, etc." Trans. Camb. Phil. Soc. 1) 8 (1846), pp. 379-408. 2) 9 (1850), pp. 79-127. 3) 10 (1858), pp. 173-230. 4) Ibid. (1860), 331-*358. 5) Ibid. (1863), pp. 428-87. * Syllabus of a proposed system of logic. London, Walton, 1860. On indirect demonstration. Phil. Mag., ser. 4, 4 (1852), pp. 435-38. *DINES, L. L. Complete existential theory of Sheffer s postulates for Boolean algebras. Amer. Math. Soc. Bull, 21 (1915), pp. 183-88. DROBISCH, M. W. Neue Darstellung der Logik nach ihren einfachsten Verhaltnissen. Leipzig, Voss, 1836. DUFUMIER, H. Les theories logico-metaphysiques de MM. B. Russell et G. E. Moore. Rev. de Met. et de Mor., 17 (1909), pp. 620-53. Les tendances de la logique contemporaine. Rev. Phil, 74 (1912), pp. 359-78. La generalization mathematique. Rev. de Met. et de Mor., 19 (1911), pp. 723-58. La philosophie des mathematiques de MM. Russell et Whitehead. Ibid., 20 (1912), pp. 538-66. La logique des classes et la theorie des ensembles. Ibid., 23 (1916), pp. 623-31. ELLIS, A. J. On the algebraical analogues of logical relations. Proc. Roy. Soc. (London), 21 (1873), pp. 497-98. ELLIS, R. L. Boole s laws of thought. Report of British Assoc. for Advancement of Science, 40 (1870), (Sect.) pp. 12-14. EULER, L. Letters on different subjects in natural philosophy addressed to a German princess. New York, Harper, 1872. FAGGI, A. Sulla natura delle propozioni logiche. Palermo, Reber, 1898. FRANKL, W. M. Gegenstandstheoretische Beitrage zur Lehre vom sogenannten logische Quadrat. Arch. f. sys. Phil, 13 (1907), pp. 346-66. Ein Kalkul fur kategorische (Gewissheits-) Schliisse. Ibid., 19 (1913), pp. 1-8. FRANKLIN, F. A point of logical notation (proposing a numerical notation). Johns Hopkins Univ. Circ., 1 (1879-82), p. 131, Apr. 1881. FRANKLIN, MRS. LADD-. See LADD-FRANKLIN, C. FRECHET, M. Sur quelque points du calcul fonctionnel. Rend. Circ. Matem. di Palermo, 22 (1906), pp. 1-74. Les ensembles abstraits et le calcul fonctionnel. Ibid., 30 (1910), pp. 1-26. Bibliography 393 *FREGE, G. Begriffsschrift, eine der arithmetischen nachgebildete Formelsprache des reinen Denkens. Halle, Nebert, 1879. Anwendung der Begriffsschrift: Vortrag. Silz. d. Jena. Gesell. f. Med. u. Naturwiss., 1879. Ueber den Zweck der Begriffsschrift. Ibid., Jan. 1882. Die Grundlagen der Arithmetik, eine logisch-mathematische Untersuchung iiber den Begriff der Zahl. Breslau, Koebner, 1884. * Ueber formale Theorien der Arithmetik. Sitz. d. Jena. Gesell. f. Med. u. Naturwiss., 1885, pp. 94-104. Function und Begriff. Vortrag gehalten in der Sitzung vom 9. Januar. 1891, der Jena. Gesell. f. Med. u. Naturwiss., Jena, 1891. Ueber Sinn und Bedeutung. Zeitsch. f. Phil., 100 (1892), pp. 25-50. Ueber Begriff und Gegenstand. Viertelj.f. wiss. Phil., 16 (1892), pp. 192-205. * Grundgesetze der Arithmetik, begriffsschriftlich abgeleitet. 2 vols. Jena, Pohle, 1893-1903. Translated portions. Monist, 25 (1915), pp. 481-94, 26 (1916), pp. 182-99, 27 (1917), pp. 114-27. Kritische Beleuchtung einiger Punkte in E. Schroders Vorlesungen iiber die Algebra der Logik. Arch. f. sys. Phil., 1 (1895), pp. 433-56. Ueber die Begriffsschrift des Herrn Peano und mein eigene. Ber. d. ?nath. Klasse d. Gesell. d. Wiss. zu Leipzig, 6. Juli, 1896. GEISSLER, K. Ueber Xotwendigkeit, Wirklichkeit, Moglichkeit und die Grundlagen der Mathematik. Arch. f. sys. Phil, 11 (1905), pp. 1-26. Identitat und Gleichheit mit Beitriigen zur Lehre von den Mannigfiiltigkeiten. Zeitsch. f. Phil., 126 (1905), pp. 168-88. GERGONNE, J. D. Essai de dialectique rationelle. Ann. de Mathem. pure et appl., 7, pp. 189 ff. GEYSER, J. Logistik und Relationslogik. Phil. Jahrb., 22, 2. Heft. Grundlagen der Logik und Erkenntnisslehre. Mtinster, Schoningh, 1909. GILMAN, B. I. On propositions and the syllogism, with remarks by C. S. Peirce; and on propositions called spurious. Johns Hopkins Univ. Circ., 1 (1879-82), pp. 240- 41, Aug. 1882. Operations in relative number, with applications to the theory of probabilities. In Studies in Logic by members of Johns Hopkins Univ., pp. 107-25. GRASSMANN, H. Die lineale Ausdehnungslehre (1844). Leipzig, Wigand, 1878. *GRASSMANN, R. Die Wissenschaftslehre oder Philosophic. Stettin, Grassmann, 1872- 90. Issued in parts. GREGORY, D. F. On the real nature of symbolic algebra. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, 14 (1838), pp. 208-16. HADAMARD, J. La logistique et la notion de nombre entier. Rev. gen. des sci., 16 (1906), pp. 906-14. HAGEMANN, G. Logik und Noetik. Freiburg, Herd sche Verlagsbuchh., 1873. HAHN, O. Zur Axiomatik des logischen Gebietkalkuls. Arch. f. sys. Phil., 15 (1909), pp. 345-47. * Ueber die Koeffizienten einer logischen Gleichung und ihre Beziehungen zur Lehre von den Schlussen. Ibid., 16 (1910), pp. 149-76. *HAHN, O., und NEURATH, O. Zum Dualismus in der Logik. Arch. f. sys. Phil., 15 (1909), pp. 149-62. HALSTED, G. B. Professor Jevons s criticism of Boole s logical system. Mind, 3 (1878), pp. 134-37. Boole s logical method. J. of Specul. Phil, 12 (1878), pp. 81-91. Statement and reduction of the syllogism. Ibid., pp. 418-26. Algorithmic division in logic. Ibid., 13 (1879), pp. 107-12. 27 394 A Survey of Symbolic Logic The modern logic. Ibid., 17 (1883), pp. 210-13. Algebras, spaces, logics. Pop. Sci. Mo., 17 (1880), pp. 516-22. De Morgan as logician. J. of Specul. Phil, 18 (1884), pp. 1-9. Rational Geometry. New York, Wiley, 1907. HAMILTON, W. Discussions on philosophy. London, Longmans, 1852. Lectures on logic. Blackwood, Edinburgh, 1860. HAMILTON, W. R. Elements of quaternions. London, Longmans, 1866. HARLEY, R. Memorial of George Boole. Brit. Quart. Rev., 44 (1866), pp. 141-81. Boole s analysis of logic. Rep. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 36 (1866), (Sect.) pp. 3-6. Boole s laws of thought, Ibid., 40 (1876), (Sect.) pp. 14-15. Remarks on Mr. Murphy s paper. Mem. Manchester Lit. and Phil. Soc., 23 (1884), pp. 36-40. HARRIS, J. R. On the syllogism. Johns Hopkins Univ. Circ., 3 (1884), pp. 130-31. HAUBER, K. F. Scholae logico-mathematicae. Stuttgardiae, 1829. HEATH, A. E. The geometrical analysis of Grassmann and its connection with Leibniz s characteristic. Monist, 27 (1917), pp. 36-56. HERIGONE, P. Cursus mathematicus, nova, brevi, et clara methodo demonstratus per notas reales et universales, citra usum cuiuscunque idiomatis, intellectu faciles. (In both Latin and French.) Paris, 1644. HERMANT, P., et VAN DE VAELE, A. Les principales theories de la logique contemporaine. Paris, Alcan, 1909. HICKS, L. E. Euler s circles and adjacent space. Mind, n. s. 21 (1912), pp. 410-15. Is inversion a valid inference? J. Phil, Psych., &c., 9 (1912), pp. 65-70. Is inversion a valid inference? A rejoinder. Mind, n. s. 23 (1914), pp. 96-98. HILBERT, D. Grundlagen der Geometric. Leipzig, Teubner, 1899. HILDEBRANDT, T. H. A contribution to the foundations of Frechet s calcul functionnel. Amer. Jour. Math., 34 (1912), pp. 237-390. HILLEBRAND, F. Die neuen Theorien der kategorischen Schliisse. Wien, Holder, 1891. HOCKING, W. Two extensions of the use of graphs in elementary logic. Univ. Calif. Publ. Philos., 2 (1909), pp. 31-44. HODGSON, S. G. The game of logic by Lewis Carroll. London, Macmillan, 1887. Symbolic logic. London, Macmillan, 1896. HOFFMANN, J. J. Exacte Darstellung aller Urteile und Schltisse. Arch. f. sys. Phil., 11 (1905), pp. 317-22. See Nachtrag, Ibid., 12 (1906), pp. 55-58. Sprachliche Logik und Mathematik. Arch. f. sys. Phil, 19 (1913), pp. 43-49. *HOLLAND, G. J. VON. Abhandlung liber die Mathematik, die allgemeine Zeichenkunst, und die Verschiedenheit der Rechnungsarten. Tubingen, 1764. Briefe an J. H. Lambert. In Deutscher Gelehrter Briefwechsel, 1 (1781). HOMANS, J. La logique algorithmique. Rev. Neo-Schol., 9, no. 2. HONTHEIM, J. Der logische Algorithmus in seinem Wesen, in seiner Anwendung und in seiner philosophischer Bedeutung. Berlin, Dames, 1895. HOSKINS, L. M. General algebraic solutions in the logic of classes. Amer. Math. Soc. Bull, 15 (1908), pp. 84-85. HUGHLINGS, I. P. The logic of names: An introduction to Boole s laws of thought. London, Walton, 1869. HUNTINGTON, E. V. Simplified definition of a group. Amer. Math. Soc. Bull., 8 (1902), pp. 296-300. A second definition of a group. Ibid., pp. 388-91. t*- Sets of independent postulates for the algebra of logic. Trans. Amer. Math. Soc., 5 (1904), pp. 288-309. A set of postulates for real algebra. Ibid., 6 (1905), pp. 17-41. The continuum as a type of order. Reprinted from Annals of Math. (1905) by the Harvard Univ. Press. Bibliography 395 A set of independent postulates for cyclic order. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci., 2 (1916), no. 11. Complete existential theory of the postulates for serial order. Amer. Math. Soc. Bull., 23 (1917), pp. 276-80. Complete existential theory of the postulates for well ordered sets. Ibid., pp. 280-82. HUNTINGTON, E. V., AND KLINE, J. R. Sets of independent postulates for betweenness. Trans. Amer. Math. Soc., 18 (1917), pp. 301-25. HUSSERL, E. G. Recension, Schroders Vorlesungen iiber die Algebra der Logik. Gotting- ische Gelehrte Anzeige, 1891, pp. 243-78. Philosophic der Arithmetik, psychologische und logische Untersuchungen. Halle, Pfeffer, 1891. Der Folgerungscalcul und die Inhaltslogik. Viertelj. f. iviss. Phil., 15 (1891), pp. 167-89, 351-56. See also, Erwiderung . . ., von A. H. Voigt, also Antwort, Ibid., 17 (1893), pp. 504-11. A. Voigts "elementare Logik" und meine Darstellung zur Logik des logischen Calculs, Ibid., 17 (1893), pp. 111-120. JAGER, J. N. Handbuch der Logik. Wien, Heubner, 1839. *JEVONS, W. S. Pure logic, or The logic of quality apart from quantity. London, Stanford, 1864. The substitution of similars, the true principle of reasoning. London, Mac- millan, 1869. On the mechanical performance of logical inference. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. (London), 160 (1870), pp. 497-518. On a general system of numerically definite reasoning. Mem. Manchester Lit. and Phil Soc., 24 (1870), pp. 330-52. On the inverse, or inductive, logical problem. Ibid., 25 (1871), pp. 119-30. Who discovered the quantification of the predicate? Contemp. Rev., 21 (1873), pp. 821-24. The principles of science, a treatise on logic and scientific method. Ed. 3. London, Macmillan, 1879. * Studies in deductive logic. London, Macmillan, 1880. Elementary lessons in logic. New ed. London, Macmillan, 1904. * JOHNSON, W. E. The logical calculus. Mind, n. s. 1 (1892), pp. 3-30, 235-50, 340-57. Sur la th6orie des Equations logique. In Bibl. Cong. int. de Phil., Paris, 1900, 3, pp. 185-99. JONES, E. E. C. Mr. Russell s objections to Frege s analysis of propositions. Mind, n. s. 19 (1910), pp. 379-87. A new u law of thought" and its implications. Ibid., 20 (1911), pp. 41-53. JOURDAIN, P. E. B. De infinite in mathematica. Rev. de Mathem. (Turin), 8 (1905), pp. 121 ff. Transfinite numbers and the principles of mathematics. Monist, 20 (1910), pp. 93-118. f Development of theories of mathematical logic and the principles of mathe matics. Quar. J. of pure and appl. Math., 41 (1910), pp. 324-52, 43 (1912), pp. 219-314, 44 (1912), pp. 113-25. Some modern advances in logic. Monist, 21 (1911), pp. 564-66. The philosophy of Mr. B*rtr*nd R*ss*ll. Ibid., 21 (1911), pp. 481-508, 26 (1916), pp. 24-62. Mr. Bertrand Russell s first work on the principles of mathematics. Ibid., 22 (1912), pp. 149-58. The logical work of Leibniz. Ibid., 26 (1916), pp. 504-23. KAULICH, W. Handbuch der Logik. Prag, Lehmann, 1869. 396 A Sumy of Symbolic Logic KEMPE, A. B. Memoir on the theory of mathematical form. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc, (London), 177 (1886), pp. 1-90. See also, Note, Proc. Royal Soc. (London), 42 (1887), pp. 193-96. * On the relation between the logical theory of classes and the geometrical theory of points. Proc. London Math. Soc., 21 (1890), pp. 147-82. The subject matter of exact thought. Nature, 43 (1890), pp. 156-62. KEYSER, C. Some outstanding problems for philosophy. J. of Phil, Psych., &c., 2 (1905), pp. 207-13. The thesis of modern logistic. Science, 30 (1909), pp. 949-63. KIRGHER, A. Ars magna sciendi, in XII libros digesta. Amsterdam, 1669. KONIG, J. Neue Grundlagen der Logik, Arithmetik und Mengenlehre. Hrsg. v. Konig. Leipzig, Veit, 1914. KORSELT, A. Bemerkung zur Algebra der Logik. Math. Annalen, 44 (1894), pp. 156-57. Die Logik der Geometrie. Jahresber. d. Math. Ver. (Leipzig), 17 (1908), pp. 98-112. Was ist Mathematik? Arch. f. Math. (Leipzig), 21 (1913), pp. 371-73. KOYRE, A. Sur les nombres de M. Russell. Rev. de Met. et de Mor., 20 (1912), pp. 722-24. KRAUSE, K. C. F. Abriss des Systemes des Logik als philosophische Wissenschaft. Gottingen, Dieteiich, 1828. KREIBIG, J. K. Ueber die Paradoxen in der Logik Bolzanos. Viertelj. f. iciss. Phil, 28 (1904), pp. 375-92. KRIENELKE, K. J. H. Lambert s Philosophic der Mathematik. Berlin, Mayer, 1905. KVET, F. B. Leibnizens Logik, nach den Quellen dargestellt. Prag, Tempsky, 1857. LADD, CHRISTINE. See Ladd-Franklin. f*LADD-FRANKLiN, C. On the algebra of logic. In Studies in Logic by Johns Hopkins University, pp. 17-71. On some characteristics of symbolic logic. Amer. J. of Psych., 2 (1889), pp. 543-67. Some proposed reforms in common logic. Mind, 15 (1890), pp. 75-85. Dr. Hillebrand s syllogistic. Mind, n. s. 1 (1892), pp. 527-30. The reduction to absurdity of the ordinary treatment of the syllogism. Science, 13 (1901), pp. 574-76. Implication and existence in logic. Phil. Rev., 21 (1912), pp. 641-65. The antilogism an emendation. J. of Phil, Psych., &c., 10 (1913), pp. 49-50. Articles on Syllogism and Proposition in Baldwin s Diet, of Phil, and Psych. LALANDE, L. Le mouvement logique. Rev. Phil., 63 (1907), pp. 256-88. LAMBERT, J. H. Neues Organon. 2 vols. Leipzig, Wendler, 1764. * D e universaliori calculi idea, disquisitio. Nova Ada Eruditorum, 1765, pp. 441 ff. Anlage zur Architectonic. Riga, Hartknoch, 1771. Logische und philosophische Abhandlungen; hrsg. v. J. Bernoulli. 2 vols. Berlin, Bernouilli, 1782-87. *J. H. Lamberts Deutscher Gelehrter Briefwechsel; hrsg. v. Bernouilli. 4 vols. Berlin, Bernouilli, 1781-84. LANGE, F. A. Logische Studien. Iserlohn, Baedeker, 1877. LANGE, I. C. Inventum novi quadrati logici universalis in trianguli quoque formam commode redact!. Giessen, M tiller, 1714. Neucleus logicae Weisianae. Giessen, Miiller, 1712. *LEIBNIZ, G. W. Philosophische Schriften, hrsg. v. C. I. Gerhardt. 7 vols. Berlin, Weidmannsche Buchh., 1887. * Opuscules et fragments inedits . . . ; extraits de manuscrits de la Bibliotheque royale de Hanovre, par L. Couturat. Paris, Alcan, 1903. Bibliography 397 Leibnitiana, Elementa philosophiae arcanae, De summa rerum. Ed. Ivan Jagodinsky. Kazan, Imp. Univ., 1913. LEWIS, C. I. Implication and the algebra of logic. Mind, n. s. 21 (1912), pp. 522-31. Interesting theorems in symbolic logic. J. of Phil., Psych., &c., 10 (1913), pp. 239-42. A new algebra of implications and some consequences. Ibid., pp. 428-38. The calculus of strict implication. Mind, n. s. 23 (1914), pp. 240-47. The matrix algebra for implications. J. of Phil., Psych., &c., 11 (1914), pp. 589-600. A too-brief set of postulates for the algebra of logic. Ibid., 12 (1915), pp. 523-25. Types of order and the system.. .(Among Papers in honor of Josiah Royce on his Sixtieth Birthday.} Phil Rev., pp. 407-19, May 1916. The issues concerning material implication. J. of Phil, Psych., &c., 14 (1917), pp. 350-56. LIARD, L. Un nouveau systeme de logique formelle, M. Stanley Jevons. Rev. Phil., 3 (1877), pp. 277-93. La logique algebrique de Boole. Ibid., 4 (1877), pp. 285-317. f Les logiciens anglais contemporains. Ed. 5. Paris, Alcan, 1907. LICHTENFELS, J. Lehrbuch der Logik. Wien, Heubner, 1842. LIPPS, G. F. Untersuchung iiber die Grundlagen der Mathematik. Phil. Studien, 14 (1898), pp. 157-241. Logicae Compendium. [Anonymous.] Glasgow, 1764. LORIA, G. La logique mathe matique avant Leibniz. Bull des sci. Mathem., 18 (1894), pp. 107-12. LOURIE, S. Die Prinzipien der Wahrscheinlichkeitsrechnung, eine logische Unter suchung des disjunktiven Urteils. Tubingen, Mohr, 1910. LOWENHEIM, L. Ueber das Auflosungsproblem in logischen Klassenkalkul. Silzber. math. Gescll. (Berlin), 7 (1908), pp. 89-94. * Auflosung von Gleichungen im logischen Gebietekalkul. Math. Annalen, 68 (1910), pp. 169-207. * Ueber Transformationen im Gebietkalkul. /tad., 73 (1913), pp. 245-72. * Potenzen im Relativkalkul und Potenzen allgemeiner endlicher Transfor mationen. Sitzber. math. Gestll. (Berlin), 12 (1913), pp. 65-71. Ueber eine Erweiterung des Gebietekalkuls, welche auch die gewohnliche Algebra umfasst. Arch. f. sys. Phil., 21 (1915), pp. 137-48. LiiROTH, J. Aus der Algebra der Relative, nach dem 3. Bd. von E. Schroders Vorlesungen iiber die Algebra der Logik. Jahresber. d. Deutsch. Math.-Ver., 13 (1904), pp. 73-1 MAASS, J. G. E. Grundriss der reinen Mathematik. Halle, Ruff, 1796. Grundriss der Logik. Halle, Ruff, 1807. MACCOLL, H. Symbolical or abbreviated language with an application to mathen probability. Math. Questions, 28 (1877), pp. 20-23, 100. * The calculus of equivalent statements. (Seven papers and a note.) London Math. Soc., 9 (1877), pp. 9-20; ibid., pp. 177-86; 10 (1878), pp. 16-2 11 (1880), pp. 113-21; 28 (1896), pp. 156-83; 28 (1897), pp. 555-79; 29 ( pp. 98-109; Note, 30 (1898), pp. 330-32. (1897), (1903), On the growth and use of symbolical language. Mem. Manchester Lit. and Phil. Soc., 27 (1881), pp. 225^48. Implicational and equational logic. Phil. Mag., ser. 5, 11 ( >D, PP- 4 Question for logicians. Mind, n. s. 9 (1900), p. 144, 288, 432.) 398 A Survey of Symbolic Logic Logique tabulaire. Rev. de Met. et de MOT., 10 (1902), pp. 213-17. La logique symbolique et ses applications. Bibl. du Cong. Int. de Phil., Paris 1900, 3, pp. 135-83. La logique symbolique. Enseign. Mathem. (Paris), 6 (1904), pp. 372-76. Symbolic Logic and its applications. London, Longmans, 1906. Symbolic logic: A reply. Mind, n. s. 16 (1907), pp. 470-73. Linguistic misunderstanding. Mind, n. s. 19 (1910), pp. 186-99, 337-55. Problems, in Math. Questions 29 (1878), pp. 66-68; 33 (1880), p. 113; 35 (1881), p. 29; 36 (1881), pp. 50, 55, 72. *MACFARLANE, A. Principles of the algebra of logic. Edinburgh, Douglas, 1879. On a calculus of relationship (algebra of relationship). Proc. Roy. Soc. Edin burgh, 10 (1879), pp. 224-32; 11 (1880), pp. 5-13; 11 (1881), pp. 162-73. An analysis of relationship. Phil. Mag., ser. 5, 11 (1881), pp. 436-46. Analysis of relationships, of consanguinity and affinity. 18 pp. London, Harrison, 1882. Analysis of relationships applied to various problems. /. of Anthrop. Inst. (London), 1882. The logical spectrum. Phil. Mag., ser. 5, 19 (1885), pp. 286-90. Principles of the algebra of physics. Proc. Amer. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 40 (1891), pp. 65-117. On exact analysis as the basis of language. Trans. Texas Acad. of Sci., Feb. 1892, pp. 5-10. The fundamental principles of algebra. Proc. Amer. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 48 (1899), pp. 21-51. Les idees et principes du calcul geometrique. Bibl. du Cong. Int. de Phil., Paris 1900, 3, pp. 405-23. Problems, in Math. Questions 32 (1879), pp. 17-19, 74-77, 90; 35 (1881), pp. 103- 04; 36 (1881), pp. 27-28, 78-81. MAIMON, S. Versuch einer neuen Logik. Berlin, Felisch, 1798. MALLY, E. Zur Gegenstandstheorie des Messens. In Meinongs Untersuchungen zur Gegenstandstheorie und Psychologic. Leipzig, Earth, 1904. Gegenstandstheoretische Grundlagen der Logik und Logistik. Erganzungsheft zu 148. Bd. Zeitsch.f. Phil. (1912). MANNOURY, G. Methodologisches und Philosophisches zur Elementar-Mathematik. Haarlem, Visser, 1910. MARQUAND, A. A machine for producing syllogistic variations, and A note on an eight- term logical machine. In Studies in Logic by Johns Hopkins Univ., pp. 12-16. A new logical machine. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., 21 (1885), pp. 303-07. MEDOLAGHI, P. La logica matematica ed il calcolo delle probabilita. Boll. Ass. Hal. incr. scienza attuari (Milan), 18 (1907), pp. 20-40. Intorno al calcolo formale delle probibilita. Gior. Matem., 45 (1907), pp. 192- 200. MICH, J. Grundriss der Logik. Wien, Buchholz, 1871. MINEO, C. Logica e matematica. Riv. Ital. di Filos., 3 (1911), pp. 49-70. MITCHELL, O. H. On the algebra of logic. Johns Hopkins Univ. Circ., 1 (1879-82), p. 208, May 1882. On a new algebra of logic. In Studies in Logic by Johns Hopkins Univ., pp. 22-106. Note on Venn s review of Studies in Logic. . . . Mind, 9 (1884), pp. 321-22. MONTAGUE, W. P. The meaning of identity, similarity and non-entity: a criticism of Mr. Russell s logical puzzles. J. of Phil., Psych., &c., 3 (1906), pp. 127-31. MOORE, E. H. A definition of abstract groups. Trans. Amer. Math. Soc., 3 (1902), pp. 485-92. Bibliography On the foundations of mathematics. Amer. Math. Soc. Bull., 9 (1903), pp. 402-24. Introduction to a form of general analysis. New Haven Math. Colloquium (1910}] Yale Univ. Press, 1910; pp. 1-150. MULLER, E. See also Schroder, E. Ueber die Algebra der Logik: I. Die Grundlagen des Gebietekalkuls; II. Da3 Eliminationsproblem und die Syllogistik. Programm des Gymnasiums Tauber- bischofsheim, 1900. Ueber die Algebra der Logik und iiber die hinterlassene algebraische-logische Schriften von Ernst Schroder. Ber. int. Kong. Phil, Heidelberg 1908, 3, pp. 686-91. MURPHY, J. J. Relation of logic to language. Belfast Nat. Hist, and Phil. Soc., Feb. 1875. Fundamental logic. Mind, 2 (1877), pp. 47-55. On an extension of ordinary logic, connecting it with the logic of relatives. Mem. Manchester Lit. and Phil. Soc., 27 (1879), pp. 90-101. On the addition and multiplication of logical relatives. Ibid., 27 (1881), pp. 201-24. On the transformations of a logical proposition containing a single relative term. Ibid., 28 (1882), pp. 132-38. A new system of logical notation. Ibid., 32 (1888), pp. 22-32. A new symbolic treatment of the old logic. Ibid., 34 (1891), pp. 201-15. NAGY, A. Sulla rappresentazione grafica delle quantita logiche. Rend. Accad. Lincei, 6 (1890), pp. 373-78. Fondamenti del calcolo logico. Gior. Matem., 28 (1890), pp. 1-35. I teoremi funzionali nel calcolo logico. Riv. di Matem. (Turin), 2 (1892), pp. 177-79. " Principi di logica, esposti secondo le dottrine moderne. Torino, Loescher, 1892. Ueber Bcziehungen zwischen logischen Grossen. Monatshefte f. Math. u. Phys., 4 (1893), pp. 147-53. Ueber das Jevons-Clifford sche Problem. Ibid., 5 (1894), pp. 331-45. NASSO, M. Alcuni teoremi di arithmetica. Rev. de Mathem. (Turin), 7 (190 42-55. NATORP, P. Zu den logischen Grundlagen der neueren Mathematil Phil, 7 (1901), pp. 177-209, 372-438. NEURATH, O. See also Hahn and Neurath. Eindeutigkeit und Kommutativitat des logischen Produkte a b. Phil., 15 (1909), pp. 342-44. Ernst Schroders Beweis des 12. Theorems. Fur die identischen Oper gilt das "Kommutationsgesetz"? Ibid., pp. 104-06. Definitionsgleichheit und symbolische Gleichheit. Ibid., 16 (1 NICOLI, P. F. II metodo delle matematiche e 1 insegnamento elementare della logica. Riv. Ital. di Filos., 11 (1908), pp. 355-63. NEWLIN, W. J. A new logical diagram. J. of Phil., Psych., &c., 3 (1 PADOA, A. Conferences sur la logique mathematique. Univ. nouvelli 1898 Algebra elementare logicamento esposta. Conferenze tenuto nella R. Univ. di Pavia, 1899, pp. 35 ff . Essai d une theorie algebrique des nombres entiers, precede d une i logique a une theorie deductive quelconque. Bibl. du Cong. Int ^Theorie des nombres entiers absolus. Rev. de Mathem. (Turin), 7 (1900), pp. 1-41. 400 A Survey of Symbolic Logic Numeri interi relativi. (Translation of "Essai d une theorie . . . ".) Rev. di Mathem. (Turin), 7 (1900), pp. 73-84. Logica matematica e matematica elementare. Atti del II. Congr. dei Professori di Matem., Livorno 1902, pp. 186-200. Le probleme nr. 2 de M. David Hilbert. Enseign. Mathem., 5 (1903), pp. 85-91. Che cos e una relazione? Atti Accad. Sci. (Turin), 41 (1905-06), pp. 1084-92. Ideografia logica. Ateneo Veneto, 1906. Sul teorema Cantor-Bernstein-Peano. Period. Matem. (Livorno), 22 (1906), pp. 23-28. f La logique deductive dans sa derniere phase de developpement. Rev. de Met. et de Mor., 19 (1911), pp. 828-83; 20 (1912), pp. 48-67, 207-31. La logique deductive dans sa derniere phase de developpement. Paris, Gau- thier-Villars, 1912. , Des consequences d un changement d idees primitives dans une theorie deductive quelconque. Rev. de Met. et de Mor., 24 (1917), pp. 315-25. PASCH, M. Vorlesungen iiber neuere Geometrie. Leipzig, Teubner, 1882. PEACOCK, G. Report on recent progress and present state of certain branches of analysis. Rep. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 3 (1883), pp. 185-352. On symbolical algebra and its applications to the geometry of position. (Vol. 2 of A treatise on algebra.) Cambridge, Deighton, 1845. PEANO, G. Calcolo geometrico secondo 1 Ausdehnungslehre di H. Grassmann, preceduto dalle operazioni della logica deduttiva Torino, Bocca, 1888. Arithmetices principia, nova methodo exposita. Torino, Bocca, 1889. Sur la definition de la limite d une function; exercise de logique mathematique. Amer. J. of Math., 17 (1894), pp. 37-68. Sui fondamenti della geometria. Riv. di Matem. (Turin), 4 (1894), pp. 51-90. ["*- Notations de logique mathematique; introduction au Formulaire de Mathe matique. Torino, Bocca, 1894. Saggio di calcolo geometrico. Atti Accad. Torino, 31 (1896), pp. 3-26. Studii in logica matematica. Ibid., 32 (1897), pp. 3-21. Les definitions mathematique. Bibl. du Cong. Int. de Phil., Paris 1900, 3, pp. 279-88. Arithmetica generale e algebra elementare. Torino, Paravia, 1902. La geometria basata sulle idee di punto e di distanza. Atti Acad. Torino, 38 (1902), pp. 6-10. Super theorema de Cantor-Bernstein. Rev. de Mathem. (Turin), 8 (1906). *PEANO, G., redacteur. Formulaire de Mathematiques. Tome I, 1895; II, 1897; III, 1901; IV, 1902; V, 1908. Torino, Bocca, 1895-1908. In addition to Peano, the chief contributor, the other contributors were MM. Arbicone, Bellazzi, Boggio, Burali-Forti, Cantoni, Castellano, Ciamberlini, Giudice, Fano, Padoa, Vacca, Vivianti, et al. The successive volumes are comparable to new, revised and enlarged editions. Tome V is written in the proposed international language, Interlingua. PEIRCE, B. Linear associative algebras. New edition, with notes and addenda by C. S. Peirce. Amer. J. of Math., 4 (1881), pp. 97-229. PEIRCE, C. S. Complete bibliography, by M. R. Cohen, see J. of Phil, Psych., &c., 13 (1916), pp. 733-37. *PEIRCE, C. S. On an improvement in Boole s calculus of logic. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., 7 (1867), pp. 250-61. Upon the logic of mathematics. Ibid., pp. 402-12. Description of a notation for the logic of relatives. Mem. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., 9 (1870), pp. 317-78. On the application of logical analysis to multiple algebra. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., 10 (1875), pp. 392-94. Bibliography 401 Note on Grassmann s "Calculus of Extension". Ibid., 13 (1877), pp. 115-16. On the algebra of logic. Amer. J. of Math., 3 (1880), pp. 15-57. On the logic of number. Ibid., 4 (1881), pp. 85-95. On the algebra of relatives. 6 pp., 1882. Separately published without indi cation of the publisher. On the relative forms of quaternions. Johns Hopkins Univ. Circ., Feb. 1882, p. 179. A theory of probable inference. In Studies in Logic by Johns Hopkins Univ., pp. 126-82. t* The logic of relatives. Ibid., pp. 187-203. * On the algebra of logic; a contribution to the philosophy of notation. Amer. J. of Math., 7 (1885), pp. 180-202. The critic of arguments: Exact thinking, Open Court, 6 (1892), pp. 3391-94; The reader is introduced to relatives, Ibid., pp. 3415-19. Recension, Schroder s Vorlesungen, Bd. Ill: The regenerated logic, Monist, 7 (1896), pp. 19-40; The logic of relatives, Ibid., (1897), pp. 161-217. PESLOUAN, C. L. DE. Sur les fondements de I arithmetique et autres questions connexes. Rev. Phil, 10 (1907), pp. 372-97, 489-509, 568-92, 11 (1907), pp. 182-206. Les systemes logique et la logistique. Paris, Riviere, 1909. PIERI, M. Sur la geometric envisaged comme un systeme purement logique. Bibl. du Cong. Int. de Phil., Paris 1900, 3, pp. 367-404. Sur la compatibility des axiomes de 1 arithmetique. Rev. de Met. et de Mor., 14 (1906), pp. 196-207. Sopra una definizione aritmetica degli irrazionali. Accad. Gioenia di Catania, 1906. Uno sguardo al nuovo indirizzo logico-matematico delle scienza deduttive. Discorso letto inaugurandosi 1 anno accademico 1906-07 nella R. Univ. di^Catania. PLOUCQUET, G. Fundamenta philosophiae speculativae. Tubingen, Cotta, 1759. 18 Untersuchung und Abanderung der logicalischen Constructionen des Herrn Professor Lambert. Tubingen, Cotta, 1765. < Sammlung der Schriften welche den logischen Calcul Herrn Professor Ploucquet s betreffen. Frankfurt, 1766. " Institutiones philosophiae theoreticae sive de arte cogitandi. * Elementa philosophiae contemplativae, sive de scientia ratiocinandi. gart, 1778. POINCARE, H. Les mathe*matiques et la logique. Rev. de Mil. et de Mor., 1 15), pp. 816-35, 14 (1906), pp. 17-34, 294-317. A propos de la logistique. Ibid., 14 (1906), pp. 866-68. La logistique de 1 infini. Ibid., 17 (1909), pp. 461-82. The new logics. Monist, 22 (1912), pp. 243-56. The latest effort of the logistlcians. Ibid., pp. 524-3 POKORNY, I. Neuer Grundriss der Logik. Wien, Graeser, 1878. PORETSKY, P. On the subject of mathematical-logic. (In Russian.) Bull. Math. Soc. Kazan, 1881. First principles of mathematical-logic. (In Russian.) Ibid., li Logical equations, methods of solution, and inverse method of mathemat logic. (In Russian.) Ibid., 1884. Solution of the general problem of the theory of probabilities by i mathematical-logic. (In Russian.) Ibid., 1887. On the monograph of M. Volcov, Le calcul logique. (In Russian.) Ibid., U La loi de racines en logique. Rev. de Mathtm. (Turin), 6 (1896), pp. 5-8. AJO, iwi vie t.a\ji.^.a ^n i^gjivjv.^ t *_ . Sept lois fondamentales de la thSorie des elite s logiques. Bu Soc. Kazan, 1898. 402 A Survey of Symbolic Logic Expose e"le"mentaire de la thSorie des Sgalites logique & deux termes a and 6. Rev. de Met. et de Mor., 8 (1900), pp. 169-88. * Quelques lois ulterieures de la theorie des egalite"s logiques. Butt. Phys.-Math. Soc. Kazan, 1900-01. Theorie des egalites logiques a trois termes, a, b, and c. Bibl. du Cong. int. de Phil, Paris 1900, 3, pp. 201-33. Theorie des non-6galites logiques. Bull. Phys.-Math. Soc. Kazan, 1903. Theorie conjointe des egalites et des non-4galites logiques. Ibid., 1908. (The four most important papers by Poretsky those indicated by * are reprinted and issued separately by the Imperial Univ. of Kazan.) PRANTL, K. v. Geschichte der Logik im Abendlande. 4 vols. Leipzig, Hirzel, 1855-70. PROCHAZKA, I. J. Gesetzbuch fur das Denken. Wien, Gerold, 1842. REIMARUS, H. S. Vernunftlehre. Hamburg, Bohn, 1790. REYES Y PR6SPER, V. Christina Ladd-Franklin : Matematica americana y su influencia en la logica simbolica. Progr. Matem. (Zaragoza), 1 (1891), no. 12. Ernesto Schroeder: Sus merecimientos ante la 16gica, su propaganda logico- mathematica, sus obras. Ibid., 2 (1892), no. 14. REYMOND, A. Logique et mathematiques: Essai historique critique sur le nombre infini. Paris, Alcan, 1908. Note sur le theoreme d existence des nombres entiers, et sur la definition logis- tique du zero. Rev. de Met. et de Mor., 17 (1909), pp. 237-39. RIEBER, C. H. Is inversion a valid inference? Mind. n. s. 22 (1913), pp. 258-59. RIEHL, A. Die englische Logik der Gegenwart, mit besonderer Beriicksichtigung von W. S. Jevons. Viertelj. f. wiss. Phil, 1 (1877), pp. 150-80. RIQUIER, C. Des axiomes mathematiques. Rev. de Met. et de Mor., 3 (1895), pp. 269-84. Ross, G. R. F. Inversion and the diagrammatic representation of negative terms. Mind, n. s. 22 (1913), pp. 254-57. *ROYCE, J. The relations of the principles of logic to the foundations of geometry. Trans. Amer. Math. Soc., 6 (1905), pp. 353-415. Prinzipien der Logik. In Ruges Encyc. d. philosoph. Wiss., Bd. I, Loqik, pp. 61-136. Principles of Logic; translated by B. E. Meyer, pp. 67-135. i MJ .!_-/. j_j. .LVA^y ci j I- JK ^ * .LOU. An extension of the algebra of logic. /. of Phil, Psych., &c., 10 (1913), pp. 617-33. (See correction, p. 672.) RUSSELL, B. A. W. See also Whitehead and Russell. The logic of geometry. Mind, n. s. 5 (1896), pp. 1-23. On the relations of number and quantity. Mind, n. s. 6 (1897), pp. 326-41. An essay on the foundations of geometry. Cambridge Univ. Press, 1897. Sur la logique des relations. . . . Rev. de Mathem. (Turin), 7 (1901), pp. 115- 148. On the notion of order. Mind, n. s. 10 (1901), pp. 30-51. Theorie generate des series bien ordonnees. Rev. de Mathem. (Turin), 8 (1902), pp. 12-43. t*- Principles of mathematics: I. Camb. Univ. Press, 1903. No more volumes published. On denoting. Mind, n. s. 14 (1905), pp. 479-93. See also Notes by MacColl, Russell, and Shearman, Ibid., pp. 295, 398, 401, 578. Sur la relation des mathematiques a la logistique (avec une note de M. White- head). Rev. de Met. et de Mor., 13 (1905), pp. 906-17. The theory of implication. Amer. J. of Math., 28 (1906), pp. 159-202. Les paradoxes de la logique. Rev. de Met. et de Mor., 14 (1906), pp. 627-50. On some difficulties in the theory of transfinite numbers and order types. Proc. London Math. Soc., ser. 2, 4 (1906), pp. 29-53. Bibliography in:; Mathematical logic as based on the theory of types. Amer. J. of Math., 30 (1908), pp. 222-62. La the*orie des types logiques. Rev. de Met. et de A/or., 18 (1910), pp. 263-301. L importance philosophique de logistique. Ibid., 19 (1911), pp. 281-91. RSponse a M. Koyre". Ibid., 20 (1912), pp. 725-26. The philosophical importance of mathematical logic. Monist, 23 (1913), pp. 481-93. RUSSELL, F. C. Hints for the elucidation of Peirce s logical work. Monist, 18 (1908), pp. 406-15. SCHADEN, E. A. VON. System der positiven Logik. Erlangen, Palm, 1841. SCHEFFLER, H. Die Naturgesetze und ihr Zusammenhang mit den Prinzipien der abstrakten Wissenschaften. Leipzig, Foerster, 1876-80. See especially Part 3. SCHLOTEL, W. Kleine Bausteine zu einem Denkmale. Freiburg i. B., 1876. SCHMIDT, K. Studies in the structure of logical systems: The separation of problems. J. of Phil., Psych., &c., 9 (1912), pp. 197-204. The deductive system form. Ibid., pp. 317-21. Postulates. Ibid., pp. 431-40. The generating problem. Ibid., 10 (1913), pp. 64-75. f Inversion. Ibid., 9 (1912), pp. 232-34. SCHNIPPENKOTTER, J. Bedeutung der mathematischen Untersuchungen Coutourats fur die Logik. Phil. Jahrb. (Fulda), 23 (1910), pp. 447-68. SCHRODER, E. Ueber unendliche viele Algorithmen zur Auflosung der Gleichungen. Math. Annalen, 2 (1870), pp. 317-65. Lehrbuch der Arithmetik und Algebra. Leipzig, Teubner, 1873. Ein auf die Einheitswurzeln beziigliches Theorem der Funktionenlehre. Zeitsch. f. Math. u. Phys., 22 (1877), pp. 183-90. J-* Der Operationskreis des Logikkalkuls. Leipzig, Teubner, 1877. Ueber den Operationskreis (Note). Math. Annalen, 12 (1877), pp. 481-84. Recension, Freges Begriffsschrift. Zeitsch. f. Math. u. Phys., 25 (1880), Histor- isch-literarisch Abt., pp. 81-94. On the most commodious and comprehensive calculus: Exposition of a logical principle, as disclosed by the algebra of logic but overlooked by the ancient logi cians. Rep. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 53 (1883), (Sect.) pp. 411-12. Ueber das Eliminationsproblem im identischen Kalkul. Tageblatt der Natur- forscherversammlung zu Strassburg, 1885, pp. 353-54. Ueber Algorithmen und Kalkuln. Arch. f. Math. u. Phys., 1887, pp. 225-78. f* Vorlesungen iiber die Algebra der Logik (exakte Logik), Leipzig, Teubner; 1. Bd., 1890; 2. Bd. 1. Abth., 1891; 3. Bd., 1895; 2. Bd. 2. Abth., hrsg. v. E. Miiller, 1905. Eine Berichtigung zum ersten Band meiner Algebra der Logik. 36 (1890), p. 602. Ueber das Zeichen. Festrede bei dern Direktoratswechsel an der Technu Hochschule zu Karlsruhe am 22. November 1890. Karlsruhe, 1890. Ueber die Algebra der binaren Relative (Note). Math. Annalen, 46 (: >95), pp. 144-58. Ueber Pasigraphie, ihren gegenwartigen Stand und die pasigraphische Beweg in Italien. Verh. der 1. int. Math. Kong., Zurich 1898. On Pasigraphy; its present state and the pasigraphic movemen Italy; translation. Monist, 9 (1898), pp. 44-62. (See corrigenda, p. 320.) ^Sur une extension de 1 idde d ordre. Bibl. du Cong. Int. de Phil., Pans 1900, 3, pp. 235-10. f Abriss der Algebra der Logik; hrsg. v. E. iMiiller. Leipzig, Teubner; 1. T 1909; 2. Teil, 1910. (The third part not yet published.) SCHWEITZER, A. R. A theory of geometrical relations. Amer. J. of Math., 31 pp. 365-410, 35 (1913), pp. 37-56. 404 A Survey of Symbolic Logic Concerning linear protective order. Ibid., 34 (1912), pp. 169-76. Les iddes directrice de la logique gene"tique des mathe matiques. Rev. de Met. et de Mor., 22 (1914), pp. 175-97; also published by Univ. of Chicago Press, 1915. SEGNER, J. A. Specimen logicae universaliter demonstratae. Jena, Crocker, 1740. SEMLER, C. A. Versuch iiber die combinatorische Methode, ein Beitrag zur angewandten Logik und allgemeinen Methodik. Dresden, Walther, 1811. SETON, J. Dialectica. 1611. fSHAW, J. B. What is Mathematics? Review of Principia Mathematica, vol. I. Amer. Math. Soc. Bull, 18 (1912), pp. 386-411. Logistic and reduction of mathematics to logic. Monist, 26 (1916), pp. 397- 414. SHEARMAN, A. T. Some controverted points in symbolic logic. Proc. Aristot. Soc., n. s. 5 (1904-05), pp. 74-105. The development of symbolic logic. London, Williams, 1906. Mr. MacColl s views on logical existence. Mind, n. s. 15 (1906), pp. 143-44. Certainties, impossibilities and variables (reply to Mr. MacColl). Mind, 16 (1907), pp. 315-16. Definition in symbolic logic. Mind, 19 (1910), pp. 387-89. t The scope of formal logic. London, Univ. Press, 1911. *SHEFFER, H. M. A set of five independent postulates for Boolean algebras, with appli cation to logical constants. Trans. Amer. Math. Soc., 14 (1913), pp. 481-88. SIGWART, H. C. W. Handbuch zu Vorlesungen iiber die Logik. Ed. 3. Tubingen, Osiander, 1835. SOLLY, T. A syllabus of logic. Cambridge, Deighton, 1839. SPOTTISWOODE, W. Remarks on some recent generalizations of algebra. Proc. London Math. Soc., 4 (1871), pp. 147-64. STAMM, E. On the theory of relations and operations. (In Polish.) Prace mat.-fiz. Warszawa, 21 (1919), pp. 42-54. What is and what should be Mathematics. (In Polish.) Wiad. mat. Warszawa, 14 (1910), pp. 189-96. Principles of the algebra of logic. (In Polish.) Ibid., 15 (1911), pp. 1-87. STERZINGER, O. Logik und Naturphilosophie der Wahrscheinlichkeitslehre; ein um- fassender Losungsversuch. Leipzig, Xenien Verlag., 1911. STOKL, A. Lehrbuch der Logik. 8 Aufl., neuarbeitet v. Dr. G. Wohlmuth. Mainz, Kirchheim, 1905. STOHR, A. Logik im psychologisierender Darstellung. Wien, Deuticke, 1910. STOLZ, O. Vorlesungen iiber allgemeine Arithmetik, nach den neueren Ansichten bearbeitet. 2 vols. Leipzig, Teubner, 1885-86. STRACHEY, O. Mr. Russell and some recent criticisms of his views. Mind, n. s. 24 (1915), pp. 16-28. THOMSON, W. Outline of the necessary laws of thought. (From the 4th London ed.) New York, Sheldon, 1860. TONNIES, I. H. De logicae scientiae ad exemplar arithmeticae instituenda ratione. 1752. TRENDELENBURG, F. A. Logische Untersuchungen. Ed. 3. Leipzig, Hirzel, 1862. TRUAN-BORSCHE, M. Die ersten Schritte zur Entwicklung der logischen und mathe- matischen Begriffe. Langensalza, Beyer, 1912. TWESTEN, A. D. C. Die Logik, insbesondere die Analytik. Schleswig, Taubst-Inst., 1825. VAILATI, G. Un teorema di logica matematica. Riv. di Matem. (Turin), 1 (1891), pp. 103 ff. Le proprieta fondamentali delle operazioni della logica deduttiva, studiate dal punto di vista d una teoria generale delle operazioni. Ibid., pp. 127 ff. Sui principi fondamentali della geometria della retta. Ibid., 2 (1892), pp. 71 ff. Bibliography 405 Dipendenza fra le proprieta delle relazioni. Ibid., pp. 161 ff. La logique math6matique et sa nouvelle phase de developpement dans lea Merits de M. J. Peano. Rev. de Met. et de Mor., 7 (1899), pp. 86-102. VATER, J. S. Pasigraphie und Antipasigraphie; oder Ueber die neueste Erfindung einer allgemeinen Schriftsprache fur alle Volker, und von Wolkens, Leibnitzens, Wilkins und Kalmars pasigraphischen Ideen. . . . Leipzig, 1799. VEBLEN, O. A system of axioms for geometry. Trans. Amer. Math. Soc., 5 (1904), pp. 343-84. The foundations of geometry. In Young s Monographs on Topics of Modern Math., pp. 1-51. VENN, J. Consistency and real inference. Mind, 1 (1876), pp. 43-52. Boole s logical system. Ibid., pp. 479-91. On the various notations adopted for expressing the common propositions of logic. Proc. Camb. Phil. Soc., 4 (1880), pp. 35-46. On the diagrammatic and mechanical representations of propositions and reasoning. Phil. Mag., ser. 5, 10 (1880), pp. 1-15. On the forms of logical proposition. Mind, 5 (1880), pp. 336-49. On the employment of geometrical diagrams for the sensible representation of logical propositions. Proc. Camb. Phil. Soc., 4 (1880), pp. 35-46. j-* Symbolic logic. Ed. 2. London, Macmillan, 1894. Princeton Rev., Sept. 1883, pp. 247-67. Notice of Castillon s Sur un nouvel algorithm logique. Mind, 6 (1881), pp. 447-48. Catalogue of a collection of books on logic presented to the library by John Venn. . . . Univ. Library Bull. Extra series. Cambridge, 1889. VICTORIN, A. Neue naturliche Darstellung der Logik. Wien. Schaumburg, 15 VOIGT, A. Die Auflosung von Urtheilssystemen ... in der Algebra der Logik. Leip zig, 1890. Was ist Logik? Viertelj. /. mss. Phil., 16 (1892), pp. 289-332. Voss, A. Uebcr das Wesen der Mathematik. Leipzig, Teubner, 1908.^ WAGNER, L. H. Grundriss der reinen und allgemeinen Logik. Hof., Grau, 1( WARRAIN, G. Les principes des mathematiques de M. Couturat. Rev. de Phil., 8 pp. 517-29, 658-73. WERNER, H. Ein Beitrag zur Lehre logischer Substitutionen. t*WniTEHEAD, A. N. A treatise of universal algebra. Camb. Univ. Press, 189 t* Memoir on the algebra of symbolic logic. Amer. J. of Math., 23 ( 139-65, 297-316. * - On cardinal numbers. Ibid., 24 (1902), pp. 367-S * _ The logic of relations, logical substitution groups, and cardi Ibid., 25 (1903), pp. 157-78. * - Theorems on cardinal numbers. Ibid-., 26 (1904), pp. 31- * _ On mathematical conceptions of the material world. Phil. Trc (London), ser. A, 205 (1906), pp. 465-525. The axioms of protective geometry. Camb. Umy, - The axioms of descriptive geometry. Camb. Univ. Press, 1907. Introduction logique a la geometric. Rev. de Met. et de 1 Qd._ QQ - La theorie relationniste de 1 espace. Ibid., 23 (1916), pp. 423-54 t*WHiTEHEAD, A. N., and RUSSELL, B. Principia Mathematica. iplification of the logic of relatives. Ibid., 17 (1914), pt. 5, pp, 387-90. 406 A Survey of Symbolic Logic * Certain formal invariances in Boolian algebras. Trans. Amer. Math. Soc., 18 (1917), pp. 65-72. WILBRAHAM, H. On the theory of chances developed in Professor Boole s Laws f Thought. Phil. Mag., ser. 4, 7 (1854), pp. 465-76. WILKINS, J. Essay toward a real character and philosophical language. London, 1668. Mercury, or the secret and swift messenger. Ed. 2. London, 1694. WILSON, E. B. Logic and the continuum. Amer. Math. Soc. Bull, 14 (1908), pp. 432-43. Symbolic logic. Ibid., pp. 341-44. WINTER, M. Metaphysique et logique mathematique. Rev. de Met. et de Mor., 13 (1905), pp. 589-619. Application de Talgebre de logique a une controverse juridique. Ibid., 14 (1906), pp. 617-25. Sur Introduction logique a la theorie des foncotins. Ibid., 15 (1907), pp. 186-216. Les principes du calcul fonctionnel. Ibid., 21 (1913), pp. 462-510. WOLF, A. Existential import of categorical predication. Camb. Univ. Press, 1905. WUNDT, W. Logik. Ed. 3, 3 vols. Stuttgart, Enke, 1906-08. Refer especially to vol. 1. YOUNG, G. P. Remarks on Professor Boole s mathematical theory of the Laws of Thought. Canad. Jour., 10 (1865), pp. 161-82. YOUNG, J. W. Lectures on the fundamental concepts of algebra and geometry. New York, Macmillan, 1911. YULE, G. U. On the theory of the consistence of logical class-frequencies and its geo metrical representation. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. (London), ser. A, 197 (1901), pp. 91-133. An introduction to the theory of statistics. Ed. 2. London, Griffin, 1912. INDEX (References here given are in addition to, not inclusive of, those readily suggested by the Table of Contents). Absorption, law of, 74. Absurd, see Impossible. Addition, arithmetical, 343; definition of arithmetical by Peirce, 81 ff., by Peano, 345; relative addition, 91, 95, 275 ff. See also Sum. Alphabet, logical, 74. Aristotle, 231. Bayne, A., 36. Bentham, G., 36. Bernoulli, J., 18. Bernstein, B., 119 Boole, G., 3, 4, 31, 78-79, 118, 137, 207, 211, 212, 217; Jevons on system of, 72; system of, compared with Peirce s, 80 ff.; his general problem, 162. Calculus, 4, 6, 8. See also Classes, Proposi tions, Propositional functions, Rela tions. Cantor, G., 4, 5. Carroll, Lewis, see Hodgson, S. G. Castillon, G. F., 4, 18, 32-35. Classes, conception of, 261 ; application of Boole-Schroder Algebra to, 121-22; calculus of, derived from Strict Impli cation, 321 ff. Coefficients, in Boole s system, 59-63; in the Boole-Schroder Algebra, 137 ff. Consistency, relation of, in Mrs. Ladd- Franklin s svstem, 109; in the system of Strict Implication, 293; meaning of, 333. Contained in (the relation C), 43, 16, 47, 65, 118-19, 262, 270; Peirce on the meaning of, 83-84, 96. Contradictory propositions, 189; as treated by De Morgan, 40, Jevons, 76-77. Contrary propositions, 189; as treated by Jevons, 76-77. Converse, propositions, 191; Converse relations, 46, 74, 91, 273-74. Dalgarno, G., 5. Dedekind, R., 4,5, 114,342. del Re, A., 119. DeMorgan, A., 4, 5, 79, 209; DoMorgan s Theorem, 125, 237, 283. Descriptions, 290, 343. Distribution of terms, 43. Division, in Lambert s system, 21 ff.; in Holland s, 30 ff.; in Boole s, 61 ff.; in Peirce s, 81 ff. Duality, law of, in terminology of Boole, 58/in Boole-Schroder Algebra, 126. Either or, meaning of, 213. Elective symbols, 52. Elimination, in Boole s system, 59-60, 64; in Jevons s, 75-76; in the Boolo- Schroder Algebra, 153 ff., 194. e-relation, 16, 261-62, 270, 345. Equivalence, in the Boole-Schroder Al gebra, 120; of classes, 262; of relations, 270; of propositions, strict, and mater ial, 292-93. Euclid, 342. Euler s diagrams, 176. Existence, 12, 14, 186-88, 328-29. Exponents, in the logic of relatives, 87 ff. Extension, Chap. I, Sects. II and III, passim; in Leibniz s system, 13-14; Boole s logic based on, 52; classes in, 184-86; relations in, 219; propositions in, 230-31, 328; definition in, 349. See also Intension. Formal implication, see Implication. Formulaire de Mathtmatiques, v, 5, 7, 115-16, 278, 28078!, 368. Fractions, see Division. Frege, G., 4, 5, 50, 114-15, 273, 351. F-relation, 366. Functions, as developed by Boole, 58, 82; in the Boole-Schroder Algebra, 125, 133 ff. See also Pro positional Functions. Geometry, 10, 340-42; 363-67. Grassmann, H., 4. Grassmann, R., 107-08. Hamilton, Sir W., 4, 36-37. Hamilton, W. R., 4. Hilbert, D., 5. Hodgson, S. G., 326; his diagrams, 180 ff. Holland, G. J. von, 18, 29-32, 323. Huntington, E. V., 119, 342. Ideographic language, 2, 6-8, 340. Implication, no symbol for, in Boole s sys tem, 65; material, 84-85, 214-15, 231, Chap. V, passim, see esp. 303-04 and Sect. V; formal, 243, 328 ff.; four types of, 259. See also Contained in. Impossible, 32, 292. 336-39. See also Con sistency. Inclusion, see Contained in. Inconsistent triad, 19.5-97. Indeterminate, see Undetermined. Index law, 54. Individual, 324. See also e-relation. Induction, see Mathematical induction. Index Inference, 57-58, Chap. Ill, Sects. II and III, passim; in the logistic method, 352-53; immediate, 14, 33, 39, 41, 77, 190 ff. Intension, 8, 13 ff., Chap. I, Sects. II and III, passim, 73; postulates for calculus of propositions in, 318; calculus of classes in, 323. Jevons, W. S., 4, 118, 149, 205. Kant, I., 341. Kempe, A. B., 198. Kircher, A., 5. Ladd-Franklin, Mrs. C., 78, 108-10; 118, 195, 205, 211, 231. Lambert, J. H., 4, 18-29, 32, 204, 323. Leibniz, G. W., 3, 4, 79, 372. Linear Sets, 365, 367. Logical product, see Product. Logical sum, see Sum. Logistic, vi, 5-7, 11. Lully, R., 5. MacColl, H., 4, 108, 119, 327. Mathematical induction, 29, 131, 236, 351. Multiplication, arithmetical, denned by Peirce, 101-02, by Peano, 345; relative multiplication 86 ff., 275 ff. See also Product. Necessary, 17, Chap. V, passim. Negative, in the Boole-Schroder Algebra, 119, 124; terms, 38, 53, 73; classes, 121, 185, 263: relations, 46, 220, 271; propo sitions, 14-15, 25-26, 30-31, 32-33, 40, 57, 108, 188-89, 213. 292. Null-class, 185-90, 327. See also 0. Null-proposition, see 0. Null-relation, see 0. Number, 80, 101; in Peano s Formulaire, 344; denned in Principia Mathematica, 346 ff. 1, see Universe of discourse; see also under Operation, meaning of, 342; nature of, in logistic, 358 ff. Order, logical, 3, 342, 364. Peano, G., 50, 115. See also Formulaire de Mathematiques . Peirce, C. S., 4, 261, 279. Plato, 4. Ploucquet, C., 4, 18. n and 2 operators, 79, 97 ff., 140, 234. Fieri, M., 5, 342. Poretsky, P., 114, 145-46, 163-66, 200. Possible, 15, 329. See aho Impossible. Premise, in logistic, 352-53. Primitive concepts, in Leibniz, 7. Primitive ideas and propositions, of Prin cipia Mathematica, 282, 287-88; of arithmetic in Peano s Formula-ire, 344- 45. Principia Mathematica; v, 5, 7, 8, 102, 116, 222, 261, 277, 279, 281, 314-16, 324, 361. Probability, Boole s treatment of, 67 ff.; Peirces treatment of, 105-06. Product, in Leibniz s system, 12 ff. ; in Lambert s, 19; in Boole s, 52; in Peirce s, 81; in the Boole-Schroder Algebra, 119; of classes, 120, 185, 262; of regions in space, 175; of relations, 86 ff., 219, 271, 275; of two functions, 143; strict logical, 293. See also Multi plication and IT and 2 operators. Prepositional functions, 94, 113; meaning of, 232-33; range of significance of, 233, 242, 254; in Principia Mathematica, 287; calculus of, derived from Strict Implication, 320 ff. Quantification of the predicate, 19, 24, 36, 38 ff., 56. See also Undetermined co efficient. Quaternions, 4; Peirce s logical, 103 ff. Reductio ad absurdum, 166-67. Regions in a plane, application of the Boole-Schroder Algebra to, 120-21, 175. Relations, as treated by Lambert, 28-29, by DeMorgan, 37, 45 ff., by Peirce, 85 ff., 102-05, by Schroder, 111 ff.; Peirce s paper on logic of, 100; mean ing of, in extension, 219, 269; calculus of, compared with calculus of classes, 271; converse, 91, 273-74, 276; powers of, 29, 277; domain, converse domain, and field of, 277-78; calculus of, de rived from Strict Implication, 323. Relative terms, 277-78; in DeMorgan s system, 45 ff. ; Peirce s treatment of, 85 ff.; Schroder s treatment of, 111 ff. See also Relations. Royce, J., vi, 195. Schroder, E., v, 4, 5, 78, 110 ff., 211, 246, 261, 279. Science, exact, 7, 370-71. Segner, J. A., 18. Self-contradictory, see Impossible. Sheffer, H. M., 119. S operator, see II and 2 operators. Solly, 7, 29, 36. Solutions, in Boole s system, 60-63; in Jevons s, 76-77; in Peirce s, 98-100; by means of diagrams, 77, 181 ff. ; of some logical problems, 201-12, 215-19. See also Equations and Inequations in Table of Contents. Square of opposition, 190. Subcontrary propositions, 190. Substitution of similars, in Jevons, 75. Subtraction, arithmetical, treated by Peirce, 80-81; in Leibniz s system, 17- 18; in Lambert s, 19; in Castillon s, 32; in Boole s, 53; in Peirce s, 81 ff. Sum, in Leibniz s system, 16 ff. ; in Lam bert s, 19; in Castillon s, 32 ff.; in Boole s, 52-53; in Jevons s, 73; in Peirce s, 81-82; in Schroder s, 111; in the Boole-Schroder Algebra, 119; of classes, 121, 185, 263; of propositions, 213; of relations, 271; of two functions, 143; of prepositional functions, 94; strict logical, 291, 301-02. See also Addition. Index Syllogisms, in Lambert s system, 26 ff.; in Holland s, 31-32; in Castillon s, 34; in DeMorgan s, 41, 49 ff.; in Boole s, 57-58; in Jevons s, 75; in Mrs. Ladd- Franklin s, 109-10, 195-97; Peirce s principle of, 85; application of the Boole-Schroder Algebra to, 181-82, 193-95; in Barbara, 245, interpreted by Kempe, 365;" conditional, 197; limitation of, 1, 198-201. System-S, 366. Thomson, W., 36. Tonnies, I. H., 18. Truth value of propositions, 227, 230, 294. Two-valued Algebra, defects of, as a calcu lus of propositions, 281. Undetermined class, in Holland s system, 30; in Castillon s, 32. See also Undeter mined coefficient. Undetermined coefficient, in Leibniz s system, 15; in Lambert s, 24 ff.; in Boole s, 50-51; in Jevons s, 75; in Peirce s, 82; in the Boole-Schroder Algebra, 186. Universe of discourse, 37; diagrams of, 177 ff. See aho refs. under 0. Variables, 3, 232 ff.; Peirce on, 93; in Principia Mathematica, 289. Venn, J., v, 18, 201, 203, 211; diagrams, 77, 176 ff. Whitchead, A. N., v, 118. See also Prin cipia Mathematica. Wilkins, J., 5. 0: in Boole s system, 52 ff.; in Jevons s, 73-74; in Peirce s, 82; in Schroder s, 111; in the Boole-Schroder Algebra, 119; in the Calculus of classes, 121, 185 ff., 263; in the system of regions in a plane, 181; in the calculus of proposi tions, 213-14, 223 ff.; in the calculus of relations, 218-19, 271; Boole s algebra is an algebra of and 1, 52. b (X * <- b,<. J3IND1NG UCU 1 19/U University of Ton vc : > CheckCut Racs 020V/0! 12:33pni Item: A survey o : symfji li: eg c Due Date: 3/3/;iOi. ):./:: r>-. ltem:Handbookofh(i is.1or y ::> "i! .-tote- ^n^ OD , : : iiS BC 135 U Lewis, Clarence Irving A survey of symbolic 1